TO
THE EEVEEEND JOHN KEATE, D.D.
HEAD MASTER OF ETON COLLEGE,
THE ETON LATIN GEAMMAE,
WITH NOTES,
IS MOST RESPECTFULLY INSCRIBED,
BT
HIS VERY OBEDIENT SERVANT,
T. W. C. EDWARDS.
PREFACE.
THIS Work consists of the common Eton Text, with very
slight alterations in four or five places only ; but with the
addition of accents on all English words of more than one
syllable ; and of the quantities of the several syllables of all
the Latin words ; and also of the acute accent on the syllable
to be accented in every Latin word of more than one syllable.
The vast utility of this plan can never be so fairly appreciated
as by comparing the pronunciation of boys in schools where
this Grammar is used, with the pronunciation of boys in
schools where it is not used : and by viewing at the same
time the diminution of labour to persons engaged in tuition,
and also the satisfaction they must feel, at the accuracy, and
accelerated progress, of their pupils.
Independent of the improvements just named, the common
Eton text is rendered clearer than heretofore, by the method
of printing the Latin, and by the amplification of the English
of several of the words.
The Notes, appended to the Text, are of the most useful
description, being selections from the best authors of antiquity
condensed into as few words as possible, yet always preserving
a lucidity. The same plan of marking the accents and
quantities is pursued in the Notes as in the Text.
Again, in the present "Work, the Construing is entirely
new, the genitive case of the several nouns, and, when
anomalous, sometimes even other cases, being given ; with
whatever else appeared to me to be calculated to render the
Latin more intelligible, and the whole more profitable to
learners, than the old mode of translating the Rules and
Examples could render it.
After the Construing, I have given a short appendix,
containing various necessary information on Punctuation and
VI PREFACE.
the use of Capital Letters ; and also the principal figures of
Grammar and of Rhetoric.
Some persons, I am well aware, think that the quantity of
the Latin syllables is really an object of very little impor-
tance, and that accentuation is a matter of no moment at all
the meaning of words, and the construction of sentences,
being the chief thing to be learnt : and, they say, that accent
is so much at variance with quantity, and quantity with
accent, that, in a greater or less degree, the one must always
be sacrificed to the other : moreover, they say, Latin being
a dead language, it may be pronounced as we like, without
error and without offence. But what can be more false than
doctrine like this ?
A strict observance of Quantity is not by any means in-
compatible with the strictest observance of Accent ; nor can
any language be properly an oral language without a strict
observance of both, according to some acknowledged systen^
true or false.
If, in the Latin language, we moderns agree to shorten
many of the long syllables, in pronouncing them ; and to
lengthen many of the short syllables ; and, also, to accentuate
the words in a way in which they never were accented by
the Romans, let us not say we are reading or speaking Latin.
My main object in the present performance being to induce
and to establish a habit of correct enunciation in reading and
in speaking Latin, (as respects Quantity and Accent), 1
shall here briefly state what is meant by each of those terms,
By QUANTITY, then, we are to understand the time actually
and practically devoted, in the act of speaking, to the enun
ciation of a syllable : thus, a syllable uttered quickly, as to
time, is said to be short, but a syllable, uttered slowly, is
said to be long. Take, for example, the two English words
" oval" and * 4 oven," and it will be found, that by every
man and woman bred in England, the former is pronounced
as two long syllables, and the latter as two short ones : the
" o " in " oval " and the " o " in " oven," it will be allowed,
seem to the ear to be scarcely the same letter.
Just so in Latin ; the " o " in the word " ovum, an egg?
and that in " ovis, a sheep" are equally distinct from one
PREFACE. VII
another : nor less so, the " o " in " proniis, prone" and that
in " bonus, good."
In Latin, in Greek, and every other language, the length
of a long syllable is not always owing to the length of the
vowel in it ; for, whenever a short vowel stands before a
consonant, and the next syllable begins with a consonant, the
time occupied between the consonants causes the first syllable
to dwell on the ear longer than it otherwise would do, and
hence its quantity is said to be long. Now where a long
vowel or a diphthong is followed by a consonant in the same
syllable, and the next syllable begins with a consonant, it
follows that the first will be still longer, than one in which
the vowel is short.
But, as every ear cannot discriminate, with so much nicety,
the precise time and parts of a time which a correct speaker
actually devotes to the enunciation of every individual syllable,
Grammarians content themselves with the division of quan-
tity into long, short, doubtful, and common.
Every long syllable ought, at least, to occupy double or
twice the time of a short syllable ; but syllables which are
doubtful are uttered of a length bstwixt long and short.
Common syllables are such as are with equal propriety either
long or short, at the option of the speaker or composer.
By ACCENT, we are to understand a peculiar inflexion and
stress of voice laid upon some one syllable of a word.
Of accents there are three, namely, the acute, the grave, and
the circumflex : but here we shall speak of the acute only,
being that to which we moderns mostly confine ourselves, the
limits of a preface not admitting of much detail.
In every word, then, of more than one syllable, some par-
ticular syllable of the word is always distinguished from the
rest by a sort of emphasis, or greater stress, given to it by a
stroke of the voice.
Without this, language would be monotonous, and often
unintelligible to a hearer ; for it would be next to impossible,
in many instances, to know where one word terminates, and
another begins.
In English, we have many words accented on the last
syllable, as " aslant, condescend ;" but in Latin very few or
VH1 PREFACE.
no words have the accent on the last syllable. In that lan-
guage the accent falls either upon the penult or the antepenult
of words. Hence it follows, that in all words of two syllables
the stress must le on the first syllable. Again, the place of
the accent in polysyllables is readily determined by the fol-
lowing simple Rule :
If the penult, or last syllable but one, le long, the accmt is on
it, but if the penult be short, the accent is on the antepenult, or
last syllable.
It would, no doubt, have been extremely amusing to the
ancient Greeks and Romans, to hear a word pronounced with
the accent on the fifth, or sixth, syllable from the end ; as it
sometimes is in English ; when in their respective tongues
the antepenult, or third syllable from the end, was the very
farthest from the terminational syllable that the accent was
ever removed.
But in Greek, as in English, many words were accented on
the final syllable.
In speaking all this time of accent, I must be decidedly
understood to mean nothing more than that weight, or stress
of voice, which serves to distinguish some one syllable of
every word, containing more than one, from the other syllables
of the same word ; without alluding at all to the species of
accent, or to the tone, or musical key, in which the ancients
uttered certain syllables, conformably to the genius of their
native tongues.
This subject, on which the elegant and forcible use of the
Latin language so much depends, merits the greatest attention,
let us, therefore, always lay the right stress of voice upon the
right syllable, equally regardless of the scorn of pedants,
and of the sneer of fools. Be truth our sole aim, and error
our only fear.
T. W. C. EDWARDS.
fg^* In Scanning the Hexameter Rules, every syllable long by posi-
tion is marked long ; but in all other instances the true quantity of the
syllables is given, without reference to position.
T1IS
ETON LATIN GRAMMAR 1
THE Latin Letters are thus written
Capitals.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUYXYZ.
Small, or Cdtnmon.
a b c d e f g h i j k 1 m n o p q r s t u v x y z. 2
Of these Letters six are named "Vowels, , 0, e, o, u, y.
i As Grammar is that Science which has for its dbject correctness of
language, both oral and written, it follows then, that La"tin Grammar
must mean the knowledge and art of speaking and of writing the Latin
language correctly ; that is, accdrding to the established Rules of the
Roman tongue, and usage of the Roman writers. By the E'ton Latiu
Grammar is implied the abridged Manual of Mr. LILY, which has for
many years been succe'ssfully employed at E'ton school, to initiate boys
in Latin.
lu Grammar there are four distinct departments or divisions :
I. Orthography, which teaches us the shape, and sound, of the le'ttera
of a language ; and the right method of combining them in the forma-
tion of syllables and of words.
II. Etymblngy, which treats of the derivation, signification, and affec-
tion, of the various parts of speech.
III. Syntax, which determines the Right Construction of words in a
sc ; ntence, and points out their mutual connexion, depe'ndence, and
relation.
H 7 ". Prosody, which is the perfection of the dther divisions ; and
which re'gulates the pronunciation by fixing the time or quantity of
syllables, the accents of words, and the tone and emphasis, that ought to
be observed, in the utterance of sentences. To this division of Grammar
belongs the entire art of Versification.
- These are called Roman characters, be*ing based on and resembling,
in a considerable degree, those used by the Romans or Latins. They
are, however, not altoge'ther the same. It is a mistake that the Rdmau
characters have been retained since the times of the Rdmaus, as each
succe'ssive age used a different character ; and a person accustomed to
Latin manuscripts, and skilled in reading them, can determine the ttra
of each from the character used in it. Our pre'sent Rdman character
M\IS formed by the early printers, by altering those used in Latin manu-
scripts. It is used by the Italians, Spaniards, Danes, Swedes, En'glish,
French, and latterly by the Dutch. Various attempts have been made to
introduce its use in German works ; but though many German publica-
tions, of great impdrtance, have been printed in the Rdman character, by
much the greater number of the printers of that country retain the Gdthio,
12)
The rest (k alone excepted 3 ) are called Consonants.
A vowel makes a full and perfect sound of itself, as e.
A consonant cannot be sounded without a vowel, as #, pro-
nounced be.
Consonants are divided into mutes, liquids, and double
le'tters.
The liquids are /, m^ n, r ; * the double letters are j", x y z : Tj
the remaining letters are called mutes.
K, Y, Z are found o'nly in words originally Greek.
A syllable 7 is a distinct sound of one or more le'tters pro-
nounced in a breath.
or black letter. The student who wishes for informdtion on the intricate
subject of Palaeography (as it is termed), will receive full satisfaction in
Mabillon " De Re Diplomtica," and Champollion, " Pale'ographie des
Classiques."
3 The letter h is neither a v<5wel nor a consonant, but a sort of bredthing
or aspiration. It is found both at the beginning and in the middle of
words, and likewise at the end : but in Latin, few words terminate in
this letter.
* Grammarians have given the name of liquids or semivdwels to these
four le'tters, because, though they cannot be sounded without a vdwel,
yet, like the imperfect mutes (see note 6), no one of the four impedes
the voice entirely, as any of the pe'rfect mutes impedes it ; and moredver
because any one of the four can follow a mute in the same syllable, and
liquidly coalesce with it. Thus, in glls, a dSrmouse, the liquid / follows
the mute y, and coalesces with it : so, in crux, a cross, the liquid r follows
the mute c. Of these four le'tters / and r occur more frequently after a
mute hi Latin words than either m or n : and of the four, perhaps m is
the least liquid, exce'pt at the end of a word fdllowed by a vdwel or a
diphthong, when the vdwel before the TO is in most instances elided by
the figure Ecthh'psis.
5 The letters j, .r, and z, are tinned double, because the sound of j is
equivalent to that of dg ; and the sound of .r, to that of cs, or gs, or ks ;
and the sound of z, to that of ds, or of ts. But it may be obse'rved that
j is not a double le'tter after the vowel i, as in bi'jugis, two-ybked, nor
when it begins the latter part of a cdmpound word, the fdrmer part be'ing
in itsdlf a pe'rfect word, as jurejuran'do, by swearing an oath.
6 The mutes then are b, c, d,/, g, k, p, q, s, t, and v ; wheredf b, c, d,
g, k, p, q, and t are pe'rfect, that is, totally dumb in themselves, and
occasioning, whenever they end a syllable, an instant stop to the passage
of the voice : but f, s, and v, are impe'rfect ; because, although they are
dumb in themse'lves, yet aiter a vdwel, they efi'e'ct not a complete stdp-
page of the voice like the pe'rfect mutes. Of these three the le'tter s
approaches by far the nearest to the character of a liquid, for it can not
dnly stand befdre a mute and liquid, as in strlx, a groove or channel,
also, a screech-owl : but it can fdllow a liquid and mute in the same
syllable, as in stirps, a stem.
* in every syllable there must be at least one vdwel ; but the presence
(3 )
A diphthong is the sound of two vowels in one syllable.
Of proper diphthongs there are five, au, eu, ei, ae, oe. 9
The two last of these diphthongs, namely ae and oe, are com-
monly pronounced as the vowel 0, and are very often joined
and written thus : sE ce^ (E ce.
THE PARTS OP SPEECH are Eight:
1. Noun, Pronoun, Verb, Participle ; declined.
of a consonant is not necessary : for sometimes we meet jvith a word of
several syllables in which there is not a consonant ; as .^Boi'a, an island
on the coast of I'taly. But although the' presence of a cOnsonant be not
absolutely necessary in a sellable, yet there are many syllables that both
begin and end with a consonant. Some syllables, indee'd, begin with
two, or even three consonants, and some final syllables terminate with
the like number. Thus, in the monosyllabic word " scobs," filings or
sawdust, a syllable both begins and ends with two consonants ; and in
" scrobs," a ditch, a syllable begins with three cOnsonants, and ends with
two ; so, in " stirps," a stem, a syllable begins with two consonants, and
ends with three. A syllable long by authority or use is distinguished by
a straight line Over the vowel, as in fios, a f.6wer t or in urbs, a city a
short syllable is, hi like manner, distinguished by a curve line over the
vowel, as in os, a bone : and a common or doubtful syllable is distin-
guished by both of these marks, as F.VC, do. The length of a long syl-
lable depends either upon the established length of the vOwel in it, else
upon the check given to the voice by the concurrence of consonants :
and sOmetimes the length is owing to both these causes.
In the division of syllables the following directions are to lie observed :
I. A consonant betwee'n two vowels in the same word is joined to the
latter vowel ; as bo'-nus, a'-mo ; except the accent falls on the last syl-
lable but two (antepdnult), then this syllable takes the following cOnso-
naiit, as tSn'-I-ca, a tunic ; opM-fex, a workman : and the double letter
x, which may more properly be considered to belOng to the vowel before
it ; as in flex'-i-lTs, flexile : except, likewise, any particular consonant
terminating the first part of a cOmpound word ; as b in ab'-est, it is
distant, or n in In'-o-do-rus, inodorous.
II. Two cOnsonants betwee'n two vOwels, in the same word, are to be
se'parated, as in pec'-ten, a comb, dlph-thon'-gus, a diphthong, In-ter'-pres,
an interpreter ; unless the cOnsonants can begin a syllable : in which
eve"nt they are to be joined to the vOwel which follows them, pro-
vided Only that the quantity of the vOwel befOre the two cOnsonants be not
lengthened by position, that is, be not made long owing to the sequence
of those cOnsonants. Thus in such words as cy'cnus, a swan, the prOper
division is cjK-cnus ; but if the first vOwel be le'ngthened by position,
then the right division becOmes cyc'-nus. This exception, howeVer,
applies not to cOmpound words, e'ven where a short vOwel is lengthened
by position ; as in re'-spu-o, / spit out again.
The improper diphthongs are ai, oi, ui, and yi, whercOf the first two
seldom occur in words purely Latin ; and ui is ohfefly conf'ued to the
two datives huic and cut.
B 2
(4)
2. Ad' verb, Conjunction, Preposition, Interjection ; unde-
clined.
Nouns are of two kinds substantives and adjectives.
A noun substantive declares its o\vn meaning, and requires
not any other word to be joined with it to show its significa-
tion; as ho'mo, a man ; au'geius, an angel ; li'ber, the book ;
constan'tia, constancy. 10
A noun adjective " requires to be joined with a substantive,
either expressed or understoo'd; of which it shows the nature
or quality : as, bo'nus pu'er, a good toy ; ma'lus pu'er, a bad
or a naughty loy ; multl (understand homines) many men ;
mul'ta (understand negotia) many things.
OF A NOUN.
A NOUN is the name of whatsoever Thing, or Being, we
see, or discourse of.
OF THE NUMBERS OF NOUNS.
NOUNS have two numbers ; namely, the singular and the
plural.
The singular speaks only of one ; as pa'ter, a father.
The plural speaks of more than one ; as pa'tres, fathers.
9 To these parts of speech may be added Inseparable Particles, as the
prepdsitives am-, dl- f dls-, re-, se-, re-, and the iidjunctives -met, -tc, -cc,
-pfS, -cine, with some others of the same sort : also, the enclitics -rii-. t
-que, -ve, which however are classed with conjunctions : likewise pro-
nominal terminations, altogether different from adjunctive particles ;
such as, -dcm, -dam, -quum, -que, -nam, -piain y -cun'que, and many more.
10 A noun substantive is eiti ,-r c&mmon or pr6per : common, when the
name or appellation belongs equally to all things of the same identical
bimilitude or sort ; as S'qua, water; do'mus, a house; a'pls, a bee; paiipdr'-
tas, poverty ; proper, when the appellation is confined to one individual,
notwithstanding there may among many be several individuals of the
tarne appellation; as Pe'irus, Piter; Britan'nia, Britain; Ta'rn&sTs, the
Thames; Londl'num, L6ndon.
11 Ad'jectives, likewise, are either c&mmon or proper : cdmmon, when
they relate to things in general ; as, al'biis, white trls'tis, sad , fe'llx,
Jidppy ; pr6per, when they owe their derivation to some proper name ;
as Pluto'nius, Plutonian, that is. of or betinying to Pluto ; Sfculus, Si-
lian, or belonging to Sicily ; Troja'nQs, Tr&jan; Athemen'sls, Athenian.
(5)
OF THE CASES OF NOUNS.
NOUNS have six cases 12 in each number:
The nominative, the genitive, the dative, the accusative, the
vo'cative, and the ablative.
The nominative case comes before the verb, and may be
known by its answering to the questi-on who ? or what as,
who teaches ? magis'ter do'cet, the master teaches.
The genitive case 13 is known by the sign of, in En'glish,
and answers to the question whose ? or whereof? as, whose
learning ? doetri'na magis'tri, the learning of the master^ or
the master's learning.
The dative case is known, in En'glish, by the signs to or for,
and answers to the question imto whom ? or to or for what?
as, unto whom do I gice the Look ? do li'briim magis'tro, I give
the look to the master.
The accusative (or, as it is more commonly denominated in
En'glish, the objective) case follows the verb, and answereth
to the question whom f or what ? as, whom do you love ? a'mo
niagis'trum, / love the master.
The vo'cative case is known by calling, or speaking to ; as,
6 magis'ter, master.
11 The Stdi'cs considered the relation which, in discourse, a noun hath
to a verb, in the same member of a sentence with it, under the figure of
a right line falling upon a plane. If the line (as they thought) fell per-
pendicularly, the noun was said to be ' in recto cdsn" that is, in its
right or straight case ; by which they meant the nominative : but if the
line swerved or declined from the perpendicular, then the noun was said
to be " in obliquo cdsu," that is, in a cro6ked or an oblique case ; and its
deviation from the perpendicular, or, right fall, was termed ' decliniitio"
that is, declension. Now it is eVident, that the right case could be only
one, while the oblique cases might be few or many according to the
degree of declination, or declension. However inappropriate these terms
may appear, grammarians have, very good-naturedly, contented them-
selves to retain them.
13 The ge'nitive, as its name indee'd implies, is the case from which all
the dther oblfque cases (with the exce'ption of the vocative singular,
which seems to be merely a sort of echo of the nominative, differing from
it in ndthing for the most part, and seldom differing from it much ; and
with the exception also of the accusative of neuter nouns, and some few
andmalous instances not worth me'ntioning at pre'sent) are generated or
formed by simply varying the termination. It may be right to ndtice
that the nominative case plural of nouns is in this sense to be considered
a.s an oblique case, inasmuch as it owes its formation (a few anomalies
exce'pted) to the genitive case singular.
(6 )
The ablative case is known in En'glish by prepositions ex-
pressed or understood, serving to the ablative case ; as, de
magls'tro, of or concerning th* master ; co'ram magls'tro,
before or in the presence of the master.
Al'so, the prepositions in, with, from^ ly ; and the word
than, after the comparative degree, are signs of the ablative
case.
GENDERS AND ARTICLES.
GEN'DERS of nouns are three ; namely, the masculine,
the feminine, and the neiiter.
ARTICLES 14 are used in Grammar, to denote the gender of
nouns; and are thus declined:
Nominative
Genitive
Dative
A ccusative
Vocative
Al'lative
SINGULAR.
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter.
Hie hiec hoc
Hii'jus, of all genders
Huic, of all genders
Iliinc hanc
Hoc
hac
hoc
hoc
PLURAL.
Masculine. Feminine.
Neater.
Nominative
Ill lite '
llcBC
Genitive
Ho'rum ha'rum
ho ruin
Dative
His, of all genders
A ccusative
Hos has
hac
Vocative
.
Ablative
His, of all genders.
14 Though the Greeks employed Articles in their language, yet in the
Latin tongue (strictly speaking) Articles were never used. The demdn-
Btrative pronoun hie, haec, hoc, by mdny improperly called an article,
was sometimes empldiyed, as it still is, to distinguish the genders of nouns.
//!c, then, is the sign of the masculine gender ; haec of the feminine ;
and hoc, of the neuter : so, Me et haec will signify the common of two
ge'nders, that is, both the masculine and feminine genders under one
termination ; lac, haec, hoc, the common of three genders, as fe'lix,
happy ; so likewise, Inc aut haec, the doubtful guilder, that is, a gdnder
varying betwixt masculine and fe'minine, as pam'pi-nfis, a vine-leaf,
indifferently feminine or masculine : again, Me aiit hSc will signify the
doubtfully masculine or neuter gdnder, as vul'gus, the rabble ; and lastly,
hio (tut hdc, the doubtfully feminine and neuter.
(7)
NOUNS declined with the two articles Me and hdJc are called
common, that is, are of the masculine and feminine gender :
as, hie et hd'C pa'rens, a parent, father or mother.
Nouns are called doubtful, when declined with the article
hie or hdJc : as, hie ant hd>c an'guis, a snake.
Some nouns are also called epicene ; that is, when under
one article both sexes are signified ; as htc pas'ser, a spdivotc ;
h&c a'quila, an eagle : both male and female.
DECLENSION OF NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE.
There are five declensions of substantives, distinguished by
the ending of the genitive case.
The first declension 16 makes the genitive and dative cases
singular to end in ae diphthong, (-ai) ; as,
SINGULAR.
N.
Jicec
Mu'-sa,
a song.
G.
hi'ijus
Mu'-saV 6
of a song,
D.
huic
Mu'-ste,
to a song.
A.
hanc
Mu'-sam,
a song,
Y.
Mu'-sa,
song,
A.
db hac
Mu'-sa,
from a song.
Ji This declension has four terminations, -a, -e, -as, and -Is, wheredf
the first dnly is purely Ldtin ; the remaining three, Greek. Of nouns
ending in -a, likewise, many are of Greek drigin. Latin nouns in -a of
the first declension are for the most part feminine : but some are mls-
culine ; dthers are cdmmon ; and dthers, doubtful : one, pas'-cha, the
feast of the passover, is said to be neuter. Nouns in e- of this declen-
sion are without exception feminine ; and nouns in -as, and in -es,
masculine.
16 The gdnitive case of the first declension in La'tin anciently ejided
in -a'i, and sometimes in -as; thus of the ndminative vi'ta, life, was
fdrmed the genitive vita'I, of life : and in like manner the ge'uitive of
au'ra, a breeze or gale, was either aiiru'i or au'ras, of a breeze or a gale.
Whene'ver the vdwel i, or the liquid r, preceded the terminational -a. of
the nominative, then the genitive ^nded in -as preferably to -a'i ; as,
ndminative fl'lla, a daughter, ge'nitive fili'as, rather than flllu'l, of a
daughter ; but afterwards, fl'llce, preferably to the dther two. The
noun f aml'lla, however, generally retains -as in tiie genitive case, when
joined to pa'ter, a father, or to ma'ter, a m5ther ; as pat'er fami'lias, the
father of the family or master of the house ; pa'tris fami'lias, of the father
of the family or master of the house.
Most nouns in -e, -as, and -ts of the first decldnsion are prdpor names,
and consequently seldom, or ne'ver, admit of the plural number ; but
eome few are common nouns : as, for example, O'de, an ode, or a
PLURAL.
N. TUB
Mu'-SCB,
wag*,
G. hdrum
Mii-sa'rum, 1 *
of songs,
D. his
Mu-sTO 3
to songs,
A. A$
Mu'-sas,
songs.
V.
Mu'-sie,
songs,
A. a& Jtis
Mu'-sis,
from songs.
song ; ept'tome, an abridgement; tia'ras, a turban, or sash for the head;
Ki'phifiB, a sword-Jish ; pyri'tes, a fire-stone ; acha'tes, an agate: these,
however, when plural, differ in no respect, as to their terminations, from
the formula of nouns purely Latin.
In the singular number, nouns in e-, -as, and -es are declined in the
manner following :
Mu'sTce, music, Bo'reas, the north-wind, Trior'ches, a buzzard.
N. mu'si-ce N. bo're-as N. trior'-ches
G. mu'sT-cGs G. bo're-se G. trioi / -ch
D. mu'si-cG D. bo're-a D. trior'-chjE
A. mii'si-cea A. bo're-an vel am A. trior'-chen
V. mu'si-ce V. bo're-a V. trior'-che vel -chs
A. mu'si-ce A. bo're-a A. trior'-che vel -cha.
Many Greek names in -e of the first declension, have ^Iso the Latin
termination -a, and are inflected accordingly both ways : as He'lene vel
He'lena, Helen ; Pene'lope vel Pene'lopa, Penelope: these make -es or
-ae in the cdnitive, -5 or -ae in the dative, -en vel -am in the accusative,
and so forth.
^ All proper names in -as of this declension, as ^Ene'as, Ly'cidils,
Amyn'tas, are declined like bo'reas : but some common nouns in -as and
vs have also the termination -a, and are declined like mu'sa. To the
termination -cs belong all patronymic nouns in -dcs, as Peli'des, son of
PeleuSy ^Eu'cides, descendant of jE'acus; but these are sdmetimes
found, liliewise, of the third declension : also to the first decle'nsion
belong several nouns, proper as well as co"mmon, in -stts and in -^e.v :
these have generally - in the vdcative,as T hyes'tt-s, rkative o Thj^es'ta ;
Thersi'tes, vocative o Thersl'ta. Greek names in -a, except such as have
e- also, often form the accusative in -an rather than in -am : as Iphr-
gem'a, accusative IphTgenl'an, rather than IphTgem'am ; ^Egi'na, accus*
alive ^gfuan, rather than jfjgl'nam.
17 The termination -a'rum of the genitive case plural of the first
decle'nsion, as well as that of o'rum of the sc f cond, is not unfre'qnentljr
contracted into -Urn, by syncope and crasis ; thus we read terri'geuum,
for tcrrTgSna'rum.
18 The fdllowing nouns have -d'l>us rather than -ts, in the dative and
ablative plural, to distinguish them, in those cases, from their masculines
of the se'cond declension :
a'nima, the soul
a'sTna, a she- ass
de'a, a nSddess
do'imna, a lady
e'qua, a mare
fa'imila, a maid-servant
fl'IIa, a daughter
liber'ta, a frced-iv6man
mu'la, a she-mute
na'ta, a daughter
scr'vii, a female slave
\ so'cia, a she-companion
(9 )
The second declension 19 makes the genitive case singular to
end ill -t; as,
SINGULAR.
N.
kic
Magls'-t5r,
a master^
(jr.
hii]us
Masis'-tri,
of a master,
D.
kuic
Magis'-tro,
to a master,
A.
hunc
Maojis'-trum,
a master,
V.
Miigis'-tgr,
master,
A.
ab hoc
Magis'-tro,
ly a master.
PLURAL.
X.
Jd
Magis'-tri,
masters,
G.
horum
Magis-tro'rum, 80
of masters,
D.
his
Magis'-tris,
w masters,
A.
hos
IMacjis'-tros,
masters-.
V.
Magis'-tri,
masters,
A.
ab his
Magis'-tris,
by masters.
!9 The second declension has seven (or more prdperly speaking, ten)
terminations : viz. -er, -er, -ir, -Zr, -us, -us, -urn, -os, -os, -on. Of these
the last three, namely, -os, -os, -on, are Greek ; as is likewise -Us : and of
the second (-er) and third (-zr) few examples occur beyond I'ber, a
Spaniard, or native of Iberia; vir, a man or husband; with their cdm-
pounds, CeTtib5r, a Celtibcrian ; duum'vTr, one of the duumvirate .
trium'vir, one of the triumvirate, and the plural noun decem'viri, the
ten, that is, the ten men in authority, or consular magistrates: in -fir
there is dnly the masculine gender of the adjective sa'tur, sa'tura,
sa'turum,/^//, formed by apocope from sa'turiis. The Latin terminations,
therefore, more frequently met with, are these three, -er, -us, and -m.
]S'ouns e'nding in -er, with very few exceptions, drop the e in the ge'nitive
case singular, and in all cases derived from it : the exceptions to this,
are ge'ner, a son-in-l^w ; so'cer, a father-in-law pii'er, a boy; pres'byter,
an elder ; ar'miger, an armour-bearer ; adul'ter, an adulterer ; fur'c'ifer,
a knave, and the plural noun li'berl, children : with the three prdper
names, Ll'ber, Bacchus ; MurcTber, Vulcan, and Lu'clfer, the m&rning-
star. Several adjectives in -er, howe'ver, retain the e, as te'ner, tender,
H'ber,/ra?: but others reje'ct it, as ni'ger, black, pul'cher, fair. The
gentile^ noun I'ber, and its cdmpound Cel'tiber, retain the long e, and
make Ibe'ii and Celtibe'ii, in the ge'nitive case. Many Greek names
e'nding in -eiis, and which rightly belong to the third declension, are
sdmetimes transferred to the second with a resolution of the terminational
diphthong into -eiis : for example, Mor'pheus (ge'uitive, Moi/pheos,) of
the third declension, dften becomes Mor'pheus (ge'nitive, Mor'phel, and
by contraction, Mor'phel vet Mor'plri,) making in the accusative, Mor / -
plicum or Mor^pheon.
80 The termindtiou -oruw of the ge'nitive case plural of this declension
B 3
( 10 )
Observation 1st. The nominative and vocative cases of
nouns are for the most part alike in both numbers. But when
the nominative case singular of the second declension ends .in
-us, the vocative ends in -e : as,
K.
Me
G.
liiijus
I).
ftuic
A.
/tune
Y.
A.
ab hoc
K.
M
G.
horum
I).
Ms
A.
hos
V.
A.
ab Ms
SINGULAR.
Do'mi-niis,
Do'mi-m
Do'mi-no,
Do'nii-num,
Do'mi-ne, r *
Do'mi-no,
PLURAL.
Donri-m,
Domi-no'rum,
Do'mi-ms,
Do'mi-nos,
Do'mi-ni,
Do'mi-ms,
a lord,
of a lord,
to a lord,
a lord,
lord,
Ij a lord.
lords,
of lords,
to lords,
lords,
lords,
ly lords.
Observation 2nd. De'iis, God, makes " De'us " in the
vocative case singular : 22 also, the pro'per name of a man
ending in -lus makes-?/ as, Geor'gms, George; vo'cative,
Geor'gi. In like manner, fi'lms, a son, makes fill; and
ge'nms, a genius, ge'ni. 23
is dften contracted into -m by syncope and crisis : thus, for vTru'rum
we frequently find vi'rura ; and for divo'rum, dl'vum.
*i The pdets occasionally, and the prose writers more rarely, retain
-t/s in the vdcative case, after the At'iic manner : as flu'vius, O stream ;
po'puliis, O people ,- ag'nus, O lamb.
In the plural number, de'us is thus declined :
N. de'I, but, more cdmmonly, di'i, and by crasis,
G. ded'riim, or by syncope and crasis,
D. de'ls, but, more cdmmonly, di'Is, and by crisis,
A. de'os,
V. de'T but, more cdmmonly, di'i, and by crasis,
A. de'ls, but, more cdmmonly, di'Is, and by crasis,
23 Although fi'llus, a son, has rightly fl'll iu the vdcative case, and
ge'mus has rightly ge'ni, yet the vocative of both the one and the dther
is sdmetimes like the ndminative. O'ther nouns in -IKS, whether they be
substantives or adjectives, not eVen excepting the Adjectives derived
from prdper names, change -MS into -e in the vdcative ; as, cublcula''-
rius, a chdmbcrlain, vocative cubtciilaVTe ; pi'us, y6dly } vdrative pi'c ;
di ffods,
de'um offfoda,
dis to gods,
yods,
di O pods.
dis from' gods.
( 11 )
Observation 3rd. Nouns of the neuter gender are generally
of the second or third declension; and make the nomina-
tive, the accusative, and the vocative cases alike, in both
numbers : and in the plural number these cases end all in
-d: as,
SINGULAR.
N.
hoc
Regf -num.,
a kingdom,
G.
hujus
Reg'-ni,
of a kingdom ,
D.
hide
Reg'-no,
to a kingdom.
A.
hoc
Reg'-num,
a kingdom^
V.
Reg'-num,
kingdom,
A.
ab hoo
Reg'-no,
ly a kingdom.
PLURAL.
N.
hccc
Reg'-na,
kingdoms,
G.
horurn
Reg-no'riim,
of kingdoms,
IX
his
Reg'-ms,
to kingdoms,
A.
hccc
Reg'-na,
kingdoms,
Y.
Reg'-na,
kingdoms,
A.
ab Ids
Reg'-ms,
ly kingdoms.
Juno'nius, pertaining unto Juno, vocative Juno'me ; De'Kus, Dilian t
vocative De'lie.
Nouns in -us, -vs, -Us, and -on, of the second declension, are inflected,
in the singular number, as follows :
Andro'geos, Andrfyeus; Pa'phos, a city of Cyprus, Pan'thus, Pantheus,
I'lion. Troy.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
A.
Andro'geos
Andro'geo vel -gel
Andro'geo
Andro'geon vel -ge5
Andro'geos vel -geo
Andro'geo
Pa'phos
Pa'phi
Pa'pho
Pa'phon
Pa'phos vel -phe
Pa'pho
Pan'thus
Pan'thI vel -thu
Pan'tho
Pan'thum v el -thun
Pan'thii
Pan'tho
TlTon
I'liI
I'liO
I'lTou
I'lTon
I'lio
It should be udticed that several names in -os have lilcewipe the ter-
mination -us ; and cdnsequently make the accusative in -inn, as well as
-on. Many names in -on, have the termination -nm ; and this they of
course retain in the accusative and vocative singular. The noun FlTon
lias, besides the termination -f/m, that of -os, and is then fe'minine. Some
few nouns, as, bar'blton, a harp, neuter, have also the termination &,
masculine or fe'minine ; and -M.V, masculine.
In the plural number, Greek nouns of the se'cond declension are
declined after the manner of Liitin nouns ; those in -us and -us, like
nouns in -iis ; and those in -8n, like nouns in -nm: except that they
have -5n, rather than -u'riim, in the genitive plural : thus, buco'licon, a
pastoral song, has (genitive plural) buco'licon, rather than bucolico'riim,
( 12 )
The third declension e4 makes the genitive case singular to
end in -is : as,
SINGULAR.
N. h&c Nu'-bes, a cloud,
G. hvjus Nu'-bis, of a cloud,
D. huio Nu'-bi, to a cloud,
of pastoral songs. A few Greek names of men in -es of the third de-
cle"nsion, which have likewise -eiis in the iidminative, take sometimes the
fonn of the Second Declension, like nouns of the third which have -etia
dnly : thus, Achil'les, vel Achll'leus, AchilKs, beco'mes Achll'leus, gdni-
tive Achil'lel vel Achll'lel, and, by crasis, Achll-'li : the adjective is
Achllle'us, Achille'a, Achille'um. In like manner, Olys'scs, vel Olys'-
seus, or (as it is sdmetimes written), tJHx'es vel tJUx-eus, Ulyfs't-s. be-
cdmes tJlys'seiis we/ tTlIx'eus ve/tJUx'us, genitive tJlys'sel vei tTUx'ei
vel Ollx'l.
Greek names of this declension in -s and -pus have -I in the genitive,
.and (more rarely) -u ; but they are for the most part also of the third
declension, the former termination becdming -eiis, with -cos in the ge'ni-
tive ; thus Pan'thus becdmes Pan'theus, Pan'theos : and the latter,
making the ge'nitive in -podis, as Po'lypus, Oe'dipus, Melam'pus, genitive
Pdly'podis, Oe'dT'podTs, Melam'podis. These, when of the second de-
cldnsion, have sdmetimes -us in the nominative, as though cdming from
the Ddric dialect.
- 4 of nouns substantive, considerably more than one half will be found
to be of the third declension ; for its final syllables amount to upwards
of ninety ; and its final Idtters to thirteen : namely, a, e, i, o, y, c, rf, /",
?i, r, s, I, x. Of these, a, <?, n, r, o, and s, are common to the third, and
some of the dther declensions : that is, a and e are common to it with
the first ; n and r, with the second ; o, with the fourth ; and s with ail
the dther four. The seVen final letters, then, c, d, i, /, t, y, and x, are
peculiar to this declension. All nouns of the third declension Ending ia
a are of Greek drigin and of the neuter gender ; the , also, is invariably
preceded by the le'tter m ; as in stem'ma, stem'matis, a stem or pedigree.
Nouns in -2, and in -?, are neuter ; the latter, indeclinable in both
numbers : plurals in. -c, as ce'te, whales, are likewise neuter, and inde-
clinable. Of nouns in c there are drily two, lac, milk, and a'lec, or
hu'lec, an dnchovy, also a pickle, or, as some say, a herring. The
nouns in d consist sdlely of a few prdper names of men, as Da'vid. Some
dther He'brew names of various e'ndings, such as Job, Ra'phael, Sa'iiL,
Be'thlem, Seth, Am'ram, beldng to this declension, but cannot be prd-
perly cUtssed with Latin words. The more copious final letters of nouns
purely Latin are o, n, r, s, and x : the more cdpious final syllables are
16, -do, -go, -en, [nouns in -en are Greek,] -or, [nouns in -er are of
Greek extraction,] -or, -as [all nouns in -as are Greek, and so are mdny
in -as,] -es and -es, [nouns in -es, making -e'tis in the ge'nitive case, (exce'pi
qiu'es, rest, and its compound re'quTes,) are Greek, and of the masculine
.ge'uder ; nouns in -es, not increasing, are likewise Greek, but of tho
( 13 )
A. Juinc Nii'-bem, 25 a cloud,
V. Nii'-bes, cloud,
A. fl /^c/c Nu'-be, 26 &y a
neuter gender,] -is, and -Is ; -os and -5s ; -us and us ; -ns, -ps, -rs, ex ;
and Ix.
25 A few Latin nouns in -Is have -tm in the accusative case ; such as,
si'tis, thirst; tus'sis, a cough; ru'vis, hoarseness; cu'cumis, a cucumber .
bu'ris, the beam of a plough; amus'sis, a mason's rule ;meph.l'tis, foul
air : to which may be added, vis, strength or force : likewise all proper
names of places, and of rivers, ending in -is ; but these sdmetimes have
-in rather than -im in the accusative case. And all Greek edmmou
nouns in -ts, fdrming the gdnitive in -os pure, that is, in -5s preceded by
a vdwel, make the accusative in -Im or -in ; as hae'resis, ge'nitive ho-re"-
seos, heresy, accusative hee'resim vel hae'resin. In like manner Greek
nouns in -ys, wheredf the genitive ends in -os pure, have -i/m or -yn, in
the accusative case. To those add all masculine Greek names in -is,
making -dls or -dus in the ge'nitive ; for these have more frequently -Im
or -in (though sdmetimes -dSm, but never -da) in the accusative : thus,
Pa'ris, ge'nitive Pa'rTdis vel Pa'ridos, accusative Pa'rTm vel Pu'riu,
rather than Pari'dem ; but in no instance Pa'rida.
Many Latin nouns ending in -is have either -em, or im, in the accu-
sative case : such are, pel' vis, a basin , cla'vis, a key ; nu'vis, a ship :
piip'pYs, the stern or poop; res'tis, a cord or rope; tur'ris, a tower; secu'ns,
an axe; stri'gilis, a curry-comb; aqua'lis, a water-ewer ; cu'tTs, the skin;
fe'bris, a fever; au'ris, the ear; semen' t\s, seed-time; and a few others : to
which may be added one noun in -ns, namely, lens, a lentil.
a6 Nouns which have the accusative in -im or -in have -* (Greek
nouns -i) in the Ablative : as, vis, strength or force, ablative vl, ivith
strength or force : and those which have -em or -im in the accusative,
have -e or -I in the ablative ; thus, na'vis, a ship, accusative na'vem vel
na'vlm, ablative na've vel na'vl : but res'tis and cu'tls have -e only ;
stri'gilis and secu'ris, dftener -i than -e. Cana'lTs, a channel, vec'tls,
lever, and bipen'ms, a hdlbert or pole-axe, make the ablative ge'nerally
in -i : the following nouns have -e or -I indifferently ; viz. am'nis, a
rive.r ; an'guis, a snake; a'vis, a bird; ci'vis, a citizen; clas'slis, a fleet
fl'nls; an end; fus'tis, a rope; Ig'riis,Jire; pos'tis, a door-post; and un'guis,
a nail of the hand or foot: to which may be added, Im'ber, a shower ;
oc'ciput, the hinder part of the head; riis, the country ; supel'lex, house-
hold furniture; sors, chance, with a few others : also, the names of soma
cities, as Cftrtha'go, Carthage, ablative Cartha'gine vel Cartha'gini. The
names of months, though they have -Zm in the accusative, make the
;lblative always in -i. Nefiters, too, in -al, -ar, and -dr (see note 30,
below) have, with very few exceptions, -i in the ablative : of se'veral
nouns, also, of this decle'nsion, the dative case is not unfrc'quently (by
poetic licence) usurped for the ablative. Lastly, all nouns ending in 45
in the ndminative case (the names of towns exempted) have -J iu
the ablative : as, ma're the sea., ablative ma'rl ; re'te, a net, abla-
tive re'tl.
PLURAL.
K. 7ta3 Nu-bes, clouds,
G. hdrum Nu'-bium, 2 ? of ckuds,
D. his Nu'-bibiis, to clouds,
A. has Nu'-bes, 2 * clouds,
V. Nu'-bes, clouds,
A. al his Nu'-bibus, from clouds.
Many nouns of this declension* 9 increase in the genitive
case ; as in the following examples.
SINGULAR.
N,
hie
La'-pis,
a stone,
G.
hit jus
La'-pidis,
of a stone,
D.
hulc
La'-pidl,
to a stone,
A.
hunc
La'-pid5m,
a stone,
V.
La'-pis,
stone,
A.
ab hoc
La'-pide,
from a stone.
z ~ Nouns in -es and in -is not increasing in the genitive case singular,
and nouns dnding in s if a cdnsonant immediately precedes the s, or in
t r with the same restriction, filso mduosyllables in -a*, and nouns in -I*,
have generally -turn in the genitive plural : to which add ca'ro.^A-A / cor,
the heart; cos, a whetstone; dos, a dowery ; faux, the fforoe or entrance
of the gullet; lar, a dwelling vr fire-side; bes, eight ounces ; Kn'ter, a lark;
mus, a mouse,- nix, snoic; nox, night; os, a lone; u'ter, a bottle or bladder;
ven'ter, the belly, and most nouns which have -I, or -i, in the ablative case
singular : exce'pt oc'ciput. But of nouns in -es and -is the following
are to be excepted, as haYing -urn: vu'tes, a prophet or bard ; ju'vems,
a young person ; pa'ms, bread or a loaf; ru'dis, a foil ; vo'lucris, a bird ;
ca'nis, a dog or bitch : also, a'pTs, a bee, and the plural noun o'pes,
wealth. And of nouns Ending in s preceded by a cdnsonant, must be
exce'pted all nouns ending in -tbs, -eps, and -ops : also hy'ems, winter ;
and all words of Greek drigin ; as gryps, a griffin; A'rabs, an Arabian.
Here, too, it may be noticed that -ttim, of the genitive case plural, of this
declension, is frequently contracted into -urn by the figure crasis ; as,
infitn'tum, of infants, for Infan'tTum.
28 When the ge'nitive plural ends in -turn, the accusative dptionally
ends in -els (and by contraction in -is) instead of -es : thus we find par'-
tels, and par'tis, for par'tes ; and om'nels or om'nls for om'nes.
89 Greek nouns of this declension, increasing in the genitive case, are
mdny, and of various terminations. Of these, we shall only notice the
chief; dividing them into nouns cdmmon, and nouns proper. Greek
cdmmon nouns, more frequently occurring, and in -en, -In, -er, -as, -as,
-es, -is, -ma, -os, and -ys : as, for exdmple, ren, re'nos, a kidney; del'phin,
delphl'nos, a dolphin ; cra'ter, crate'ros, a bowl or goblet ; lam'pas, lam 7 -
pados, a lamp ; a'dumas, adaman'tos, a diamond; le'bes, lebe'tos, a
cauldron; las'pis, las'pidos, a jasper ; ba'sis, ba's?5s, a base; poe'ma,
poe'niatos, a poem; he'ros, hero'os, a hero; chla'inys, chla'mydos, a
( 15 ^
PLURAL.
N.
hi
La'-pmes,
stones.
G.
korum
La'-pidum,
of stones,
D.
his
La-pi' dib us,
to stones,
A.
has
La'-pides,
stones,
V,
G
La'-pides,
stones,
A.
al Jds
La-pi' dibus,
from stones.
cloak or mantle, and che'lys, che'lyos, a harp or lute. These we shall
decline in the drder in which we have given them : and, as the Latins
generally pref erred -is to -os in the ending of the genitive case, we
snail (with the perfect understanding that -os is the true original) adopt
the termination -is in most instances.
Declension of Greek cdmmon nouns.
Singular.
Plural. Singular.
Plural.
N.
ren
re'nes
del'phm
delphfnes
G.
re'ms
re'num
delphi'ms
delphl'num
D.
re'ni
re'nibu3
delphi'm
delphi'mbus
A.
re'na
re'nas
delphl'na
delphl'nas
V.
ren
re'nes
del'phin
delphi'nes
A.
re'ne
re'nibus
delphi'ne
delphi'mbus
N.
Singular.
crft'ter
Plural.
crate'res
Singular.
lam'pas
Plural.
lam'pades
G.
crilte'ris
crlte'rum
lam'padis
lam'padum
D.
crate'ri
crate'ribus
lam'padi
lampa'dibus
A.
crate'ra
crate'ras
laui'pada
lam'padas
V.
cra'ter
crate'res
lam'pas
lam'pades
A.
crate're
crate'ribus
lam'pade
lauipa'dlbus
Singular.
Plural. Singular.
Plural.
N.
u'damas
aclaman'tes le'bes
lebe'tes
G.
adamun'tTs
adaman turn
lebe'tis
lebe'tum
D.
adainan'ti
adamau'tibus
lebe'ti
lebe'tibus
A.
adaraan'tu
anamrin'tus
lebe'ta
lebe'tas
V.
adamas
adaman'tes
le'bes
lebe'tes
A.
adaman'te
adaman' lib us
lebe'te
lebe'tlbiis
Singular.
Plural. Singular.
Plural.
N.
las'pTs
las'pides
ba'sis
ba'sees vel -sCs
G.
las'pidis
las'pTdum
ba'seos rel -sis
ba'sium vel scon
D.
A.
liis'pidi
Yas'pida
laspT'dibus
las'pidas
ba'seT vet si
ba'sin vel Tm
ba'sibus
ba'sees vel -ses
V.
las'pis
las'pides
ba'sis
ba'sees vel -ses
A.
las'pidg
laspi'dibus
l-S'sei vel -si
ba'sibus
C 16 )
SINGULAR.
N. Iwc O'-pus,
G. hi'ijus O'-peris,
a wortc,
of a work,
D. huic O'-peri,
lo a icork>
Singular.
Plural
Singular.
Plural.
N.
poe'ma
poe'mata
he'ros
hero'es
G.
poe'matYs
poe'maton t?e/-tura
herols
hero'um
D.
poe'mati
poe'matisi:e/-tibus
heroli
hero'is'i vel -Tbus
A.
poe'ma
poe'mata
hero'a
hero'as
V.
poe'ma
poe'mata
hc'rSs
hero'es
A.
poe'mate
poe / matlsre/-tibus
hero'e
hcrolsi vel -ibus
Singular. Plural.
Singular. Plural.
N.
G.
I).
A.
V.
A.
chla'mys
chla'inydTs
chla'mydT
chla'mydu
chla'mv
chla'myde
chla'mydes
chla'mydum
chlaniy'dibus
chla'mydas
chla'mydes
chlamy'dibus
che'iys
che'lyos
che'lyt vel -?
che'lyn
che'ly
che'lye vel -i
che'lyes
che'lyon vel -um
che'lysi
che'ly as
che'lyes
che'lysi
Like crii'ter are declined a'er, the air, and ce'ther, the sky, except
that they increase short, making a'eris, and ee'theris, in the genitive
case, and want the plural number. Nouns in -on, as I'con, I'conls, an
image, are declined like ren or del'phin, but with short penult in the
ge'nitive case. Greek neuters in -ar differ in nothing in declension from
Latin nouns of the same termination, except that the final -t of the dative
is short : in the ablative case they have -e.
Greek nouns which have -dos or -dis in the genitive, have frequently
-dcm instead of -da in the accusative singular, and -dts instead of -dsis
in the accusative plural, as though they were purely Latin. Some
outlier Greek nouns, but more rarely, take -em for -a in the accusative
singular, and -5s for -as in the plural. Any dative or ablative plural in
-si becomes -sin before an initial vowel or diphthong.
Greek prdper names of this decle'nsion end, for the most part, in -Js,
-as. -as, cs, -eiis, -Is, -os, or -an. Of names in -is, some are masculine,
as Pu'rTs, Pa'rldos, Paris ; and some, again, are feminine, as, Brlse'is,
BriseTdos, Bristis. These differ from one andther in the accusative-,
the masculines making -Im or -in or -dcm, but never -dti ; and the fe'mi-
nines making -dSm or -da, but never -im or -in.
Declension of Greek prdper names in the singular 6nly.
N. PS'ris i Brise'Ts i Pfil'lSs | Pallas
G. Pa'rTdos vel -dis BrIse"Tdosre/-dis Pal'lados tj^-dis 1 Pallau'tosr^-tTs
D Pa'ridi Pn-Isetdi
A. Pa'rui re/-ridem BnscTda vel -Hem
Pril'ladi
Pallan'tT
Pal'ladaueJ-dem' Palhu/ta
V Pa'rT
A. Pa'ridS
i Brlse'i
, BriseTde
Pal'las
Pal'iade
! Pal'la
( Pallau'tl
( 17 )
A. hoc O'-pus, a icork,
V. </-pus, work,
A. ab hoc 0'-pere, so from a icork.
N. Achilles
G. AchU'iis
D.AchTl'lT
A. Achll'leni
V. Aching
A.Aclul'le
AcluTleus
Achil'leos
Achll'leT vel -li
Achll'lea
Achll'leu
Acliil'lee vel -le
SI'moTs
STmocr/tYs
Simoen'ti
Smiotjn'la
Si'mol
Simoen'te
Pan
Pa'jlOS
Pa'ni
Pa'na
Pan
Pi'ne
Proper names in -os are declined like he'rOs ; and those in -ys like
chc'ly's : names of several other terminations than those mentioned
above, as Cy'clops, Cy'clo'pis, a Cyclops, Ce'yx, Cey'cis, a king of
Thrace, Astfanax, Astyanac'tos, one of the sons of Hector, TfmOii,
Tlmo'nis, an Athenian misanthropist, Cha'ron, Charon'tis, the ferryman
on the ricer Styx, Ciis'tor, Cas'toris, and Pol'lux, Pollu'cxs, two sons of
Leda, with many besides, may be referred to one or other of the ex-
amples given in this note. Of Greek names in -ts, many are declined
like Achli'les, after the Latin fashion, entirely relinquishing their original
form: as EurT'pides, Euri'pidis, a traffic poet of Salamis : with all
names in -crates, -genes, -thenes, and a few more : but names in -c/e\,
have either -is, or -eos in the genitive. Some Greek names in -es of this
decle'nsion make either -is or -e'tis in the ge'nitive case, as Chre'mes,
genitive Chre'mis vel Chremetis : and some names of the first declen-
sion, are likewise of the third, as Atrldes, genitive Atrl'da* vel Atri'dls :
some few, aiso, are of the third and se'cond, as was remarked in notes
19 and 23, above. Dl'do is of the third and fourth declension, making
Dldo'ms vel Dl'dus in the genitive.
Although the names of persons and of places, for the most part want
the plural number, yet when more than one of the same name are
spoken of, the plural is used j as in the following example :
Singular
N.
Crc'sar
Cdsar,
G.
Ci'saris
ofC&sar,
D.
C*'sarl
to Ccesar,
A.
C.-c'sarem
Cd'sar,
V.
Cce'sar
O Ctfsar,
A.
CrS'sare
by C(sar.
Singular.
N.
Pi'so
Piso,
G.
Plso'nTs
of Piso,
D.
Piso'nl
to Piso,
A.
Piso'ncm
Pino,
V.
Pfs5
O Piso,
A.
Piso'nS
by Piso.
30
We remarked in
note 26,
Plural.
Cdsar,
Cs'sarcs
the Caesars,
off&sar,
Caj'sarum
of the C<Jesara,
to Caesar,
C/rsa'ribus
to the Ccesars,
Cd'sar,
Cn-'sarcs
the Ccesary,
O C<sar,
Coe'sarcs
O Ciesars,
by C(sar.
Ciesa'ribug
by the Catsars.
Pttral.
Plso'nes
Plso'num
Piso'nibus
Plso'ncs
Plso'nes
Plso'nibiis
the Pisocs,
of the Pisces,
to the Pisoes,
the Pisoes,
O Pisoes.
by the Pisoes.
;, that neuters in -al and in -ar,
have - in the dblative singular ; but jii'bar, a t-unbean, must be ex-
N.
G-. horum
D. his
A. h(EC
V
A. 5 7s
(18 )
PLURAL.
O'-pera, 91
O'-periim,
"
O'-pera,
O'-pera,
6-peribus,
SINGULAR.
X. luc et JICBC
Pa'-rens,
G. hujas
Pa-ren'tis,
D. hide
Pa-ren'tl,
A. Jiunc et hanc
Pa-ren'tem,
V.
Pa'-rens,
A. al hoc ct hue
Pa-rente,
PLURAL.
K. Jdetha Pa-ren'tes
G. horum et hdrum Pa-ren'turn, 33
D. his Pa-ren'tibus, 34
A. 7^05 et has Pa-ren'tes,
Y. Pa-ren'tes,
A. ab his Pa-ren'tibiis,
works,
of icorks,
to works,
works,
O works,
from works.
a parent*
of a parent,
to a pa rent,
a parent,
parent,
by a parent.
parents,
of parents,
to parents,
parents,
O parents,
1y parents.
copied : with such Greek neuters in -ur, as he'par, the liver, nec'tar, the
drink of gods : to these add monosyllables in -dr : as far, bread-corn .
par, a pair or couple ; lar, a dwelling or household god. But the adjec-
tive par, tqual, has - 6"nly : and yet its compounds have -e or -I.
31 Neuters which have -I in the ablative singular, have -ta in the
ndminative, accusative, and vdcative plural, and -ivm (as has been
already noticed) in the geliitive.
32 By referring to note 29, it will be perceived in the declension of
poe'ma, a poem, that the dative and Ablative cases plural end in -tls, (as
though of the neuter noun poe'matum, poe mat!, of the second decl^n-
sion,) in preference to -tibtis. All Greek nouns in -ma have this pre-
dile'ction.
33 The word bos, a cow or an ox, makes bo'um (which is evidently a
contraction for bo'vium, as paren'tum is of paren'tmm,) in the genitive
plural. The plural noun Cde'lites, the i7ihalitants of heaven, has cf&'litiim
vel coili'tiium : and in Uke manner, a'les, any large bird, has a'litum vel
alT'tuum.
s * Bos, a cow or an OJT, has bo'biis (and sdmetimes bu'bus) in place
of bo'vibiis, in the dative and dbiative cases plural. Ausdnius gives
bo'bus with the penult short, as if by syncope of the middle syllable of
bo'vibus, instead of syncope of the i, and crdsis of the OP or ou.
( 19)
The fourth declension 35 makes the genitive, case singular to
end in -us ; as,
SINGULAR.
N.
/tic
Gra-dus,
a step,
G.
hvjus
Gra'-dus,
cfa step,
D.
huic
Gra'-dui, 36
to a step,
A.
hunc
Gra'-diim,
a step,
V.
Gra'-dus,
stcj),
A.
ab hoc
Gra'-du,
by a step.
35 The fourth declension has four terminations, namely, -us, -vs, -o and
-i2, whereof the first and last are Latin ; but the middle two, Greek.
Nouns in -us of this declension are masculine ; nouns in -o are femi-
nhie ; and those in -u, neuter : and they are declined in the manner
following :
Je'sus or le'sus, Jesus, e'cho, an echo, cor'nu, a horn.
Singular* Singular. Singular. Plural.
N. Je'sus
e'cho
cor'nu
cor'uua
G. Je'su
e'chus
cor'nu
cor'nu um
D. Je'su
e'cho
cor'nu
cor'nibiis
A. Je'sum
e'cho
cor'nu
cGr'nua
V. Je'sus vel su
e'cho
cor'nu
cor'nu a
A. JC-'su
e'cho
cor'nu
cor'nibiis
Many prdper names in -o are declined like e'cho : for example Ar'go,
the shi/) Ar go ; CH'o and 'rato, two of the Muses ; Man'to, a daughter
of Tiresias the seer; Sap'pho, a famous poetess of Lesbos ; I'no, a
daughter of Cadmus ; and I'o, a daughter of I'nachus : with Dl'do, a
queen of Carthage ; which last is also of the third declension, making
Dido'nla in the genitive case.
Se'veral nouns in -us, of the fourth decle'nsion, are likewise (in whole,
or in part,) of the second : such as, lau'riis, a bay-tree ; pl'niis, a pine-
tree ; fi'cus, a fig-tree or a fig; quer'cus, an oak; ver'sus, a verse,
co'lus, a distaff or whorl; cor'nus, a wild-cherry-tree; pe'nus, provi-
sions, is of the second, third, and fourth declensions, pe'nus, (and
pe'num,) -I ; pe'nus, -oris ; pe'nus, -us ; la'cus, a lake ; and do'mus, a
house : but there is not perhaps one of these which have all the cases oi
Loth declensions in cdmmon. Do'mus has do'mi as well as do'mus in
the ge'nitive singular, but dnly to signify " at home,-" dative, do'mul
and do'mo ; vocative, do'mus ; ablative, domo only ; nominative plural,
domus; genitive, do'muumanddomo'riim ; dative and ablative, d5m\'bus
only ; accusative, do'mus and do'mos, which last is most used. The
peculiarities of the declension of do'mus are given in this old line
" Tdlle me, mu, mi, mis, si declinare domus vis."
38 The dative singular of this decle'nsion Anciently <5nded in -?!, a ter-
mination which, in some few instances, the best Latin authors have
retained.
N.
G.
D.
A.
V.
A.
hi
horum
his
hos
ab Ms
PLURAL.
Gra-dus,
Gra'-dufmi,
Gra'-dibuV 7
Gra'-dus,
Gra'-dus,
Gra'-dibiis,
steps,
of steps,
to steps,
steps,
steps,
ly steps.
The fifth declension ** makes the genitive and dative cases
singular to end in -el;
as,
SING ULAR.
N. JUBG
Fa'ci-es,
a face,
G. Jtujiis
Faci-e'I,
ofaface.
I). huic
Faci-eV D
to a face,
37 The nine nouns which follow, make the dative and ablative cases
plural in -ubus : never in -tbus :
a'cus, a needle cor'nus, a cornel-tree quer'cus, an oak
iir'cus, a bow la'cus, a take spe'cus, a den, and
ar'tus, a joint par'tus, a birth tri'bus, a tribe.
But the three following have either -ibus or -ubus indifferently :
por'tus, a harbour \ ge'nu, the knee \ vc'ru, a spit.
38 The fifth declension has only one termination, -Zs ; and the nouns
belonging to it hardly exceed fifty in number : and, with the exception
of di'es, a day, which is either masculine or feminine, in the singular,
but masculine dnly, in the plural ; and with the exce'ption likewise of its
compound meri'dies, noon, (which is masculine in the singular, and wants
the plural number,) all nouns of this declension are fe'minine. Here,
also, it may be remarked, that every noun of the fifth declension ends in
-tes, exce'pt three ; namely, fi'des, faith, spes, hope, and res, a thiny:
and, moreover, that all nouns ending in -ics are of the fifth decle'nsion,
exce'pt three ; namely, a'bies (yenitive, abi'etis vel ab'jetis) a fir-tree,
a'rles, (genitive, arl'ctisae/ar'jetis,) a 7 - am,and pa'ries (genitive, parl'etls
vel par'jetls) a wall or partition : but qui'es, rest, and its compound
re'quTes, repose, are of the third, as well as of the fifth, decle'nsion ;
making quie'i vel qme'tis, and requie'I vel requie'tts, in the genitive :
a era in, the noun fa'mes, hunger, of the third declension, is of the fifth
declension in the ablative case. Finally, the three nouns of this declen-
sion not ending in ~ics, have -e in the ge'nitive and dative cases singular :
ail the rest -e'l.
Rcspub'Hca, a commonwealth, which is a compound of res, a thing,
with the feminine gender of the adjective pub'licus, public, is declined as
if the substantive res and the adjective pub'lica, though written toge'ther,
were actually separated ; as, genitive, relpub licte ; accusative, rempub"'-
Hcam, &c.
so The genitive and dative cases singular of nouns of the fifth declen-
eion originally ended in e, like the ablative ; and this termination the
pdets sometimes (the prose writers more rarely) retain.
A. lane Fa'ci-em. a face,
V. Fa'ci-es, face,
A. ab Me Fa'ci-e, from a face.
PLURAL,
X. hce Fa'ci-es, faces,
G. hdrum Faci-e'rum, 40 of faces,
I). Ids FacT-e'bus, to faces,
'A, has Fa'ci-es, faces*
V. Fa'ci--es, faces,
A. al his Faci-e'bus, from faces.
DECLENSION OF NOUNS ADJECTIVE.
A NOUN 41 adjective is declined either Avith three termina-
tions ; as, bo'nus, good, te'ner, tender : or with three articles,-
as in the following examples :
SINGULAR.
Masculine.
Feminine.
Neuter.
N.
Bo'-iiiis, 4 -
bo-na,
bo'-num,
G.
Bo'-m,
bo'-nte,
bo'-ni,
D.
Bo -no,
bo'-nai,
bo'-no,
<* Though fa'cies be here declined through all its cases, for the pur-
pose of showing the terminations, yet, in the plural number, the genitive,
dative, and ablative of this noun seldom or never occur. Indeed of nouns
of the fifth declension, dnly two, res, a thing, and di'es, a day, are said to
l)e entire : of the rest (except fa'cies, a face, effi'gies, an effigy, spes,
hope, and spe'cies, an appearance, which have the nominative, the accu-
sative, and vocative cases,) few are read in the plural number, though in
the singular they are all pe'rfect.
41 The only reason for giving to Latin ddjectives the name of u noii'i3
adjective " appears to be, that the Latin jidjectives are declined like
nouns substantive : that is, the feminine termination -a, (with the ex-
ception of the genitive and dative cases singular of the nine Adjectives
mJutioned in note 45, below,) like nouns fe'minine in -a, of the first de-
cle'nsion : the masculine terminations -us and -cr, (with the exce'ption of
ve'tiis, old ; and with the exception of the eleven adjectives specified in
note 48, beldw ; and also of pau'per, poor; u'ber, fru itful ; de'gener,
ileciineraie ; pu'ber, ripe of aye; Impu'ber, unripe of aye,} like nouns
masculine in -its and -Sr of the se'coud declension of substantives : all
dther terminations, (one in -iir, namely, sX'tiir,/M#, exempted,) like nouns
eubstantive of the third declension. All adjectives, then, are efther of
the first and second decle'nsion of substantives, or of the third dnly.
8 Like " bo'nus " are declined all adjectives prdper, dnding "in -.<?,
whdther they be derived from the names of persons or of places : as
A. Bo'-num,
V. Bo-ne,
A. Bo'-nd,
( 22 )
bo-nam,
bc'-na,
bo'-na,
PLURAL.
Masculine. Feminine.
Bo'-ni, bo' -me,
Bo-no'rum, bo-na'rum,
D. Bo'-nis, of every gender,
A. Bo'-nos bo-nas,
Bo'-m, bB'nte,
Bo'-nis, of every gcnd-.r.
SINGULAR.
Feminine.
te'-nera,
te'-nene,
te'-nerui,
te'-neram,
te'-nera,
te'-nera,
N.
G.
V.
A.
N. Te'-ner,
G. Te'-neri, 43
D. Te'-nero,
Te'-nerum,
Te'-ner,
A.
V.
A. Te'-nero,
b5'-niim,
bo'-no.
Neuter.
bo'-na.
bo-no'rum,
bo'-na,
bo'-na.
te'-neram,
te'-neri,
te'-nero,
te'-nerum,
te'-nerum,
te'-nero.
Thyeste'us, of Thyestes ; Earope'us, of Eur6pa or of Europe, that is,
Euronean, &c. Many adjectives prdper in -e'ius relating to wdmen, have
Slso the termination -e'ls, and are declined like Greek names feminine iu
is of the third declension of substantives : for example, Cephelus,
Cephean, or of Cepheus, when relating particularly to Andrdmeda,
daughter of that m6narch, is read Cephets. Like bo'nus, likewise, are
declined all participles in -rus, -tus, and -dus ; and the superlative
degree of comparison of every adjective (which has that degree') without
exce'ption.
Many ddjectives in -er, (as was remarked in note 19, abdve.)
wheredf the masculine gander is declined after the manner of nouna
substantive in -er of the second declension, lose e in the genitive case,
and consequently in the feminine and neuter genders throughout :
such, for example, as a'ter, a'tra, a'trum, black ; genitive, ii'tri, a'tr^,
a'trl : or, pul'cher, pul'chra, pul'chrum, fair t genitive, purchrT, pul'-
chrae, pul'chri. The adjectives which retain the e in the ge'nitive case,
and consequently in the fe'minine and neuter gefnders throughout, are.
te'ner, tinder, as'per, rough, la'cer, ragged, ex'ter, foreign, mi'ser,
wrctchcd y H'ber, free, pros'per, prosperous, gibTaer, bunched or hump-
backed ; with all those that end in -/er, and in -ger, namely, the deriva-
tives of fe'ro, 7 bear, and ge'ro, / carry. To these add dSx'ter, right,
which sometimes keeps, and sometimes rejects the e : also, ca'ter, the
other, or the rest, but which is not read in the masculine gender, singular
liumber. Gdntile or pa"trial adjectives in -Hr (their number, indeed, is
extre'inely few,) generally drop the e ; as, A'fer, A'fru, A'frum, African.
( 23 )
PLURAL.
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter.
N. Te'-neri, te-nera>, te-nera,
G. Te-neroriim, te'-nera'runi te- nero'riim,
D. Te' neris, of every gender,
A. Te'-neros, te'-neras, ttf-nera,
V. Te'-neri, te'-nens, te"-nera,
A. Te'-nerls, of every gender
Observation. The masculine and neuter genders of adjec-
tives of three terminations are declined like nouns substantive
of the second declension ; and the feminine gender like nouns
of the first declension. 44
But, U'RUS, one; solus, alone; to'tus, the ic hole ; nul'lus,
none ; al'te'r, the other ; u'ter, which of the two ; and a few
other adjectives, 45 make the genitive case, singular, in ~lus t
and the dative in -I ; as,
SINGULAR.
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter.
N. U'-nus, 46 u'-na, u'-num,
G. U-ni'us vel u'-nms, of every gender ,
D. U'-m, of every gender,
A. tJ'-num, u'-nam, u'-num,
V. U'-ne, u'-na, u'-num,
A. U'-no, u'-na, u'-n5.
The adjective I'bgr, Iberian or Spdnish, (but more especially pertaining
to that part of Spain which bdrders on the E'bro,) retains the long e, and
makes Ibe'ra and Ibc'rum in the feminuie and neuter genders.
41 Except, however, the eleven adjectives in -er or -Is, mentioned in
note 48, beldw : for they are wholly of the third declension of sub-
stantives.
45 The dther adjectives are, ul'lus, dny, alius, another, and neu'ter,
neither of the two, making (in all) nine : to which may be added the
compounds of u'ter ; as, uter que, each of the two or both, uter'vTs, which
of the tico you like, uterTibet, which of the two you please : likewise,
alteVuter, one and the other, genitive, alteru'trius, of both the one and
the other : but this last is not unfrequently written as two distinct
words, al'ter u'ter ; genitive, alte'rius u'trius vel alte'rlus utrl'iis. The
i in the genitive of al'ter is always short, as altertiis ; and in the genitive
of aTius is always long, as alf us. The gdnitive of u'ter is u'trius more
frequently (perhaps) than utrl'us.
4<i Here it may be proper to remark, that u'nus signifies " a single
one," or "one of many," whereas al'ter signifies " one of two: " thus,
(24 )
PLURAL.
Masculine. Feminine. Neater.
N, U'-ni, u'-riaj, u'na,
G. U-no'runj, u-na'rum, u-no'rum,
I). U'-nis, of every gender,
A. U'-nos, u'-nas, fi -na,
V. U'-ni, u'-me, u'-na,
A. U'-nis, of every gender.
Note. U'nus has no plural number, unless it be joined to a
noun that lias not the singular number ; as, u'nie li' terse, a
letter ; u'na mde'nia, a wall.* 7
In like manner, also, is declined a'lms, another: \vhich
makes a'liud in the neuter gender singular number.
A NOUN adjective of three articles is declined after the third
declension of substantives; as, tris'tis, sad; me'lior, better ;
fe'llx, happy.
SINGULAR.
N. Me et Jicec
G. hit jus
D. huic
Trls'-tis,* 8 Jtoc tris'-te,
Tris'-tTs, of all genders,
Tris'-tl, of all genders,
u'nus e dT'gitTs, one of the fingers u'niis discipiilo'rum, one of iha
scholars ; al'ter oculo'riam, one of the eyes : sometimes, too, a'liiis is
contested with al'ter ; as a'lius, the one, iil'ter t the other: and sdmetirnes
a'liiis is contrasted with itself, that is, when one, and another, instead of
one, and the other, are meant : thus, a'liiis cantu'bat, a'lius salta'bat, one
teas singing, another was dancing ; 2/lTi_siilta'bant, a'lil canta'bant, some
were dancing, others were singing. U'nus, one, is compounded with
quis'que, to signify " every individual one : " as, unusquis'que, una-
quS'que, anumquod'que ; genitive, uniuscujus'que ; dative, unlcul'que ;
accusative, unumquem'que. unamquam'que, QnQmqnod'que.
47 Or to any noun plural, which, though it may have the singular
number, yet, is taken colle'ctively in an individual or undivided sense :
as, u'nl sex dl'es, one six days, that is, the duration or space of six days .
u'na vcstimen'ta, one suit of clothes or of apparel.
48 The eldven adjectives that follow, have either three or two ternrina'-
tions in the nominative and vdcative cases singular, that is, they have
either -cr, or -is, in the masculine gender of those two cases ; but are in
a.11 the other cases declined like tri'stis : namely, a'cer, sharp ; a'lacer,
brisk; ce'ler, speedy or swift ; ce'leber, renowned; salu'ber, wholesome.
vo'lucer, swift of wing ; campes'ter, champaign ; pedes'ter, belonging to
foot, eques'ter, pertaining to horse ; sllves'ter, woody ; paius'ter, marshy.
These eleven adjectives, in the ndminative and vdcative c&ses singular
masculine ge'nder, have -2r or -fr with the loea of e ia all except ce'ler.
( 25 )
A, hunc et 7ianc Tris'-tem, hoc trisf-t8,
V. Tns'-tis, neuter, tris'-tS,
A. ab hoc, hdc, k6c
PLURAL.
N. 7d et lias Tris'-tes, Jicec tris'-tia, 5 *
O. horum, hdrum, kbrum Trls'-tium, 51
I). Ms Tris'-tibiis, of all genders,
A. hos et has Tris'-tes, hcec tris'-tia,
V. Tris'-tes, neuter, tris'-tia,
A. ab his Tri^-tibiis, of all genders.
SINGULAR.
K. hie et hcBC Me'li-or, hoc me'li-us,
O. hi'tjus Meli-'o'ris, of all genders,
D. huic Meli-6'ri, of all genders,
A. hunc et hanc Meli-6'rem, hoc rne'Ii-us?,
V. Me'li-or, neuter, me'li-us,
A. ab Me, hdc, hoc Meli-6're vel meli-6'ri.
PLURAL.
N. hi et hce Meli-6'res, hac meli-6'ra, w
G. horum,hdrum,h6rum IV1 eli-6'rum, 63
1). his Meli-6'ribus, of all genders,
A. hos et has 3Meli-6'res, hcec meli-6'ra,
V. Meli-6'res, neuter, meli-6'ra,
A. al his MelT-6'ribus, of all genders.
Thus we say, a'cer vel a'cns, a'crTs, a'cre, 01* hie et hcec a'cris, hoc a'cre ;
but, c&'lcr vel ce'leris, ce'leris, cc'lere ; dtherwise, hie et heec ce'leris,
hoc ce'lere.
49 All adjectives which have the vdwel -e for termin^tional letter ia
the ndminative case singular, neuter gdnder, have -I dnly in the ablative.
5 Agredably to the practice of neuter nouns of the third declension of
substantives, -I in the ablative case singular will give -ia in the nomina-
tive, the accusative, and vocative cases plural.
b! When the neuter gdnder of the nominative case, plural, ends in -uJ,
the genitive invariably ends in -ium.
52 Althdugh adjectives, of the comparative degree, have the double
termination -2 or -I in the ablative singular, yet they all have -a, and
never -i&, in the n6mir,ative, accusative, and vdcative cases plural,
neuter ge*nder : except plus, more, which has either plu'ra or plu ria.
3 With the exception of plQs, more, which has both plu'riim and
plu'rium in the genitive plural, all comparatives make this case to end
in rum.
( 26 )
SINGULAR.
N. hie, hose, hoc Fe'-llx, 64
G. /tiijus Fe-li'cis, of all gender 3,
D. huic Fe-li'ci, of 'all genders.,
A. hunc et lianc Fe-H'cem, hoc fe'-lix,
V. Fe'-llx, of all genders.
A. ab hoc, licic, hue Fe-li'ce, wel fe-li'ci. M
PLURAL.
N. hi et ha Fe-li'ces, hac fe-ll-eia,
G. horum, hdrum, h6rum Fe-li'cmm,
D. his Fe-li'cibus, of all genders,
A. hos et has Fe-li'ces, hcec fe-li'cia,
V. Fe-li'ces, neuter, fe-li'cia,
A. ab Ills Fe-li'cibus, of all genders.
Am'b5, loth, and dtl'o, two, are nouns adjective ; and are
thus declined in the plural number only :
N. Am'-b5,
am'-b^,
am'-bo,
loth,
G. Am-bo'riira,
am-ba'rum,
am-bo'rum,
of loth,
D. Am-bo'bus,
am-ba'bus,
am-bo'bus,
to loth,
A. Am'-bos vel -bo,
am'-bas,
am'-bo,
loth,
V. Am'bs,
am'-bai,
am'~bo,
loth,
A. Am-bo'bus,
am-ba'bus,
am-bo'bus,
icith loth.
si Like fe'llx are declined all adjectives of one termination, and all
participles in -ns. But, for the most part., adjectives in -er, -es, -Us, -us,
-or, -els, -eps, -ops, -crs t -fix, -il, -is, -ux> (with a few dthers, such as,
sc'nex, old, sup'plcx, suppliant, sons, guilty, and In'sons, guiltless,) liavt,
seldom or never the neuter gender in the singular number, and very
rarely in the plural. Patrial and patronymic adjectives derived from
the Greek, terminating in -is, or, in -iis, as, Pi'eris, Pierian, Sl'celTs,
Sicilian, Dry'as, Dryad, Les'bias, Lesbian, Ac'tiiis, Ac' tic, At'iic, or
Athenian, Achalas, Achaian, are hardly c'ver met with, except of the
feminine gender, and mdstly (although not always) of the plural num-
ber : these have -m, and -asr, respectively (in preference to -ibus) in the
dative and ablative cases plural.
55 All adjectives (of one termination) in -?r, -ts, -is, -os, -as, -as, -ex,
-ebs, and in -joes, -color, -cor'phr, have -e only, in the ablative singular,
and -am, (not -jam) in the ge'nitive plural. To these might be added a few
ddjectives of the dther dndings specified in note 54, above: but several
of those have sometimes -i in the ablative. Me'mor, mindful, and par,
like or equal, have -1 only, in the ablative case singular ; but the fdrmer
has -urn, the latter -iu.m in the ge'nitive plural : ve'tus, also, makes
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
MOST, but not all, adjectives have three degrees of significa-
tion, or comparison :
1. The po'sitive, which denotes the quality of a thing
absolutely : as, doc'tus, learned ; bre'vis, short.
2. The comparative, which increases or lessens the qua-
lity : as, do'ctior, more learned; bre'vior, shorter or more
short :
And it (namely, the comparative degree) is formed of the
first case of the positive that ends in -i, by adding thereto
the syllable -or, in the masculine and feminine genders ; and
the syllable -us, in the neuter : as, of
Do'ctus, genitive, do'cti, is formed hie et hcec do'ctior, hoc
do'ctius, more learned. Of
Bre'vis, dative, bre'vi, is in like manner formed hie et htec
bre'vior, hoc bre'vms, shorter or more short.
3. The superlative, which increases or diminishes the sig-
nification, or comparison, to the greatest degree : as, doc-
tis'simus, dcctls'sima, doetis'simum, the most learned; brtf-
vis'simus, brevis'yima, brevis'simum, the shortest :
And it (namely, the superlative degree) is formed also of
the first case of the po'sitive that ends in -z, by adding thereto
the termination -sslmus : as, of the
Genitive, doc'ti, is farmed doctis'simus, most learned.
And, of the
Dative, bre'vi, is formed brevis'simus, the shdrtest.
Observe. Many adjectives vary from these General Rules,
and form their comparison irregularly : as,
Bo'niis, good, mel'ior, letter, op'timus, lest.
Ma'lus, lad, pe'jor, worse, pes'simus, worst.
Mag'nus, great,
Par'vus, little,
Mul'tiis, much,
major, greater,
mi' nor, less,
plus, 56 more,
max'Imus, greatest.
mi'mmus, least.
plu'rimus, most.
ve'terfim. The compounds of piir, as im'pftr, uneven or odd, dls'par,
unequal or unlike, have -e or -, in the Ablative, indifferently ; and -tint
or -iu.m ui the genitive plural.
58 This comparative is not found either of the masculine or feminine
gender in the singular number ; the neuter gender " plus" followed by
C 2
( 28 )
Di'ves, rich, di'tior, 57 richer or more rich, ditis'simus, richest
or most rich.
Ne'quam, 58 icicked, ne'quior, more wiclced, neqiris'simus, most
wicked.
Exter'nus, oiitward, exte'rior, 59 more outward, extre'mus vel
ex'tmius, Outermost or most outward.
In'ferus, low, infe'rior, lower or more low, in'fimiis vel i'mus,
lowest or most low.
a genitive case be'ing up<5n all occasions used when either of the dther
two genders may come into need : but, in the plural number, plus makes
hi et hoe plu'res, haec plu'ra vel plu'ria ; genitive, horum, hdrum, horum
plu'rum vel plu'rium ; dative, Ms plu'rlbiis of all genders, and so forth.
57 This comparative is formed by syncope from divT'tior ; which last
word occurs in the best authors, though perhaps less frequently than
dftior.
68 This Adjective, (which is whdlly indeclinable in the positive degree,)
is a corruption of " ne ae'quus," not just : so nul'liis, nul'la, nul'lum,
none, was fdrmed by synsresis, of " ne ul'liis, ne ul'la, ne ul'lum,"
not Any.
s Exte'rior is properly the comparative degree of the obsolete adjec-
tive ex'-terus, outward, from which it appears (unquestionably) to have
been formed : use, howeVer, has constituted it the comparative of ex-
ter'nus : in like manner, also, ought Infe'rior, and supe'rior, to be con-
sidered the comparatives of Infei/nus and siiper'ntis respectively, as well
as of In'ferus and su'perus. Ma }y grammarians, and not without much
reason, regard exte'rior, Inte'rior, cite'rior, ulte'rior, supe'rior, Infe'rior,
pri'or, postc'rior, with their superlatives, to have the adverbs or else
prepositions ex'tra, without, In'tra, within, ci'tra, on this side, ul'tril,
beyond, sii'pra, above, In'fra, bel6w or beneath, prse, before, post, after,
for their positives respectively ; thus :
Positive. Comparative. Superlative.
prie, before, pri'or, former, pri'mus, first,
post, behind, postS'rio'r, more behind, postre'mus, last,
inner or . , f inmost or
more within, \ most within,
outer or extre'mus, f uttermost or
more without, ex'tlmiis, \ most without,
nearer or ~/,~ J" nearest or
more towards, ' \mosttowards,
Jn'tus,
In'tra,
ex'ter,
ex'tra,
CIS,
ci'tra,
ul'ter,
ul'tra,
In'fer,
In'fra,
.su'per. 1 , , v f x, v f more above supre'mus, f most above
su'pra, } alove > SU P e rior ' \ or higher, sQm'mus, \ or highest,
prfi'pe, near, prS'pior, nearer, prox'imiis, nearest.
To these, did our limits permit, we ce'rtainly might add ve'ry mdny
within, Inte'rior,
without, exte'rior,
on this side, ctte'rior,
beyond, ulte'rior, f&rther, ul'timus,
7 JL^ - e-> - f more beneath In'fimus, f most beneath
benedth, inferior,^ /x , fi 4 ;.,-.,
( 29 )
Su'perus, high, supe'rior, higher or more high, supre'mus vel
sum'mus, highest or most high.
In'tus, inward, Inte'rior, more imcard, In'timus, innermost or
most inward.
Ju'venls, young, ju'nior, younger.
Se'nex, old, se'mor, older.
Pri'or. former, prl'mus, first.
Pro'pior, nearer, prpx'imus, nighest or nearest.
Ulte'rior, farther, ul'tmius, last. With some others. 30
more : but, for the present, the above must suffice. In some of the
instances which aVe here adduced, the original positive is dbsolete ; and
in dthers, an adjective rather than a preposition or an adverb ought to
be regarded as the positive : such, for example, as, Ini'e'rior and supe'rior,
which have the adjectives in'ferus and su'perus rightly for their positive
degrees : yet in others, as pri'or and pro'pior, the adverbs or prepositions
pra?, before, and pro'pe, nigh, seem to be the words from which those
comparatives have been formed.
60 The Adjectives, (not here specified,) which, in addition to those
already given, vary from the general rule, may be chtssed under one, or
dther, of the seven heads following. First, adjectives borrowing their
comparison from Adjectives of some dther termination : second, adjec-
tives forming their superlative degree' of comparison irregularly :
third, adjectives wanting the pdsitive degree' : fourth, Adjectives want-
ing the comparative degree : -fifth, adjectives wanting the superlative
degree : sixth, adjectives which are found only in the pdsitive degree":
and seventh, adjectives which are found only in the comparative
degree'.
1. Ad'jectives borrowing their comparison.
All adjectives Ending in -dlcus, -ficus, -loquus, and -vulus, change the
final -I of the first case of the pdsitive degree which terminates in that
vowel, into -en'tlor for the masculine, and also feminine ge'nder, of the
comparative degree ; and into -en'tius, for the neuter. Again, they, ia
)ike manner, form the superlative degre6 by changing the same -1 into
tntls'simus, -enlis'sima, -ends' simum : as though actually borrowing
their comparison from participles in -dicens, -ficens, -loquens, and
-volens. For example, munrflcus, munificent, makes hie et hcsc muni-
flcen'tior, hoc mumficen'tlus, more munificent, muuificentis'simus,
munificentls'slma, munTficeutls'sTmum, most munificent: and so of
adjectives of the other three terminations : but mlri'ficiis, wonderful,
has either mlrificentls'sTmus or mmficls'simus, most wonderful, in the
superlative degree j and perhaps some of the rest are similarly fdrmed.
2. Ad'jectives forming their superlative degree irregularly.
Several Adjectives of this class are given in the E'ton text, and these
need not therefore be repeated : we shall add dnly the four fdllowing,
and which, in the comparative degree, are re'gular :
(30 )
Adjectives ending in -Zr form the superlative degree from
the no'minative case singular, masculine gender of the po'sitive,
Positive. Superlative.
matu'rus, mature or ripe, matur'riraus, the ripest or most ripe.
ve'tus, old or ancient, veter'rTmus, very oldor most ancient*
dex'ter, rioht or on the right hand, dex'timus, the moat to the right.
sinls'ter, left or on the left hand, smls'timus, the most to the left.
With these, some folks (as Valpy) couple cT'ter, near, cT'timus,
nearest ; and pos'terus, postern or behind, postre'mus, last or most
behind; but el'timiis and postre'mus we, in note 59, abdve, formed
(though perhaps less prdperly) from the d verbs or prepositions els or
ci'tra, on this side, and post, after.
3. Ad'jeciives wanting the p&sitive degree.
The Adjectives of this class are, by no means, numerous, if we are
alldwed to call an ddverb, or a preposition, a positive degree ; which,
strictly speaking however, we hardly can. These two Adjectives follow-
ing seem entirely destitute of a pdsitive degree, even in the latitude to
which we have just alluded :
Comparative. Superlative.
dete'rior, worse, deter'rimus, worst,
O'cior vcl 6'cyor, swifter, ocls'simus, speediest, or swiftest.
The fdrmer of these seems indeed to have had de'ter, or some such
like, for the pdsitive degree, but which has long since become dbsolete.
4. Ad'jeciives wanting the comparative degree,.
Of this class the adjectives, which here follow, are those which occur
more frequently ; but several dthers might be ddded :
Positive. Superlative.
bellus, spruce or fine, bellls'simus, mcst spruce,
dlver'sus, different, diversls'slmus, most different,
fi'dus, faithful, fldis'simus, most faithful,
in'clytus, renowned, inclytls'slmus, most renowned,
Invic'tus, invincible, invlctls'simus, most invincible,
Invl'tus, unicilling, InvTtTs'sTmus, most unwilling,
mc'ritus, deserving, mentls'sTmiis, most deserving,
no'vus, new or late, novis'sTmus, newest or latest,
nu'perus, recent, nuper'rimus, most recent,
persua'sus, persuaded, persuasls'simus, fully persuaded,
sa'cer, holy, sacer'rimus, most holy.
A few of these (just named) are pdrticiples rather than adjectives ; or,
at all eVents, they are participials, that is, participles used adjectively,
without reference to time. Thus, Invic'tus is a participle, if we trans-
late it ' uncongitered,' because this meaning is connected with the past ;
but the same word Invic'tus is a participial adjective, if we render it
' invincible,' because, in that sense, it is not confined to the past, present,
nor future.
(31 )
by adding thereto the termination -rimiis : as, of pul'
fair, is formed pulcher'rimus, the fairest.* 1
5. Ad'jectives wanting the superlative degree.
The number of Adjectives of this class is exceedingly numerous, if wo
admit into it all adjectives which are not compared : but in a more
limited acceptation, namely, a class of adjectives which have the pdsitive
and comparative degrees, but not the superlative, the number is ve'ry
considerably diminished ; embracing only such adjectives as end iu
-a' Us, -flis, and -bllis, with most of those in -d'nus, -I'vls, and -in'quus :
to which may be added (in addition to the two given in the E'toii text, >
the following :
Positive. Comparative.
adoles'cens, young or youthful, adolescen'tior, younger,
dlutur'nus, lasting, diutur'nior, more lasting*
in'gens, great or huge, Ingen'tTor, more huge,
opl'mus, fertile or rick, opi'mior, more fertile,
pro'nus, prone, pro'mor, more prone,
sa'tur, full, satu'rior, more full.
6. Ad'jectives which are found only in the positive degree.
This class is the most numerous of any, comprising all adjectives and
participles of whatever tense, whereunto degrees of comparison aro
incompatible with the signification : and all Adjectives compounded with
nouns substantive, and with the verbs fe'r5, / bear, and ge'ro, / carry .
with some dthers : also most, if not all, adjectives te'rminating in -icus,
-t'cus, -limits, -1'mus, -znws, -i'nus, -I'viis, -5'rus, -sonus, -fugus, and
-bundiis : likewise in -ul'las, -ulu*, and other endings indicative of
diminution ; with all participles in -rus, and in -dus. To which add,
al'mus, gracious ; du'biiis, doubtful ; ege'niis, indigent ; la'eer, ragged
ortorn; me'mor, mindful , mi'rus, wonderful; sos'pes, safe; va'cuus,
empty : and several besides. But some few of these are found com-
pared in the writings of the earlier Romans, and dthers of them admit,
indeed, of an imperfect comparison with the aid of the adverbs ma'gis,
more ; val'de, very ; and maxtme, most. And some adjectives which
are regularly compared, and others which are not, do occasionally, in the
pdsitive degree', increase or lessen their signification by means of pre-
positions in composition : as, prcedu'rus, very hard ; perdi'ligens, very
diligent ; depar'ciis, very niggard.
7. Ad'jectives which are found only in the comparative degree.
There are fewer ddjectives of this class than of dny dther : indeed w
hardly know of more than these three below :
ante'rior, former, sa'tior, better, se'quior, worse.
Of which, the first seems to be the comparative degree' of the Adverb
an'te, before ; and the second, that of sat or sa'tis, enough. In this
class, again, some grammarians rank po'tior more eligible or choicer t
but this comparative has po'tis, for its positive, and potls'simus for its
superlative degree*.
61 The eleven adjectives mentioned in note 60, ab6ve 4 form their com-
( 32 )
Ad'jectives ending in -Tis form the superlative degree
according to the General Rule : as, of u'tilis, useful, dative,
u'tili, is formed utilis'simus, most useful : except the follow-
ing, which change -is into -limits : as,
A'gtlfa, nimble, agil'limus, nimblest, or most nhnlle,
Fa'cilis, easy, facil'limus, easiest, or most easy,
Gra'cilis, slender, gracil'limus, slenderest, or most slender,
Hu'irrilis, low, humil'limus, lowest, or most loic,
Si' mills, like, simil'limus, likest, or most like.**
Likewise, if a vowel come before -its, in the nominative
case singular, masculine gender, of the positive degree of an
adjective, the comparison is generally made by ma'gis, more,
and max'ime, most : 63 as,
Pi'us, godly, dutiful, or affectionate; ma'gis pi'us, more
godly, more dutiful, or more affectionate; max'ime pi'us,
most gddly, most dutiful, or most affectionate.
OF A PRONOUN.
A PRONOUN 64 is used instead of a noun, and is declined
\vith number, case, and gender.
parison like pul'cher : but the cdmpounds of fe'r5, / bear, and of ge'ro,
/ carry, as la'niger, wool-bearing, ar'mTger, arms-carrying, admit not of
a comparative or superlative degree*. Dex'ter, right, and sinis'ter, left,
with some few others in -er, (see note 60, ab6ve,) deviate from this
Hule, in the formation of their superlatives.
6 - To these may be added Imbecil'lis, weak ; and dny compounds of
fa'cilis or of sT'milis : as, d'iffi'cilis, difficult ; dissi'mills, dissimilar or
unlike ; persi'mTlis, very similar or exceedingly like.
03 Although all adjectives ending in -us pure may be compared by
help of these two adverbs, yet many of them have dlso their regular
degrees of comparison ; thus, stre'nuus, strenutor, strenuis'simus,
strenuous.
64 Prdnouns, as the name very clearly indicates, are substitutes for
nouns, supplying the piace of the latter, and preventing them (as it were)
from being too frequently repedted : they have re'fereuce, the'refore, to
yome person or thing before me'ntioned. Pronouns are either Simple 01
Compounded : and they are more6ver divided into Personal, Dem6>i~
xtrative, Relative, Interrogative, Possessive, Indefinite, and Pdtrial.
The simple pronouns, in Latin, amount to eighteen hi number ; namely,
the fifteen given in the E'ton list, above ; with the relative qul, who, th
interrogative, quis ? who, or, what 9 which last, however, some regard
( 33)
There are fifteen pronouns : namely,
E'go, /, Ip'se, himself^ Su'us, his,
Tu, thou, Is'te, that, Nos'ter, ours,
Il'le, he, Hie, this, Ves'ter, yours,
Is, he, Me'us, mine, Nos'tras, of our country.
Su'l, of himself, Tii'us, thine, Ves'tras, of your country.
To these may be added their compounds, e'gomet, I myself ^
tu'te, thou thyself, I'dem, the same ; also the relative qui, who,
or what ; and cu'jas, of ichat country.
DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS.
E'co, tu, su'i, 6 * are pro'nouns substantive, and are tlms
declined :
as a cdmpound of qui with Is ; and the patrial, cu'jas, of what country.
Of these, e'go, 1, tu, thou, (or you by courtesy,) and su'l, of himself , of
herself, of itself, or of themselves, are substantives of all ganders : the
remaining fifteen are adjectives. But of these simple adjective pro-
nouns, several are assumed substantively : as, Il'le, in the masculine
gender, he : Il'la, in the feminine ge'nder, she ; Il'lud, in the neuter gen-
der, it. In like manner are hie, hSc, hoc, this, Is'te, Is'ta, Is'tud, that, and
is, S'S, Id, he, she, it, used ; and more rarely, Ip'se, Ip'sa,Ip'sum, himself,
herself, itself: also, the relative, qui, who ; and some few others.
Again, the pro'nouns e'go, /, and tu, thou or you, with their plurals nos,
we, and vos, ye or you, are termed primitives, because from them are
derived the posse'ssives me'us, mine, tii'us, thine, nos'ter, ours, ves'ter,
yours : su'l, of himself, is also a primitive prdnoun, the posse'ssive
sii'iis, his oicn, her own, its own, cr their own, being derived from it.
The last, namely su'l, and its derivative su'iis, are styled reflex, because,
pointing always reflectively to the chief noun prece'ding them, they are in
a manner reciprocals of one another. With e'go, tu, and su'l, through
their several cases, are often found the like cases of Ip'se, Ip'sa, Ip'sum,
agree'ing in gender and in number, with the person understodd in thoso
primitive and simple pronouns.
65 These three pronouns take -met, aTter them, in all their cases,
whenever a speaker, or writer, inte'nds to mark more than drdinary
emphasis : and, in the ndminative case (singular) of tu, the syllable -/2-
is dften inserted betwee'n the prdnoun and the adjunctive, -mlt : thus,
viMi e'gSmet, /, my own self , saw ; fecis'ses tu'temet, thou, thy own,
s?lf, wouldest have done (if). In so far, howeVer, as regards the second
person, tu'te is dftener used, perhaps, than tu'temet. In the accusative*
singular, t5 ic sdmetimes doubled ; as te'te, thy identical self; and in
like manner, both in a singular and plural sense, we frequently meet
with se'se, him very self or them own selves. Finally, in the ablative
case, both singular and plural, these three prdnouns, in cdmmon with
the relative, are followed by the preposition cum in composition : as
c 3
SINGULAR.
N. E'?o, 7,
G. Me'I, of me,
D. Mi'hi,* 8 to me,
A. Me, me,
V. . .
A. Me, from me.
(34)
PLURAL.
N. Nos, we,
G. Nos'trum, vcl -I, 67 of us,
D. No'bis, to us,
A. Nos, us ,
y
A. No'bis, from us.
SINGULAR.
G.
IX
A.
V.
A.
Tu,
Tii'i,
Tl'bi,
Te,
Tu,
Te,
thou,
of thee,
to
thou,
with thee.
Y.
A.
PLURAL.
Yes, ye or you,
Ves'trum, vel 5, of you,
Yo'bis, to you,
Yos, you,
Yos, ye or you,
Yo'bis, with you.
Su'i, of himself, of herself, of itself, of themselves, has no
nominative or vocative case, and is thus declined :
SINGULAR and PLURAL.
Y herself, itself, themselves.
Il'le, he, il'la, she, and Is'te, that, are thus declined :
N.
G. Su'I,
D. Si'bi,
A. Se,
Y.
A. Se,
of himself ,
to himself,
himself,
oy himself. .
SINGULAR.
Masculine. Feminine.
N. Il'lS, il'la,
G. Il'lius, vel illi'us, of all genders,
D . I I'll, of all genders,
Netter.
Il'lud,
mij'cum, with me ; se'cum, with or by himself or themselves ; vobls'cum,
with you.
66 The dative mTTii, to me, is dften contracted by the pdets,and so"me-
tirae by the prose writers, into mi ; like nTTiTl, nothing, into nil, nought.
67 The genitive plural of e'go, was originally nostro'rum, when the
person alluded to was masculine ; and nostra'rum. when that person waa
of the feminine gdnder. But in prdcess of time, this genitive became
nostrum, by syncope : and occasionally nostri.
(35 )
A. Il'lfim, illain, 31'lud,
V
A. 1116, Ilia, Il'lo.
PLURAL.
fifascnline. Feminine. NeuteT.
N. Il'ii, 6 * illse, ilia,
G. Illorum, illa'rum, illo'rum,
D. Illis, of all genders,
A. 1116s, Il'las, ilia,
A. Il'lls, of all genders.
In like manner, also, is declined ip'se, 7ie himself; except,
that the nominative and accusative cases, singular, have
pi sum in the neuter gender.
Is, he, she, or that, and qu!, who, are thus declined :
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Ma.sc. Fern. Neut. Mn.sc. Fern. Neut.
N. Is, e'a, id,
G. E jus, of all genders,
D. E'l, of all genders,
A. E'um, e'am, id,
A. E'6, e'a, e 6.
"N" T'T ';p 'a
-*-^i A 1} C t*J} c d^
G. Eo'rum, ea'rum, eo'rum,
D. 1'is vel e'ls vel els ??6'/ is, 69
A. E'os, e'as, e'a,
T.
A. 1'is vel e'ls Tel els vel is.
In like manner also is declined its compound I'dem, the
same; as, Nominative, I'dem, e'adem, I'dem ; Genitive,
ejus'dem ; Dative, ei'dem, &c. 7
CT For ll'll, and ll'l'is, we sometimes meet with o/7l, and ol'us, agree-
ably to the more ancient mode of spelling. Like those cases of ll'lc
were the dative and ablative cases singular of lac, is, and qu'i : ndmely,
hole, e'ol, and quol, for the masculine and neuter ge'nders, and hale,
e'al, and quai, for the feminine ge'nder. The adverb ec'ce, or rather a
fragment of that adverb, enters into composition with ill'l in the mas-
culine and fe'minine genders of the accusative case both in the singular
and plural number : as, el'lum, cl'lam, cl'los, cl'lds.
69 With the adverb ec'ce, the pronoun ?s dnters into composition
exactly in the same way, and to the same extent as ll'le : hence we have
ec'cum, ec'cam, Ec'cos, and cc'cds, but nothing further.
7i) This pronoun is very evidently a compound of is, with the adjunc-
tive syllable -dem, contracted by syncope into I'dtm for the masculine,
and idem for the neuter ge'nder. In the accusative case singular and
genitive case plural it has eun'dem, ean'dtm, and eorun'ilem, edrun'dcut,
the le'tter m being changed into n for the sake of the sound.
( 36)
SINGULAR.
Masculine. Feminine. Neuter.
N. Qui,^ qu,
G. Cu'jus, of all genders,
D. Cui, of all genders,
A. Quern, quam,
^ f Quo, qua,
' ( vel qui, of all genders. 71
PLURAL.
Masculine. Feminine. Netiter.
N. Qui, qu&, qufe,
G. Quo'riim, qua'rum, quo'rum,
D. Qui'bus vel que'is vel queis e/ quis,
A. Quos quas, quge,
A. Qui'bus vel que'is vel queis vel quis.
In like manner also are declined its compounds, 78 qnf-
lam, a certain one ; qui' vis, qui'libet, any one you please ;
quicun'que, whosoever.
Quis, quee, quid or quod, who ? or what ? is declined like
qui, who: as are also dliquis^ and other compounds of
fjuis : 73 these for the most part make the feminine gender of
the nominative case singular, and the neuter of the nominative
and accusative cases plural, in -qua. 1 *
71 Although the dblative qui occurs of all genders, yet it is used
6"ftener, perhaps, in the neuter than in either the masculine or feminine
gender. In both the singular, and plural number, the relative, when-
ever it is gdverned by the preposition c-Sm expressed, may be followed
or preceded by that word at option : thus we may say, cum qui, cum
fjulbiis or quo'cum, qud'cum, qul'cum, quibus'cum ; but the latter form
is more Elegant.
72 In <*very cdmpound (without exception) of the relative prdnoun
qui, who, the relative stands first : but in those of the interrogative
<juis, who or what ? the interrdgative is sdmetimes first and sdmetimes
last.
73 Quls'qu&m has often qulc'quam, for qii'idfquum, in the neuter
gender ; and qucn'quam, for quem-quam, in the accusative singuiar f
liiisculiae gender : but the feminine quam' quam is not found. The
cdmpounds of qul, also change m into n beidre d: thus we often find
qucn'dam, qudu'dam, qufirun'dam, quarun'd&m, Qc. for quern' 'dum %
yumd&m, quorum'dam, quarum'dam, S^c.
74 This observation applies only to such cdmpounds of quis> as te'nai-
Quis'qms, whosoever, is thus declined :
Masculine. Feainine. Neuter.
N. Qins'quis, quid' quid vel quic'quid,
A. quid' quid vel quic'quid,
A. Quo'quo, qua' qua, quo'quo.
Metis, tuiis, sii'us, are declined like Itfnus, except only
that me us makes mi 75 in the vocative case singular, mas-
culine ; and tu'iis, situs, with many other pronouns, have no
vocative case. 78
Nos'tras, ves'tras, and cujas, are declined, Nominative,
nos'tras, Genitive, nvstrfftls, like fellxF
OF A VERB.
A VERB is the chief word in every semtence, and ex-
presses either the action or being of a thing.
nate in that prdnoun : for those which begin with it, as quls'n&m, have
quab and not qua.
7* To the ablative case singular, feminine ge*nder (and sometimes, toc^
though rarely, in the masculine gander,) of me'us, tufus, sii'iis, nos't&r,
and ves'ter, is added (for the sake of emphasis) the termination -pit :
as, meap'le, tiiiip'te, suap'te, nostrap'te, vestrdp'te : also, rn&op'tt,
tuop'te, &c. but seldom.
~ 6 Ail nouns and prdnouns with which the vocative tu cdnnot be
coupled, so as to make sense, that is, all nouns and pronouns which
cannot be rationally addressed, " O thou," seem, of necessity, to want
the vocative case : as, ne'mo, nobody ', nul'lus, no one, quot, how mdny,
e'go, /, su'I, of himself, hie, this one.
77 It may be remarked, that to ftfc, and ny of its cses Ending in o
or in 5, there is oTten ddded the syllable -ce ; as, htc'cS, ho</c%, hujus'ce,
his'cZ : and occasionally -cinZ, to dny case e'nding in c. This pronoun is
also compounded with il'le. and with is'te ; as, tl'fic, ll'lcec, il'ldc, and,
Ist'/rtc, isthcec, ist'hoc, vel ist'huc. This last is frequently written
without the h. And with the genitive hu'jus, and likewise with e' 'jZs
and cu'jus, is dftentimes read the ge'nitive of mo'das, adj iinctively : as 1
hujus'modi, on this wise or of this mdnner : ejus'modi, of that manner ;
cujus'modi, of which sort, or, interrdgatively, of what mdnner or on
what wise ? And as hu'jus takes -cS after it, (as has been said abdve)
so e'jus and cu'jus have sometimes the same adjunctive : as, cjus'ce, o/
(SS)
Of VERBS there are two Voices :
I. The Ac'tive, ending in -u ; as a'mO, I love.
II. The Passive, ending in -or ; as a'mor, / am loved.
Of Verbs ending in -#, some are actives transitive : as,
vm'cS, / conquer ; and these, simply by changing 5 into -or,
become verbs passive ; as, vm'cor, / am conquered. Some
are named neuters, and intransitives ; as, gau'ded, / am glad :
and these are never made passives.
Some verbs ending in -6r, are called deponents, and have
an active signification : as, lo'quor, I speak. And some fe\v
are neuters : as, glo'rior, / boast." 18
Note I. That verbs neuter ending in -or, and verbs depo-
nent, are declined like verbs passive, but with gerunds and
supines like verbs active.
II. A verb is called transitive when the action passes on
to the noun following : as, vln'cO te, / conquer thee ;
ve'neror De'urn, I worship God.
III. A verb is called intransitive, or neuter, when the
action does not pass on, or require a following noun : as,
cur'rO, / run ; glo'rior, / loast.
IV. Verbs that have different persons are called verbs
personal : as, e'go a'mO, / love ; tu a'mas, tliou lovest.
And such as have not different persons are called verbs
impersonal : as, t&'det, it irks ; opor'tet, it lehoves.
thai, pointingly : cujus'ce, qfv;hose: or of what $ Between the geni-
tive singular also of those pronouns, and that of mS'dus, this fragment of
tc'ce is often introduced: as, hujusce'modl, of this very sort.
78 Inceptive Verbs are such as indicate that a beginning has been made,
and they are fdrmed from the second person singular of the present of
the indicative of some simple verb of kindred meaning, by the addition
of -cd : hence they all end in -scd j as cales'co, / wax hot, from ca'leu,
ca'les, / am hot.
Frequentative Verbs are such as imply frequency or repetition of that
which is the subject of the verb : as, cla'mito, / exclaim frequently,
from cla'mo, I exclaim ; cui'so and cur'sito, I run of I en, from cur'ru,
1 run; jac'to and jac'tito, / fling often, from ja'cTo, I cast. All fre^
qudntative verbs in -ito are formed from verbs of the first conjugation,
by changing the final -u of the last supine into -ltd.
Desiderative Verbs express some wish or desire, and are all of the
fourth conjugation ; be'ing formed by the conversion of - of the last
supine of verbs into -uVt5;-as, esu'rio, / desire to eat. from e'sii, to be
eaten.
(39)
OF MOODS.
THERE are five moods; the indicative, the imperative, the
potential, the subjunctive, and the infinitive.
The indicative mood either declares a thing positively,
as e'go, a md, / love ; else it asks a question, as a'rnas tu ?
Dost tliou love ?
The imperative mood commands or entreats : as, ve'ni hue,
come hither ; par'ce mi'hi, spare me.
It is also known in En'glish by the sign let ; as ea'nuls,
let us go.
The potential mood implies "power" or " <2wy /' and in
En'glish is commonly known by these signs, may, can,
might, would, could, should, or ought : as, a'mem, I may
love ; amavis'sem, I might have loved ; and the like.
The subjunctive mood in Latin differs from the potential,
only in that it is subjoined to an()ther verb going befo're it in
tne same sentence ; and has always some conjunction, or in-
definite word, joined to it : as, e'ram mi'ser cum ama'rem,
/ was miserable rvhen I loved, that is, 'when I was-in-love ,*
ne'sciO qua'lis sit, / know not what sort of man he is.
The infinitive mood hath neither number, person, nor
nominative case: and is (commonly) known by the sign to;
as, ama're, to love.
OF GERUNDS AND SUPINES.
VERBS have three gerunds, ending in -di, -do, -diim,
and which have an active signification : as, aman'dl, o/
loving; aman'do, in loving; aman'dum, loving.
The Supines of verb's are two :
The one ending in -urn, which signifies actively: as,
'6 ama't'um, I go to love.
The o'ther ending in -u, and having for the most part a
passive signification : as, diffi'cilis aina'tu, hard or difficult
to be loved.
OF THE TENSES OF VERBS.
IN VERBS there are five tenses, or times, expressing an
action or affirmation : viz. tiie present, the preterimperfect,
the preterperfect, the pretcrpluperfect, and the future.
40 )
I. The present tense speaks of a thing present
doing : as, a'mO, / love or am loving.
II. The preterimperfect tense speaks of a thing which was
doing at some time past, and not then terminated or ended :
as, ama'bam, / did love or was loving.
III. The preterperfect tense speaks of a thing already done
and past : as, ama'vi, / loved or have loved.
IV. The preterpluperfect tense refers to a thing done a-t
some time past, and terminated or ended befo're something
else spo'ken of: as, ama'veram an'te tune tem'poris, I had
loved before that time.
V. The future tense speaks of a thing to be done hereaf
as, ama'bo, / shall love ; ama'bis, thou wilt love.
OF NUMBERS AND PERSONS.
VERBS have two numbers, the singular and the plural:
and three persons in each number; as,
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Nos ama'mus, we love.
vr-
E'g5 a'mO, I love,
Tu a'mas, thou lovest,
Il'le, a'mat, he loves.
Vos ama'tis, ye love,
Il'li a'mant, they love,
Note. All nouns are of the third person, except e'go, /,
nos, we, tu, thou or you, and vos, you or ye : but nouns of
the vocative case are properly of the second person, because
tu or vos (according as the noun is singular or plural,) must
necessarily be understood.
OF THE VERB, ES'Sfi, TO BE.
BEFORE other verbs can be declined, it is necessary to
learn the verb eVse, to be ; which is varied as follows :
Siim, es, fu'l, es'se, futu'rus, to be.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
1. Present Tense. am.
C Sum, I am,
Singular. < es, thou a/t,
(.est, he is,
( 41 )
Plural.
Singular.
Plural.
Singular.
Plural.
Singular.
Plural.
Singular.
fsu'mus,
-? es'tis,
we are,
v* are,
2. Preterimperfect Tense. was.
C E'ram, / was,
} e'ras,
( e rat, he was,
C era'mus, we were,
1 era'tis, ye were,
^e'rant, they were.
3. Preterperfect Tense. have.
C Fii'i, 1 have been,
\ fuis'ti,
(fu'it,
i fu'imus,
< fuis'tis,
(^ fue'runt vel fue're,
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. had.
TFu'eram, I had been,
J fu'eras, thou hadst
[ fu'erat, he had been,
( fuera'mus, we had been,
< fuera'tis, ye had been,
(fu'erant, they had been.
5. Future Tense. shall or will.
E'ro, I shall be S*
e'ris, thou wilt be,
e'rit, he will be,
he has been,
we have leen,
y^ 7/at? ieen,
have leen.
78 Though the sign of the future tense be "shall or will," yet tli
farmer is generally used with the first person only ; the latter, with the
sdcond and third pe'rsons : for the expression " 1 will be," means rather,
" I am willing to be," than " / shall be ;" and in like mdnner. by " you
shall be" we rightly understand " you will be compelled to be." Yet
many speakers confound *' shall" and u will" with each other, and this
not unfre'quently to the utter perversion of the sense. But there are
instances in which, with the first person, ' ivill" is preferable to " shall:"
and Others in which, with the second and third persons, " shall" is more
Eligible than " will."
(42 )
f g'nmiis, tee shall le,
Plural. -< e'ritis, ye 'will be,
( erunt, they will be.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. No first Person.
~, j f Sis. es, es't5, be thou,
Singular. j^ -^ let him be,
f si'nius, let us be,
Plural. -J sl'tis, es'te, esto'te, be ye,
(_sint, siin'to, let them be.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
1. Present Tense. may, can, or should.
C Sim, I may be
Singular, -j sis, thou r.idyest be,
( sit, he may be,
( si'miis, tee may le,
Plural. < si'tis, ye may le,
^slnt, they may be.
2. Preterimperfect Tense. might or could,
f Es'sem, vel f o'rem, / might be,
Singular. <. es'ses, vel fo'res, thou mightest be,
( es'set, Tel f oret, he might be.
resse'mus,ve/ fore'miis, we might be,
Plural. -? esse'tts, vel fore'tis, ye might be,
[ es'sent, vel f o rent, they might be.
3. Preterperfect Tense. may or should have.
( Fu'erlm, / may have been,
Singular. < fii'eris, thou mdyest have been,
{ fu'erit, he may have been,
79 Here, want of room prevents us from giving with the several persons
of the different tenses, all the signs beldnging to those tenses ; but com-
mon sense will suggest, that they may (and ought to) be taken with each
person, singular and plural : thus, for the present tense of the potential
mood, / may, can, or should be , thou mdyesl, canst, or shouldest be ; he
may, can, or should be ; and so forth : again, for the preteriinperfect, /
might or could be ; thou mightest or couldest be ; he might or could be ;
and so on.
(43 )
f fiie'rimus, we may have been,
Plural. -? fue'ritis, ye may have been,
(Ju'erint, they may have been.
4. Preterpluperfecfc Tense. might or would have.
( Fuis'sem, / might have been.
Singular. J fuis'ses, t/ioumightest have been,
( fuis'set, he might have been,
ffulsse'mus, ice might have been,
Plural. < fuisse'tis, ye might have been,
^fuis'sent, they might have been.
5. Future Tense. shall or will have.
C Fu'erS, / shall hare been,
Singular. < fu'eris, thou wilt have been,
( fu'ent, he will have been,
f fueri'mus, we shall have been,
Plural. < fiieri'iis, ye will have been,
( fu'erint, they will have been.
The Subjunctive Mood is declined like the Potential.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present and Preterim perfect Tense.
Es'se, to be.
Preterperfect and Preterpluperfect Tense.
Fuis'se, to have been.
Future Tense.
Fo're vcl Futu'rum es'se, to be about to be.
Participle of the future in -rus.
Futu'rus, about to be.
DECLENSION OF VERBS REGULAR.
VERBS have four conjugations, both in the active and passive
voice.
The first conjugation of Verbs active hath a long before -r&
of the infinitive mood ; as ama're, to love.
(44)
The second conjugation hath e long before -re of the infiui
tive mood ; as mone're, to advise.
The third conjugation hath e short before -re of the infini
tive mood ; as re'gere, to rule.
The fourth conjugation hath i long before -r& of the infini
tive mood ; as audi're, to hear.
VERBS AC'TIVE in -o are declined after these examples.
1. A'mO, a 'mas, ama'vi, ama're, aman'di, aman'dd, aman'-
dura, ama'tum, ama'tu, a'mans, amatu'rus, to lore.
2. Mo'neO, mo'nes, mo'nui, mone're, monen'dl, monen'do
nionen'dum, mo'mtum, mo'nitii, mo'nens, monitu'rus, to advise
3. Re'gS, re'gis, rex'I, re'gere, regen'di, regen'do, regen'-
dum, rec'tiim, rec'tu, re'gens, rectu'rus, to rule.
4. Au'diO, au'dls, aiidi'vi, audi're, audien'dl, audien'dd.
audien'dum, audi'tum, audi'tu, au'diens, audltu'rus, to hear,
FIRST CONJUGATION. A'mo, / love.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
1. Present Tense. I do love or am loving.
( A'-mO, / love,
Singular. < a' -mas, thou lovest,
t a'-mat, he loves,
ra-ma'miis, we love,
Plural. -] a-ma'tis, ye love,
( a'-mant, they love.
2. Preterimperfect Tense. 7 icas loving Q.T did
( A-ma'bam, / did love,
Singular. < a-ma'bas, thou didst love,
( a-ma'bat, Jte did love,
C a-maba'mus, we did love,
Plural. < a-maba'tis, ye did love,
{ a-ma'bant, they did love.
3. Preterperfect Tense./ I6vcd or have Idved.
C Ama'-vi, / loved,
Singular. < ama-vis'tl, thou lovedst^
( auia'-vit, he loved.
( 45)
f ama'-vimus, we loved,,
n li'tral. < ama-vis'tis, ye loved,
(ama-ve'runt vel -vere, they loved.
4. Prcterpluperfect Tense. / had loved.
C Ama'-veram, I had loved,
singular. -? ama'-veras, thou hadst loved^
( ama'-verat, he had loved,
5ama-vera'mu3, we had loved,
. .. ama-vera'tis, yc had loved,
^ama'verant, they had I6ved
5. Future Tense. I shall or will love.
{A-ma'b5, I shall love,
a-ma' bis, thou wilt love,
a-ma'bifc, he will love,
T a-ma bimus, we shall love>
Plural. 3 a-ma'bitis, ye will love,
{ a-ma'bunt, they will love.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. No first Person.
, 7 J A' -ma, a-ma't5, love thou,
* m I a'-met, a-ma'to, let him or her love,
ra-me'mus, let us love,
Plural. 1 a-ma'te, a-mato'te, love ye,
^a'-ment, a-man't6, let them,
let them love.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
1. Present Tense. may, can, should, would.
( A'-mem. / may love,
Singular. < a -mes, thou mayest love>
{ a'-met, he may love,
i a-me'nrms, we may love,
Plural. < a-me'tis, ye may love,
( a'-ment, they may love.
2. Preterim perfect Tense. might, could.
C A-ma'rem, / might love,
Singular. -J a-ma'res, tJtou miyhtest love,
a-ma'ret, he might love.
C Ama'-Terim,
Singular. < ama'-veris,
(^ ama'-verit,
f a-mare'mus, we might love,
Plural. < a-mare'tis, ye might love,
^ a-ma'rent, they might love.
3. Preterperfect Tense. may have, should have.
I may have loved,
thou mdyest have loved,
he may have loved,
C Ama-ve'rimus, we may have loved,
Plural. < ama-ve'ritis, ye may have loved,
ama'-verint, they may have loved.
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. might have, would have.
C Ama-vis'sem, / might have loved,
Singular. -J ama-vis'ses, thou migfitest have loved,
(^ ama-vis'set, he might have loved,
( ama-v!sse'mus, we might have loved,
Plural. < ama-visse'tis, ye might have loved,
(_ ama-vis'sent, they might have loved.
5. Future Tense. shall or will have.
i Ama'-vero, / shall have loved,
Singular. < ama'-veris, thou wilt have loved,
( ania'-verit, he will have loved,
C ama-veri'mus, we shall have loved,
Plural. < ama-veritis, ye will have loved,
(^ ama'-verint, they will have loved.
The Subjunctive Mood is declined like the Potential.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present and Preterimperfect Tense.
A-ma're, to love.
Preterperfect and Preterpluperfect Tense.
Ama-vis'se, to have loved.
Future Tense.
Ama-tu'rum eYse. to le alout to lone.
( 47 )
GERUNDS.
A-man'dl, of loving,
a-man'do, in loving,
a-man'dum, loving.
SUPINES.
Ama'-tum, to love. Ama'-tu, to le loved.
PARTICIPLES.
Present, A-mans, loving.
Future, Ama-tu-rus, about to love.
Observation. In VERBS several tenses are formed of the
preterperfect tense of the Indicative Mood : as, of ama'-vt,
are fo'rmed :
1 . The pluperfect of the same mood, .... ama-veram,
2. The perfect of the potential mood, .... amff-t^rim^
3. The pluperfect of the same mood, .... amd-vis'sein?
4. The future tense of the same mood, . . . amff-vcrd,
5. The preterite of the infinitive mood, . .
SECOND CONJUGATION. Mo'neO, I advise.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
1. Present Tense. I do advise or am advising.
f M5'-ne6, / advise,
Singular. <^ mo -nes, thou advisest,
Lmo'-net, he or she advises,
rmo-ne'mus, we advise,
Plural. J mo-ne'tis, ye advise,
Lmo'-nent, they advise.
2. Preterimperfect Tense. / did advise or icas advising.
r Mo-ne'bam, / did advise,
Singular. 1 m5-ne'bas, thou didst advise,
L mo-ne'bat, he did ddvise,
80 From -6 of the present, come -lam, -15, -dm, -cm and -ns : from -urn
are derived -Z and -rus: from -r&, comes -rem, and -a, -e, -c, or -I of the
second person singular of the imperative. The gerund takes its rise
from -us.
( 48 )
f mo-neba'mus, ice did advise,
Plural. < mo-neba'tis, ye did advise,
|_mo-ne'bant, tliey did advise.
3. Preterperfect Tense./ advised or have adciscd,
r Mo'nii-i, / advised,
Singular. J monu-istl, thou advisedst,
Lmo'nu-it, lie advised,
C monu'-imus. ice advised,
Plural. < nionu-is'tis, ye advised*
monu-e'runt vel -e're, they advised.
4. Preterpliiperfect Tense. / had advised.
f Monu'-eram, 1 had advised,
Singular. J raonu'-eras, thou hadst advised,
Lmrnu'-erat, he had advised,
rmonu-era'mus, we had advised.
Plural. < monu-era'tis, ye had advised,
Lmonu'-erant, they had advised.
5. Future Tense. / shall or will advise.
/"Mo-ne'bo, I shall advise.
Singular. 1 mo-ne'bis, thou wilt advise,
i.mo-ne'bit, he will advise,
( mo-ne'bimiis, we shall advise,
Plural. < m5-ne'bitis, ye will advise,
Lmo-ne'bunt, they will advise.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. -No first Person.
c , 7 c Mo'-ne, mo-ne't5, advise thou,
angular. | m5 /_ n g at> m5 . n e'to, let him advise,
rmo-nea'miis, let us advise,
Plural. J mo-ne'te, mo-neto'te, advise ye,
Lmo'-neant, mo-nen't6, let them advise.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
1. Present Tense. may, can, should, would.
{Mo'-neam, 7 may advise,
mo'-neas, thou mdyest advise,
mo'-neat, he may advise,
(49 )
t mo-nea'mus, tee mat/ advise,
Plural. -v ino-nea'tTs, ye may advise,
[ mo'-neant, they may advise.
2. Preterimperfect Tense. might, could.
i Mo-ne'rem, / might advise,
Singular. < mo-ne'res, thou mightest advise,
( mo-ne'ret, lie might advise,
( mo-nere'mus, we mi^ht advise,
Plural. < mo-nere'tis, ye might advise,
t mo-ne'rent, they might advise,
3. Preterperfect Tense. may have, should hare.
( Monu'-erlm, / may have advised.
Singular. -{ monii'-eris, thonmdyesthaveadnsfd^
( monu'-erit, he may have advised,
5inonu-fc'rimus, we may have advised.
* .... . v monu'-e'ritis, ye may have advised,
[ monu'-ermt, they may have advised,
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. might or could have.
f Monu-is'sem, / might have advised,
Singular. < monu-is'ses, thou m'ightest have adviscdy
[ monu-is'set, he might have advised,
C monu-Isse'mus, we might have advised t
Plural. < monu-isse'tis, ye might have advised,
( monu-Is'sent, 'they might have advised*
5. Future Tense. shall or trill have.
C M5nu'-er5, I shall have advised,
Singular. < monu'-ens, thou wilt have adviscdy
t monu'-erit, ho it-ill have advised,
i monu-eri'mus, we shall have advised t
Plural. < monu-eri'tis, ye will have advised^
( monu'-erint, they will have advised.
The Subjunctive Mood is declined like the Potential.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present and Preterimperfect Tense.
Mo-nc're, to advise.
(50 )
Preterperfect and Preterpluperfect Tense.
Monu-is'se, to have advised.
Future Tense.
Moni-tu'rum es'se, to be about to advise.
GERUNDS.
Mo-nen'di, of advising,
ino-nen'do, i?i advising,
mo-nen'dum, advising.
SUPINES.
Mo'ui-tiim, to advise. Mom-tu, to be advised.
PARTICIPLES.
Present, Mo'-nens, advising.
Future, Moui-tu'rus, about to advise.
THIRD CONJUGATION. He go, I rule.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
1. Present Tense. / do rule or am ruling.
< Re'-go, / rule,
Singular. < re'-gis, thou rulest,
(. re'-git, he rules,
C re'-gimus, we rule,
Plural. < re'-gitis, ye rule,
{ re'-gunt, they rule.
2. Preterimperfect Tense. / was ruling or did rule.
C Re-ge'bam, / was ruling.
Singular. -| re-ge'bas, thou wast ruling,
(re-ge'bat, he was ruling,
( re-geba'mus, we were ruling,
Plural -J re-geba'tis, ye were ruling,
(re-ge'bant, they were ruling.
3. Preterperfect Tense. 7 ruled or have ruled.
( Rex'-I, / ruled,
Singular. 3 rex-Is'ti, thou ruledst.
( rex'-it, he ruled.
( 51 )
i rex'- mi us, we ruled,
Plural. < rex-is'tis, yc rtiled,
( rex-e'runt vel -e're, they ruled.
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. / had ruled.
( Rex'-eram, / had ruled,
Singular. < rex'- eras, thou hadst ruled,
(rex'erat, he had ruled,
i rex-era'mus, roe had ruled,
Plural. < rex-era'tis, ye had ruled,
rex'-erant, they had ruled.
5. Future Tense. / shall or will rule.
C Re'-gam, I shall rule,
Singular. < re'-ges, thou wilt rule,
t re'-get, lie will rule,
( re-ge'mus, we shall rule,
Ph'iral. -< re-ge'tis, ye will rule,
{ re'-gent, they will rule.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. No first Person.
f*, j ( Re'-ge, re'-gito, rule thou,
Singular. < -. s . . _Y*R j at j,: m ,
C re-ga'mus, let us rule,
Plural. < re'-gite, re-gito'te, rule ye,
( re -garit, re-gun'to, let them rule-
POTENTIAL MOOD.
1. Present Tense. may, can, should, would.
C Re'-gam, / may rule,
Singular. ? re'-gas, thou mdyest rule.
( re-gat, he may rule,
C re-ga'mus, we may rule,
Plural. 1 re-ga'tis, ye may rule,
[ re'-gant, they mny rule,
2. Preterimperfect Tense. might, could.
f Re'-gerem, / might rule,
Singular. -? re'-geres, thou mtghtest rule,
(re -geret, he might rule,
J) 2
(52 )
f rS-gere'miis, we might rule,
Plural. < re-gere'tis, ye might rule,
t re'-gerent, they might rule.
3. Preterperfect Tense. may have> should have.
C Rex'-erlm, / may have n'tled,
S'/noular. 1 rex'-eris, thou mdyest hare ruled,
^rex'-erit, he may have ruled,
C rex-e'rimiis, we may have ruled,
Plural. < rex-e'ritis, ye may have ruled,
(. rex'-ermt, they may have ruled.
4. Preterpliiperfect Tense. might have, would have.
f Rex-Is'sem, I might have wiled,
Singular.^ rex-is'ses, thou mightest have ruled,
(^ rex-is'set, he might have rilled,
( rex-isse'mus, we might have ruled,
Plural, -c rex-isse'tis, ye might have ruled,
( rex-is'sent, they might have ruled.
5. Future Tense. shall or tcill have.
f Kex r -er5, / shall have Tided,
Singular. < rex'-eris, thou wilt have ruled,
( rex'-erit, he will have ruled,
f rex-eri'mus, we shall have ruled,
Plural. < rex -eri'tis, ye will have ruled,
( rex'-ermt, they will have ruled.
The Subjunctive Mood is declined like the Potential.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present and Preterimperfect Tense.
Re'-gere*, to rule.
Preterperfect and Preterpliiperfect Tense.
Rex-is'se, to have ruled.
Future Tense.
Xfcec-tu'rum es'se, to be about to rule.
( 53 )
GERUNDS.
Re-gen'di, of ruling,
re-gen'd5, in riding,
re-gen'dum, ruling.
SUPINES.
Rec'-tum, to rule. Rec'-tu, to be rit
PARTICIPLES.
Present) Re'-gens, ruling,
Future, Rec-tu'rii?, about to rule,
FOURTH CONJUGATION. Au'dio, I hear.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
1. Present Tense. I do hear or am hearing.
i Au'-d!6, / hear,
Singular. < aii'-dls, thou hedrest^
t au'-dit, he hears,
f au-di'mus, we hear,
Plural. < au-di'tis, ye hear,
(^au'-dmnt, they hear.
2. Preterimperfect Tense. / was hearing or did hear.
( Au-die'bam, / did hear,
Singular. <. au-die'bas, thou didst hear,
[ au-die'bat, he did hear,
( au-dieba'mus, tve did hear,
Plural. -' au-dieba'tis, ye did hear,
[ au-die'bant, they did hear.
3. Preterperfeet Tense. / heard or have heard.
( Audi'- vi, 7 heard,
Singular. 1 audi-vis'ti, thou hedrdesi,
( audi'-vit, he heard,
C audi'-viinus, we heard,
Plural. < audi-vis'tis, ye heard,
(^audi-ve'runt vcl -ve're, they heard.
( 54)
4. Preterpluperfect Tense, / had heard.
C Audi'-\eram, / had heard.
Singular. < audi'-veras, thou hadst heard,
I audi'-verat, he had hea*d,
5audl-vera'miis, we had heard,
.. , audi-vera'tis, ye had heard,
(audi'-verant, they had heard.
5. Future Tense. / shall or will hear.
( Au'-diam, I shall hear,
Singular. < au'-dies, thou wilt hear,
( au'-diet, he will hear,
C au-die'mus, we shall hear,
Plural. < au-die'tis, ye will hear,
[ au'-dient, they will hear.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. No first Person.
~, j f Au'-cli, au-di'to, hear thou,
ar ' jau'-dmt, au-di'to, let him hear,
rau-dia'mus, let us hear,
Plural. -? au-dl'te, au-dito'te, hear ye,
^au'-dlant, au-diun'to, let them hear.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
Present Tense. may, can, should, would.
5Afi'-diam, I may hear,
au'-dia
~.,i s *,-, . x au'-dias, thou mdyest hear,
[ au'-diat, he may hear,
{ au-dia'mus, ice may hear,
Plural. < au-dia'tis, ye may hear,
(^ au'-diant, they may hear.
2. Preterim perfect Tense. might, could.
( Au-di'rem, / might hear,
Singular. < au-di'res, thou mightest hear,
( au-di'ret, he might hear,
fau-dire'mus, ive might hear,
Plural. - afi-dire'tis, ye might hear,
they might hear.
(55 )
3. Preterperfect Tense may have, should have.
f Audi'-verim, I may have heard,
Singular. < audi'-veris, thou mnyest have heard,
^ audi'-verit, he may have heard,
( audi-ve'rimus, we may have heard,
Plural. < audi-ve'ritis, ye may have heard,
t audi'-vermt, they may have heard.
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. might or would have.
C Audi-vis'sem, / might have heard,
Singular. < audi-vis'ses, thou mlghtest have hearr
[ audl-vls'set, he might have heard,
f audl-visse'mus, we might have heard^
Plural. < audi-visse'tis, ye might have heard,
( audi-Yis'sent, they might have heard,
5. Future Tense. shall or will have.
f Audi'-verO, / shall have heard,
Singular. J audi'-veris, thou wilt have heard,
t audi'-verit, he will have heard,
r audi-veri'mus, we shall have heard,
Plural. } aiidi-verl'tis, ye will have heard,
Laudi'-vermt, they will have heard.
The Subjunctive Mood is declined like the Potential.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present and Preterimperfect Tense.
Au-di're, to hear.
Preterperfect and Preterpluperfect Tense.
Audl-vis'se, to have heard.
Future Tense.
Audl-tu'riim es'se, to le about to hear.
GERUNDS.
Au-dien'di, of hearing,
au-dlen'dd, in hearing,
au-dien'dlim, hearing.
( 56)
SUPINES.
Audi'- turn, to hear. Audi'-tu, to be heard.
PARTICIPLES.
Present, AiT-diens, hearing,
Future, Audl-tu'rus, about to hear.
DECLENSION OF VERBS PASSIVE.
VERBS PASSIVE in -dr are thus declined :
1. A'mor, ama'ris vel ama're, ama'tus sum vel fu'I, aina'rl,
Sma'tiis, aman'dus, to be loved.
'2. Mo'neor, mone'ris vel mone're, rno'nitus sum vel ful,
mone'ri, nio'mtus, monen'dus, to be advised.
3. Re'gor, re'geris vel re'gere, rec'tus sum vel fu'I, re'gl,
rec'tus, regen'dus, to be ruled.
4. Au'dTor, audi'ris vel audi're, audi'tus sum vel fu'I, audi'r:,
audi'tus, audien'dus, to be heard.
FIRST CONJUGATION.-Arnor, lam teved.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
1. Present Tense. am.
C A'-mor, T am loved,
Singular. < a-ma'ris vel a-ma're, thou art loved,
{ a-ma'tur, he is loved,
I a-ma'mur, ice are loved,
Plural. < a-ma'mini, ye are loved,
( a-man'tur, they are loved.
2. Preterimperfect Tense. was.
f a-ma'bar, / teas loved,
Singular. < a-maba'ris vel a-maba're, thou icast loved,
( a-maba'tur, lie was loved,
f a-maba'mur, ice were loved,
Plural. < a-maba'minl, ye were loved,
(. a-maban'tur, they were loved.
Singulai
Plural.
(57)
3. Preterperfect Tense. sum vel f u'l, have been.
5 Ama'-tus sum, / have been loved,
ama'-tus es, thou hast been loved,
[ ama'-tus est, he has been loved,
( ama'-ti su'mus, we have been loved,
- ama'-ti es'tis, ye have been loved,
(ama'-ti sunt, they have been loved.
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. e'ram vel fu'eram, had been.
f Ama'-tus e'ram, / had been loved,
Singular. < ama'-tus eras, thou hadst been loved,
[ ama'-tus e'rat, he had been loved,
T ama'-ti era'mus, we had been loved*
< ama'-ti era'tis, ye had been loved,
(^ama'-ti e'rant, they had been loved.
5. Future Tense. shall or will be.
Plural.
Singular
C A-ma'bor,
'
a-ma'berisve^a-ma'bere,
a-ma'bitur,
L a-ma'bimur,
Plural. < a-mabi'mini,
t a-mabun'tur,
I shall be loved,
thou wilt be loved,
he will be loved,
zee shall be loved,
ye icill be loved,
they will be loved.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. No first Person.
7
Singular
Plural.
A-ma're, ama'tor,
ra-me'mur,
J a-ma'minl, a-ma'mmc
(^a-men'tur, a-man'tor,
be thou loved,
let him be loved,
let us be loved,
be ye loved,
let them be loced.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
1. Present Tense. may, can, should, would be.
( A'-mer,
Singular. < a-me'ris vel a-me're,
( a-me'tur,
Plural.
-ine'mur,
nie'mini,
meii'tur,
I may
thou mdyest
he may
we may
ye may
they may
D3
( 58 )
2. Preterimperfect Tense. might or could be.
fA-ma'rer, I might
Singular. 1 a-mare'ris vcl a-mare're, thou mightest
^a-mare'tur, he might
( a-mare'miir, we might
Plural. <. a-mare'minl, ye might
( a-maren'tur, they might
3. Preterpe'rfect Tense. sim vcl f u'erlm, may or should have
leen.
C Ama'-tiis sim, / may
Singular. \ ama'-tus sis, thou mayest
( ama'-tus sit, he may
( ama'-t! si'mus, we may
Plural. ? ama'-ti si'tis, ye may
ama'-ti sint, they may
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. es'sem vel f uis'sem, might or
would have leen.
C Ama'-tus es'sem, / might -\ |
Singular. < ama'-tus e/ses, thou mightest
{ ama'-tus es'set, he might
( ama'-ti esse'mus, we might
Plural. < am '-ti esse'tis, ye might
f anm'-tl es'sent, they might
5. Future Tense. e'ro vel fu'^rO, shall or will have leen.
( Ama'tiis e'ro, Is/tail -v =
Singular. < ama' tus e'ris, thou wilt
ania tus e'rit, he will
i rmia-ti e'rimiis, we shall
Plural. \ ama-tT e ritis, ye will
( ania - ti e'r iint, they will
Tli3 Subji'mctive jMood is declined like the Potential.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present and Preterimperfect Tense.
A-ma'ri, to be loved.
Preteirerfect and Preterpluperfect Tense.
Ama-tilm es'ue vel fuis'se, to have leen Idved.
( 59 )
Future Tense.
Ama'-tum i'ri, to le about to le loved.
PARTICIPLES.
Past, A-ma'tus, loved or having leen loved.
Future, A-mau'dus, that is to le or that must le loved.
SECOND CONJUGATION. Mo'neor, Iain advised.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
1. Present Tense. am.
f Mo'-neor, / am advised,
Singular. < mo-ne'ris vel mo-ne're, thou art advised,
[ mo-ne'tur, he is advised,
f mo-ne'mur, we are advised,
Plural. \ mo-ne'mini, ye are advised,
t mo-nen'tur, they are advised.
2. Preterimperfect Tense. was.
( Mo-ne'bar, / icas advised,
Singular. < m5-neba'ris vel mo-neba're, thou least advised,
[ mo-neba'tur, he was advised,
rmo-neba'mur, we were advised,
Plural. < mo-neba'mini, ye were advised,
(^mo-neban'tur, they were advised.
3. Preterperfect Tense. sura vel fu'i, have leen.
( Mo'ni-tus sum, / have
Singular. < mo'm-tus es, thou hast
(. mo'ni-tus est, he has
C mo'ni-ti su'mus, ice have
Plural. < mo'ni- ti es'tis, ye have
( mo nl-tl sunt, they have
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. g'ram vel f u'eram, had leen.
r Mo'm-tus e'ram, 7 had -\ ^
Singular. 1 mo'ni-tus e'ras, thou hadst
Lmo'ni-tus e'rat, he had
fmo'ni-ti e'ra'mus, ice had,
Plural. 4 moni-ti gratis, ye had,
(mcrni-ti t'rant, they had,
( 60)
5. Future Tense. shall or will be.
fMo-ne'bor, I shall
Singular. < mo-ne'beris rcl -ne'bere, thou wilt
(^ mo-ne'bitur, he will
f fno-ne'bimur, we shall
Plural. < mo-nebi'mini, ye will
^mo-nebuii'tur, they will
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. No first Person.
^, , ^ J Mo-ne're, mo-ne'tor, be thou
\ mo- nea'tiir, mo-ne'tor, let him Is
( mo-nea'mur, let us be
Plural. < mo-ne'mmi,mo-ne'minor, be ye
^m5-nean'tiir, mo-nen'tor, let them be
POTENTIAL MOOD.
1. Present Tense. may, can, should) would be.
1 may
mo-nea're, thou mdyest
lie may
( Mo -near,
Singular. -J mo-nea'ris vel
^mo-nea'tiir,
y S-
f mo-nea miir, wo may
Plural. - mo-nea'minT, ye may
( mo-nean'tur, they may
2. Preterim perfect Tense. might or could be.
C Mo-ne'rer, I might
Singular. ^ mo-ne're'ris reZnere're, thou mightest
^ ino-nere'tur, he might
C mo-nere'milr, we might
Plural. -N mo-nere'minl, ye might
( mo-neren'tur, they might
3. Preterperfect Tense. sim vcl fu'erlm, may or should have
been
( Mo'ni-tus sim, / may
Singular. 1 mom-tus sis, thou mdyest
(^mo'ni-tus sit, he may
( mo'ni-ti si'mus, ire may
Plural. < mo'ni-ti sitis, ye may
( mo'ni-ti sint, they may J
( Gl )
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. es'sem vel fuis'sem, might or
would have been.
( Mo'ni-tus es'sem, / might
Singular. < mo'ni-tus es'ses, thou mightest
m5'm-tus es'set, he might
mo'ni-ti esse'mus, ice might
1:
Plural. < mo'ni-ti esse'tis, ye might
( mo'ni-ti es'sent, they might
5. Future Tense. e'rO vel f u'erO, shall or will have been.
f Mo'ni-tus ero, I shall
Singular. < mo'ni-tus e'ris, thou wilt
( m5'ni-tus e'rit, he will
( mo'ni-ti e'rimus, we shall
g a
Plural. < mo'ni-ti e'ritis, ye will
{ mo'ni-ti e'ruut, they will
The Subjunctive Mood is declined like the Potential.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present and Preterimperfeet Tense.
Mo-ne'ri, to be advised.
Preterperfect and Preterpluperfect Tense.
MS'ni-tum. es'se vel f uis'se, to have been advised.
Future Tense.
Mo'ni-tum 1'ri, to be about to be advised.
PARTICIPLES.
Present, Mo'ni-tus, advised or having been advised.
Future, Mo-nen'dus, that is to be or that must be advised*
THIRD CONJUGATION. Re'gor, lam ruled.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
1. Present Tense. am.
( Re'-gor, / am ruled,
Singular. } re'-geris vel re'-gere, thou art rided^
(re'-gitur, he is ruled,
_ we are ruled,
Plural. ! re-gi'mini, ye are ruled,
they are ruled.
( 62 )
2. Preterimperfect Tense. was.
( Re-ge'bar, / ivas
Singular. < re-geba'ris r^re-geba're, thou wast
(. re-geba'tilr, he was
( re-geba'mur, rve were
Plural. < re-geba'mmi, ye were
(^ re-geban'tiir, they ivere
3. Preterperfect Tense. sum vel fu'I, have been.
( Rec'-tus sum, 1 have
Singular.-^ rec'-tus es, thou hast
(rec'-tus est, he has
f rec'-ti su'mus, we have
Plural. < rec'-ti es'tis, ye have
( rec'-ti siint, they have
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. e'ram vel fii'eram, had been.
( Rec'-tus e'ram, / had
Singular. < rec'-tus e'ras, thou hadst
( rec'-tus e rat, he had
C rec'-ti era'mus, we had
Plural. -J rec'-ti era'tis, ye had
( rec'-ti e'rant, they had
5. Future Tense. shall or will be.
C Re" -gar, I shall
Singular. < re-ge'ris vel re-ge're, 81 thou wilt
[ re-ge'tur, he will
( re-ge'milr, we shal
Plural. < re-ge'mmi, ye will
( re-gen' tur, they wit
81 Here we have ' e' long before -re and -ris, in the third conjugation.
In the same tense of the second conjugation we have 2 short before -rS
and -ris. This I mention with allusion to an alteration which I have
made in the E'ton text, respecting 'e' before -rt and -ns, page 44,
abdve. Of the dther conjugations it is not necessary here to speak.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. No first Person.
le'-gere, re'-gitor, le thou
\ re~ga'tur, re'-gitor, let him le
re-ga'mur, let us le
Plural, -{ re-gi'mim, re-gi' minor, le ye
-gau'tur, re-gun'tor, let them le
POTENTIAL MOOD.
1. Present Tense. may, can, should, would le.
Ii'-gar, / may le
re-ga' ris vel re-ga're, > thou mdyest le
re -ga'tur, he may le
( re-ga'mur, ice may le
Plural. K re-ga'mml, ye may le
( re-gan'tur, they may be
2. Preterim perfect Tense. might or could le.
f Re'-gerer, / might
Singular. < re-gere ris vel re-gere're, thou mightest
( re-gere" tur, he might
( re-gere'mur, we might ( ^
Plural. < re-gere' mini, ye might
\ (
( rS -|
-] re-
(.re-<
Pr
{
they might
3. Preterperfect Tense. sim vel f u'er!m, may or should have lean.
C Rec'-tus slm, I may -\ ^
Singular. J rec'-tus sis, thou mdyest
[ rec'-tus sit, he may
( rec'-ti si'miis, we may
Plural. < rec'-ti si'tis, ye may
( rec'-ti sint, they may
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. es'sem vel fuis'sem, might or
would have leen.
5 Rec'-tus es'sem, I might
^...y^^, . , rec'-tus es'ses, thou mightest
( rec'-tus es'set, he might
( rec'-ti esse'mus, we miyht
Plural. -< rec'-ti esse'tis, ye might
( rec-ti es'sent, they might
)
5. Future Tense. e'rO vcl ffi'erO, shall or will have leen.
C Rec'-tus e'rO, / shall
Singular ? rec'-tus e'ris, thou u ilt
f rec'-tus 3 rit, he will
5rec'-ti e'rimus, we shall
. rec'-ti e'ritis, ye will
(rec'-ti e'runt, they
The Subjunctive Mood is declined like the Potential.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present and Preterimperfect Tense.
Re'-gi, to le riiled,
Preterperfect and Preterpluperfect Tense.
Rec'-tum es'se vcl fuis'se, to have leen ruled.
Future Tense.
Rec'-tum I'rl, to le about to le ruled.
PARTICIPLES.
Past, Rec'-tus, ruled or having leen ruled.
Future, Re-gen'dus, that is to le or that must le
FOURTH CONJUGATION. Au'dior, lam heard.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
1. Present Tense. am.
5Au -dlor, 7 am
~,.. y au-di'ris vel au-di're, thou art
'i'tur, he is
au-di'mur we are
Plural. ^ au-di'mini, ye are
au-diun'tur, they are
2. Preterimperfect Tense. was.
f Aii -die'bar, / was
Singular. < au-dieba'iisr6'/au-diebare,MoM wast
(^au-dieba'tur, he was
i au-dieba'mur, we were
Plural. < aii-diebamini, ye were
(.au-dTeban'tur, they ice re
.r
(
<
I
( 65 )
3. Preterperfect Tense. sum vel fu'i, have leen.
f Audi'-tus sum, I have
Singular. < audi'-tus es, thou hast
[ audi'tus est, he has
f audi'-ti su'mus, we have
Plural. \ audi'-ti es'tis, ye have
t audi'ti sunt, they have
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. e'ram vel fu'eram, had leen.
C Audi'-tus e'ram, / had
Singular. \ audi'-tus e'ras, thou hadst
( audi'-tus e'rat, he had
f audi'-ti eramus, we had
Plural. < audi'-ti era'tis, ye had
(^ audi'-ti e'rant, they had
5. Future Tense. shall or will le.
f Au'-diar, / shall
Singular. < au-die'ris vel au-die're, thou wilt
(_ au-die'tur, he will
C au-die'mur, we shall
< au-die'mim, ye will
t au-dien'tur, they will
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. No first Person.
f Au-di're, au-di'tor, le thou
' \ au-dia'tur, au-di'tor, let him le
C au-dia'mur, let us le
Plural. -' au-di'mini, au-di'minor, le ye
( au-dlan'tiir, au-diiiu'tor, let them le
POTENTIAL MOOD.
1. Present Tense. my, can., should, woull le.
C Au'-diar, / may
Singular. ? au-dia-ris vel au-dia're, thou mdyest
^ au-dTa'tur, he may
C au-drn'mur, ive may
Plural. < .'ifi-dia'mTni, ye may
^ au-dian'tur, they may
'
2. Preterimperfect Tense. might or could be.
C Au-di'rer, / might
Singular. < au-dire'ris vel au-dire're, thou mightest
( au-dire'tur, he might
C au-dlre'mur, we might
Plural. -| au-dire'mini, ye might
{ au-diren'tur, they might
3. Preterperfect Tense. sim vel fu'erlm, may or should
have been.
t Au-di'tiis sim, / may
Singular. \ au-di'tus sis, thou mdyest
( au-di'tiis sit, he may
faudi'-ti si'mus, we may
Plural. J audi'-ti si'tis, ye may
^audi'-ti sint, they may
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. es*sem vel fuis'sera, might or
icould have been.
f Audi'-tus es'sem, J might
Singular. < audi'-tiis es'ses, thou m'rghtest
[ audi'-tus es'set, he might
( audi'-ti esse'mus, we might
Plural. < audi'-ti esse'tis, ye might
[ audi'-ti es'sent, they might
5. Future Tense. e'ro vul f u'ero, shall or will have been.
C Audi'-tus e'rO, I shall
Singular. N audi'-tus e'ris, thou wilt
audi'-tus e'rit, he will
faudi'-ti e'rimus, we shall
Plural. -] audi'-ti e'ritis, ye will
faudi'-ti e'runt, they will
The Subjunctive Mood is declined like the Potential.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present and Preterimperfect Tense.
Au-di'rT, to be heard.
Preterperfect and Preterpluperfect Tense.
Afidl-tum es'se vel fuis'se, to have been heard.
( C7 )
Future Tense.
Audrtum i'ri, to be about to be heard.
PARTICIPLES.
Past, Audi'-tus, heard or having been heard,
Future, Au-dien'dus, that is to be, or that must be heard?*
DECLENSION OF YERBS IRREGULAR.
CER'TAIN verbs deviate from the General Rule, and arc
formed in the manner following :
1. Pos'sum, po'tes, po'tiii, pos'se, po'tens, to be cible.
2. Yo'15, vis, vo'lui, vel'le, volen'di, volen'do, volen'dum,
vo'lens, to be willing.
3. N5'15, non'vis, n5'lui, nol'le,, nolen'di, nolen'do, nolen'dum,
no'lens, to be unwilling.
4. Ma'15, ma' vis, ma'liii, mal'le, malen'di, malen'ds, ma-
len'dum, ma'lens, to be more willing or to have rather.
88 A Verb Deponent (as we read in the text, page 38, abdve) is declined
like a Verb Passive of the same conjugation as itself, but with Gerunds
and Supines : thus, mo'deror, mo'dera'ris, (vel modera're), modera'tus
sum (vel f ui), modera'ri, moderan'di, moderan'do, moderan'dum, mo-
dera'tiim, modera'tu, mo'deranSjmoderatu'rus, moderu'tus, moderan'dus,
to moderate or to mdnaye; polli'ceor, pOllice'ris, (vel pollice're), pollicitiis
sum (vel fii'i), pollicg'rl, pollicen'di, pollicen'do, pollicgn'dum, polli'-
citQm, polli'cltu, po'llicens, pollicitu'riis, polli'cTtus, pollicen'dus, to
promise; lo'quor, lo'queris (vel lo'quere), locu'tus sum (vel f u'l), lo'qul.
loquen'di, loquen'do, loquen'diim, locu'tum, locu'tu, lo'quens, locutu'-
rus, locu'tus, loquen'dus, to speak; lar'gior, lurgl'rTs, (vel largi're),
largi'tus sum (vel fu'l), largl'ri, largien'dl, largien'do, largiendum,
largl'tum, largi'tQ lar'giens, largitu'rus, largi'tus, larglen'dns, to bestow
freely. And here it may be remarked, that the participle in -us of
Deponent Vei'bs has sdmetimes a passive, though more frequently (and
pro*perly) an active signification : for example, in Virgil we find Obll'tS,
mi'hl carmina, songs forgotten by me. Ec'logue IX. 53.
Lastly, in the tenses of passive and of depdnent verbs, declined by
help of the verb sum, the participle must always be .of the same gender
and number as the nominative case to the verb : for, although, for the
.sake of brevity, we say, ama'tus sum, yet do we mean, ama'tus, ama'tu,
umd'tum siim vel fu'l, according as the nominative is masculine, femi-
nine, or neuter : and, in the plural number, ama'ti, ama't*,
su'mus vel f ulmus, we have been loved.
(68 )
5. 'd5, eVlis (vel 5s), e'dl, e"dere (t/<?J es'se), eden'df,
eden'do, eden'dum, e'sum, e'su, e'dens, esu'rus, to cat.
G. Fe'rO, fers, tu'H, fer're, feren'di, fereii'do, ferendum,
la'tum, la'tu, fe'rens, latii'rus, to bear or suffer.
7. Fi'o, fis, fac'tus sum xel fill, fi'eri, fac'tus, facien'dus,
to be made or done*
S. Fe'ror, f er'ris vel f er're, la'tus sum vcl fu'i, f er'ri, la'tus,
f eren'dus, to be borne or suffered.
POSSUM, / am able.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
1. Present Tense. / am able.
( Pos'sum, 83 / am
Singular. - po'tes, thou art
( po'test, he is
f pos'siimus, we are
Plural. < potes'tis, ye are
* pos'sunt, they are
2. Preterimperfect Tense. / was able.
C Po'teram / was
Singular. < po'teras, thou icast
[ po'terat, he was
C potera'mus, we were
Plural. < poter^'tis, ye were
' po'terant, they were
ss Pos'sum is a compound of the adjective po'tis, able, with sum, I am,
contracted into one word ; the letters t and i being dropped. The (Sther
compounds of sum, are :
tib'sum, / am absent or away, \ ob'sura, / am against or / hurt,
ad'sum, / am present or at hand,
de'siim, / am wanting or I fail,
lu'sum, / am in or within,
Inter'surn, / am in the midst of,
pras'sum, / am over or chief,
pro'siira, / benefit or profit,
sub'sum, / am under or below,
super'sum, / abound or / remain.
These are, in all their tenses, declined like the verb es'se, to be, except
pro'siim, / do good to or / benefit, which always takes the letter d betwixt
pro and the tenses of ts'se, beginning with a vowel : as, pro'des, thou
profitest or availest, pro'dest, he avails, pro'derara, / availed, prodesse,
to avail. The verb in'stim is said to want the pre'tej^te, and conse-
quently the tenses derived from it.
( 69 )
Preterperfect Tense. I have been able.
f Po'tui,
I have
Singular. < potuis'ti,,
thou hast
( po'tuit,
he has
f potiYimus,
we have
Plural. < potuls'tis,
ye have
( potue'runt vel e're,
they have
4. Preterphiperfect Tense f had been able.
C Potu'eram, / had
Singular. < potu'eras,
thou hadst
potu'erat,
he had
C potuera'mus,
we had
Plural. < potuera'tis,
ye had
^ potu'erant,
they had
5. Future Tense. I shall be able.
rPo'terf), I shall
Singular. \ po'teris, thou ivilt
(^ po'terit, he will
i pote'nmus, ive shall
Plural. J pote'ritis, ye will
( po'terunt, they will
Observe. Pos'siim, in common with vo'lo and ma'lo, is never
iised in the Imperative Mood : and po'tens rarely occurs as
a participle.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
1. Present Tense. may, can, should or would be.
sr
f Pos'sim, / may
Singular. < pos'sis, thou mdyest
(. pos'sit, lie may
f possi'mus, we may
Plural. -| possi'tis, ye may
( pos'smt, they may
2. Preterimperfect Tense. m ight or could be.
i Pos'sem, I might \ ^
Singular. < pos'stis, thou m'jghtest > ^
t pos'set, he might ) -
( 70 )
f posse'mus, we might ~\
Plural. -j pflsse'tis, ye might > ^
( pos'serit, they might J 5*
3. Preterperfect Tense. may or should have lecn.
( Potu'erlm, / may
Singular. N potu'eris, thou mdyest
( potu'erit, he may
( potue'rimiis, we may
Plural. < potue'ritis, ye may
(^ potu'erint, they may
4. Preterpliiperfect Tense. might or would have been.
C Potuis'sem, / might
Singular. < potuls'ses, thou mightest
( potuis'set, he might
C potuisse'mus, ive might
Plural. ! potuisse'tis, ye might
( potuls'sent, they might
5. Future Tense. shall or will have been.
^PotuerO, I shall } |-
Sinaular. < potii'erls, thou wilt
( potu'erit, lie will
rpotueri'mus, we sha
Plural. ^ potueri'tis, ye will
( potu'ermt, they u-ill J ?*
The Subjunctive Mood is declined like the Potential.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present and Preterimperfect Tense.
Pos'se, to le able,
Preterperfect and Preterpluperfect Tense.
Potuis'se, to have been able.
Note. Pos'sum wants the future tense of the Infinitive
Hood : and has no gerunds or supines.
PARTICIPLE.
Present, Po'tens, being able.
As Possum has no supine, it has no future participle,
we shall
)
VOLO, / am willing.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
1. Present Tense. I am willing.
fVo'15, lam '
Singular. -| vis, thou art
(_vult, he is
f "vo'lumus, we are '
Plural. -J vul'tis,
( vo'lunt,
2. Preterimperfect Tense. I was willing.
( Vole'bam, / was
Singular. < vole'bas, thou least
( vole'bat, he was
C voleba'mus, we were
Plural. < voleba'tis, ye were
( vole'bant, they were
3. Preterperfect Tense. / have leen willing.
C Vo'lui, / have
Singular, < voluis'tl, thou hast
[ vo'luit, he has
f volu'imus, we have
Plural. < voluis'tis, ye have
(_ volue'runt vel -e*re, they have
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. I had leen willing.
f Volueram, I had
Singular. < volu'eras, thou hadst
[ volu'erat, he had
t voluera'mus, we had
Plural. \ voluera'tis, ye had
( volii'erant, they had
5. Future Tense. 7 shall or will le icilliny.
rVo'lam, I shall ^| 1
Singular. < vo'les, thou wilt > $:
(volet, he will J '|
(72)
f vole'mus, we shall
Plural. < vole'tis, ye wilt
t vo'lent, they will
Observe. Void has no Imperative Mood.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
1. Present Tense. may, can^ should or would le.
C Ye'lim, / may
Singular. < ve'lls, thou mdyest
( ve'lit, he may
C veli'mus, we may
Plural. < vell'tis, ye may
(ve'lint, they may
2. Preterimperfect Tense. might or could le.
f Yel lem, / might
Singular. < veTles, thou mightest
f. vel'let, he might
{ velle'mus, we might
Plural < velle'tis, ye might
{ vel'lent, they might
S. Preterperfect Tense. may or should have Icen.
( Yolu'erlm, / may ~\ <..,,
Singular. ? volu'eris, thou mdyest
^volu'erit, he may ^ ^
C volue'rimus, we may
Plural. < volue'ritis, ye may
they may
>, a
\ ^*
J*
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. might or would have leen.
C Yoluis'sem, / might ^ 5^
Singular. < voluis'ses, thou mightest
(voluls'set, hemigl't [^
C volulsse'miis, we might
Plural. < voiuisse'tis, ye might
[ voluis sent, they might.
(73 )
5. Future Tense. shall or will have been.
fVolu'erO, I shall
Singular. - volu'eris, thou wilt
( volu'erit, he will
C volueri'mus, we shall
Plural. -? volueri'tis, ye will
( volii'erint, they will
The Subjunctive Mood is declined like the Potential.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present and Preterimperfect Tense.
Vel'le, to be willing.
Preterperfect and Preterpluperfect Tense.
Voluis'se, to have been willing.
Note. Void wants the future tense of the Infinitive Mood,
as it has no supine.
GERUNDS.
Volen'di, of being willing,
volen'dd, in being willing,
volen'dum, being willing,
PARTICIPLE.
Present, Vo'lens, willing or being willing.
As VoW has no supine, it has no future participle.
NOLO, / am unwilling.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
1. Present Tense. I am unwilling.
TNo'lo," lam
Singular, -j non'vis, thou art
^non'vult, lie is
Tno'lumus, we are
Plural. -j nonvul'tis, ye are
{no'lunt, they are
11 This verb is a cdmpound of nOn, not, with the preceding verb vu'io,
/ will.
(74 )
2. Preterimperfect Tense. / icas unwilling.
fNole'bam, I -was
Singular. < nole'bas, ihou wast
[ nole'bat, he was
( noleba'mus, we were
Plural. < noleba'tis, ye were
[ nole'baut, they were
3. Preterperfect Tense. / have been unwilling.
( No'lui, / have
Singular. -J noluis'ti, tJiou hast
' no'luit, he has
fnolu'imus, we have
Plural. < noluis'tis, ye have \ ^.
^nolue'runt vcl -e're, they have )
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. / had leen unwilling.
C Nolu'eraui, / had
Singular. < nolu'eras, thou hadst
" I nolu'erat, he had
("noluera'mus, we had
Plural. J noluera'tis, ye had
( nolu'erant, they had
5. Future Tense. / shall or will le unwilling.
( No'Iam, I shall *\ c^
Singular. J no'les, thou wilt
(nolet, he, will
C nole'mus, we shall \ g
Plural. < nole'tis, ye will \ ^
{^no'lent, theyicill ) '
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. No first or third Person
^, . 1 \ Noll, noli'to, be thou unwilling.
Singular. < ft
Plural < noll'te, nolito'tS, be ye unwilling.
( 75 )
POTENTIAL MOOD.
1 . Present Tense. may, can, should, would be.
( No'lim, / may
Singular. < no'lis, thoumdyest
( no lit, he may
f noli'mus, we may
Plural. -J noli'tis, ye may
t no lint, they may
2. Preterimperfect Tense. might or could l>e*
i Nol'lem, / might
Singular. < nol'les, thou mightest
(^nol'let, he might
f nolle'mus, we might
Plural. < nolle'tis, ye might
' nol'lent, they might
3. Preterperfect Tense. may or should have been
C Nolu'erim, / may
Singular. < nolu'eris, thou mdyest
\ nolu'erit, he may
C noliie'rimus, we may f |
Plural. -? nolue'ritis, ye may
(^nolu'erint, they may ) <*
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. might or would have leen.
i Noluls'sem, I might
Singular. \ noluis'ses, thou mighiest
( noluis'set, he might
Tnoluisse'inus, ice might
Plural. < noluisse'tis, ye might
(^noluis'sent, they might
5. Future Tense. shall or will have leen.
rNolu'erO, I shall
Singular. < nolu'eris, thou wilt
(^ nolu'erit, he will
( nolueri'mus, we shall
Plural. < nolueri'tis, ye will
( nolu'ermt, they will
The Subjunctive Mood is declined like the Potential.
(76)
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present and Preterimperfect Tense.
Nol'le, to be unwilling.
Preterperfect and Preterpluperfect Tense.
Noliiis'se, to have been unwilling.
Note. No Id wants the future tense of the Infinitive Mood,
as it has no supine.
GERUNDS.
Nolen'di, of being- unwilling.
nolen'do, in being unwilling.
nolen'dum, being unwilling.
PARTICIPLE.
Present, No'lens, unwilling or being unwilling.
As No Id has no siipine, it has no future participle.
"M ALO, / am more willing.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
1. Present Tense. I am more willing or I icould have rather-
f Ma'15, 8 * 7 am } 3
Singular. I ma'vls, thou art
t ma'vult, he is
C ma'lumus, we are
Plural. < mavul'tis, ye
are
they are
2. Preterimperfect Tense. 7 was more willing,
( Male'bam, 7 was ^ 3
Singular. - male'bas, thou wast
(male'bat, he was
f maleba'riius, we were ( ^
Plural. < maleba'tis, ye were \ ^
J male'bant, they wert ) *
S 5 This verb is a compound of the Adverb ma'gis, more, with the simple
irregular verb, volo, / will or am willing.
( 77 )
3. Preterperfect Tense. / havi been more willing.
C Ma'lui, / have
Singular. < maluis'ti, thou hast
(_ ma'luit, he has
C malu'imus, we have
Plural. \ maluis'tis, ye have
( malue'runt vel -e'rg, they have
4. Preterpliiperfect Tense. / had been more icilling.
fMalu'eram, I had
Singular. < malu'eras, thou hadst
^nialu'erat, he had
f maluera'mus, we had
Plural. < maluera'tis, ye had
^ malu'erant, they had
5. Future Tense. / shall or will be more willing.
f Malam, / shall
Singular. < ma'les, thou wilt
I ma'let, he will . ^ ^
t male'mus, we shall
Plural. < male'tis, ye will ,
(. ma'lent, they will
Observe. Maid has no Imperative Mood.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
1. Present Tense. may, can, should, would be.
f Ma'lim, / may
Singular. < malls, thou vndyest
(_ ma'lit, he may
C mali'mus, we may
Plural. < mali'tis, ye may
t ma'lmt, they may
2. Preterimperfect Tense. might or could be.
t Mal'lem, / might
Singular. \ mal'les, thou mightest
^ mal'let, he might
C malle'mus, we might ' ~
Plural. < malle'tis, ye might
\. mal'lent, they might
( 78 )
3. Preterperfect Tense. may or should have been.
C Malu erlm, / may
Singular. < malu eris, thou mayest
( malu'erit, he may
Plural,
i malue'rimus, ice may f-i $
< malue'ritis, ye may j J5* S
f malu'erlnt, they may ) - q
4. Preterpliiperfect Tense. might or would have been.
C Maluis'sem, I might
Singular. ? maluis'ses, thou mightest
^ maluis'set, he might
f maluisse'mus, we might
Plural. < maluisse'tis, ye might
t maluissent, they might )
5. Future Tense. shall or will have been.
fMalu'erd, I shall
Singular. < malu'eris, thou wilt
( malu'erit, he will
C malueri'mus, we shall
Plural. < maliieri'tis, ye will
t malu'erlnt, they will
The Subjunctive Mood is declined like the Potential.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present and Preteriinperfect Tense.
Mal'le to be more willing or to have rather.
Preterperfect and Preterphiperfeet Tense.
Malms se, to have been more willing or to have had rather.
Note. Md'W wants the future tense of the Infinitive Mocd,
a,s it has no supine.
GERUNDS.
Malen'di, of being more willing.
malen'dS, in being more willing.
malen'dum, being more willing.
PARTICIPLE.
Present, Ma'lens, more willing or beiny more willing.
As Maid has no supine, it has no future participle.
(79 )
EDO, I eat.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
1. Present Tense. I do eat or am eating.
( E'd5, 7 eat,
Singular. \ e'dis vel es, thou edtest,
^ 3'dit vel est, he eats,
C e'dimiis, we eat,
Plural. < e'ditis vel es'tis, ye eat,
J e'dunt, they eat.
2. Preterimperfect Tense. 7 did eat or was eating.
f Ede'bam, I teas
Singular. < ede'bas, thou wast
[ ede'bat, he teas
f edeba'mus, we were
Plural. < edeba'tis, ye were
[ ede'bant, they were
3. Preterperfect Tense. 7 ate or have eaten.
fE'dl, late,
Singular.^, edis'ti, thou utest,
( e'dit, he ate,
( e'dimiis, ice ate,
Plural. 1 edis'tis, ye ate,
(^ede'runt vcl ede're, they ate
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. 7 had eaten.
f E'deram, 7 had
Singular. < e'deras, thou hadst
I e'derat, he had
C edera'miis, ive had
Plural. < edera'tis, ye had
( e'derant, they had
5. Future Tense. I shall or will eat.
I shall
^
Singular. - e'des, thou wilt > ^.
( e'det, he will
80 )
f ede'mus, tee shall (
Plural. < ede'tis, ye will <
( e'dent, they will (. *
IMPERATIVE MOOD. No first Person.
E'de, e'dito fleZ es, es't5, 8t}
i eda'mus, let us eat,
Plural. -? e'clite, edito'te vel es'te, esto'te, eat ye,
[ e'dant, edun'to, let them eat.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
1. Present Tense. may, can, should, would
f E'dam, / may
Singular. 4 e'das, thou mdyest
(e'dat, he may
t eda'mus, we may
Plural. < eda'tis, ye may
^ e'liant, they may
2. Preterimperfect Tense. might or could.
C E'derem vel es'sem, / might
Singular. < e'deres vel es'ses, thou mightesi
^ e'deret vel es'set, he might
C edere'mus vel esse'mus, we might
Plural. < edere'tis vel esse'tis, ye might
[ ede'rent vel es'sent, they might
3. Preterperfect Tense. may or should have.
C E'derim, / may
Singular. -J e'deris, thou mdyest
(_e'derit, he may I *
( ede'rimus, we may
Plural. < ede'ritis, ye may
[ e'dermt, they may
5 This verb has seme of its parts the same with those of the verb
es'se, to be.
( 81 )
4. Preterpliiperfect Tense. might or would have.
fEdis'sem, I might
Singular. 1 edis'ses, thou mightest
^edis'set, he might
i edisse'mus, we might
Plural. < edisse'tis, ye might
(. edis'sent, they might
5. Future Tense. shall or will have.
( E'derO, / shall
Singular. \ e'deris, thou wilt
( e'derit, he will
( ederi'mus, we shall *?
Plural. < ederi'tis, ye will ?
f e'derint, they will
The Subjunctive Mood is declined like the Potential.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present and Preteriraperfect Tense.
E'derS vel es'se, to eat.
Preterperfect and Preterpluperfect Tense.
Edis'se, to have eaten.
Future Tense.
Esu'rum es'se, to be about to eat.
GERUNDS.
Eden'di, of eating^
eden'do, in eating,
eden'dum, eating.
SUPINES.
JS'siim, to eat, 'su, to be eaten.
PARTICIPLES.
Present, E'dens, eating.
Future, Esu'rus, about to eat.
3
( 82 )
FERO, / bear or suffer.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
l. Present Tense. / do bear or am bearing,
fFerS, I bear,
Singular. -| fens, thou bedrest,
(fert, he bears,
( fe'nmus, ice bear,
Plural. ? ier'tis, ye bear,
( fe runt, they bear.
2. Preterimperfect Tense. 7 <ftW bear or wra* bearing.
C Fere'bam, / w^s
Singular.^ fere'bas, thou wast
I fere bat, he was
i fereba'mus, jve mere j
Plural. : fereba'tis, ye were
f fere' bant, they were
3. Preterperfect Tense. / bare, bore, or have borne.
l Tull, / bare,
Singular. < tulis'ti, tJwu barest,
[ tu'lit, he bare,
T tu'limus, we bare,
Plural. i tiills'tis, ye bare,
vel tule're, they bare.
4. Preterpliiperfect Tense. I had borne.
( Tu'leram, 7 had
Singular. < tu'leras, thou hadst
(.tu'lerat, he had I |"
f tulera'mus, we had
Plural. < tulera'tis, ye had
( tu'lerant, they had
5. Future Tense. I shall or will bear
Fe'ram, I shall
1 ^
Singular. 1 fe'res, thou wilt
( fe'ret, he will ) **
(83 )
}r
f fere'mus, ice shall
Plural. -< fere'tis, ye will
( fe'rent, they will
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. No first Person.
<?' , 7^ / Fer, fe "r'tO, iear thou,
Singular.
f fera'mus, let us
Plural. < fer'te, ferto'te, bear yc,
^fe'rant, ferun'tS, let them bear.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
1. Present Tense. may, can, should, would.
C Fe'ram, I may
Singular. < fe'ras, thou mdyest
[ fe'rat, he may ^
C fera'mus, we may j >
Plural. < fera'tis, ye may
[ fe'rant, they may
2. Preterimperfect Tense. might or could.
f Fer'rem, / might
Singular. < fer'res, thou mightest
( ferret, he might
rferre'mus, we mi<rht
Plural. ? ferre'tis, ye mig'it
(^fer'rent, they might
3. Preterperfect Tense. may or should have.
C Tu'lerlm, / may
Singular. < tu'lens, thou mdyest
( tu'lent, he may
C tule'rimus, we may
Plural. 1 tule'ritis, ye may
^ tu lerint, they may
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. might or would have.
C Tulis'sem, might ^ o-
Singular. \ tulis'ses, thou mightest > |
^tiilis'set, he might J ?
( 84)
( tulisse'mus, . we miyht ~\ _? ^
Plural. < tulisse tis, ;//? m%-A f 2 *
( tulis'sent, 'they might J $ '
5. Future Tense. shall or will have.
rTu'lerD, I shall ^ ^
Singular. \ tu'leris, ^
( tii'lerit, Ae
4' tuleri'mus, we
Plural. < tuleri'tis, ye
( tu'lerint, they
The Subjunctive Mood is declined like the Potential.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present and Preterimperfect Tense.
Fer're, to hear or suffer.
Preterperfect and Preterpluperfect Tense.
Tulis'se, to have borne or suffered.
Future Tense.
Latu'rum es'se, to he about to bear or suffer.
GERUNDS.
Feren'di, of bearing^
feren'do, in bearing,
fereu'dum, bearing.
SUPINES.
La' turn, to bear. La'tu, to be borne.
PARTICIPLES.
Present, Fe'rens, bearing or suffering.
Future, Latu'rus, about to bear or suffer
FIO, / become or am made.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
1. Present Tense. I do become or am made.
t Fi'5, / become,
Singular, < fis, tkou becomest,
( fit,
( 85 )
f fi'mus, we becdme,
Plural. 1 fi'tis, . ye become,
(fi'unt, they become.
"2. Preterim perfect Tense. / did becdme or teas made.
( Fie bam, / did
Singular, x f le'bas, thou didst , ^
( fie bat, he did
( fleba'mus, ice did
Plural. - -J fieba'tis, ye did
( fie'bant, they did
3. Preterperfect Tense. sum vel fin, I became, I am become,
or I have been made.
( Fac'tus sura, / have -^
Singular. < fac'tus es, thou hast \ ^
( fac'tus est, he has I
( fac'tl su'mus, ^c /tare
Plural. -? fac'tl es'tis, y<? 7are -
sunt, they hate
j
4. Preterpliiperfect Tense. e'ram vel fu'eram, 1 had become
or / had been made.
( Fac'tus e'ram, I had
Singular. < fac'tus e'ras, thou hadst
(fac'tus e'rat, he had
f fac'ti era'mus, ice had
Plural. ) fac'tl era'tis, ye had
(fac'tl e'rant, they had
5. Future Tense. / shall or will become.
TFi'am, I shall
Singular. < fi'es, thou wilt
(fi'et, he will
rfie'mus, we shall
Plural. <| f le'tis, ye will
they will
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Pre'sent Tense. No first Person.
( Fi, fi'to, become thou,
( 86 )
( fia'mus, let us become.
Plural. 1 fi'te*, fito'te", become ye,
( fi'ant, flun'to, let them become.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
1. Present Tense. may, can, should, would.
f Fi'am, / may
Singular. < fi'as, thou mayest
[ f I'at, he may
T fia'mus, me may
Plural. < fia'tis, ye may
( fi'ant, they may
2. Preterimperfect Tense. might or could.
( Fi'erem, / might ^
Singular. < fi'eres, thou mightest | ^
( fTeret, he might
i fiere'mus, we might i g
Plural. < fiere'tis, ye might
[ fi'erent, they might )
S. Preterperfect Tense. sim vel f u'erlm, may hate or should
have been made or have become.
f Fac'tus sim, / may
Singular. < fac'tus sis, thou mayest
[ fac'tus sit, he may
f fac'ti si'mus, we may
Plural, s fac'ti si'tis, ye may
t fac'ti sint, \liey may
4. Preterpluperfect Tense es'sem vel fuis'sem, might or
would have become, or been made or done.
( Fac'tus es'sem, / might
Singular. 2 fac'tus es'ses, thou mightest
( ^c'tus es'set, he might
( fac'ti esse'mus, me might
Plural. < fac'ti esse'tis, ye might
{ fac'ti es'sent, they might
(87 )
5, Future Tense. e'ro vcl fu'ero, shall or will have become,
or been made or done.
C Fac'tus e'ro,
Singular. -? fac'tus e'ris,
( fac'tus e'rit, he will
t fac'ti e'rimus, we shall
<
Plural. < fac'ti e'ritis,
(_ fac'ti e'runt, they will
The Subjunctive Mood is declined like the Potential,
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present and Preterimperfect Tense.
Fi'eri, to be made or done, or to lecdme.
Preterperfect and Preterpluperfect Tense.
Fac'tum es'se vel fuls'se, to have been made or done, or to have
become.
Future Tense.
Fac'tum I'ri, to be aboilt to be made or done, or to be about to
becdme.
PARTICIPLES.
Past, Fac'-tus, made, done, or become.
Future, Fa-cien'dus,* that is to or that must become ; or, that
is to be or that must be made or done.
FEROR, lam borne.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
1. Present Tense. I am borne or suffered.
( Fe'ror, / am
Singular. 2 fer'ris vel fer're, thou art
f fer'tur, he is
* Sometimes this participle, as also the gerunds of fa'clo, have the
vowel M ill place of e in the third syllable : as faciiin'dus,faclun rfa, fa-
ciun'dum, fac'iuridl, f&dun'do ; but this manner of writing is more
cincient,
( 88 >
f fe'rimur, we are ^ g-
Plural. 3 feri'mini, ye are
(ferun'tur, they are J ?
2. Preterimperfect Tense. ^1 was borne.
C Fere'bar, / was ^
Singular, -j fereba'ris reZ-ba're, thou wast
{ fereba'tur, he was
4 fereba'miir, ice were i ?
Plural. < fereba'mini,
(. fereban'tiir,
3 Preterperfeet Tense. sum ceZ ful, / have leen borne.
( La'tus sum, / have
Singular. < la'tus es, thou hast
t la'tus est, he has
L la'ti su'miis, ice have
Plural. < la'ti es'tis, ye have
(. la'ti sunt, they have
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. e'ram e/fu'eram, I had leen Lome.
( La'tus e'ram, / had
Singular. < la'tus e'ras, thou hadst
^ la'tus e'rat, he had
t la'ti era'mus, we had
Plural. < la'ti era'tis, ye had
^la'tl e'rant, they had
5. Future Tense. / shall or will le borne.
f Fe'rar, / shall
Singular. < fere'ris vel fere're, thou wilt
( fere'tur, he will
( fere'mur, we shall
Plural. < fere'mim, ye will
t feren'tur, they will
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. No first Person.
c , , ( Fer're, fer'tor, be thou
Singular. ^ f ^ let /iim be
o
I O
i feramur, let us be (^
Plural. -J feri'mini, feri'minor,
ferau'tur s feruutor, lei them be
(89)
POTENTIAL MOOD.
1. Present Tense. may, can, should, would be.
rFe'rar, I may
Singular. ^ fe'ra'ris vcl fera're thou mriyest
I fera'tur, he may
i fera'miir, we may
Plural. < fera'mhii, ye may
(.feran'tur, they may
2. Preterimperfect Tense. might or could be.
C Fer'rer, / might
Singular. <J ferre'ris eel ferre're, thou mtghtest
[ ferre'tur, he might
C ferre'mur, we might
Plural. < ferre'mini, ye might
( ferren'tur, they might
3. Preterperfect Tense. sim vel fu'erlm, may or should have
r La'tus sim, / may
Singular. < la'tus sis, thou mdyest
( la'tus sit, he may
C la'ti si'mus, we may
Plural. < la'ti si tis, ye may
[ la'ti smt, they may
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. es'sem xel fuis'sem, might or would
have been.
( La'tus es'sem, / might
Singular. -J la'tus es'ses, thou mtghtett
( la'tus es'set, he might
C la'ti esse'mus, we might
Plural. J la'ti esse'tis, ye might
(^ la'ti es'sent, they might
5. Future Tense. e'ro vel fu'erO, shall or will have been.
( La'tus e'ro, I shall
Singular. * la'tus e'ris, thou wilt
[ la'tus e'rit, he will
( 90 )
fla'ti e'rimus, we shall "i -x ^
Plural. J la'ti e'ritis, ye will > | | |
( la'tl e'runt, they will J ? '
The Subjunctive Mood is declined like the Potential.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present and Preterimperfect Tense.
Fer'ri, to le borne.
Preterperfect and Preterpliiperfect Tense.
La'tum es'se vel fuls'se, to have been borne.
Future Tense.
La'tum i'ri, to be about to be borne.
PARTICIPLES.
Past. La'tus, borne or having been borne
Future, Feren'dus, that is to be or that must be borne.
EO, I go.
o, I go, is also a Verb Irregular, but, in many of its tenses,
it re&embles verbs of the Fourth Conjugation : it is declined aa
follows :
E, is, I'vi, I're, eiin'dl, eun'do, eun'dum, I'tfim, 1'tu, i'ens,
itii'rus, to go.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
1. Present Tense. / do go or am g6ing.
C E'o, I go,
Singular. < is, thou goest,
{ it, he goes,
f I'mus, we go,
Plural. < I'tis, ye go,
( e'unt, they go.
2. Preterimperfect Tense. 7 did go or was going.
( I'bam, 7 was
Singular. 1 1'bas, thou wast
(_i'bat, he was
( Iba'mus, we were
Plural. < iba'tts, ye were
( I'bant. they were
.
T I' vi,
. | ivis't
(.i'vit,
C I'vim
< ivis't
(_ ive'r
4. Pr
4 I'veram,
Singular. < I'veras,
I I'verat,
( 91 )
3. Preterperfect Tense./ went or have gone.
/ went,
Singular. ivis'ti, tJiou wentest,
he went*
C I'vimus, we went,
Plural. < ivis'tis, ye went,
(_ ive'runt vel ive're, they went.
4. Preterpluperfect Tense. / had gone.
I'veram I had
thou hadst
Ae had
( Ivera'mus, we had
Plural. < ivera'tis, ^e Aarf
( I'verant, ^6^ had
5. Future Tense. I shall or will go.
ri'bs, I shall
Singular. -? This, thou wilt
(i'bit, Ae ci
l I'bimus, we shall
Plural. -| I'bitis, ye rz7<?
f I'bunt, they will
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. No first Person.
c ,, 7 ( I, I'to, go thou,
Angular. -. let kirn go,
f ea'mus, let us go,
Plural. < i'te, ito'te, go ye,
( e'ant, eiinto, let them go.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
1. Present Tense. may, can, should, would.
f E'am, . / may
Singular. < e'as, thou mdyest
( e'at, he may
f ea'mua, ice may
Plural. < ea'tis, ye may
( e'ant, they may
92)
2. Preterim perfect Tense. might or could.
C I'rem, I might
Singular. ? I'res, thou mightest
(I'ret, he might
f ire'mus, we might
Plural 1 ire tis, ye might
(_ Trent, they might
3. Preterperfeet Tense. may or should have.
f I'verlm, I may
Singular. < I'veris, /^OM mdyest
(^ I'verit,
f ive'rimus, we may
Plural. < ive'ritid, ye may
J Tveriut, they may
4. Preterpliiperfect Tense. might or would have.
{Ivis'sem, I might
Ivis'ses, thou mightest
ivis'set, he might
i ivisse'mus, we might
Plural. < ivlsse'tis, ye might
( ivis'sent, they might
5. Future Tense, shall or will have.
i I'vero, I shall ^
Singular.^ Tveris, thou wilt | g w
(^i'veiit, he will \ ^
riveri'mus, we shall
Pliiral. < iveri'tis, ye will
( Tver int, they will )
The Subjunctive Mood is declined like the Pote'ntial.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present and Preterimperfect Tense.
I're, to go.
Preterperfect and Preterpliiperfect Tense.
Ivis'se, to Juive gone.
(93 )
Future Tense.
Itu'rum es'se, to be about to go*
GERUNDS.
Eun'dl, of going,
eun'do, in going,
eun'dum,
SUPINES.
I'tum, to go. I'tu, to be gone.
PARTICIPLES.
Present, Tens, going.
Genitive, eun'tis, of a person or thing going.
Future. Itu'rus, about to go.
In like manner are the compounds 87 of eo declined : as are
7 The more cdmmon cdmpounds of e'd are the following, which, ex-
clusive of que'6 and of ne'qucO, and exclusive (likewise) of am'bio, /
environ, a verb originally a cdmpound of e'd, but eventually adopted
among the regular verbs of the fourth conjugation, amount to seventeen
in number :
1. ab'eo, abl'vl, abTtum, abl're, to go away,
2. ad'eo, adi'vi, ad'itum, ndl're, to yo unto,
ii. ante'eu, antel'vT, antuTtum, antel're, to go before,
4. clrcum'eo, circumi'vl, circumltum, circuml're, to go round,
5. co'eo, coi'vi, co'itiim, cofre, to yo together with,
6. ex'eo, Sxi'vl, exTtum, exl're, to go out,
7. in'eo, ini'vi, in'itum, ini're, to go in,
8. Inter'eo, Interi'vT, Intei-'Itum, Tnteri're, to perish,
9. Intr6 7 eo, IntroI'vI, Intro'itum, Intrul're, to go into,
10. ob'eo, obi' vl, ob'itum, obl're, to go through with,
ll.peYeo, perl'vi, per'itum, peri're, to perish,
12. pr;e'eo, preel'vl, pree'itum, prjiei're, to precede.
13. pnpter'eo, pr^tert'vl, praeterltum, prseterl're, to pass by,
14. pro'deo, prodl'vi, pro'ditum, prodl're, to go forth,
li>. re'deo, redi'vl, re'dTtum, redi're, to return,
16. siib'eo, subl'vl, siiblitum, subl're, to go under,
17. trans'eo, trSnsi'vT, trans'itum, trunsi're, to pass over.
In all these verbs the penult of the supine (t'5 being one of the excep-
tions to the General Rule " SupI'fiUM d'tssyl'liibum, priorem hubt-t
lon'yam,") is short. See Prosody.
And here it is requisite to observe, that in the Preterite of the Indi'-
cative, and the tenses derived from it, the v is dftener dropped, than
(94)
also que'5, / am dble, and ne'qued, I am unable ; but these
last are not used in the Imperative Mood, and seldom or never
either in the Gerunds or Participles. 88
DEFECTIVE VERBS.
VERBS that have only some particular Tenses and Persons,
are called Defective ; such are the following :
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. I say.
Singular. Plural.
Ai'5, a'ls, alt, - - ai'iint.
Vetained, in e'o and all its cdmpounds : thus, for adl'vl, perl'vt, <|-c., we
more frequently read and say iid'n, per'n, &c. This contracted form is
likewise very frequent in other verbs, though scarcely so frequent as in
e'd and its cdmpounds.
Again, although c'o is properly a neuter verb, yet, even by the best
writers, was it used personally, as well as impersonally, in the passive
voice: thus in C^E'SAR we find " flu'men pe'dibus transi'rl po'test," tie
river can be crossed o<i foot : also in CI'CERO we read " perl'cula adeun'-
tiir," dangers are come unto : and many dther passages of tike kind
might be qudted.
In prd'dcd and rc'dcS the letter d is inse'rted for the sake of distinct-
ness of sound ; and in pra'So, the diphthong is dftener short than long.
w Ve'neo, to be sold, is cdnjugated like e'o, except that it has no im-
perative, nor future infinitive, nor gerunds, supines, or participles.
69 The verb da're, to give, wants the first person singular of the present
of the indicative, and also of the present of the potential, passive : iu
like manner, fa'rl, to speak, wants the same pe'rsous, of the like tense,
of the same two moods. Again, the second pe'rson singular of the impe'-
rative of sci'o, / know, namely, set, was seldom (or perhaps neVer) iu
use. Among Defective Verbs some grammarians class such words as
" sis," for si vis, if thou art willing ; *' sul'tis " for si vul'tls, if ye are
willing ; "so'des," for si audes, if thou ddrest : also, In'fit, he begins,
or rather, it is begun ; de'f It, it is wanting ; and con'fit, it is done ; with
a few more which hardly beldng to this tribe.
90 In the verb afo the first two le'tters are always pronounced as one
syllable whenever they are followed by a vowel : but when a cdnsouaut
follows the i, then the first letter is invariably short j as, a'it, he saith or
says.
( 95 )
Preterimperfect Tense. / said or did say.
Singular. Plural.
Ale'-bam, -Las, -bat, -ba'mus, -ba'tis, -bant.
Preterperfect Tense. thou satdest.
Singular. Pl-iral.
- . ai'sti, - - ais'tis, -
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. say.
Singular. Plural.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
Present Tense. thou mdyest say.
Singular. Plural.
atas, ai'at, aia'miis, - afant.
PARTICIPLE.
Present, Ai'ens, saying.
2. Au'sim, / dare.
INDICATIVE AND POTENTIAL MOOD.
1. Present Tense. / dare or I may dare.
Singular. Plural.
Au'sim, au'sis, au'sit, - au'sint.
3. A've, fail.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
1. Present Tense. haiL
Singular. Plural.
f a've, ) J ave te, *l
\Hvet5, J I aveto'te.j
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present Tense.
Ave're, to hail or to speed.
( 96 )
4. Sal've, 91 - God save you.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Future Tense. thou wilt be safe..
Singular. Plural.
IMPERATIVE MOOD
Present Tense. be safe.
Singular. Plural.
/sal've, ) fsalve'te, 1
( salve'to, J \salvet6'te,J
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present Tense.
Salve're, to be safe and sound.
K Ce'do, tell me.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. tell me.
Singular. Plural.
cg'do, . ce'dite,
6. Fax'Im for Fa'ciam or Fe'cerim, / may do it.
INDICATIVE AND POTENTIAL MOOD.
Preterperfect Tense. / may do it.
Singular. Plural.
Fax'Im, fax'is, fax'it, fax'imus, fax'itis, fax'Iut.
Future Tense. / shall or will do it.
Singular. Plural.
Fax'5, fax'is, fax'it, faxi'mus, faxi'tis, faxlnt.
9i With this verb several grammarians couple the like parts of the
verb va'leo, / am dbfy'in ttie sense of "adieu " or "farewell."
( 97 )
7, Qiue's5, 92 I pray.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. I pray.
Singular. Plural.
Quaj'sO, qu&'sis, qtiee'sit, quai'sumus,
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Present Tense.
Qiise'sere, to leg or to beseech.
PARTICIPLE.
Present, Quai'sens, beseeching.
8. In'quiO vel In'quam, J say.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. / say.
Singular. Plural.
In'quiO, "I
vel in'qms, In'qmt, in'qufmiis, mquiuni
In'quam, J
Preterimperfect Tense. / said or did say.
Singular. Plural.
Inquie'bat, Inqirie bant.
Preterperfect Tense. saidest thou.
Singular^ Plural.
Future Tense. thou wilt say.
Singular. Plural.
in'quies, in'quiet,
92 This verb qucb'so seems to have been the original form of quai'ro,
/ seek.
(98)
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
Present Tense. say thou,.
Singular.
jin'que, \ fln'quiat,)
" i In'quitO, | | In quitd, J "
PARTICIPLE.
Present, In'quiens, saying?*
No'v!, / know or / have known, o'di, 9 * / hate or / have
hated, coe'pi, / begin or / have begun, and me'mim, I do re-
member or / have remembered, are likewise Verbs Defective ;
ns they have only the Preterperfect Tense of the Indicative
Mood, with the Tenses formed therefrom : thus.
No' vi, I know or / knew,
No'veram, I had ^
No'verlm, / may have | g-
Novis'sem, I might have }- S
No'verO, / shall have j s
Novis'se, to have
O'di, / hate or / hated,
O'deram, / had ~\
O'derlm, / may have j >
Odis'sem, J would have V |-
O'derO, / shall have
Odis'se, to have
In like manner do c&'pi, and m&nun*, form their tenses :
and it is to he observed that these four verbs have not only
the first person, but also all the other persons of those Tenses :
me'mini has moreover the second person of the Imperative
Mood, both singular and plural : as,
mSmentS, remember thou. || memento'tS, remember ye. gb
^3 To these some add fo'rem, / might be, and the infinitive fo're, to be.
94 The two verbs o'di and cai'pl have the past participles C'sus, hdtrd,
and cdep'tus, begun ,* the two participles txo'siis and pcro'sHs are dlso in
use.
S3 To these Defective Verbs might be joined o'vas, thou exultest, o'vat,
he exults, o'vans, exulting : dlso, a'page, aw&y with thee, apa'gite, get ye
hence. And here it may be noticed that the four following verbs, ia'cio,
/ do, di'co, / say, du'co, I lead, and fe'ro, / bring or J bear, lose the
tetter e, by the figure apdcope, in the second person singular of the im-
pdrative, active ; makiug/^c, die, duc,ftr, instead of fn'ce, di'cS, du'ce,
fe're. But when/a'czJ is compounded with a preposition it changes the
first vdwel of the present into t, and forms its imperative regularly : as,
/ perform ; per'fice, perform thou.
IMPERSONAL VERBS.
VERBS that are used, exclusively, in the third person sin-
gular, without a nominative in Latin (but of which the
nominative in En'glish is u It" indefinitely taken,) are called
Verbs Impersonal, as, delec'tat, it delighteth, de cgt, it bc-
c6mcth, pugna'tur, it is fought, vide'tur, 83 it seems.
Impersonal Verbs have all the moods and tenses which
Personal Verbs have, with
imperative : thus,
Delec'tat, it delights,
Delecta'bat, it did delight,
Delecta'vit, it delighted,
he exception, perhaps, of the
VTde'tur,
Delecta'verat,i had delighted,
Delectabit, it will delight,
Delec'tet, it may delight,
Delecta'ret, it might delight,
and so forth.
it seems,
it did seem,
Vi'sum est, it seetned,
Vi'sum e'rat, it had seemed,
Vide'bitur, it will seem,
Videa'tur, it may seem,
Videre'tur, it might seem,
and so forth.
33 "V erbs which are seldom, or never, found except in the third person
singular of one or more of the te'uses of the active voice are, strictly,
Verbs Impersonal : but many verbs which are regular in all the persona
of the active voice, are dften assumed impersonally in the passive. The
verbs properly termed Impersonals are the following :
pe'mtet, it repents,
pii'dtft, if ashdmes, and
ts'defc, it wearies.
de'cet, t* becomes, } ml'seret, it pities,
li'bet, U pleases, opor'tet, it behoves,
H'cet, it is lawful, \ pi get, it irks,
To which some grammarians add many more, as, cfln'flt, it w done,
de'fit, it is wanting, in'flt, he begins or rather it is begun, li'quet. it
appears ; with verbs expressive of the occiiri-ences of nature ; thus,
plu'It, it rains, nln'glt, it snows, gran'ainat, it hails, ge'lat, it freezes,
re'gelat, it thaws, to'uat, it thunders, ful'mTnat, it lightens, vcspera'sclt,
it begins to draw towards evening : and a multitude besides.
Some verbs not strictly impe'rsonal, are nevertheless dften used im-
personally. Of these we shall give, as a specimen, one or two of each
conjugation :
1st CONJUGATION. Ju'vat, it delights ; coVstitt, it is agreed on , va'cat,
there is leisure ; spec'tat, it concerns , ccrla'tur, t* is contended ; pota'-
tur, it is drunk ; Qc.
2nd CONJUGATION. De'bet, it ought; pl&'cct. it ple&ses ; at'tlriet, it
pertains; fave'tur,/<iro?<r ts shown ; vide'tiir, t* appears or seems ; $-c.
3rd CONJUGATION. Sufficft, it sujficeth ; iu'cipit, it begins; dc'sinit,
it terminates or gives over ; crc'ditur, it is trusted ; mlt'tltur, it is
sent; 4"<J.
4th CONJUGATION. E'venTt, it comes to pass; cfin'venTt, it is meet;
ex'pedit, it is expedient; senti'tur, it is perceived; apSrl'tur, it is
opened, $c.
OF A PARTICIPLES
A PARTICIPLE is a part of speech derived from a Verb, and
has share with a Noun Ad'jectivo, in number, gender, case,
and declension ; and share with a Verb, in tense and signi-
fication.
There are four distinct sorts or kinds of PARTICIPLES :
1 . One of the present tense, which in En'glish ends always
in "ing ; and in Latin always in -ans or in -ens: as, loving
a'mans ; teaching, do'cens.
2. One of the future, in -riis, which implies a likelihood or
design of doing a thing : as, amatu'rus, 98 about to love.
3. One of the preterperfect tense, which has generally a
passive signification, and in En'glish ends (for the most part)
in -d, -, or -n : as, lec'tus, read; doc'tus, taught; \ 7 isus,
seen**.
IRREGULAR VERBS, Pro'dest, it profits ; re'fert, it concerns ; m'terest,
it interests ; su'perest, it remains ; adi'tur, it is come unto ; abeundum
est, it is to be or must be gone away.
97 A Participle owes its name to the circumstance of participating or
partaking of Gender and Declension in cdmmon with AD'JECTIVES, and
of Time and Signification in common with VERBS. Some participles of
the present and past tenses admit even of comparison : thus, a'mans,
loving, aman'tior, more loving, fimantls'simus, r.wst loving ; doc'tus,
taught or learned, doc'tior, more taught or more learned, doctis'sirnus,
tlie most taught or very learned. But as in this sense the idea of tense
or time is not strictly ble'nded with the signification, seVeral grammarians
reje'ct the name of Participles in such instances, and addpt that of Par-
ticipiaJs. Participles admitting of degrees of comparison are generally
the source or drigin of adverbs ; which, in like manner, admit of compa-
rison : thus, from a'mans, loving, are derived aman'ter, lovingly : ama'n-
tius, more lovingly, amantls'sTme, most lovingly : and similarly from doc'-
tus. learned, corne the adverbs doc'te, learnedly, doc'tius, more learnedly,
doctis'sime, most learnedly.
98 With the verb SUM this participle is frequently used (and with
Elegance) instead of the future of the indicative of verbs, especially if
Purpose or Intention be signified ; and with slm it is elegantly employed
for the pre'sent, or future, and, with es'sem, for the pluperfect, of the
potential mood : thus, profec'turiis sum, / will go, that is, / am about to
go ; non dii'bito qum sit factu'riis, 7 doubt not but he may (or will) do it ;
nun dubita'vi qum es'set veutu'rus, / doubted not but he would come :
rather than " qulnfa'ciat, quln fa'ceret, qiiin fe'ctrlt ; quln ve'nircf,
guin vcntssZl, quln vcnent." All verbs which have no supines, want of
course this piirticiple, -vyhich is derived from the supine in -u.
99 In Liitin the participle of the past tense ends invariably in -us, pre-
ceMed for the most part by /, not nnfre'quently by s, sometimes by x, and
in one instance, namely, mor'tuus, dead, by the vdwel u.
(103 )
4. One of the future, in -diis, which has also a passive sig-
nification, and expresses a future action ; as, aman'dus, that
is to be, or that must be loved, else, that is deserving or worthy
of being I6ved. io
Note. All participles are declined like nouns adjective:
those of three terminations, like loniis, and those of one ter-
mination, Iike/e7z#.
OF AN ADVERB. 101
AN AD' VERB is a part of speech joined to verbs, adjectives,
and substantives, to increase or diminish their signification :
as, he speaks well ; they write badly.
OF A CONJUNCTION. 102
A CONJUNCTION is a part of speech that joins words and
sentences together ; as, my father and mother.
100 The participle in -dZs is v<5ry seldom, or perhaps never, used in a
sense purely denoting Futurity ; for, its import is that of Necessity,
Duty, or Merit, rather than that of bare and absolute Futurity. Thus,
dl'cd ll'terds a me scrip' turn z'rz, and di'cd ll'terds a me scrlbtin'dds ts'se,
are very different indeed in meaning, the fdrmer signifying, I say that
a letter will be written by me : but the latter, / say that a letter must be
written by me, or, that I am obliged to write a letter.
101 An adverb, as the name impdrts, is a part of speech a'dded to a
verb to express Quantity, Quality, Manner, Time, Or'der, or Place.
And not only to verbs, but also to nouns, pronouns, participles, and even
to other adverbs are these often adjoined. Of adverbs some are derived
from substantives, as par'tlm, partly, me'rito, deservedly : and some
are abbreviations of nouns combined with pronouns or prepositions ;
as, ho'die, to-day, for hoc di'e, on this day ; ad'modiim, very, for ad
mo'dum, unto measure : dthers are derived from adjectives ; as, alte,
loftily or detpfy, from al'tiis, high or deep ; bre'viter, briefly, from bre'-
vls, short; volen'ter, willingly, from vo'lens, willing. These generally
admit of comparison, if the adjectives or participles (whence they are
derived) can be compared ; and their comparative and supe'rlative
degrees of comparison are always analogous to those of the adjectives or
participles from which they spring : as, be'ne, well, me'lius, better, op'-
tiine, best, from bo'nus, good; poten'ter, powerfully, potea'tiiis, more
powerfully, potentis'slme, most powerfully, from po'tens, able. In many
instances the neuter ge'nder of ddjectives or of participles, is usurped
adve'rbially : as, dul'ce, sweetly, plus, more, transver'sa, askew or leer-
ingly. And a few adverbs are derived from verbs : as, sci'llcet, namely,
for sci'as li'cet, it is permitted thou know.
102 The line of distinction between adverbs and conjunctions is dften so
indeterminate, that it is difficult in some instances to distinguish between
( 102 )
OF A PREPOSITION.
A PREPOSI'TION is a part of speech most commonly set before
a Noun ; IOS as, an'te meri'diem, before noon-day ; ad dex'tram,
to or on the right hand : or else is joined in composition to
Nouns, Verbs, Participles, and Ad'verbs; as, perar'duus,
very arduous, pne'sto, I stand before, or / excel, indoc'tus,
vnledrned, de'super,/ro??z above.
These Prepositions have an accusative case after them.
Ad, to, at, or for,
Jux'ta,
beside or nigh to,
Adver'sum )
Adver'sus, J
Ob,"*
Penes,
for or because of,
in the power of,
Ante, before,
Per,
by or through,
A' pud, at, with, or near,
Pone,
behind,
Clr'ca, )
Post,
after or since,
Cir'cum, \about,
PraVter,
beside, or except,
Cir'citer, J
Pro'pe,
nigh, or near to,
CTtrii,'" } on this side,
Prop'tgr,
Secun'dum
for or because of,
, according to,
Con'tra, against,
Se'ciis,
by or along,
Er'ga, tmcards,
Su'pra,
above,
Ex'tra, without,
Trans,
across,
In'fra, beneath,
Versus,
towards,
In'ter, between or among,
Ul'tra,
beyond,
In'tra, within.
Us'que,
as far as.
Observe. Versus is set after its case ; as, Londi'num ver'sus,
towards London.
Likewise pS'nes and us' qua" may be so placed.
those two Parts of Speech, and to assign to each its right place. It even
not unfre'quently happens, indeed, that the same words are at one time
Ad'verbs, and at another, Conjunctions ; and that words which many
grammarians call Conjunctions, dthers call Ad'verbs.
is I have taken the liberty of enlarging this pdrtion of the E'ton text,
because (to me) it appeared to be by much too brief, and at the same
time vdry vdguely wdrded.
104 Cl'trd in the later prose writers has sometimes the signification of
without, e.g. "PhlMTas in e'bore lon'ge ci'tra re'raulum tra'ditur."
Phidias is said to have been quite without rival in carving ivory.
105 In composition ob signifies against ; thus, po'no, J set, oppo'no,
/ set against.
. ( 103 )
The Prepositions folio-wing have an ablative case :
A, ab, fibs, 106 from or ly,
Abs'que, without,
Co'ram, in presence of,
Cum, 107 with t
De, of or concerning,
E, ex, 108 from or out of.
Pa'lam, openly,
Prai, before or in front,
on account of,
Pro, 109 for, or instead of,
Si'ne, without,
Te'niis, up to or as far as.
Observe. Te'niis is set after its case ; as, poYta te'nus, as
far as the gate: and, in the plural number, the noun is
co'mmonly put in the genitive case : as, au'rium te'nus, up to
the ears.
The Prepositions following serve to both cases, that is, to
the accusative and also to the ablative.
Clam, unknown to ; as, cla"m pa'trSm vel pa'tre, unknown
to my father, or without my father s knowledge.
In, 110 for into, signifying mdtion towards, has an accusative
case ; as e 5 in ur'bem, I go into the city.
In, for in only, or signifying either motion or rest, in a, place,
serves to the ablative case ; as, m te spes est, in thee 19
my hope.
Sub, 111 under, as, sub noc'tem, a little before night: sub
ju'dice Us est, the strife or matter m before the judge.
106 A is used only before consonants ; ab before vdwels ; abs before
c, q, and t.
107 In composition cam is for the most part changed fnto con-, as.
cGnsi'mills, vtry like ; conjun'go, I conjoin : but if the word, with whic
this preposition is compounded, begin with the letter /, then con- becomes
co/-, as collu'do, / sport with : or if the word begin with b, p, or m, then
con- is made com-, as com'bibo, / drink together with, complo'ro, 1 be-
wail together with : or, if the word begin with a vdwel, the final con-
sonant of the preposition is, in general, dropped ; as, coacer'vo, 7 amass
together with,- co'emo, I buy together with : but the verb e'do, / eat,
retains the m, as, com'edo, I eat up.
108 is prefixed only to consonants, ex both to consonants and v<5wels.
109 Pro in composition usually implies "forward or forth:" as pro-
mo'vco, I move forward ; produ'co, / lead forth. And, here, it should
be observed, that although, as a monosyllable, the preposition pro be
long, yet in composition it is frequently short. In some words, indeed, it
seems to be habitually short ; in dthers, habitually long ; and in dthers,
cdmmon.
uo In composition with Adjectives the preposition in generally signifies
not ; as Infir'mus, not strong, that is, infirm or feeble ; Tn'utilfs, not
useful, that is, useless : but in composition with verbs it usually retains
its primitive meaning; as, m'volo, I fly in.
111 The preposition sub in cdmpound words generally weakens or di
( 104 ) t
Sub'ter, beneath, as, sub'ter ter'ram, under the earth : sub'ter
a'qua, under the water.
Su per, over, as, su'per la'pidem, up6n a stone : su'pSr vi'ridr
fron'de, upon the green leaf. 112
OF AN INTERJECTION.
AN Interjection is a part of speech 113 which betokens a
sudden emotion of mind ; be it grief, joy, or other passion.
THE THREE CONCORDS EXPLAINED.
There are three Concords, or Agreements, in Latin :
1. Between the nominative case and the verb.
minishes the signification of any simple word with which it is joined r
thus, subrl'deo, / laugh a little, or / smile : but in some instances it
retains its original meaning : as subscribe, 1 write under or / subscribe ~
m Before dismissing the subject of prepositions it may be right to
notice, that there are four syllables often found in composition with
words, but which never occur by themselves : these are called Insepa-
rable Prepositions, and are, am-, round about, dl- vtl dis-, asunder , re-,
again, and se-, aside or apart : to which some add ve-, positively not,
and con, together, for ciim, with.
113 Interjections express compendiously a whole sentence in one word,
representing, instantly, to the mind of a hearer, some sudden emdtioii
of soul as respects the utterer. A shriek, for example, is a natural sound
edmmon to all languages, and expressive of sudden dread : a groan is,,
likewise, a natural sound expressive of deep suffering : a sigh betokens
heaviness of heart, whdther occasioned by grief, or by desire, or by
anxiety. Yet, as no one of these three can be regai-ded as an articulate
sound, they do not fall (properly) under the head of Interjections, gram-
matically so called : though several of the acknowledged interjections
have very little articulate iu them ; thus, 'st, hush, ha, ha, he, sounds of
laughing.
INTERJECTIONS are usually divided into those of JOY, as, e'vax, I'o,
hey ! brave ! of GRIEF, as, ah. hel, lieu, e'heu, ha ! woe ! alas ! of
WONDER, as, vah, pa'pre, strange ! of PRAISE, as, eu, eu'ge, well done !
of SURPRISE, as, a'tat, a, aha 9 of CALLING, as, ho, c'ho, ho, ho ! there !
of ATTENTION, as, hem, hah ! of EXCLAIMING, as, oh ! proh ! O! ahl
of IMPRECATION, as ve, woe 071 it ! of DERISION, as hul, away 1 silly
with several others.
And not uufrequently are Nouns used for Interjections : thus, nia'lum.
with a mischief! mi'serum, O wretched! piix, silence! hush! infun'-
diiru, O fy for shame ! ne'fas, O the villany ! In some instances too the
same interjection dendtes one passion at one time, and andther passion
at another : as, vah, O joy, O sorrow, or O wonder. An interjection,
differs from an iidvex'b, in that it can be put independent of any dther
ivord whatever, and be a perfect se'ntence (if we may so speak) in itself.
( 105 )
2. Between the substantive and the adjective.
3. Between the antecedent and the relative.
. THE FIRST CONCORD
A VERB agrees with its nominative case in number, and
in person.
In order to find out the nominative case, ask the question
who ? or what ? with the verb ; and the word that answers
to the question is the nominative case to the verb ; as, who
reads ? who regards not ?
The master reads, fiut ye regard not.
Praicep'tor le'git, vos ve'ro negli'gitis.
Sometimes an infinitive mood, or a sentence, is the nomina-
tive case to a verb ; and sometimes, the substantive to an
adjective ; and in this event the adjective or the relative must
be in the neuter gender : as,
Dilu'culo sur'gere saluber'rimum est.
To rise betimes in the morning is most wholesome.
In tem'pore ve'ni, quod om'niiim est pri'mum.
/ came in season^ which is the chief thing of all.
Two or more nominative cases singular require a verb
plural, which must agree with the nominative case of the most
worthy person.
Now, the first person is more worthy than the second, and
the second more worthy than the third : as,
E'go et tu su'mus in tu'to.
/ and thou are in safety.
Tu et pa'ter pSriclita'mini.
Thou and thy father are injedpardv.
The substantive which comes next after the verb, and
answers unto the question whom ? or what ? made by the
verb, shall commonly be the accusative case, except the verb
by some particular Rule, require another case after it : as,
Si cu'pis place're magis'tro, u'tere diligen'tia.
If you desire topfeasc the master, use diligence.
Observe. In this Example, mdgis'tro is the dative, and
lijfcritid the ablative case, according to the Rules of Latin
Syntax or The Construction of Latin Grammar.
( 106 )
THE SECOND CONCORD.
"When you have an adjective, ask this question, who or
what? with the adjective; and the word which ^answers to
the question shall be the substantive to the adjective.
The adjective, whether it be a noun, pronoun, or participle,
agrees with its substantive in gender, number, and case : as,
Ami'cus cer'tus in re mcer'ta cer'nitur.
A sure friend is discerned in a doubtful affair.
Observation 1st. The masculine gender is more worthy than
the feminine, and the feminine (in things animate,) more
wo'rthy than the neuter. But, again, in things without life,
the neuter gender is the most worthy : as,
Laus et impe'rmm quse petns'ti.
The praise and dominion -which thou soitghtest.
And in such event, though the substantives or antecedents
be of the masculine or feminine gender, and none of them of
the neuter, yet may the adjective, or relative, be put in the
neuter gender : as,
Ar'cus et ca'lami sunt bo'na.
The bow and arrows are good.
Ar'cus et ca'lami quse fregis'ti.
The boio and arrows whicli thou brokest.
Observation 2nd. Two (or more) substantives singular will
have an adjective plural ; which adjective shall agree with the
substantive of the most worthy gender : as,
Rex et regi'na sunt bea'ti.
The king and queen are happy.
Observation 3rd. "When, in En'glish, the word " thing" is
put with an adjective, you may in Latin leave out the sub-
stantive " negotiiim" and put the adjective in the neuter
gender : as, inul'ta me impedie'runt, many things have hin-
dered me.
THE THIRD CONCORD.
When you have a relative, ask this question, who ? or
ivhat ? with the verb ; and the word that answers unto the
question shall be the antecedent to the relative.
( 107 )
The relative agrees with its antecedent in gender, number
and person : as,
Yir sa'pit qui pau'ca IcfquTtur.
The man is wise who speaks few words.
Observation 1st. If the relative clearly lefer to two ante-
cedents, or to more, then it must be of the plural number :
as, tu mul'tum dor' mis, t sse'pe po'tas, qute am'bo sunt cor'-
pori immi'ca, thou sleepest much, and drmkest 6ften^ both
which things are injurious to the body.
Observation 2nd. When the En'glish word '* that" can be
turned into "who" or "which" it is a relative; otherwise it
is a conjunction, expressed in Latin by quod, or ut : and, in
making Latin, the conjunction may be put away, by turning
the no'minative case to the verb into the accusative, and the
verb into the infinitive mood : as, gau'deO quod tu be'ne va'lea
or gau'deO te be'r.5 vale're, I am glad that you are well.
Paradigm (or General Table) of Regular Verbs, showing
the Termination of the first and second Persons singular of
the several Tenses of the different Moods : dlso the Infi-
nitives^ Participles^ and Supines.
INDICATIVE MOOD.
ACTIVE.
1. Present Tense.
PASSIVE.
. 1.
-5"*,
-as,
-5r,
-a'ris,
2.
-eo,
-es,
-eor,
-e'ris,
3.
-5,
-is,
-or,
-eris,
4.
-16,
-is,
-i3r,
-I'ris.
2.
Preterimperfect Tense.
C.I.
-a'bam,
-a'bas,
-a'bar,
-aba'ris,
2. &3
-e'bam,
-e'bas,
-e'bar,
-eba'rfs,
4.
-le'bam,
-lebas,
-le'bar,
-leba'ris.
1U There are between thirty and fdrty verbs of the first conjugation,
which terminate in -to, and from fifteen to twenty simple verbs (besides
their numerous compounds) of the third conjugation, which terminate
similarly : these all retain the letter i in the impe'rfect and future tenses
of the indicative mood, and in the present of the potential, both Active
and passive ; also in the present participle, the ge'runds, and future pir-
ticiple in
( 108 )
ACTIVE. 3. Preterperfect Tense. PASSIVE.
C. 1,2,3,4.-!, -is'ti, | -iis sum, -uses.
4. Preterpluperfect Tense.
G\ 1,2,3,4. -eram, -eras, | -us e"ram, -iis e'ras.
5. Future Tense
-ii'bo,
-ebd,
-am,
-lain,
-abis,
-ebis,
-es,
-les,
-a'bor,
-e'bor,
-lar.
-a'beris,
-e'bens,
-e'ris,
-lens.
IMPERATIVE WOOD.
jj
-i.'
>are,
-e're,
-ere,
-1'rS.
POTENTIAL MOOD.
1. Present Tense.
-em,
-5am,
-am,
-es,
-55s,
-as,
-las,
-ear,
-ar,
-lar,
-er'Is,
-ea'ris,
-a'ris,
-la'ris.
2. Preterim perfect Tense.
-a'rem,
-e'rein,
-irrem,
-I'lem,
-a'res,
-tTres,
-5res,
-I'rSs,
-e'rgr'
-Srer,
-I'rer,
-are'ns,
-ere'ris,
-ere'ris,
-Ire'ris.
C. 1.
2.
3.
4
ai.
2.
3.
4.
3. Pi-eterpftrfect Tense.
C 1 . 1,2,3,4. -grim, -ens, J -us sim, -us sis.
4. Preterpluperfect Tense.
C. 1,2,3,4. -Is'sem, -Is'ses. | -us eafsem, -us es'ses.
5. Future Tense.
C. 1,2,3,4. o, -eris, | -us e'ro, -us e'ris.
( 108 )
ACTIVE. INFINITIVE MOOD. PASSIVE.
C. 1. -a're, -Is'sg, -u'rum es'se, I -a'ri, -iim es'se, -iim i'ri,
2. -e're, -Is'sS, -u'rum es'se, ' -e'ri, -iiir* es'se, -um I'rT.,
3. -ere, -Is'se, -u'riim es'se, | -I, -um es'se, -iim I'ri,
4. -T're, Is'se, -u'riiin es'se 1 , | -I'ri, -um es'se, -iim I'rl.
PARTICIPLES.
Present.
Fiiiure. Past.
a i.
-fins,
-riis,
-us,
2.
-ens,
-riis,
-iis,
3.
-ens.
-riis,
-U8,
4
-lens,
-riis,
-us,
(7.1,2,3,4.
SUPINES.
flni,
u.
Future.
-diis,
-dus,
-dfis,
END OP THE A.CCIDENCE.
( no )
RULES
POE, TB.Z
GENDERS OF NOUNS.
l|if These Rules being in Hexameter verse, and Ltin verse requiring such
final syllables as have either a vowel, or a diphthong, or m for terminational
letter, to be elided, or at least to be vdry sparingly pronounced when the fol-
lowing word begins with a vdwel or a diphthong, all the syllables' which, in
scanning, are cut off by the figures Synalcepha and Ecthlipsis, are here printed
in a smaller type than the rest of the text. Now respecting final m bef6re an
initial vowel, or an initial diphthong, it is to be remarked, that the m itself is
not dropped, but that the vowel before it is silent, or nearly silent ; while the
final m is so pronounced as to seem (to a hearer) to begin the word which fol-
lows it. Thus, in the third, line below, "Jluvio'rum ; ut, Ti'brls," cxight to
be pronounced as if written u jlu,'vior ; mut, Tl'bris."
*** In these verses, as was mentioned indeed at the end of the Preface, all
short final syllables Ending in a cdnsonant are marked long (by position) before
an initial cdusonant ; but syllables le'ngthened by caesura are marked short,
with zn asterisk dfter them. And note, a dagger set after ny particular short
syllable denotes that though the syllable is short in itsilf, yet it is long by
position in the verse.
Observe. All Rules in verse are best committed to memory by scanning them
on the fingers in learning them, and afterwards (for the first week at least) by
repeating them in this manner when learned : for thus the toil of learning them
is greatly diminished, and the retention of them will be more lasting.
PROPER NAMES.
1. Masculine.
Prop' rid quce marilT(s triluuritur mas'cula dZcas ;
iit ft unt Divorum ; Mars, Bac'chus, Apol'lo : vlrorum ;
ut, Ca'to, Virgi 1ms : fluviorum ; ut, Tib'ris, Oron'tes : l
men sium; , Octo'ber: ventorum; ut, Libs, No'tus, Aus'ter.
i To the names of rivers might be added those ofmountains, as being,
for the most part, masculine : such are, He'lTcon, At'ias, Pe'lion, Ju'ra,
CithEe'ron. But to this Rule there are exceptions in regard both of the
one and the dther : for, the names of several rivers in -a, not increasing
in the genitive case, are feminine, conformably to the First Spe'cial Rule
for the Genders of Nouns. Thus, Al'bBla, the ancient name of the Tiber
Ma'trona, the Marne, Se'quana, the Seine, with some others, are feini.
nine : and of mountains, also, many take their gender from the termi-
nation : thus JE'tna, ^E'tnS, mount jBfna, Os'sa, Os'ssb, Os'sa, (E'ta,
CE'tsc, (E'ta, Al'pes, Arpiilm, the Alps, are feminine ; and Sorac'te
SOrac'tis, mount Sordcte, neuter.
( 111 )
2. Feminine.
Prop'ria fabmVncum rcftrcritici no'mina seafum,
fcemi'neo generl trllmin tur : sive Dear urn
siint; ut JU'DO, Ye'nus : mullebria; ut> An'na, Philo'tis ;
vr'bium ; tit, E'lis, Opus : regw'num ; ut, Gr&'cia, Per'sis ;
m'sulce ?tem no men ; ceu Cre'ta, Britan'ma, Cyp'rus. 3
Excipicnda to. 'men ^qud> 'dam sunt ur'linm ; fit, is'ta *
mas' ciila : Sal'nio, Agragas : qua? dam neutralia; lit, Argos,
Ti'bur, Pr&nes'te; 5 et ge'niis An'xur quod ddt utrumquc.
NOUNS APPELLATIVE.
1. Feminine Gender.
Appellativa arborum erunt mulie'lria; tit, ai'nus,
cupres'sus, ced'rus. Mas spi'nus, mas oleas'ter: 8
et sunt neutra, si'ler, suber, thus, ro'bur, acer'^z^.
2. E'picene Nouns.
Sunte'tiain Voliicrlim ; ceu pas'ser, hirun'do ; Per a rum;
tit, tig'ns, vul'pes : et Piscium ; ut^ os'treia, ce'tus,
dic'ta cplccena : 7 guTbus vox Ip'sd genus fe ret dp turn.
8 The names of some few countries, as Pon'tus, a region bordering
upon the E&xine cea, are, by their termination, masculine ; in confor-
mity to the Spicial rather than to the General Rule.
Although the names of most islands be feminine, yet Al'bton, the
island of Great Britain, which (like Pe'lion, mentioned in the first note
abdve) ought, by its termination, to beneuter, is more properly masculine.
4 The names of most towns ending in -o, and all plural names of cities
in -t, are masculine : as, Hip'po, a town of Africa, Phillp'pi, a city of
Macedonia, Ga'bn, a city of the Volsci, Parl'sil, Paris, the metropolis of
France.
Several other exceptions might be dded, particularly of names of
the second declension ending in -on, as Aby'don, a city on the Hellespont,
but which was more frequently written Aby'dos, of the feminine ge'nder.
Some grammarians, howdver, class all prdper names in -on, under the
bead of nouns in -urn.
6 To these masculines add paliu'riis, buckthorn, rham'nus, rheinlerry
lush, and ve'pres, a brier ; which, though shrubs rather tlian trees, come
as properly under this Rule, as myr'tus, a myrtle, and mdny dthers.
Ctiprcs'sus, a cypress, la'rlx, a larch, lo'tus, the late-tree, and rii'bus, a
bramble, with a few more, are occasionally masculine, and may therefore
be said to be of doubtful ge'nder.
7 In some dnimals the difference of sex is not immediately obvious ;
neither, indeed, for the general purposes of language, is it necessarv to
ascertain it. In Latin, the names of animals of this description are
called Nouns E'piccne, of which the ge'nder (like that of the names of
( 112)
3. Neuter Gender.
Attdmen ex cunc'tis supra, r&Uquisque, notdridiim,
om'ne quod exit in -um,t seu Grot; cum, s?ve
cs se genus neutrum:* sic invarid'lile no men.
FIRST SPECIAL RULE.
NOUNS NOT INCREASING ARE FEMININE.
No men non ores' cens ffenitt'i'O ; ceu ca'ru car'nis,
cap'ra ca'pne, nu'bes nu'bis ; genus est mulie'bre.
1. Nouns Masculine excepted.
Mds'cula no'mina in -a* dicun'tur mul'ta viro'rum :
ut, scri'ba, as'secla, scur'ra, et ra'bula, lix'a, lanis'ta.
Mds'cula, Grceco'rum qudt declmd'tw prl'md
fiin'dit in -as, et in -es ; 9 et ab ll'lts qudt per a fzTmt:
ut sa'trapas sa'trapa, athle'tes athle'ta. 10 Legun'tur
mascula i'tem, ver'res, nata'lis, aqua'lis : lib ds'sZ
nd'iai ut, centus'sis : conjiin'ge lle'nis, et or'bis,
cal'lis, cau'lis, fol'lls, col'lis, men'sis, et en'sis,
fus'tis, fu'ms, cen'chris, pa'ms, cri'nis, et ig'ms ;
cassis, fas' cis, tor'ris, sen'tis, pis'cis, et un'guis ;
et ver'mis, Tec'tis, pos'tis : socie'tur et ax'is. 11
inanimate things) is regulated by the termination. Thus, by the Special
Rule for the ending, pas'ser, a sparrow, cor'vus,a raven, ce'tus, a whale,
are masculine ; whilst vul'pes, a fox, fe'lls, a cat, a'quilS, an eagle, are
feminine ; although each includes both the male and fe'male. The names
however of several animals, in which the difference of sex is not always
instantly apparent, are to be excepted : such, for example, as tal'pa, a
mole, da'ma, a deer, pei/dix, a partridge, li'max, a snail, of doubtful
gender : vei/mis, a worm, le'6, a lion, mus, a mouse, del'plnn, a dolphin,
masculine : ca'nis, a dog or bitvk, bos, a cow or ox, sus, a hog, common
of two genders, that is, both masculine and feminine.
8 Though this Rule holds good in most instances, yet the names of
wdmeii, as Glyce'rium, Glycery, must be excepted : to these, also, may
be added, the names of ships, and of gems.
9 As tia'ras, a turban or sash for the head ; aci'naces, a scymitar or
faulchion. In Greek, both these nouns are of the first declension ; but
in Latin, the former is of the first decle'nsion, and the latter of the third.
10 To these exceptions in -a, add ne'pa, a scorpion ; also, the proper
name A'dria or Ha'driS, the Adriatic sea or gulf : as being of the mas-
culine gender.
11 In like manner must be excepted cu'cumls, cucumber, molai'Ts, a
mill-stone, or'clus, a sort of herb, also ajiih ; with some dthers.
( 113 )
Mas' ciila in -er ;t ceu, ven'tgr ; in -<5s.t vel -VLB ; ut, lo'gos,
an'nus.
F&mXnei at generis siint, ma'ter, hu'mus, do'mus, al'vus,
et co'lus, et quartos pro fruc'tu f 1'cus, acus'^we,
por'ticus, at'que tri'bus, soc'rus, nu'rus, et ma'nus, I'dus :
hue a'nus ddden'da est, hue mys'tlca van'uus Idc'chi.
Hisjurigds -os in -usf verten'tift Grcu'ca : papy'rus,
anti'dotus, cds'tus, diplithon'gus, bys'sus, abys'sus,
crystal'lus, sy'nodus, sapphi'rus, ere'mus, et Arc'tus :
cum muftis 8,' Kit, quce nunc perscrfbere Ionium est. 1 *
2. Nouns Neuter excepted.
Neutrnm no'men in -e,* si giy'nit -is ; ut ma're, re'te :
et_ quot in -on,t per -i 13 flex 'a le gas ; ut bai/biton, dd'de.
Est neutrum hippo'manest genus, et neutrum cacoe'thes : lv
et vi'rus, pe'lagus : lb neutrum mo do, mas modo, vu.rgus.
3. Nouns of the Doubtful Gender excepted.
Incer'ti gc'nerls siint tal'pa, et da'ma, cana'lis,
et cy'tisus, ba'lanus, clu'nis, fi'nis, peiiiis, am'ms,
pam'pmus, et cor'bis, Im'ter, tor'quis, spe'cus, an'guis,
pro mor'bo fi'cus, fl'ci dans, at'que phase'lus,
le'cythus, dc a'tomus, gros'sus, pha'riis, et paradi'sus. 16
f The syllables -er and -os in this line being in themselves short, al-
though long by position in the verse, I have set a dagger to mark this
circumstance, that the learner may not confound them with -er and -os-
of the second Special Rule, from which they are quite different in sound.
Many, however, make no distinction in the pronunciation between -er
and er, nor between -os and -os I
12 Such as dialec'tus, a dialect or manner of speech, me'thodus, a.
method or mode, peri'odus, a period or perfect sentence.
13 Although the scanning of the verse before us requires this i to be
short, yet final t, of the ge'nitive singular of the second declension, is
always long. Such examples as e for in the preceding line, a for a iix
the first verse of the First Exception to the First Spe'cial Rule, and i for
1 here, with many others that might be named, detract greatly from the
me'rits of these Rules.
14 Al'so, though occurring less frequently, nepen'thes, buglosa ; and
pa'naces, all-heal, a sort of herb, are neuter : and several dthers.
15 The two nouns, sex'us, sex, and spe'cus, a den or lur king-place, are
nften of the neuter gender : but the fdrmer, especially when of the fourth
decle'nsion, is perhaps more prdperly masculine ; and the latter, (as may
be seen in the next exception) is of doubtful gender, being sometimes
masculine, and sometimes fe'minine, as well as neuter.
16 To these may be added carTaasus, cambric or lawn, also sail-cloth^
which, in the singular number, is either fe'minine or masculine j and, ia
114 )
4. Nouns of the Common of two Genders excepted.
Compo'situm a ver'bo dans -a,* commune duo'rum cst :
Graju'gena a gig no, agri'cola a co'lo, id ad' vena mon'strdnt
a venio : dd'de se'nex, auri'ga , et ver'na, soda'lis,
va'tes, extor'ris, patrue'lis, per-^^-duel'lis,
affTnls, ju'vems, tes'tis, ci'vis, ca'nis, hos'tis.
SECOND SPECIAL RULE.
NOUNS INCREASING WITH THE ACUTE ACCENT ON THE PENULT
OP THE GENITIVE CASE ARE FEMININE.
^ crescen'tls pZnTil'timd si geniti'vl
syllaba. acii'ta sondt, ve'liit hcec, pi'etas pieta'tis,
vlr'tus vlrtu'tis, mon'strdnt, genus est mulle'bre l7
1. Nouns Masculine excepted.
Mds'culd dlcun'tur tnftnosyl'lala no'mina qua? dam :
sal, sol, ren, et splen, Car, Ser, vir, vas va'dis, as, mas,
bes, Cres, prtes, et pes, glis gll'ris ha bens geriitivo ;
mos, flos, ros, et Tros, mus, dens, mons, pons, si mid et fons ;
seps pro serperite, et gryps, Thrax, rex, grex gre'gis, et
Phryx. 18
Mds'culd sunt e'tldm polysyl'lala in -n ; ^, Acarnan,
li'chen, et del'phm : le et in -6 signdritia corpus ;
ut, le'o, curcu'lio : sic se'mo, ter'nio, ser'mo.
the plural number, neuter : palum'bes, a pigeon, is likewise a noun of
doubtful gander ; in Virgil, however, it is feminine, conse'ntingly with
the First Special Rule.
17 To this Rule, of course, belong all nouns whereoT the penult of the
genitive case (increasing) is sharp ; whether the syllable be long or
short. Thus res, genitive, re'I, a thing, grus, genitive, grQ'is, a crane,
increase sharp, (although the penult of the genitive be short,) as well as
di'es, genitive, die'I, a day, or Us, genitive, li'tis, strife, which have the
penult of the genitive case long.
18 To these masculines add lar, a fire-side or household god, sa'lar, a
trout, vol'vOx, a worm called a vine fritter, and some few others.
J9 The words H'chen, and del'phin, are (properly speaking) dissyllables,
rather than polysyllables ; but by " poljteyTlaba," m the prece'ding verse
we are to understand words of more than one syllable. Hence the Rule
applies to such dfsr-yllables as gno'mon, the stile of a dial, pai'an, a song
or hymn to Apollo, as well as to the trisyllables at'tagen, a snips, and
Acar'nun-* a man of Acarndnia..
( 115 )
Mas ciila in -er, -or, el -6s : ceii, cra'ter, con'ditor, he'ros :
his, tor'rens, 90 nefrens, o'riens 21 conjun'ge, cliens'que ;
at'que bi'dens mstrumen'tum, cum plurilus in -dens:
dd'de gi'gas, e'lephas, a'damas, Garamas'<?w, tapes'^we,
at'que le'bes, sic et mag'nes,* 1 unum'que meri' di-
es no men quint &: et qu(e compdnuritiir, ab ds'se,
nt do'drans, se'mis : 23 Jungdn'tur mds'cula, Sam'ms,
hy'drops, et thorax : jun'gds quoque mds'cula, ver'vex,
phce'nix, et bom'byx pro vermiculo: At'tumen ex his
sunt mulie'lre genus, Sy'ren, nec'non so'ror, iix'or.
2. Nouns Neuter excepted.
Sunt neutrfflla et hoic monosyl'labci no'mina ; mel, fel,
lac, far, ver, a^s, cor, vas, va'sis, os os'sis, et 6'ris,
rus, thus, jus, crus, piis. Et in -al polysyfltiba, in -ar'^we, 94
ut t ca'pital, la'quear. Neiitr um a'lec, -lex mulie'lre.
3. Nouns of the Doubtful Gender excepted.
Sunt du'lii ge'neris, scrobs, ser'pens, bubo, ru'dens, grus,
per'dix, lynx, li'max, stirps pro trurico, pe'dis et calx :
dd'de di'es ; nu'mero tan turn mas es'to secun'do.
4. Nouns of the Common of two Genders excepted.
Sunt commu'ne^ pa'rens, auctor'^z^, m'fans, adoles'cens,
dux, Il'lex, h^'res, ex'lex : a fron'te cred'ta,
ut, bifrons : cus'tos, bos, fur, sus, at'que sacer'dos.
20 In like manner of the masculine gender, con'fluens, a meeting of
tioo rivers, pro'fluens, a stream or current, re'fluens, the refluent tide ;
with several other nouns resembling the present participle of verbs.
ai At the same time, too, oc'cidens, the west, is to be exempted as
masculine. This word (as well as o'riens) is properly a present parti-
ciple ; the substantive sol, the sun, being understood.
>B To these might justly be added several dther Greek nouns in -cs,
making -t'tis in the ge'uitive case ; as, her'pes, a cutaneous eruption.
83 In se'mis, (which is a contraction for se'mias ; as do'drans is, for
de'est qua'drans,) the final syllable is long by crasis. And here it may
be seasonably ndticed that all the derivatives of un'cia, an ounce, as well
as those of as, a pound, are masculine ; as quin'cunx, five ounces,
eep'tunx, seven ounces.
2 * This exception applfes to dissyllables (as cal'car, a spur}, as well
as to pdlysyllables prdperly so called : but sa'liir, a trout^ or young
sdlmon, (as we remarked in note 18 above) is masculine.
( 116 )
THIRD SPECIAL RULE.
NOUNS INCREASING GRAVE IN THE PENULT OP THE GENITIVE
ARE MASCULINE.
No men, crescen'tis penul'timd si genitim
sit gravis, ut san'guis geniti'vo san'guiuis, est mas.
1. Nouiis Feminine excepted.
FcemZnei ge'neris sit hyperdissyllabon In -do,
quod -dims, dt'que In -go, quod ddt -gmis, in geriifivo :
id ti'bt dnlce'dofaciens .dulce'dinis, Idque
mon'strdt compa'go compa'ginis : dd'fic& vir'go,
gran' do, f 1'des, com'pes, te'ges, et se'ges, ar'bor, hyems'^we .*
sic chla'mys, et sin'don, Gor'gon, i'co", et Ama'zon. 25
Gr&'cula in -as,t vel in 3a$fhffta; ut, lam'pas, 28
cas'sis, cus'pis : 27 Ttem mu'lier, pe'cus et pe'cudls dans :
his for'fex, pel'lex, ca'rex, sVmiil dt'que supel'lex,
appen'dix, hys'trix, coxen'dix, dd'de filix'g'we. 94
2. Nouns Neuter excepted.
Est neutrd'le ge'nus sig'ndns rem non animatam
no' men in -a, ut proble'niaj -en, ut 6'men; -ar, ?2zju'bar;
ur t dans,
ui je'cur ; -us,t ut o'nfis ; -put, ut oc'ciput. At'tamen ex his
Qnds'cula sunt pec-'ten, fur'fur. Sunt neu'trd, cada'ver,
ver'ber, 1'ter, su'ber, pro fun' go tu'ber, et u'ber,
gin'giber, et la'ser, ci'cer et pi'per, dt'que papa'ver,
et si'ser : his dd'dds neu'tra , se'quor, mar'mor, ado^we, 29
dt'que pe'cus qudn'do ipvcfaisfa'cit In geniti'vo.
25 To these may likewise be joined ae'don, a nightingale, and hal'cyon,
a kinc/fisher, with a few others.
2 This exception extends only to nouns in -as, making -adis (or -ados)
in the gdnitive case : for Greek nouns in -as making -alls, as bu'ceras,
liiice'ratis, fenugreek, are neuter ; save a'nas, a duck, which is of the
common gender.
27 To this exception, of course, beldng such words as poe'sis, poe'seos,
poesy or pot try, metSmor'phosis, metamorpho'seos, a transformation:
these, however, sometimes take the Latin inflexion, and have simply -is,
in the genitive ; falling, as to their gender, under the First Special Rule.
28 The following, likewise, are feminine : fu'lix, a coot, ISgo'pus, the
white partridge, len'dix, a maggot, po'lythrix, maidenhair, to'mex, &
cord or rope, and mer'ges, a handful: to which some add bac'cSr,
ploughman' s-nard, but this noun is properly neuter ; sdmetimes, how-
ever, it is written bac'oaris in the nominative case, and is then fe'minine.
29 This noun increases either long, or short, in the genitive case, or
3. Nouns of the Doubtful Gender excepted.
Sunl dulil generis, car'do, mar'go, ci'nis, o'bex,
for'ceps, pu'mex, im'brex, cor'tex, puTvis, adeps'^z/f? :
ad'de cii'lex, na'trix, et o'nyx cum pro'le, silex'quS ; 30
qudm'xls h&c me'llus vidt mds'culd dicier u'sus.
4. Nouns Common excepted.
Commu'nts ge'neris siint is'td ; vi'gil, pu'gil, ex'ul,
pra'sul, ho mo, ne'mo, mar'tyr, Li'giir, au'gur, et Ar'cas,
antis'tes, mi'les, pe'des, inter'pres, co'mes, bospes;
sic a'les, pr^'ses, prin'ceps, au'ceps, e'ques, ob'ses, 31
at'que alia a ver'lls quce nomina mul'ta credn'tur ;
tit, con'jux, ju'dex, vin'dex, o'pifex, et arus'pex. 32
ADJECTIVES.
Adjecti'va unam duntux'ut huben'tia vo'cem ;
nt, fe'lix, audax., retlnent genus om'ne sub u'na :
sub ge'mind sz voce caddnt, velut om'ms, et om'ne,
voxcoinmu'ne du'um pri'dr cst, vox alter a neutrum:
at si tres variant voces ; sa'cer ilt, sa'cra, sac'rum ;
vox prt'ma est mds, dl'terafcemlna, ter'tia neutrum.
At siint qua* flex' u pro pe substantfva vocd'res^
adjec.ii va tamen ndturd usuque reper'td :
td'lia sunt, pau'per, pu'ber, cum de'gener, u'ber,
et di'ves, locuples, sos'pes, co'mes, dt'que super'stes :
cum panels a His, quce lectio Jus td doce'bit.
rather, perhaps, it Always increases long, and cdnsequently ouj^lit to have
"been classed tinder tlie Sdcond Special Rule : a'dus from which comes
the genitive a'doris with short pdnult, is of course neuter, falling under
the same exception as o'niis. The adjective ado'reus seems to owe de-
riva'tion to a'ddr, ado'ris.
30 With these may be conjoined ra'mex, a sort of abdominal swelling
or tumour, rii'mex, sorrel, va'rix, a swoln vein, and sty'riix, a sort of
gum ; though in the best authors they are generally masculine.
31 To these may be added the Greek noun a'nas, a duck or drake, as
being both masculine and feminine : a"lso, qua'drupes, a four-fooled
beast.
32 Several verbal nouns falling iinder this head, as to gender, end in
-ccps, from ca'pio, / take, as, mil'nlceps, a burgess ; in -cen, from ca'nu,
/ sing, as, coi/nTccn, a horn-lloiver ; in -fex, from fa'clo, / make, as,
Sr'tlfex, an artificer : and in -spex, from spe'cio, I view, as, aas'pex, a
diviner by birds r with mlny in -dex, as in'dex, an indicator.
( 118 )
HCEC pr&'prium quen'dam si'biflex'um adsls'cere gait' dent :
campes'ter, vo lucer, ce'leber, ce'ler, at'que salu'ber :
jun'gc pedes'ter, eques'ter, ct a'cer : jun'ge palus'ter,
ac a'lacer, sylves'ter : at h&c tu sic varlalis ;
Inc ce'ler, h&c ce'leris neu'tro hoc ce'lere : aut a liter sic ;
Idc at'que hose ce'leris, rur'sum hoc ce'lere cst till neutriim.
OF HETEROCLITE OR IRREGULAR NOUNS.
Qua? ge'nus aut fiex'um variant, qucecurique nova to
ritii defi'ciunt superant've, Heteroc'lita suntd. 33
33 frregular Ncuns are of three different sorts or kinds : I. Variant.
II. Hedundant. III. Defective. And these three sorts admit each of
several subdivisions : as, 1 . Variant in Gender. 2. Variant in Flexion.
3. Variant in Meaning. Again, 1. Redundant in Termination. 2. Re-
dundant in Gender. 3. Redundant in Declension. And, 4. Redun-
dant in Case. Likewise, 1. Defective in Number. A'lid, 2. Defective
in Case.
I. VARIANTS.
I. KOUNS VARYING THEIR GENDER MAY BE CLASSED AS FOLLOWS t
1. Nouns Masculine in the Singular Number ', and Neater in the
Plural.
Aver'nus, a lake of Campania,
Dm'dyiniiS, a hill of Phryyia,
Is'marus, a hill of Thrace,
Mse'ualus, a hill of Arcadia,
Pangne'us, a promontory of Thrace,
Tte'narus, a promontory of Laconia,
Tiir'tarus, the abode of the dead,
Tayge'tiis^ a hill of Laconia.
2. Nouns Feminine in the Singular Number, and Neuter in the Plural.
Car'basus, sail-cloth, \ PCr'gamus, Troy, \ Supel'lex, household stuff.
3. Nouns Neuter in the Singular Number, and Masculine in the
Plural.
Ai/gos, a city of Greece, \ Cde'liim, heaven, \ Elysium, the Elysian realm.
4. Nouns Neuter in the Singular Number, and Feminine in the Plural.
Bal'ncum, a bath, fi'piilum, a banquet,
Dell'ciiim, a delight, Nuu'dlnum, iRdrket~u<jLy.
Of these, bdl'neu-m is either feminine or neuter in the plural number.
5. Nouns Masculine in the Singular, and Masculine or Neuter in the
Plural.
JS'cus, a jest, \ Lo'ciis, a place, \ SlTbilus, a hiss.
Of these, ju'cus and locus were at first declined regularly : but there
were dlso two nouns, jo'ciim and IS'cum, of the neuter gender, which
went at length into disuse in the singular number ; and the dther two,
into disuse in the plural. Yet, even in the plural number, lo'ci may be
6sed in the sense of points of position : and the neuter uoun rfbilum is
found in several authors.
Nouns changing tlicir gender and declining.
H(C ge'nus, ac flex'um, pdr'tlm varidriiia c^ms ;
Per'gamus In numero plurd'li Per'gama gig nit.
D at prior his nu merits neu'trum genus, alter u
ras'trum cum fraj'no, fi'lum, si' mid dt'que capis'trum :
Ar'gos item, et coelum, siint sm'guld neutrd : sed au'di^
mds'cida duntdx'dt cde'los vdcttd'ris, et Ar'gos :
frte'na sed et frge'nos, quopdc'to et cat'terafor'mdnt.
Pluralls nu'merus ge'nus his solet dd'dere utrum'que ;
si'bilus dt'que jo'ciis, lo'cus. His quo'que plurlma jun'gds.
6. Nouns Neuter in ike Singular, and Masculine or Neuter in thz
Plural.
Capis'trum, a Miter or headstall, I Fra'num, the lit of a bridle,
Fi'lum, a thread or string, \ Ras'triim, a rake or harrow.
Ii: NOUNS VARYING THEIR FLECTION, ARE :
1 . Vas, a vessel, which is of the third declension, in the singular
number ; and of the second declension, in the plural.
2. Ju'gerurn, an acre of ground, which is of the second declension, in
the singular number ; and of the third declension, in the plural.
III. NOUNS VARYING THEIR MEANING IN THE PLURAL, ARE :
Singular. Plural.
ffi'dSs, a temple,
co'pia, plenty,
facul'tas, opportunity,
fi'iiis, an end,
fcrtu'nS, fortune,
fur'fur, bran,
mos, a custom,
o'pis, aid,
sal, salt,
je'des, a house,
cS'pi^, forces,
faculta'tes, means,
fi'nes, boundaries,
fortu'nEe, possessions,
fur'f tires, scurf,
mo'res, manners,
5'pes, wealth,
sfi'les, flashes of wit.
To these might several dthers be added : with many, iudee'd, which
have very different significations e'ven in the same number.
II. REDUNDANTS.
NOUNS REDUNDANT MAY BE CLASSED AS FOLLOWS :
1. Nouns Hedundant in Termination on/// : such, for example, as,
ar'bor vtl ar'bos, a tree ; ho'nor vel ho'nos, honor ; la'bor vel la'bos,
labor ; le'por vel le'pos, mirth ; vo'mer vel vo'mis, a plough-share.
2. Nouns Redundant in Termin&tion, with change of Gender : thus,
ba'culus vel ba'ciilum, a staff; Ijar'bitiis vel bar'bitos *el bai-'blton, a
harp ; si'bilus vel si'bilum, a hissing ; I'lios t;e/riioii oe/I'lium, the city
of Troy ; mu'gil vel mu'gilis, a mullet ; and a host besides.
3. Nouns Redundant in Gender under the same Termination : as,
pe'cus, pe'ciidls, /emmine ; pe'cus, pe coris, neuter.
4. Nouns Redundant in Declension only: as, lau'rus, a lay-tree or
(120)
Nouns Defective.
Qua sPquitTir, man'c a est ca'sii numero'^e, prdpagS.
I. Apto'ta ; or, Nouns undeclined.
Quce nullum, variant casum ; nt, fas, ml, m'hil, m'star ;
mnl'ta et In -u, tfm&l -\ ; lit sunt h&c, cornu'^/e?, g&mi'quS ;
sic gum'ml, frii'gi : sic Tem'pe, tot, quot, ct om'nes
a trl'bus dd cen'tum nu'rncros, apto'ta vocabis.
laurel, of the second or the fourth declension : qui'es, rest, and re'quies,
repose, of the third or fifth declension.
5. Nouns Redundant both in Termination and Declension : as>,
del'phlnj a dolphin, of the third, and delphi'nus,a dolphin, of the second ;
t-'lep-Tls, an elephant, of the third, and elephan'tus, an elephant, of the
second.
6. Nouns Redundant in Termination and Declension, with change
of Gender : as, oi'ther, the sky, of the third, and se'thera vel ce'thra, the
sky, of the first ; men'da a fault or blemish, of the first, and meii'dum, a
fault or blemish, of the second ; cra'ter, a goblet, of the third, and cra-
tu'ra, a goblet, of the first.
7. Nouns Redundant in Case, or differently varied in the same De-
clension : thus, je'cur, the liver, ge'nitive, je'coris vel jecfnoris, of 1he
liver ; a'dor,fine wheat, genitive, a'doris vel ado'ris, of fine wheat ; ti'gns,
a tiger, ge'nitive, ti'gris vel ti'gridis.
8. Nouns Redundant in one Case only, and of a different Declen-
sion : as, ancl'lia, the sacred bucklers, genitive plural, anci'lium vel
ancl'llorum, of the sacred bucklers : of which sort are the names of
feasts : for example, Saturna'Ka, beasts dedicated to Saturn ; Baccha-
nfi'lia, Feasts dedicated to Bacchus ; QuInqua'trTa, Feasts dedicated to
J\Iintrva .- this last has -trns vel-tribus in the dative and ablative cases
plural.
III. DETECTIVES.
DEFECTIVE XOUNS MAY BE CLASSED AS FOLLOWS :
1. Nouns Undeclined in both Numbers: as, pon'do, a pound-weight,
nr pound s-u' eight guni'im, ffwn or gums ; with some adjectives ; as,
ne'quam, wicked , fru'gl, thrifty.
3. Nouns Undeclined in the Singular Number, but Declined in the
Plural: as, cor'nu, a horn.
4. Nouns Undeclined in the Singular Number, and Wanting the
Plural: as sina'pi, mustard; gau'sape, frize.
5. Nouns Declined in the Singular Number, but which Want the
Plural: as, ne'mo, nobody; san'gins, blood; jiiveii'tus, youth; se'-
nitim, old age ; si'tis, thirst : with most proper names of men, women,
heathen gods and goddesses, angels ; names of places (save those which
are of the plural number only, Ar'gos exce'pted) ; the names of virtues,
vices, arts and sciences, me'tala, liquids, diseases, spices, and plants : the
names of abstract qualities, such as colour, taste, touch, condition ; and
a great many more words which, by their import, are confined to the
singular number; as, butyrum, litter; glu'ten, glue; fl'mus, dung.
II. Monopto'ta ; or Nouns declined with one Case,
monopto'ton no' men, cut vox cci'dlt u'na :
ceu, noc'tu, na'tii, jus'su ; Injus'su, sl'mul as'tu,
prom'ptu, permis'sii : plurd li le'gimus as'tus :
le'gimiis mfi'cias, sed vox ea sold reper'ta est.
III. Dipto'ta ; or Nouns declined with two Cases,
Snnt dipto'ta, qui'bTis duplex fie xu'r a reman sit :
jit fors for'te da bit sex'to, spon'tls quo' que spon'te ;
ju'ge'ris et sex'to dut ju'pfere ; ver'beris an tern
ver'bere : suppe" tisie quar'to quo' que suppe tias dant ;
Yet some nouns which, in En'glish, admit se'ldom, and others ne'ver, of
a plural, are found of the plural number in Latin. Such, for example,
as the following :
fliahf, IpTiuftS, phlegm,
smoke, jpi x pitch,
mere nothing,] qui'es, rest,
barley, rus,* the country,
honey, sol,* the sun,
mint, so'lihn,
dread,
a murmur,
new wine,
uis,
re'vura,
rquK,"
bi'lis,
cX'ro,*
ce'rS,
cho'lerS,
cru'or,
e'bur,
brass,
age,
water,
Ifu'mus,
ihi'lum,
flesh,
wax,
choler,
gore,
ivory,
elec'trum, amber,
fame,
the ground,
sul'phur, brimstone,
ta'lio, retaliation,
tel'lus, the earth,
thus,* frankincense,
\ thy'mum, thyme.
mel*
men'thS,
jme'tus,
mQr'miir,
imus'tum,
jpauper'tas, poverty,
jpax, peace,
far, bread-corn, \
The nouns marked with an Asterisk (in the abdve list) were in habitual
use in the plural number : some of them in all the six cases, as, a'qua,
water ; dthers dnly in the nominative, accusative, and vocative cases,
as, rus, the country; mel, honey; far, meal : others again in every
case exce'pt the genitive, as so!, the sun. The nouns not marked with
an asterisk occur very rdrely in the plural number, and few of them in
more than one termination : as, de' vis, to or by ages ; mus'ta, new wines.
On the dther hand, some nouns, which admit of a singular number in
En'gfish, are se'ldom or never used in the singular number in Latin :
such, for example, as H'beri, children ; nu'gce, trifles.
And many nouns, which, in our language, admit of a plural, have prd-
perly no plural number in Latin ; such as the fdllowing :
ae'ther, the sky, j le'thum, death, I pon'tus, the sea,
hu'mus, the ground, \ lu'es, a plague, \ vi'rus, poison.
6. Nouns wanting the Singular Number, but which are Regular in
the Plural: as cupe'dtre, sweet' meats ; pena'tes, household gods ; ar'ma,
weapons of war. To these might be added nifoiy names of places, pedple,
feasts, and games.
7. Nouns wanting one Case or more : as, \i& } force ; opis, of wealth
or power ; promp'tu, in readiness.
( 122 )
tantun'dem dut tanti'dem, s?miil im'petis et dai
ale repe'tunda'rum repetun'dis. Yer'beris al&ro
qud'tuor in numero cd'sus cum ju'gere ser'vdnt.
IY. Tripto'ta ; or, Nouns declined with three Cases.
Tres qui'biis inftec'tls cd'sus, tripto'ta vocdn'tilr :
c o'pis cst nds'tr<x,fer o'pem, legis, cit'que o'pe dig'niis,
fiec'te pre'ci, citfque pre'cem pe'tlt el pre'ce blaridus aml'cam.
fit tan' turn recto fru'gls cti'ret, et ditio'nis :
Integra vox vis est, nl'sl de'sitfor'te dciliviis :
/ns vi'cis at'qu vi'cem etjiirigas vT'ce ; plus quffque plu'ris,
plus Jia'let et quarto : His numerus da'tur omnibus alter.
Y. Nouns defective in the Plural Number.
Prop'rici curicta no'tes^ qui'bus est natu'ra coer'cens,
ulu'rima nc fuerlnt : alia ct ti'bi multci legcntl
occur' rent , numerum raro excedcn'tid primum.
YI. Nouns defective in the Singular Number.
Masciila sunt tan'tum numero conten'ta sccvndd,
ina'nes, majo'res, cancel'li, li'beri, et an'tes,
len'des, ct le'mures, fas'ti, sir.iul at'que mino'res,
cum ge'niis cisslg'ndnt nata'les : dd de pena'tes :
ct locci plTirali, qud'les G&bn'que Locri'ywe;
et quabcun'que le 'gas passim si'mllis ratio nis.
Hcec sunt fceml net ge'nerls, numer7guc sccun'dl;
exu'viffi, pha'ler^, grates'ywe, manu'bia, et I'dus,
fin'tTae, et indu'ci^; s?mul instdite que rmn&'que ;
excuibife, no'nie, nu'gee, tricseque, calen'dte,
quisquT'liee, ther'mse, cunse, dT'r?e,
fe'rise, et Infe'riee ; sic pTirmti&q
re'tia st+nan'tes, et val'vae,
nup'tlse ?tem, et lac'tes : ddddn'tTir The bre et
quod ge'niis inve'iiids et no'mlna plu'ra Idcorum.
Rd'rius hafc pr?nw pin ralla nentra It-gun tur ;
moe'ma, cum tes'quis, prgecor'dia, lus'tra fcrd'rum,
ar'ma, mapa'lia ; sic bella'ria, niu'nla, cas'tra :
fii'nus jus'ta petit, petit ct sponsa'lla vlr'go;
ros'tra disertus amdt, piicr'i que crepun'dia ges'tant,
infantes' que co ITtnt cuna'bula : consulit ex'ta
augur ; & absolvent su peris efta'ta recax'tat:
( 123 )
fes'ta de'um poterunt, ceu Bacchana'lia, jurigl :
quod si plu'rd le'ges, ll'cethdc quoque elds' se repo'nas.
Nouns declined after both the Second and Fourth
Declension.
Hcec si'mul et qudr'tl flex us sunt, dtque seciin'di :
lau'rus e'nlm lau'rijftfgft et lau'rus genltivo ;
sic quer'cus, pi'nus, prof rue tu dc ar'bore fi'cus,
sic co'lus, atque pe'nus ; cor'nus quarido arbor hale'tiir ;
sic la'cus, dt'que do'mus ; licet hcec nee iibique recur' rant.
His qud'que plu'ra leges , qua: pris'cis ju're rellnquas.
RULES
FOR THE
PRETERPERFECT TENSE,
AND
SUPINES OF VERBS.
I. Of the Preterperfect Tense of Simple Verbs.
FIRST CONJUGATION.
As a' vi.
As In pr&sen'ti perfec'tumfor'mxt in a'vi:
ut no nas na'vi, vo'cito v5'citas vocita'vi.
De'me la'vo la'vi, ju'vo ju'vi, ne'xoque nex'ui, 34
et se'co quod se'cul, ne'co quod ne'cui, ml'c5 verbiim
quod mi'cui, pli'co quod pli'cul, fri'co quod fri'cui dat:
&lc do'mo quod d5'mui, to'no quod to'nul, so'no ver'bw<n
quod so nui, ere po quod cre'pui, ve'to quod ve'tiii ddt,
dt'que cu'bo cubui : raro hcec formdn'tur in -a'vi.
Do das riie de'dl, sto stas forma' re ste'tl vult.
s Prono<inccd as a dissyllable by Syni-resis ; the verse requiring -ui
to be a diphthong, else the final -i to be elided before the initial -e ol the
next line.
G2
( 124 )
SECOND CONJUGATION.
s Ui.
Es m pr&sen'ti perfec turn format -m dans:
iit nfgreo mg^res, m'grui : ju'beo cx'tipe jiis'si :
sor'beo sor'bui ha bet, sor'ps! qud'gue ; mul'ceo mui'sl
lu'ceo vult lux'!, se'deo se'di, video'^wt?
vult vi'di : sed pran'deo pran'd!, stri'deo stri'd!,
sua'deo sua'si, ri'deo ri'si, ha'bet ar'deo et ar'si.
QufTtiior his Infra gemlnStur syl'laba pri'ma :
pen'deo ndm'que pepen'di, mor'deo vuttque momor'd!;
spon'de habe're spopon'di, ton'deo vTdl'quv toton'di.
L vel r arite -geo si stct, -geo ver'lltur m -si.
ur'geo ut ur'si ; mul'geo iTJul'si, dat quoque mul'xi ;
fri'geo frixl, lu'geo lux'i, habSl au'geo et aux'i.
Dat fle'o fles fle'vl, le'o les le'vi, m'dequv nd'tum
de'leo dele' vi ; ple'o pies ple'vi, ne'o ne'vi.
A ma'neo man.'siforma'tur ; tor'qireo tor'sl,
hffi'reo vult h^'si. Ve'o/^ -vi ut fer'veo fer'vi ;
m'veo, et iride sacum pos'cit conm'veo -m'vi
et -mx'I : ci'eo ci'vi, vieoque vie'vl.
THIRD CONJUGATION.
Various.
Ter'tia pr&te'ritumfor'ma'bit ut hie mcinifes'tum.
Bo fit bi: ut lam'bo lam'bi : scri'bo excipe scrip's!,
et nu'bo nup'si : anti'quum ciim'bo cu'biii dat.
Co fit ci : ut vm'c5 vl'ci : vult par'co peper'ci
et par'ci : di'co drx'I, du'co quo'que dux'I.
Do fit di : ut man'do man'dl : sed scm'do sci'di dat,
fin'do fidi, fun'do fu'dl, tun'do tuiudi'que ;
pen'do pepen'di, ten'do teten'<3ii,jun'ge cado'^w^.
quod cecidlformat; pro ver'bero c^'do ceci'dl:
ce'do pro disce'dere, si've locum da're, ces'si :
va'do, ra'do, 1^'do, lu'do, di'vido, trii'do,
clau'do, plau'do, ro'do, ex -do semper fa ciunt -si.
Go fit xi : ut jun'go jun'xi : sed 7 an'te -go vult -sl 9
ut spar'g5 spar's! : le'go legi, et a'gofd'cit e'g! :
dat tan'go te tig!, pun'go pun'x! pupug!'^^^ ;
dat fran'go fre'gi, pe'pig! vult pa'go pacts 'cor - y
pan'go c'tldm pe'gi, sed pan'xi md'luit u'sits.
( 125 )
Ho fit xi : tra'ho ceu trax'i do'cet, et vtfho vex'I.
ILdfit -ul : co'lo ceu co'lui : psal'lo ex'cipe cum p,
e.t sal'lo sine p, ndm -li ti'li format utrum'que.
Ddt vel'lo vel'li, vul'si quo'que ; fal'lo fefel'll,
cel'lo pro f ran 1 go, ce'culi, pel'lo pepuli'^we.
Mo fit -in : vo'mo ceu vo'mui : sed gmofa'cit e'mi,
co'mo pe'tit com'psi, pro'mo prom'psi : ad'jice de'md
quod format dem'psi, su'mo sum'psi, pre'mo pres'sl.
1$ d fit -vi : si'no ceu si'vi : tem'no ex'cipe tem'psi :
ddt ster'no stra'vi, sper'no spre'vi, li'no le'vi,
mter'dum If ni et Ifvi, cer'no quo'que cre'vi :
pjig'no, po'no, ca'no ; ge'nui, po'siii, ce'cini, ddnt.
Pofit -psi: lit scal'po scal'psi : rum'po ex'cipe ru'pi;
et stre'po quod format stre'pui, cre'po quod crepui ddL
Quo fit -qui : ut lin^uo li'qui : co'quo de'mito coxl.
'Roflt -vi : se'ro ceu pro plan' to et se'mlno, se'vi;
quod se'rui me'lius semper da bit, or'dino sig'ndns.
Vult ver'ro ver'ri et ver'si, u'ro us' si, ge'ro ges'si,
qute'ro qusesi'vl, te'ro trfvi, cur'ro cucur'ri.
So, velutl pro' bat arces'so, Inces'so, dt'que laces so,
forma lit -si'vi : sed tolle capes'so capes'si,
quod'que capessfvi f d'cit dt'que faces'so faces'sl,
et vi'so vi'si ; sed pm'so pm'sui hale'lit.
Sco/f^-vi: ut pas'co pa'vi : vult pos'co popos'ci ;
vult di'dicl dis'co, quex'i forma' re quinis'co.
To fit -ti : ut ver'to ver'ti sed sis'to note'tur
jjrofa'cio stare dctivum, ndm jure sti'ti ddt ;
ddt mit'to mfsi, pe'to vult forma' re petfvl;
ster'to ster'tui ha let, rae'to mes'sui: Ab -ec'to/fi -exi ;
Tit flec'to flex'i : nec'to ddt nex'iii, habet'que
nex'i ; etidm pec'to ddt pex'ui, ha bet quo'que pex'i.
"Voftt -vi: ut vol'vo vol'vi : vl'vo ex'cipe vix'i.
Xo/Ji -ui : ut mon'strdt tex'6, quod tex'ui hdbe'bit.
Fit -cio -ci : ut fa'cio fe'ci, ja'cio quo'que je'ci :
dntl'quum la'cio lex'I, spe'cio quo'que spex'I.
Fit -dio -di : ut fo'dio fo di : -Gio ceu fii'gio, -gl.
Fit -pio -pi : ut ca'plo ce'pi : cu'pio ex'cipe -pfvi,
et ra pio ra'piii, sa'pid sa'pui dt'que sapi'vi.
Fit -no ri : ut pa'rio pe'peri : -Tio -ssl, ge'mmdns s ;
ut qua'tio quas'si, quod vlx reperi'tur in usu.
Denlque -no fit -ui : ut sta'tuo sta'tui : ]->lu'o plu'vl
format, si've plul ; stru'o sed strux'i, fiu'o fliix'L,
(126)
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
ts 1 7 vi.
Ouar'tS. ddt -Is -Ivi : ut mon'strat sci'o scls ti'bt scl'vl.
Exci'pids ve'nio dans ve'ni, et ve 7 neo ve'nii ; 35
rau'cio rau'si, far'cio far'si, sar'cio sar'si,
se 7 pio sep'si, sen'tio sen's!, ful'cio ful'si,
hau'rio i'tem hau'sl, san'cio san'xi, vm'cio vm'xi ;
pro sdtto sa'lio sa'lui, et ami'cio ami'cui ddt. 35
II. Of the Preterperfect Tense of Compound Verbs.
Pros terilum ddt fdem sim'plex et compositi viim :
ut do'cui edo'ciii mon'strat : sed syl'lala^ semper
qudm simplex gemlnat, compos to non gemmfftur ;
prceter'quam trt'bus his, prseciir'ro, excur'ro, repun'go ;
dt'que a do, dls'co, sto, pcs'co, r7te cred'tls.
A plfco compositum cum sub vel nomine, ut Is'ta,
sup'plico, multi'plico, gau' det forma re -plica' vi :
ap 7 plico, com'plico, re'plico, et ex'plico -ui quoque for'mdnt.
Qudm'vis vult o'le5 sim'plex o'liii, td'men In'de
quod' vis compositum mellusfdrmalit -ole'vi;
slm'plicis at for main re'dolet se'quitur, subolet'^we.
Compo'slta d pun' go forma biint om'nid pun'xi ;
vult u'num pu'pugi, Interdum'que repun'go repun'xi.
NStum d do, qudn'do est Inflex'lo ter'tia, ut ad'do,
cre'do, e'd5, de'do, red'do, per'do, ab'do, vel 6b 7 do,
con'do, m'do, tra'do, pro'do, yen'do, -didi ; at u'num
abscon'do abscon'di. Natum d sto stas -stiti habe'btf.
Compound Verbs which change the first Vo'vvel into E.
Ver'ba hmc slmplicia * prcesen'tls prceteritfque,
&l compondn tur ; vocd'lem pri'mam in e mutant :
dam'no, lac'to, sa'cro, fai'lo, ar'ceo, trac'tS, fatis'cor,
can'do ve'tus, cap'to, jac'to, pa tier, gradior'^-.^e,
par'tio, car'po, pa'tro, scan'do, spar'go ; pario'/??^,
cu'jus natd per I dud, com'perit et re'perit, ddnt ;
cx'terd sed per -ui ; velut h&c, aperi're operl're.
A pas'co pa' vi tdn'tiim compos td noten'tur
35 Here ve'nii is read as a dissyllable by the figure called synaresis,
t>ing pronounced as if written ve'ni.
35 We have in this verse two proceleusma'tics (or feet of four short
syllables each) in place of two spondees.
( 127 )
hd-c duo, compes'co, dispes'co, -pes'cui hale'ri* :
caster a t ut epas'co, servd'liint sim'pUcis u'sum.
Compound Yerbs which change the first Yd we! into I.
Hcec, ha'beo, la'teo, salio, sta'tiio, ca'do, laVdo,
et tan'go, at'que ca'no, sic quee'ro, caVdo ceci'dT,
sic e'geo, te'neo, ta'ceo, sa'pio, rapid's/2,
si componci n'tur, xdcd'lem prl'mam in\ mu'tant:
ut ra'pio ra'pui eri'pio eri'pui : A ca'no nattiin
prcete'ritiim per -ui, ceii con'cino conci'nui, dat.
A pla'ceo sic displi'ceo ; sed sim'plicis u'sum
h&c duo, compla'ceo ciim perpla'ceo, Ivne ser' cant*
Composita a ver'Hs cai'co, &ai'to, a per u mutant :
id ti'bl demoristrant, concul'co, Incul'co, resui'to.
Composita a claii'do, qua'tio, la'vo, rejfciunt a :
id doctt a clau'do, occlii'do, exclu'do; a quatTo'^M?,
percu'tio, excu'tio ; d la/Yo, pro'luo, di'luo, nd'ta.
Compound Yerbs which change the first Yd we! of the Present
Tense into I, but which nevertheless change nothing in the
Preterperfect Tense.
Hcee si componas, a'g, e'mo, se'deo, re'go, fran'go,
et ca'pio, ja'cio, la'cio, spe'cio, pre'mo, pan'go,
vocd'lem prTmdm prcesen'tis in I sl'bi mutant^
prceterili nun'quam : ceu fran'go, refrm'go refre'gi :
d ca'pio, inci'pio Ince'pi. Red paii'ca noten'tur ;
ndm'que suum sim'plex per'ago sequitur, satago 7 ^^;
at'que db a'go, de'go ddt de'gi, co'go coe'gi ;
d re'go, sic per'go perrex'i ; vult quoque sur'g5
sun-exl ; media prcesen'tis syl'lciba adem'pta.
Composita d panVo re'tlnent a quatiior is'tH :
depan'go, oppan'go. circumpan'go, at'que repan'go.
Nil varldt fa'cio, nl'sl prcepo'slto prceeurite :
id docet olfa'clo, cum calfa'cio, inficio'^wt'.
A le'go nata* re, per, prte, sub, trans, ad, praseun't^
prcesen'tis ser'vdnt vdcd'lem : hi i c&'tera mutant ;
de qul'lus hd r c, intel'ligo, di'lijro, ne'gligo, tdriiiim
prceterltum -\ZIL\ fa ciunt ; reliqua om'nici -le'gi.
III. Of the Supines of Simple Yerbs.
JNunc ex prcete'rito dis'cds torm'ifre supl'num.
(128 )
Bi silt -turn su'mit : sic ndmque bi'bi bi'bitum///.
f 1 iy it -ctum : ut vl'cl vic'tum testa tur, et I'd
daws Ic'tum, fe'cl fac'tum, je'cl quo'que jac'tum.
Dl j7 -sum : ut vi'dl vls'um : quce'ddm gemindnt s ;
ut pan'dl pas'sum, sedi ses'sum, ddde sci'dl, quod
ddt scis'suin, dt'que fi'dl fls'sum, fo'di quo'que fos'sum.
Hzc e'^'am ddver'tds, quod syl'lala prTma siipi'nis,
qudm vult prceteritum gemind'rl, non gemma' tur :
id'que totoa'di dans ton'sum do'cet, dt'que ceci'dl
quod c^'suvn, et ce'cidi quod ddt ca'sum, at qua teten'dl
quod ten'sum et ten'tum, tu'tudi tiin'sum, dt'que de'di quod
ju're da'tum pos'cit ; mor'sum milt dt'que momor'di.
Glfit -ctum : ut le'gi lec'tum, pe'gi pepigique
ddnt pac'tum, fre'gi frac'tum, te'tigi quo'que tac'tum,
e'gi ac'tum, pu'pugi punc'tum ; f&'gi fu'gitum dat.
~L\fIt -sum: ut sal'li, stdns pro sale condio, sal'suin :
],dt pepiili pul'sum, ce'culi cul'sum, dt'que fefel'li
lal'sum : ddt vel'li vul'sum : tu'li ha bet quo'que la'tum.
Ml, m, pi, qui, -tnmfor'mdnt, ve'liit hlc manifes'tum:
e'mi em'ptum, ve m ven'tum, ce'cmi d ca'no can' turn ;
a ca'pio ce'pi cap'tum ; cce'pi quo'que cdep'tum ;
d rum'po ru pi rup'tum ; li'qiu quo'que lie' turn.
Hi fit -sum : ut ver'rl ver'sum : pe'peri ex'cipe par'tum.
Si fit -sum : lit vi'si vi'sum ; ta'men s gemlnd'to
ml' si formd'bit mis'sum : ful'si ex'cipe lul'tum,
hau'si haus'tum, sar'sl sar'tum, far'sl quo'que far'tum,
us'si us' turn, ges'sl ges'tum ; tor' si duo, tor'tum
et tor'sum ; Indul'si Indul'tum, Indulsum'^Me requfrit.
Pslfit -ptum: ut scrip' si scrlp'tum; scul'psl quo'que scul'ptum.
Tiifit -turn : d sto ndm'que ste'ti, d slsto'que sti'tl, ddnt
dm'bo r7te sta'tum : vertl ta'men ex'cipe ver'sum.
Vifit -turn: ut fla'vl fla'tum : paV ex'cipe pas' turn :
ddt la'vl lo'tura, inter' 'dum lau'tum, dt'que lava' turn ;
pota'vl po'tum, inter' d urn fa' cit et pota'tum :
$ed fa' vi fau'tum ; ca'vl cau'tum. ^1 se'ro se'vl
t'or'mes rite sa'tum ; li'vl Mm'que li'tura ddnt :
sol'vi d sol'vo solu'tQm ; vol'vi d vol'vo volu'tum :
tiilt slngultl'vi slngul turn ; ve'neo ve'nls
veni'vl ve'num ; sepeli'vl ri'te sepul'tum.
Quod dat -ui ddt -i turn : ut do'mui do'mitum : ex'cipS
quod' vis
vZr'lum in -iio, quid sem'per -ui formd'bit m -u'tum;
( 129 )
ex"'ui lit exu'tum : a ru'o de'me rul ru'itum dans :
milt se'eui sec'tum, ne'cui nec'tum, fricuVqut'
fric'tum : mis'cui I'tem mis' turn, et ami'cui dat amic'tum ; 3?
tor'rui hubet tos'tum, do'cui doc'tum, teniii'jwe
ten'tum, contiu'lui consul' turn, a'lui al'tum alitum'^we? /
sic sa'lui sal'turn, co'lui occu'liii quo'que cul'tum :
pin'sui Jui'bet pis'tuin, ra'pui rap'tum, serui'^wt?
a se'ro vidt ser'tfim ; sic tex'ui ha'let quo'que tex'tum.
Hcec sed -ui mu'tdnt in -sum ; nam cen'seo cen'sum,
Cel'lui ha' bet cel'sum, me'to mes'siii ha bet quo'que mes'sum.
Nex'ui i'tem nex'um, sic pex'ui hd'let quo'que pex'um.
Xiy*^ -ctum : ut vm'xi "vinc'tum : qum'que dbjt'ctunt n ;
ut fin'xi fic'tum, min'xi mic'tum, dd'jice pm'xi
dans pic'tum, strm'xi stric'tum, rin'xi quo'que ric'tum.
Xum, flex'i, plex'I, f ix% ddnt ; et flu'o flux'um.
IV. Of the Supines of Compound Verbs.
Compo' situm ut slm'plex forma 'iiir quod'que siipl'num,
quam'vts ndn eadem stet syl'laba semper iitrYque.
Compo' sita a tun'sum, dem'ptd ii, -tu'sum : d ru'itum fit,
I media dem'ptd, -ru'tum ; et d sal'tum quo'que -sul'turn ;
d se'ro, qudrido sa'tumyor'iwa^, composta -si'tum ddnt.
H&c cap'tum, f ac'tum, jac'tum, rap'tum, a per e tnu'tdnt,
et can'tum, par'tum, spar'sum, car'ptum, quo'que far tuna.
Vefbum e'do compo' 'situm ndn -es'turn, sedfu'cit -e'sum ;
u'num duntdx'dt co'medo forma' 'bit utrum'que.
A nos'co tdn'tum duo cog'nitum et ag'nitum haberitiir :
cw'terd ddnt no'tum : nul'lo est jam nos'citum in u'sii.
V. Of the Preterperfect Tense of Verbs in -or.
Ver'Jja. in -or admit? tunt ex poste'riore siipfno
pr&te'ritnm, ver'so -u per -us, et sum consociffto
'eel fu'i : ut d lec'tu, lec'tiis sum vel fu'i. At ho'riim
nunc est depo'nens, nunc est commune notdn'diim :
nam la'bor lap'sus ; pa'tior dat pas'sus, et e'jus
nd'ta ; ut compa'tior compas'sus, perpetior'^we?
for'mdns perpes'sus : fa'teor dat fas'sus, et in'de
nd'ta ; ut conf i'teor confes'sus, dift'iteor'^we
for'mdns diif es'sus : gra'dior ddt gres'sus, et in'd
37 lu this verse we have a proccleusmdtic for a spdndeo.
G3
(ISO )
nd'ta ; ut digrg'dior digres'sus : jun'ge fatls'cor
fes'sus sum, men'sus sum me'tior, u'tor et u'^iis.
Pro teafo ordi'tus, pro mcep'to ddt or'dior or'sus,
ni'tor ni'sus vcl nix'us sum, ulcis'cor et ul'tus ;
Iras'cor si'mid ir'a'tus, re'or dt'que ra'tus sum,
oblivis'cor vult obli'tus sum, fru'or dp' tat
fruc'tus vcl fru'itus : misere'ri jun'ge miser'tus.
Vult tu'or et tu'eor non tu'tus, sed tu'itus sum :
a lo'quor ad'de locu'tus ; et a se'quor dd'de secu'tus.
Expe'rior fd'clt exper'tus; for 1 ma' re pacis'cor
gau'det pac'tus sum, nancls'c5r nac'tus, apis'cor,
quod ve'tiis est ver'bum, ap'tus sum ; un'de adipis'cor adep'tus.
Jun'ge que'ror ques'tus, pr5f ids' COT jun'ge profec'tus,
expergis'cor sum experrectus ; et hcec quo'que commi-
ms'cor commen'tus, nas'cor na'tus, morior'^^
moi-'tuus; dt'que o'rior, quod pr&te'ritumfa'cit or'tus.
VI. Of Verbs which make the Preterperfect Tense both of
the active and passive Voice.
Prd'te'ritum aciivce et passives xo'cis kci'bent Ti&c :
coe'nd cdena'vi el cdena'tus sum ti'li for'mat,
ju'ro jura'vi et jui'a'tus, po'toque pota'vi 58
et po'tus, ti'tubo ti'tuba'vl vel tituba'tiis.
Pran'deo pran'di et pran'sus sum, pla'ce5 pla'cui ddt
et pla'citus, sues'co sue'vi vult dt'que sue'tus.
Nu'b5 nup'si nup'ta^z/e sum, me'reor me'ritus sum,
xel me'rui : ddde K'bet li'bult K'bitum, et li'cet dd'de
quod li'cuit li'citum, tte'det quod tse'duit et ddt
pertai'sum : dd'de pu'det fd'clens pu'duit
difque pi'get, tl'bl quod for' mat pi'guit
VII. Of the Preterite of Verbs Neuter-passive.
Neu'trd-pdssTvTim sic prccte'ritum fflifor'mdt :
gau'deo gavi'sus sum, fi'do fi'sus, et au'deo 39
au'sus sum, fi'6 fac'tus, so'leo so'litus sum.
39 The last syllable of this verse, being hypermeter, is elided befdre
the initial vdwel of the first word of the next line.
39 The scanning requires au'deo to be a dissyllable, else the final o to
be elided before au'sus of the aext verse
( 131 )
Verbs which want the Preterperfect Tense.
Prcete'ritumfu'giunt, TeYgo, am'bigo, glis'co, fatis'co,
pol'leo, ni'deo : a d hccc inccptTva ; Tit, piieras'co ;
et pdssTva, qul'bus carue'r e dctl'vli supfnis ;
ut me'tuor, ti'meor : meditdtz'va om'nia, prai'ter
partu'rio, esu'rio ; qucs prcete'rltum duo scr'vdnt.
Yerbs which seldom admit a Supine.
Hcec rd'ro ant nuriqudm re tine' bunt ver'la supTniim :
lam'bo, mi'co mi'ciii, ru'do, sca'bo, par'co peper'ci,
dispes'co, pos'co, dis'co, compes'co, qiunis'co.
De'go, an'go, su'go, lin'go, nm'go, satago'^M^,
psal'io, vo'16, no'lo, malo, tre'mo, stri'deo, stri'do,
fla'veo, li'veo, a'vet, pa'veo, conni'veo, for'vet.
A nu'o compo'situm ; ut re'nuo : d ca'do ; tit ac'cido : prcetZr
oc'cido quod fa'cit occa'sum, recido'^?^^ reca'sum.
Res'puo, Im'quo, lu'6, me'tuo, clii'o, fri'geo, cal'veo, 40
et stei^to, ti'meo : sic lu'ceo, et ar'ceo, cu'jus
compo'sita -er'citum ha 'bent : sic d gru'o, ut In'gruo, nd'tu ;
et qu&'cunque in -\\\formdritnr neu'trd seciiridce :
exci'pids o'leo, do'leo, pla'ceo, taceo'qu ;
pa'reo, i'tem ca'reo, no'ceo, ja'ce5, lateo'^w^,
et va'leo, ca'le5 : gau'dent h&c ndm'que supfno.
EXCEPTIONS TO SOME OF THE FOREGOING RULES.
1. Although ddm'nd and trac'io, when compounded, generally change
th> first vowel (a) into e, yet praedam'no, / condemn beforehand, p^r-
trac'to, / treat thoroughly, and retriic/to, / handle again, are to be
exempted.
2. Although ha'beS, when compounded, generally changes the first
v<5wel (a) into i, yet anteha'beo, / prefer, and postha'beo, / postpone,
must be excepted.
3. Although la'vd, when compounded, generally reje'cts the first
vdwel, yet re'lavo, / icash again, retains it.
4. Although the verbs e'md and st'ded, when compounded, change tho
first vdwel (e) of the present tense into i, yet co'emo, / buy up, and
superse'deo, to omit or forbedr, are to be exce'pted. Lastly, to pZr'affj
and sat'agf)) compounds of a'yG retaining the first vdwel, may be added
circiiin'ago, / drive about.
10 Here cal'veo must be considered a dissyllable, else the final o, beiug
an hypermeter syllable, must suffer elision, befdre the vowel c at the
beginning of the next line.
( 132 )
SYNTAXIS: 1
OR TUB
CONSTRUCTION OF GRAMMAR.
(tf- In the fallowing Rules the short final syllables are marked short, with-
out reference to position ; but in the Examples to the Rules, whenever any
Example is in verse, all short syllables long by position are marked long,
agreeaoly to the plan which we acldpted in the metrical Rules for the guilder
of nouns, and formation of the preterite and supines of verbs.
** The Examples to the Rules of Construction are here severally printed
in Italic, with the exception of the words to which ny Rule more particu-
larly refers, those words are in Rdrnan characters to distinguish them from the
rest.
CONCORD ANTIA PRIMA.*
Nommati'vus et Yer'bum.
The First C6ncord. The Nominative Case and the Verb.
_ *
VER'EUM persona'le concordat cum nominati'vo, nu'mero
et perso'na : 3 ut,
Se'rd niin'quam est ad lo'nos mo'res vi'a. Sen.
i Syntax is that part of Grammar which teaches the right construction
of words in a se'ntence, according to certain Rules, but with occasional
exceptions. It consists of CON'CORD, or the right agreement of words
with one another., and of GOVERNMENT, or the due influence and de-
pendence of words on one another.
* There are in Grammar three Concords : first, of a verb with : ts
ndminative ; second, of an adjective with its substantive ; third, of the
Relative with its antecedent.
3 The simplest sentence pdssible consists of a neuter verb and its
nominative case, either expressed or understood : as De'us est, God is,
or there is a God ; dor'mio, / sleep, or, I am asleep, understand e'gu ;
to'nat, it thunders, understand id, it. The se'ntence which has the next
degree of simplicity to the simplest, is that which consists of a transitive
verb, with its nominative case, and regimen : as, lu'nS re'git men'ses,
the moon rules the months. As, howe'ver, there is frequently an Ellipsis
of the nominative in a sentence, so, also, is there sdmetimes an ellipsis
of the verb : as, Dt melio'rS, understand dent, may the Gods award
litter things : quot ho'niines, tot senten'tis, understand sunt after
homines and again after t5t, that is, as many persons soever as there artt
in the worlds so Ttuiny different opinions are there, or, as we say in
( 133 )
NominatI'vus prono'miniim ra'ro expri'mitur, m's!
tmctio'ms, aut em'phasis gra'tla : ut,
" Vos ddmnds'tis :"
i'si dtcat, pnete'rea ne'mO.l
" Tu L-s ptitronus, i\iparens,
" Si deseris tu, peri'imus : " Ter,
[gua'si dl'cdt, " pneci'pue, et prai a'lns, tu patro'nus.
" Fer'tur atro'ciafldgi'tia designds'se" Ovid.
Aliquan'do ora'tio est ver'bo nominati'vus : ui,
Inge'nuds didicis'se fide' liter ar'tes*
Emolllt mo' res, nee sfnit es'se fe'ros. Ovid.
Aliquan'do adver'bium cum geniti'vo : ut,
Par'tim viro'rum ceclde'runt in lel'lo.
Exceptions.
I. Yer'ba infinltl'vi mo'di frequen'ter pro nominatl'vo
accusati'viim an'te se sta'tuunt, conjunctio'ne quod vel ut
omis'sa : b ut,
Te rediisse mcoliimem gaudeo.
En'glish, many men, many minds. E'very verb, then, must have a n<5-
miuative case, either expressed or understodd ; and eVery nduiinative
case must have a verb : also two or more ndminative cases singular
(linked together by one or more copulative conjunctions, either expre'ssed
or understodd,) will have a verb plural ; wheredf the person will be that
of the more w6rthy substantive, if any distinction of worthiness can be
drawn : but sometimes the verb agree's with the nominative nearest to
it ; as, me perftus dls'cet I'ber, Rhodanl'que po'tor, me the accom-
plished, (or refined) Spaniard fliterally ^killed Iberian ) shall study,
and the drinker of the Rhone (shall study me). On the contrary, a
verb plural is sometimes usurped after a nominative singular and an
ablative prece'ded by the preposition cum, with.
4 The whole of this line may be taken as the ndminative case to
emol'llt, and likewise to si'mt : but a verb of the infinitive mood is not
only frequently the ndminative case to a verb, but also the substantrre
to an adjective : as mentl'ri tur'pe est, to lie is a base thing : veHe
su'um cul'que est, his own will is to every one, that is, every one has a
will of his own.
3 In translating dny En'glish sentence into Ldtin, if the conjunction
'thai 1 (either expressed or understood) come betwee'n two verbs, the
latter verb may with e'legance be put in the infinitive mood, its ndmi-
native case being turned into the accusative : as, they say (that ) the
king is coming, al'unt re'gem advcnta're, rather than, ai'unt quod re"x
advCa'tut : again, he said (that) he (hiir.stlf) would come, dixlt sc vcutu -
134
II. Yer'bum Ir/ter du'os nominati'vos diverso'rum num5-
rd'rum po'situm, cum alteru'tro 8 concorda're po'test : ut,
Amaritium i'r?e amoris mtegra'tio est. Ter.
Pec'tus quoquS ro'bora f I'unt. Ovid.
III. No'men multitu'dmis singula're quando'que ver'bo
plura'li jun'gitur: 7 ut.
Pars able' re.
Uter'que deludun'tur dolls.
VeYba irnpersona'lia nommati'vum non ha'bent enuncia'-
tum: 8 iit,
Tai'det me v?tce.
Perta/sum est conjugli.
rum es'se, rather than dix'it quod Ip'se venfret : but if the verb which
ought to be in the infinitive mood, ought also to be in the future tense,
and it have no future tense of that mood, then fS're, to be about to le,
followed by ut, that, and a subjunctive mood must be used ; as, he says
(that) 1 shall be able, dl'cit fS're, ut pos'sim. This construction, too,
is sdmetimes very elegantly employed, e'ven where the verb which ought
to be in the infinitive mood, has the future tense. Occasionally, likewise,
it happens, that instead of the infinitive mood, the subjunctive mood,
with the omission of ut, is pre'ferable ; as, ignos'cas, vo'lo, I wish (that)
you would be forgiving: jiibe'to, cer'tet Amyn'tas, give Orders (that)
Amyntas vie ; or simply, bid Amyntas contend.
6 Many examples of this sort are undoubtedly to be met with ; but
especially among the poets, who were dften compelled by the measure of
their verse to take a liberty which could haraly be granted in prose ;
the efficient or real nominative, however, that is, the word which (more
immediately) answers to the question made with the verb, ought properly
to. re'gulate or dire'ct the person of the verb.
7 Nouns of multitude, or, as they are generally styled, in En'glish,
Collective Nouns, are such as, though themselves of the singular number,
have yet a plural signification : for example, po'pulias, the people,
vul'giis, the rabble, tur'ba, a crowd, exer'citus, an Army, clas'sls, a fleet,
and the like. Whenever the idea implies a separation into parts, a verb
plural is preferable ; but when there is no division or separation into
parts, the verb should most unquestionably be of the singular number.
8 By impersonal verbs are meant, such verbs as are ne'ver found ex-
cept in the third pe'rson singular, and which have never any ndminativo
expressed in Ltin ; the prdnoun id, it, being upon all occasions under-
stood. Some personal verbs, however, are now and then assumed im-
personally : and all neuter verbs in -o may be similarly used in every
tense of the passive voice ; sometimes with much elegance, and at all
times with strict conformity to the idiom of the Latin tongue.
( 135 )
CONCORDANTIA SECUNDA.
Substantf vum et Adjecti'viim, &c.
The Second Concord. The /Substantive and Adjective.
Adjecti'va, partici'pia, et prono'mma, cum substanti'vS, g*'-
nere, nu'mero, et ca'su, concor'dant : 9 iit,
Ra'r a a'vis In ter'rls, mgro'que simU'lima cygfrio. Juv.
Aliquan'do 5ra'ti5 sup'plet lo'cum substantial, adjecfi'vo m
neu'tro ge'nere po'sito : ut,
Audi'to reg&m Ddrdber'niam prof ids' ci.
CONCORDANTIA TERTIA.
Relati'vum et Antece'dens.
The Third Concord. The Relative and the Antecedent.
Relati'vum cum anteceden'te 10 concordat, ge'nere, nu'-
mero, et perso'na : ut,
Vir bo' niis est quis ?
Qui consul ta pa'trum^ qui le'ges juraque ser'vat. Hor.
9 There can be no Adjective in a sentence, without some substantive
(either expressed or understood) agree'ing with it. When no substantive
is expressed, the adjective is put in the neuter gender, because tho
subject with which it is supposed to agree is not determined either to bo
masculine or feminine, and consequently is regarded as neuter. Often-
times, Adjectives agree' with substantives not actually expressed, but yet
cleai-ly understodd : as, ami'cfis (vir) a friendly man, that is, a friers! :
dex'tra (ma'nus), the right hand ; re'gla (do'mus), a royal mansion or
king's palace; pau'per (ho'mo), a poor person ; profun'dum vel al'tum
(ma're), the deep, that is, the deep sea or 6cean ; ferl'na (ca'ro) wild flesh,
meaning, venison : with ve'ry many besides.
10 The antecedent is sdmetimes whdlly withheld in its own clause of a
sentence, and elegantly expressed in the clause of the Relative, and in
the same case with the Relative : as, Qr'bem quam sta'ttio, ves'tra e"st,
that is, the city which I build (or am about to erect) is yours. Some-
times, too, the antecedent is given in both clauses, as, di'em dicunfc
qu5 di'e, they name or appoint a day, on which day : sdmetimes, again
the antecedent is entirely suppressed ; thus, vin'ce, qui vln'cis, conquer-
thou who conguerest ; understdnd tu, thon : ml'sit qui cdgnos'cerent, he
sent (persons) who might explore, or, he sent to explore ; understand
ml'lTtes, soldiers, else, explorato'res, scouts: and sdmetimes, again, the
Relative is understodd j as, urbs antl'qua futt, Tfru tenue're colO'ni,
( 136 )
Aliquan'do ora'tio pffmtur pro anteceden'te : ut,
In tem'pore ad earn ve'ni, quod re rum omnium est
pri'mum.
Relati'vum In'ter du'o substauti'va 11 diverso'rum ge'nerum
[et numero'ruin] colloca'tum, inter'dum cum posterio're con-
oor'dat : lit,
Homines tiieritiir Ilium glo'bum qute ter'ra dfcitiir. Cic.
Aliquan'do relati'vum concor'dat cum primiti'vo, quod in
possessi'vo subaudi'tur : ut,
om'nes dm ma
bonci dTcere, et laudare fortunds me'as,
qui 1 * gnatum huberem tali ingenio prcedltum. Ter.
Si nommati'vus relati'vo et ver'bo Interpona'tur, 15 * relati'-
vum re'gitur a ver'bo, aut, ab alia dictio'ne, qute cum ver'bo
In oratio ne loca'tur : ut,
Gratia ab off? do, quod mo'ra tar'dat, db'est. Ovid.
Cu'jus nu'nien ado'ro.
there was an ancient city (uhich) Tyrian colonists possessed: but in
En'glish this omission is much more frequent than in Latin. Here it is
worthy of the notice of learners that the Relative agree's with its ante-
ce'dent in yender, number, and PER'SON, but with that antece'dent,
if found in the same clause of the sentence with the Re'lative itself, the
Relative agrees in gender, number, and CASE.
11 The restriction mentioned in note 6, above, is equally applicable in
the present instance : for the Re'lative ought always to agree with the
substantive which is more immediately and ostensibly its antecedent,
unle'ss indeed some very weighty reason can be assigned for deviating
from this practice.
12 Here qui has, for its antecedent, me'!, of me, understodd in the pos-
se'ssive adjective me'as. my, of the prece'ding line.
13 The Case of the Relative always depends up6n some word in the
same clause of the sentence with itself, but it takes its gender, number,
and person, from the substantive to which it particularly refers, anci
which is generally in some former clause of the sentence. When the
Re'lative is not the nominative case to any verb, it may be viewed as a
substantive rather than an adjective, as it is governed precisely in the
same manner as a substantive is gdvcrned : if, howe'ver, the Re'lative
agrees with any substantive expressed in its own clause of the se'ntence,
then it is to all intents an ddjective, and the substantive with which it
agree's, directs its case.
(137)
NOMINUM CONSTRUCTIO.
1. SUBSTANTIVA.
The Construction of Nouns Substantive.
Quum dii'o substanti'va diver's^ sigmficatio'nis } * concu/-
runt, poste'rius in gemti'vo po'mtur : ut,
Ores' clt a'mor num'mi, quantum ip'sti. pecu'nia cres'ctt.
Hie gemti'vus aliquan'do in dati'vum ver'titur : ut,
Ur'bi pa'ter est^ uTbl'que mari'tus. Luc.
Adjecti'vum in neu'tro ge'nere si'ne substantrvo po'situm,
aliquan'do gemti'vum pos'tulat : ut,
Pau'liilum pecu'nice.
Po'mtur mter'dum gemti'vus tan'tum, prio'rS substanti'vo
per ellip'sm subaudi'to : w ut,
ff'bi ad Dla'nee Vffn&rfey
Tlo ad dex'tram : Ter.
\J3ulaudi templum.]
14 In rendering En'glish into Latin, it not unfrequently happens that
two substantives of different signification come together with the sign of
between them, whereof the latter ought not in confdrmity to the Ltin
idiom to be put in the genitive case : for instance, whenever the latter
substantive dendtes the substance or materials of which the former con-
sists, the Latin idiom requires the ablative case preceded by e, ex, 01*
de, out o/or of; else, that the substantive of matter be turned into the
adjective expressive of that sort of matter. Thus, the two substantives,
a vase of silver, that is, a silver vase, must not be re'udered viis argen'ti,
but vas ex argen'to fac'tum, or vas argen'teiim. In like manner, other
substantives are occasionally converted into their adjectives : as, my
father's house may be translated, do'mus pa'tris or do'mus pSter'na.
13 The adjectives more commonly used in this way are those which
relate to Quantity or Number ; as, mul'tum, much, plus, more, plu'rl-
mum, very much or very many, par'vum, little, mi'nus, less, ml'niinum,
the least thing or portion, sum'mum, the very highest pitch, ul'timum,
the last stage, extre'miim, the utmost verge, me diiim, the middle division
or point: with the pronouns, hoc, this, id, that, quid, what; and the
seVeral compounds of quid, as, a'liquid, anything, ne'quld, wo one thing ;
thus, quid re'I ? what is the matter *
16 This is an e'legant mode of expression, provided dnly that the
omission be consistent with perspicuity, and that the purport of the
speaker or writer, be at once (and unambiguously) eVident : thus m
En'glish we say, St. Paul's, meaning (he Cathtdral of St. Paul : and St.
James's, meaning the Palace of St. James, else the Church or Pdr't&h
( 183 )
Du'o substantl'va re'i ejQs'dem, in eo'djiin ca'su ponuii'tur: 1 *
at,
Effodluritur 6'pes, imtamen'ta maid' rum. Ovid.
Lous, vHiiperium, Tel qufflitds re'i, " po'mtur m ablatl'vo,
S'tiam geniti'vo : iit,
Inge'nui Tul'tus pucr, ingeniuque pudo'ri3. Juv.
Vir nul'la f I'de.
O'piis et ffsiis ablati'vum ex'igunt : iit,
Auctorita'te tud no'Us o'piis est. Cic.
Pecuniam, (qua nl'hil sl'li es'set usus,) ub His non
dcce'plt. Gell.
O'piis au'tem adjectl've, prd " necessffrius," quando'que
pom vide'tur : ut,
Dux no bis et auc'tor o'pus est. Cic.
II. ADJECTIYA.
The Construction of Nouns Adjective.
1. Geniti'viis post Adjectl'vum.
The Genitive Case after the Adjective.
ADJECiTvA qus& deslde'rium, noti'tiam, memo'riam, Cmo'-
Bhmed after that Saint. So, in Latin, by " per Varro'uis" was meant
"per fun'dum ViirrO'nis," through Vdrro's ground or glebe ; likewise,
by Popps'a Nero'nis," was meant " Popps'S Nero'nis ux'or," Nero's
consort or wife Poppcea and so forth.
Of the substantives thus concording in case, one may be singular,
the dther plural ; as, urbs Athe'nee, the city A'thens, f I'lius, dell'cias
ma'tris, a son, the darling of his mother.
18 The examples falling under this Rule (in so far, at least, as regards
the ablative case,) seem to be governed by some adjective, or preposi-
tion, understodd : thus, vlr nulla fide, a man with no principle ; under-
stand cum, with, else, pr.-S'ditiis cum, endued ivith. In most instances
either the genitive or ablative may be assumed indifferently : but, again,
there are ce'rtain phrases, in which the ge'nitive is more elegant than
the ablative ; and others, in which the Ablative is dee'med pre'ferable to
the ge'nitive: thus, the Romans said, " es bo'no a'nimo," be of good
cheer, or, of courage, rather than " es bo'ni a'nimi;" but, " ho'mo I'm!
. subsellu," a person of the lowest caste, or rank, rdther than "hS'mS fmo
subseriio." Cicero has " summa spe, surn'mse virtu' tis," of the highest
hope, the highest valour, in one and the same sentence. Occasionally,
( 139 )
rem significant, at'que Tis contra'ria, geniti'vum exigunt j 19
at,
Est natii'rd hominiim novita'tis a'vida. P!in.
Mens futu'ri piie'scia.
Me'mor est 5 bre'vls ie'vi.
Im'memor LenefTcii.
Impert'tus re rum. Ter.
Rti'dis bel'lL
Ti'mldfis Deo rum. Ovid,
Impavldus SHI. Claud.
Cum plu'rimis a'ins qua} affectid'nem a'mmi de'notant.
Adjecti'va verba'lia in -ax e'tiam geniti'vum ex'igunt : ut,
Auddx ingc'nn.
Tem'piis e'dax re'rura. Ovid.
No'mina partiti'va, numera'lia, comparati'va, efc superla*
ti'va, et quie'dam adjecti'va parti ti've 30 po sita, geniti'vum, a
quo et ge'nus miitilan'tur, ex'igunt : ut,
U'triira Lo'rum ma'xis accipe,
Primus re'giim Romano rum fu it Romulits.
Ma'nuura for'tior est dex'trd.
DTgito'rum me'dms est longls'simus.
Sequimur te, sanc'te Deo'rum !
Usurpan'tur au'tem et ciim his pri^positio'nibiis, a, ab y de^
e, ex, m'ter, ante : ut,
Ter'tm-s ab ^Enea.
So lus de su' peris.
however, an adjective expressed agrees with the fdrmer of the two sub-
stantives, and then the litter is put in the ablative case : as, vir pru-
den'tia excfil'lens, a man excelling in prudence, that is, a man of extra-
ordinary prudence.
1 9 To these may be added, Adjectives expressive of diligence, perse-
verance, certainty, patience, engagement, carefulness, guilt, sickness,
anxiety, kindness, liberality, prodigality, and several other qualities and
affections of the like nature : with their dpposites, as, remissness, insta-
bility, doubt, impatience, disengagement, negligence, innocence, health,
freedom from care, unklndncss, parsimony, niggardness : and a host
besides.
20 By nmins partitive, and adjectives put partilively, are meant such
nouns and adjectives as dendte a part, or portion, of any whole. When
there are two substantives of different genders, the Adjective agrees with,
the first rather than the last : as, In'diis flu'miuiim rnaxTmus, the In'dus,
greatest of rivers : le'o ammft'llum fortls'simus, the lion t strongest or
bravest of animals.
( MO )
Deus e vobJs al'ter es. Ovid.
Pri'mus in'ter om'nes.
Pri'mus an'te om'nes.
SECU.N'DUS aliquan'do dati'vum ex'igit : lit,
Hand ul'li ve'terum virtu' te seciin dus. Virg.
INTERROGATIVUM et e'jiis redditi'vum, ejus'dem ca'sQs St
ten/poris erunt, m'si yo'ces va'riiJe coustructioms adh!-
bean'tiir : lit,
Qua'riim re'rum nut Id est scitZetas? Divitia'rum.
Furtl'ne dccusds, an homlci'dn ? Utro que.
2. Dati'viis post Adjecti'vum.
The Dative Case after the Adjective.
ADJECT? VA qm'biis com'modum, incom'modum, similitu'd^,
dissimilitu'do, volup'tas, submis'siO, aut reia'tiO ad a'liquid- 1
eigmf ica'tur, dati'\ 7 iim pos'tulant : iit,
Si fads ut pa' trite sit ido'neus, u'tilis a^ris. Juv.
Tur'ba gra'vis pa'ci, placidwque mimi'ca quie'ti. Mart.
Patri si' mills. Cic.
Qui color dl'liis erdt, nunc est contra'rius al'bo. Ovid.
Jucun'diis ami'cis. Mart.
Omnibus sup'plex.
Jst f ini'timiis orato'ri poe'ta.
Hue referun'tur no'mina ex con pr^positio ne compo'sita :
ut, contubernd'lis, commi'Uto^ conservus, coynfftus.
Qute'dam ex his, qu^ similitu'dmem significant, e'tiam
gemti'vo jungun'tur : ut,
Quern me tiiis, par liu'jus e'rdt. Lucan.
"Uo'mini si'milis es. Ter.
COMMUNIS, alie'niis, immunis, geniti'vo, dati'vo, et abla-
ti'vo cum preepositio'ne, jungun'tur: ut,
81 Such as friendliness, detestation, equdlity, sdmeness: thus, se'tas
adolescen'tulis 5d!6'sa, a time of life hateful to striplings ; 1'dem occl-
den'ti, the same thing as I'Uling, that is, the same with a person or thing
7cilling, foT the act of killing would be expressed by the gdrund. In
general, however, I'dem is ftfllowed by qm who, else by ac, as, or at'que,
and : thus, a'nimus er'pa to I'dem ac fu'it, a disposition towards you,
the same as it was or has been.
( 1*1 )
Commu'ne amman'tmm om'nium cst. Cic.
Mors om'nibus cst commu'ms. Ibid.
Hoc infill te cum commu'ne cst.
Non alie'na consi'liT. Sail.
Alic'niis ambltio'ni. Sen. Praef.
Non alie'nus a Scce'volue stu'diis. Cic.
-- - Vo'lis Immu'mbus hujus
JKs'se ma'li dalitiir. Ovid.
Cftpriffcus om'nibus immu'ms cst. Plin.
Immu'nes ab il'lis ma'lis su'miis.
com'modiis, tncom'modns, utilis, inn'tilts,
, cum mul'tis a'liis, inter'dum (e'tiam) accusati'vo cum
prtepositio'ne jungun'tur : ut,
Na'tiis ad glorium. Cic.
U tills ad cam rem.
VERBA'LIA in " -bills" accep'ta passiVe, et participia'lia in
dati'vum pos'tulant : 22 ut,
Nutli penetra'bilirf as'tro
Zners. Stat.
mi'hi post mil' Ids Ju'll memoran'de stidales ! Mart.
3. Accusati'vus post Adjectl'vum.
The Accusative Case after the Adjective.
Magnitu'dims mensu'ra subji'citur adject! 'vis in accusa-
ti'vo, ablati'vo, et geniti'v5 : ut %
Tiir'ris ccritum pe'des al'ta.
Pons la'tus pe'dibiis tri'bus, al'tiis trigm'ta.
Area la'ta pe dum dc'num.
Accusati'vus aliquan'do subji'citur adjecti'vis et partici'pTis,
Ti'bl prteposi'tiO sccun'dum vide'tiir subintel'ligi : ut,
Os humeros'^z^e Deo s? mills. Virg.
* Vultum demfs'sus.
R To these may be ddded most (if indeed not all) ddjectives derfved
from such verbs as gdvern a dative case : thus, f I'dus aml'cis, faithful
to friends ; bene'volus d8'mino sei^vus, a slave well-disposed to his
master ; cre'duliis Il'lis, credent to them. For the construction of Past
and of Present Participles, which, when used as Jidjectives, are followed
by a dative, see page 162.
( 142 )
4. Ablati'vus post AdjectI'vum.
The Ablative Case after the Adjective .
Adjecti'va, quee ad co'piam, egestatem've per'tinent, m-
ter'dum ablati'vum, Inter'duna gemti'vum- 3 ex'i'junt : fit,
I)i'ves e'quum, di'ves plctd'l ves'tis et au'ri. Virg.
A'mor* et mel'le et fei'le est ftJecvmdls'simus. Plau.
Expert frau'dis.
Gratia. led'tus.
Adjecti'va et substanti'va re'gunt ablati'Yuni sigmf ican'tSm
cau'sam et for'rnam, vel mo'dum re'i : lit,
Pal'lldus t'ra.
Nomine gramma ticiis, re Idr'bcirus.
Troja'nus o.Tgine Cce'sar. Virg.
Bla'^us, 24 mdig'nus, prce'ditiis, cap' tits, conten'tus, extoi*-
?*r?, fre'tiiS) liber, cum adject!' vis pre'tium significan'tibus,
ablitfyum ex'iguiit : iit,
Dlg'nus es o'dio. Ter.
Qut gnu turn hale'rem tali inge'nio pne'ditum. Ibid.
o'ciills cap'ti f ode' re cubl'llci tal'pce. Yirg.
Sor'te tii' a conten'tus ab'i.
Terro're H'ber a'nimus. Liv.
Non gem'mis \ 7 ena'le, nee au'ro. Hor.
Ho'rum nonnul'la inter'dum gemti'vum admit'tunt : ut,
Mdgno'rum indig'nus avo'rum. ^ r i^g.
23 The Adjectives In'digiis, needy, T'nops, not possessing, ege'nus,
ftdnding in want of, ex'per.% free from, com'pos, master of, and Im'pos,
not master of, are generally followed by a genitive case : but, dlsten'tiis,
distent, gra'vldiis, gravid or heavy, refer'tus, crammed or stuffed again,
or'bus, deprived of or left destitute, va'cuus, empty or vacant, and
vi'diius, void, prefer an ablative. Most dther adjectives relating to
plenty or to want take a genitive or an ablative indifferently : as, ple'nus
vl'm vel \l'no,full of wine or with wine ; ind'nis pruden'tiai vel pru-
den'tia, void <>f prudence or discretion ; cas'sus lumme vel lu'minis,
devoid of light.
84 D'ty'nus is sdmetimes followed by an infinitive mood ; which, as
vas remarked in note 4 (on Syntax) above, is a sort of noun of the
neuter gender ; undeclfned indee'd, but which may, nevertheless, be
usurped in any case, the vdcative (perhaps) exempted. Thus, in Virgil,
we find dig'iius ama'rl, worthy to be loved, instead of dlg'nus amo're,
worthy of love : but either of these expressions is less elegant than
dlg'nus qui (vel ut) ame'tur ve.l amave'tiir, worthy zc ko should or miuht
le lovedj or that he should or might be loved.
( 143 )
Car'mina dlg'na dg'ee.
Extor'rls re'gm. Stat.
Comparati'va, cum exponan'tur per quam** ablati'viiin ad-
mit'tunt : iit,
Yi'lius drgen'tum est au'ro, virtu'tibus aft rum. Hor.
Id est, qucim- 6 au'rum, quam virtu'tes.]
TAN'TO, quarito, hoc, eo, et quo, cum quTbus'dam a'liis
quai mensu'ram exces'sus signi'ficant, I'tem ceta'te, et nd'tii^
cumparati'vis et superlatl'vis see'pe jungun'tur : ut,
Tan'to pes'simiis om'nium poe'ta,
Quan'to tu op'timiis dirinium patro'nus. Catull,
Quo plus ha lent, e'6 plus cii'piunt.
Ma'jor et maxiinus estate.
Major et max'imus nd'tu.
PRONOMINUM CONSTRUCTIO.
The Construction of Pronouns.
M% till, sul, nds'trl, ves'trl, geniti'vi primitivcTriiia, p&-
nun'tur cum perso'ria signif ica'tur : ut,
25 And the Adjective a'lius, other, or, any other, is in like manner
followed by an ablative, as often as the conjunction quam, than, is by
the figure ellipsis omitted after it : as, putas'ne S'liiim saplen'te bca'tum**
thinkest thou any other than a wise man happy ? Here we read 5'lium
saplen'te for a'liiim quam sapieia'tem. Al'so an ellipsis of quam, than,
aTter the ddverb ma'gis, more, in junction with an adjective or participle,
may be similarly followed : as, o lu'ce ma'gis dilec'ta soro'rl, O thou
dearer to thy sifter (literally, more beloved) than the liyht I
36 Quam, than, is often used (and with peculiar beauty) between two
comparatives : as, trlum'phiis cla'rior quam gra'tior, a triumph more
splendid than acceptable. And this conjunction is frequently understodd
fter some adverbs of the comparative degree, followed by almost ny
case, the vocative and (perhaps) dative excepted. See Conjunctions.
Sometimes, too, such ablatives as so'llto, than usual, fe'quo, than riyht,
Iie'cessa'rio, than necessary, are elegantly understood after comparatives
of the neuter ge'nder : as, si for'te, quTd ap'tius ex'it, if, perchance,
aught more fit or more to the purpose (so'lito, than usual) has gone forth:
llbe'rms vlve'bat, he lived more freely (ae'quo, than right}, that is, he
lived rather gaily and profusely. And here it should be observed, that
in no instance is it necessary to omit quam, though such Omission be, on
many occasions, preferable. It may likewise be observed that when
quiim is expre'ssed, the noun after it must be in the same case with the
noun before it.
( 144)
fjdn'giiet desiderio tu'L
Plg'nora cd'rli su'i. Virg.
Cdiciis amor su'i. Hor.
Jmago nos'tri.* 7
Mfi'us, tii its* suits, nos'ter, res'titr, ponun'tur cum ac'ti
vel posses' si5 re'i slgnifjca'tur : ut,
Fa vet de side rid tu'6.
Imago nos'tra :
id est, quum nos posside'miis. j
Hsec possessi'va, me'iis, tuns, suits, nosier, et tester, hos
gerriti'vcis post se reci'pmnt, " tpsfiis, soli us, unfits, duo' ruin,
trfum, &c. om'niiim plu'rlum, puncorum, cujus'que :" et
gemti'vos participiorum, qm ad primiti'vum subaudi'tum
referun'tiir: ut,
Dix't me'a um'us o'pera rempnb'licdm es'sc sal'vum. Cic.
Me'iim soll'us pecca'tum cor'rlgi non po'tesi. Ibid.
Cum me'a nemo
Scrip'ta le gat viilgo reclta're timen'tis. Hor.
De tu'6 Ipsi'fis stu'dio conjectiiram ce 'perls. Cic.
In su'a cujiis'que lau'^e prcestaritior.
Nos'tra om'nmm memo rid.
Yes'tris pauco'rum respon'det lau'dibus. Cic.
Su'i et sii'us reci'proca 98 siint : h5c est, sem'per refii
tan'tur ad id, quod preeci'puum in senten'tia preeces'sit : iit,
57 The personal and possessive pronouns are sdmetimes (but less
correctly) used for one andther : as, adspec'tu su'o, at his or her sight,
for adspec'tu su'i, at the. sight of himself or of herself \ that is, at the sight
of the person speaking or doing. And Plautus has la'bor me'i, the
Idbour of me, for la'bor me'us, my labour. Frequently, too, the pdets,
and occasionally the prose writers, employ the personal pronouns i'n the
dative case, when, strictly speaking, possession is meant: as, mT'hT
ina'nus, the hand to me, for me'a ma'nus, my hand. Similarly, also,
are other pronouns, and nouns, usurped : as, e'l cor'piis, the bMy to him,
for e'jiis cor'pus, the body of him, that is, his body ; pe'lago pro-
spec'tus, a prospect to the sea, for pe'lagi prospec'tiis, a prospect or vieto
<>f the sea.
88 Whene'ver the En'glish word ' self can be ddded to him, her, or it,
^or ' selves ' to them,) the Latin word " su'i" and none dther, is prdper,
and necessary. Thus, Cato owns he erred, Ca'to se" peccas'se fate'tiir :
and, in the same manner, whenever the En'glish word "own" can be
added to his, her, its, or their, the possessive " su-us" and none other
iscorre'ct. Thus, Cato killed himself with his (own) sicord, su'O s8
gl&'dio cflnfe'cit Ca'to.
( H5 )
Pe'trus nTmium admlratiir se : par'cit erro'rilus sins.
Magno'pere Pe'trus ro'gat, ne se de'seras.
HJBC demonstrati'va, hie, ts'te, il'le, sic distinguun'tur : Ms
rm'h! proxlmum demon'strat ; iste, e'um qui a'pud te est ;
il'le, e'um qiri ab utro'que remo'tus cst.
Hie et ?/'/<?, cum ad du'o antepo'sita referfm'tiir, Me pie-
rum' que ad poste'riiis, tl'le ad pri'us refer'tur: 89 ut,
Quocuriqu e cispi'cicis, ni'Jtll est ni'si pon'tiis et d'er
Nulllus hie tu midus, flue tiliis il'le ininax. Ovid.
YERBORUM CONSTRUCTIO.
The Construction of Verbs.
I. Nommatl'vus post Yer'bum.
The Nominative Case after the Verl.
VER'BA substanti'va ; ut sum, forem, ft'8, eons' iff, ver'ba
Tocan'di passi'va ; ut no minor, appel'lor, dicor, TO cor, nun-
cupor ; et 1'is simi'lia, lit vi'deor, habeor, cxls'timor, ucrir/quS
eos'dem ca'sus ha'bent : 3 ut,
De'iis est sum'miim bo'num.
Perpusil'li vacant' 'ur na'm.
Fi'des religioms nos'trce fundamen'tum liube'tur.
-_ Ncitura bea'tis 31
Om'nibus es'se dedit. Claud.
59 But sometimes, even in the best authors, we find hie referring to
the fdnner, and Il'le to the latter of two persons or things before men-
tioned. For instance, in O'vid : sic de'us et vlr'go est ; hie spe ce'ler,
Il'la timo're, thus the god is, and maiden, he swift with hope, she with
fear.
30 And all verbs of gesture, that is, verbs betdkening bodily aspect or
position: as, e'o, I .go : Ince'do, I walk ; se'deo, I sit ; cii'bo, I lie f
dor'mio, / sleep ; and many of the like sort : thus, Ince'do clau'diis, /
walk lame ; opor'tet ml'iTtem excuba're stan'tem, it behoves a sdldier to
watch standing. These verbs, however, are included among those to
which the next Part of the Rule applies ; only instead of an adjective
they have sometimes a substantive in apposition with them : as,
Ince'dit rex, he walks a king, that is, his manner of walking is majestic
or that of a king.
31 This dative bZa'tis" might (though not so elegantly) be the accu-
sative case " bea'tos," the pronoun " il'los" be'ing understodd before
" es'se." Thus, in Terence, we find, vC'bis ex'pedit es'se bo'nas, it is
expedient for you to be good women. And several other passages of tho
same kind might be quoted.
( 146)
I'tem oin'ma fe'rs ver'ba post se adjecti'vum admit'tunt,
quod ciim nommati'vo ver'bi ca'su, ge'nere, et nu'mero 32 con-
cordat: ut,
Pi'i o'rdnt ta'citi.
Ma'liis pas'tor dor'mit supi'nus.
II. Genitl'vus post Ver'bum.
The Genitive Case after the Verb.
SUM geniti'vum 35 pos'tulat, quo' ties sigm'ficatpossessionem,
offTcium^ sig'num^ aut id quod ad rem quam'piam per'tinet :
ut,
Pe'cus est MeliboVI.
Adolescen'tis est majores nfftu rcvcre'ri. Cic.
Excipii'm'tur hi nommati'vl, me'um, tuum, suurr^ nostrum,
ces'trum** hTimanum, Icllm'num^ et simi'lia : ut,
32 An adverb in En'glish is often expressed (with elegance) by an
Adjective in Latin, which adjective agree's with the ndminative case to
the verb, as in the two Examples given with this Part of the Rule, in
the E'ton text. To these a multitude of other Examples might be
added : but we shall conte'nt ourselves with the few fdllowing : ta'ceo
mul'tiis, / hold my peace much : lo'quor fre'qucns, / speak often ; scri'bo
epls'tolas rarls'simus, / write litters very seldom ; in which the use of
an adjective (for an ddverb) is altogether at variance with ot!r idiom.
But we re'concile oui'selves (easily enough) to an adjective in the nomi-
native case after any transitive verb, (when such Adjective agrees with
the nominative case to the verb,) as dften as the En'glish participle
" being" can make perfect sense, when placed between the nominative
case to the verb, and the adjective which follows : thus, ne assues'cus
bl'bere vl'num jeju'nus, do not accustom (yourself) to drink wine fasting ,
that is, you being hungry. In mny instances of this sort an adverb in
Latin, and an adjective in En'glish, would be prepdsterous, because
contrary to the usage of the two languages, respectively.
33 "Whene'ver sum is followed by a genitive, that ge'nitive is always g<5-
verned by some substantive understood : thus, heec ves'tis est pa'trls, this
gdrment is father's, that is, hfec ves'tis est ves'tis me'I pa'tris, this garment
is the garment of my father : hence the se'veral Examples given under
this Rule beldng more properly to the Rule " Quiim duo substantival
diverscB significationis concurrunt, Qc." and particularly to that part of
it " Ponitur interdum genitivus tdntum, Qc."
34 Not only in the neuter g6nder, but also in the masculine and femi-
nine genders, are these posse'ssive prdnouns- used : thus, hie co'dex est
me'us, this book is mine ; Il'la do'mus e'rat tii'a, that house was thine ,
vet the dative of the primitive is, in most instances, more elegant : as.
Lie co'dex est nulil, this book is to me : Il'la do'mus S'rSt ti'bt, that house
was to ihce or was thine.
(1*7)
Non est me'um con'trd auctorltd' tern send'tus di'cerZ. Cic.
Huma'num est Irdscl.
Ver'ba accusan'di, damnan'di, monen'di, absolven'dl, et
simi'lia, gemti'vum pos'tulant, qui cri'men sigm'ficat : ut,
-- Qui dl'terum incu'sat pro'bri
S'um lp' sum se mtue'ri opor'tet. - Plaut.
Sce'leris condem'nat ge'nerum su'iim. Cio.
Admone'to zl'liim prls tines fortu'nae. 35
Fur'ti absolu'tus est.
Yer'titur hie gemti'vus aliquan'do in ablatl'vum vel cum
pr^positio'ne vel si'ne prtepositio'ne ; 36 ut,
Piitd'vi e'd de re tS cs'sc admonen'dum. Cic.
Si in me mi quits es judex, condemna'bo co'dem ego te
cri'miiie. Ibid.
UTER'QUE, nul'lus, dl'ter, neu'tcr, ft'lius, am bo, et super-
lati'vus gra'dus, non, ni'si in ablatl'vo, id ge'nus ver'bia
jungun'tur: ut,
Accnsdsfur'ti, an stu'pri? Utro'qne, vel de utro'que :
arabo'biis, vel de ambo'bus : neu'tro, vel de neu'tro.
De plu'rimis simul accusa'ris.
SA'TAGO, mise'rcor, et miscres'co, geniti'viim pos'tulant :
ut,
Is * * suci'rum re'rum sa'tagit. Tor.
-- O'ro misere'i'e labo'riim
Tanto'rum, misere're S'nlmse non dig'na feren'tis. Virg,
JKt ge'neiis miseres'ce tul. Stat.
E-MINIS'COR, ollivis'cijr, me'mim, recorder, gemti'vum,
aut accusati'vum, admit'tunt : iit,
Dates fi'del remims'citur.
Pr&'prlum est stTdti'tid: ulio'rum v?tid ccr'nere, oblivis'ci
siio'rum. Cic.
Fd'ciam ut hu'jus lo'ci * * * semper memi'iierls. Ter.
Hiiec o'llm memims'sejuvd'bit.
35 Yerbs of IWdrning or Admonishing are sometimes followed by two
accusative cases. See the Rule " Virba rogdndi, doccndi, $c." under
the head of ACCUSATI'VUS POST VEU'BUM.
36 Verbs of W&rning or Adm6nishmff, when fallowed by an dblative
case, have Always some preposition (generally de, of cr concerning,)
expressed with the noun which specifies the subject of admonition.
(148)
ffu'jus me'riti in me recor'dor. Cic.
Si rite aiidi'ta recor'dor.
Po'xioR, 37 aut geniti'vo, aut ablati'v5, jun'gitur : iit,
Romd'nl signo'rum et armo'rum poti'ti sunt. Sallust.
JZgres'si opta'td potiiin'tur Trocs are'na. Virg.
III. Dati'vus post Yer'biim.
The Dative Case after the Verb.
OM'NIA ver'ba re'gunt dati'vum e'jus re"i, cul a'liquid ac-
qm'ritur, aut adi'mitur : s8 ut,
Mi'hi is' tic rie.c se'ritur, nee me'titur. Plaut.
Quts te mi'hi cd'siis ade'mit ? Ovid.
Huic RE'CUL^E appen'dent va'm ge'neris Ver'ba.
I. Impri'mis, ver'ba sigmfican'tia com'modiim, aut incom'-
modiim, 3 9 re'gunt dati'vum : ut,
37 According to the more ancient mode of writing, pv'titir, and in like
manner fun'gor, and u'tor, had an accusative case : but in later authors
n 11 these verbs govern an ablative ; only po'tior admits likewise of the
genitive.
39 The dative case of the Person, or Thing, to which a verb points ;
or for which any fiction is either done, or intended ; or by which some
acquisition is made, or loss sustained, is emp!6yed after any verb so
pointing, or denoting the action, acquisition, or loss, whether such verb
be transitive or intransitive, dctive or passive. When the verb is tran-
sitive, the noun, which is the immediate object of the verb, must be in
the accusative ; while the noun, to which the subject of the verb refers,
must be in the dative : thus, ta'liS mu't* ja'ce ver'ba f avll'lae, throw such
words as these to the dumb embers ; cu'ra mi'hi hunc H'brum, take care
of this book for me ; docebo ti'bi gna'tum, / will teach thy son for thee.
Hence may almost any verb whatever admft a dative case after it.
Sometimes there is in a sentence, an ellipsis of the object after a
transitive verb, that is an ellipsis of the accusative case ; whilst the
noun, to which the verb points, is expressed in the dative case :
for exdmple, ti'meo ti'bi, / fear for thee ; understand peri'culum,
danger, else a'liquid ma'H, something of ill : whereas " ti'meo te" would
signify " I fear thee" or, in other words, " I am afraid of thee." And
here it may be ndticed that the poets, by a Greek idiom, often use a
dative case after verbs both of the active and pdssive voice, instead of an
ablative with a preposition : as, ti'bi cer'tet, he can vie with thee, for
ie'cum cer'tet ; again, tur'bS rmx'tus iner'tl, mingled with the listless
crowd, for cum tur'ba mlx'tus iner'te ; or, hSc mi'hi obll'ta sunt, these
things are forgotten to me, for a me obll'ta, forgotten by me.
59 To this head may be referred Verbs of Profit or Advantage , of
Healing ; of Gratification . of Favour, Consent, Succour, Complaisance ;
of Fawning or Flattery ; and of Allurement : with their several dppo-
Iff on pfftes mi'hl commoda're, ncc Incoramo Ja're.
Ex his, jii'vo, Ice'du, delec'W, et a'lia quiedam, 40 accusa-
tl'vum ex'igunt : lit,
Fes'sum qui'es plurimum ju'vat.
II. Yer'ba comparan'di re'gunt dati'vum : ut,
. Sic par'vis cdmpo'nere mag'na sole'bdm. Yirg.
InteYdum ve'r5 ablati'vum cum prp5siti6'ne ciim ; inter'-
dum accusati'vum cum pnJepositio'nibus ad et Iriter : ut,
Com'paro Vlrgi'llum cum Home'ro.
Si ad e'um comparfftur, nl'hll est.
Hcec non siint in'ter se confer en da.
III. Yer'ba dan'dl et redden'dl 41 re'gunt dati'vum : utr y
Fortu'nd mul'tis dat nVmls, satis nul'li. Mart.
Ingrfftus est, qui gra'tium lene meren'ti non repo'nit.
IV. VeYba promitten'di ac solven'di re'gunt dati'vum ; ut,
Qudi tibi promit'to, tic. rccl'pw sanctissinie cs'sc obscrvd-
turum. Cic.
JEs allenum mi'hl numera'vit. Ibid.
Y. Yer'ba imperan'di, et nuntian'di, re'gunt dati'vum : ut,..
Im'perat ant ser'vlt collec'ta pecu'nici cui'que. Hor.
Quid de quo'quc vl'ro et cui di'eas, sce'pe vide' to.
Ex'cipe rVgfi, guler'nO^ quee accusati'vum ha'bent,
sites ; as those of Loss or Disadvantage ; of Hurt : of Displeasure ; of
Discountenance and Impartiality ; of Denial, Opposition, Incivility ;
of Detraction, Contumely or Reproach ; of Intimidation and Repulsion :
also verbs of Endurance and Forbearance; of Congratulation ; of
Caution and of Apprehension ; of Offending and Defending ; of Grudge,
En'vy, Malice, Rancour, and many more ; whereof some are transitive
and others neuter.
40 Such as offen'do, / offend ; which is .-ilso an exception to the Rule
* Duti'v urn ' ftr 1 'mere 'gunt vtr'ba compo'situ," c. page 150, below.
" To this class may be referred Verbs of Assigning, Allotting, Be*
yuedthinp, Bestowing, Imparting, Receiving, Sending, Bringing, Intro-
ducing, Presenting, Joining, Mingling, Conceding, Refusing, Remitting^
Forgiving, Delivering up, and Taking away, with se'veral others of like
import.
4 * With these two may be conjoined jii'beo, / order or / bid, and
clo'mo, / tame or / master : both which are verbs of kindred meaning,
though not strictly verbs of Commanding or of Ruling : and, in like
Luauucr, vlu'co, / conquer , which is still more different in sense.
( 150 )
y, et mo'deror, quee nunc dati'vum, nunc accusati'vum
ha'bent: ut,
Lu'na re'git men'ses : orHbem De'iis ip'se guber'nat.
Tem'perat ?p'se si'bi. Sol tem'perat om'ma luce.
Hie modera'tur e'quos, qm non modera'bitiir I'ree.
VI. Ver'ba fiden'di 45 dati'vum ry'gunt : ut,
Vd'cuis commit'tere ve'ms
Nil ni'st le'ne de'cet. Hor.
VII. Ver'ba obsequen'di, et repugnan'di, dati'vum re'gunt :
fit,
Sem'per obtem'perat, pi'its filius pa'tri.
fgnd'vis pTeclbnsfortu'na repug'nat.
VIII. Ver'ba minan'di, et irascen'di, 44 re'gunt dati'vum :
Utri'que mortem est mmita'tus. Cic.
Adolescen'ti nl'hil est quod succen'seam. Ter.
IX. SUM, cum compo'sitls, prte'ter pos'sum^ re'git dati'vum:
ut,
Rex pins est reipub'licaj orndmen' turn.
Mi'hl nee ob'est, nee pro'dest.
Dati'vum fer'me re'gunt Ver'ba compo'sita cum his adver'-
bTis, be'ne, satis, male, et cum his pr^positio'nibus, pr& 3
ad, con, sub, ante, post, ob, in, inter : 4 * ut,
Di'i ti'bl benef a'ciant. Ter.
go me is majo'ribus xirtute pr^lux'I. Cic.
Intempestive qui occupa'to adlu'serit. Phaedr.
Condu'cit hoc tn'ce lau'di.
Convlxlt no'bis.
uxo'ri qudd ego md'chindr.
43 With Verbs of Confiding or Trusting may be coupled those of
Believing and Discrediting, and likewise Verbs of Persuading and Un-
deceiving : but all these come properly under the head of Verbs of
Giving.
M The Latin and En'glish idioms (it may be perceived) are at con-
siderable variance in verbs of this description : for we say, " to
thrcAten a person with death," whereas the Romans said, " to threaten
death to a person.''
45 To which may be added su'per : but many verbs compounded with
this last are not put acquisitively : thus ter'ram superge'rere, to heap
up the earth, without specifying, " to whom or/or what. 1 '
( 151 )
Iniquls simam pd'cem justls'simo bel'lo ante'fero. Cic.
Postpo'nO fa'mse pecu'ni&m.
j&'a quonidm ne'rnini obtru'di po'tcsi*
Ttur ad me. Ter.
Impen'det om'mbus pZriculum.
Non solum inter'fuit his re'bus, scd e'tiatn prayfuit. Cic.
Non pau'ca ex Ins mu'tant dati'vum aliquo'ties in a'lium
ca'sum : 46 ut,
Prai'stat inge'riio alius a'lium, Quinct.
ST, pro huleo, re'git dati'vum : 47 ut,
Est mi'hi ndm'que do' ml pater, est Injus'ta nover'ca.
Huic si'mile est sup' petit : ut,
Pau'per e'nim non est* cui re'rum sup'petit u'siis. Hor.
46 These are chiefly verbs compounded with the preposition pr,
before, or an'te, before : many of which compounds take an accusative
in preference to a dative, especially where a dative case may be under-
stood after the immediate object expressed with the verb ; or where the
rdgimen of the simple verb is the accusative case : others, again, take
an accusative or a dative indifferently ; and others, a dative dnly.
Verbs compounded with the rest of the prepositions mentioned, fre-
quently have the same preposition (or one of like meaning) set before
the substantive which follows the verb : and sometimes, if the prepo-
sition govern an accusative case, the substantive is put in the accusative
case, with an omission of the preposition, being governed either by the
preposition understodd, or by that in composition with the verb.
47 This is a prevailing idiom of the Latin language, b6rrowed (ori-
ginally) from the Greek ; and is much more e'legant than the use of the
verb hafbeo. In fact it would be almost a barbarism to say, ha'beu
do'mi pa'trem, ha bed wjus'tam nover'cum ! Here, then, we may observe,
that the word which seems (in En'glish) to be the nominative case, is
actually the dative in Latin ; while the word which to us is the accu-
sative, is, in the idiom of that language, the nominative. It therefore
follows by analogy, that if the word which, with us, is the ndminative, be
conve'rted into the accusative (in Latin) by the omission of the conjunc-
tion " that," which answers in Latin to " quod or tit" then the verb EST
must be in the infinitive mood ; but still followed by a dative of the word
which, in our idiom, is the nominative : as, / know thou hast not money,
sci'o tT'bi non es'se argen'tum ; literally, / knoio money not to be unto thee.
In like manner is de'est, it is wanting, (followed by a dative,) ve'ry ap-
pr6priately used for ca'reo, / want : thus, for example, plu'rima mi'lu
de'sunt, vtry many things are wanting to me or I want very many things.
In the third person, both singular and plural of all the te'nses and moods,
are these verbs thus usurped and with Elegance as it respdcts the Ldtia
tongue.
( 152)
SIIM, cum mul'tis a'lils, ge'mmum admit'tit dati'vum : ut, 48
Exi'tio est a'vldls ma're nau'tis. Hor.
Spe'ras ti'bl laii'dl fo're, quod mi'hl vi'tio ver'tis ?
Est u'bl hie datl'vus, ti'li, aut sl'bi, aut e'tiam mihi, ele-
gan'tiee cau'sa ad'ditur : ut,
Su'o si'bi gld'dlo hunc ju'guW. Ter.
IV. Accusati'vus post Ver'bum.
The Accusative Case after the Verb.
YER'BA TRANSixi'vI 49 cujuscun'que ge'neris, si've acti'vi,
Si'vS deponen'tis, si've commu'nis, ex'igunt accusati'viim : ut,
Percontato'rem fu'gito, ndm gdr'riilus ?dem est. Hor.
A' per a'gros depopula'tur.
Imprimis venera're de'os.
Ver'ba Neu'tra accusati'vum ha'bent cogna'tse sigmfica-
tio'nis : ut,
Du'rcim ser'vit servitu'tem.
SUNT QU^ f igura'te accusati'vum ha'bent : ut,
Nee vox ho'mmem so'nat : dea, cer'te ! Virg.
Ver'ba rogan'di, docen'di, yestien'di, celan'di, fe're dii'pliceiii
re'gunt accusati'vum : ut,
Tu mo' do pos'ce de'os ve'niam. Virg.
Dedoce'bo te Is' ids mo'res.
JlidZculum est te is'tuc me admone're. 80 Ter.
48 Particularly when there is in the sense of the expression something
more or less, of the meaning of the verbs affero, / bring, du'co, I esteem
or reckon, tri'buo, / give or ascribe, ver'to, / turn or impute, and a few
dthers of similar import ; for besides the dative of the person there is
often a ddtive of the result or effect ; or of the light in which the dbject
is regarded ; or of the design with which a thing is done, or of the
purpose for which it is intended. To this Rule belong such phrases as
the following : de'dit mT'hf do'no, he gave it me a present : rell'quit
ti'bl pig'norl, he left it to thee a pledge : is rg'gi dlc'to au'diens non e'rat,
he was not hearing (that is, obedient) to the king's command, literally, to
the saying to the. king : est e'l no'men lu'lo, the name lulus is to him, i. e.
he has the name lulus.
By Verbs Transitive we must understand all verbs which have a
strictly active signification, that is, which express an action passing on
to some person, or thing, as the dirdct and immediate dbject of the verb.
50 Though Verbs of Teaching and Admonishing have frequently two
( 153 )
In'duit se cal'ceos 51 quos pr?us e.xu'erat.
'a ne me ce'let 62 consult' ci fT Hum. Ter.
Hujus'modi ver'ba e'tiam In passi'va vo'cg accusatrvuin
post se ha'bent : ut,
Pos'ceris ex'ta lo'vis.
No'mina appellati'va addun'tur fe're cum pr&positio'ne
Yer'bis, qude de'notant mo'tum : ut,
Ad tcm'plum Pdl'ladis I'bant.
V. Ablati'\us post Yer'bum.
The Ablative Case after the Verb.
QUOD'VIS VER'BUM admit'tit ablati'vum significan'tem in-
struraen'tum, aut cau'sam, aut rao'dum 53 actid'nis : ut,
Hi ja'culis, llli cer'tdnt defen'dere sax'is. Virg.
accusatives, namely, one of the Person, and one of the Admonition, yet
sdmetimes (arid ven elegantly) after the latter, the thing which is the
subject of admonition is expressed in the genitive case ; or in the ablative
with the preposition de, of or concerning : as, admo'neo te offi'cii. 1
remind you of your duty ; de hue re te saj'plus admo'niil, / have often
and often warned you of this circumstance. Again, Verbs of Askiny
sometimes change the accusative of the person into an ablative with a
preposition : as, hoc a te pe'to, this I ask of ihee : and several Verbs
of Interrogating retain the accusative of the Person, but change the
accusative of the Thing into the Ablative with the preposition de.
51 Verbs of Clothing have more commonly, instead of two accusatives,
the accusative of the person, and the ablative of the vesture without a
preposition : as ves'tlt se pui/pura, he arrays himself in purple : also, the
two verbs m'duo, I put on, and 6x'uo, / put off, have not unfrequently
the vesture in the accusative, and the person in the dative : as, thora -
cem sl'bl In'duit, he put upon himself his corslet or breast-plate.
52 The verb ce'lO is oftentimes followed by the dative of the person and
the accusative of the thing : else, by the accusative of the person, and
the ablative of the thing gdverned by the preposition de.
J>3 A preposition is, ve'ry frequently, expressed with nouns signifying
either the Cause or the Manner , as, pr<-S gau'dlOj/oryo?/, cum sum'mo
labo're, with the greatest labour , or if the preposition gdvern an accu-
sative case, the noun is put, accordingly, in the accusative ; as, prop'ter
amo'rem,/or love, ob cul'pam, for the fault, per de'decus, with disgrace:
but with the In'strument, a preposition is never used: for we cannot
say scrl'bo cum ca'lanio, but scri'bo ca'liimo, 7 write with a pen ; neither
can we say cum o'culls vT'deS, but o'culls vi'deo, / see with rny ei/es.
Yet with the In'.strument as a Concomitant the preposition is ge'nerally
expressed ; as, ingres'sus est cum giu'dlo, he entered with a sword, that
is, having a word about him, or in, his hand.
n3
( 154 )
Vehemeriter I'ra excan'diiit.
M7ra celerita'te rem pere'git.
Quibus'dam ver'bls subji'citur nonien pre'tii in ablati'vd
ca'su : iit,
Teriin'ci5, sen vitio'sa nu'ce non e'merlm.
Multorum san'gume tic vulne'ribus e'd Pcenis victoria
ste'tit. Liv.
VI'LI, paulo, <m?nimO) mag'no, nimw, plurlmo, dintfdio,
dii'plof* per se ste'pe ponun'tur, subaudi'ta voce pretio : ut,
"Vi'Ji ve'nlt tri'ticum*
Excipmn'tiir hi geniti'vi si'ne substanti'vis po'sit! ; lan'ti,
quantl^ pluris, minffris, tantidtm, quanii'vis, quantTiibct,
quanticurique^ fyc. : lit,
Tau'tl eris a'liis, quan'ti tnifutrls. Cic.
FLOC'CI, naucl, ni'hili, pill, as sis, hu'jiis, teruricii, ver'bis
eestiman'di peculia'riter addun'tur : ut,
S'go ll'liim floc'cl pen'do, nee hujiis fa'ciO, qul me
pi'li ses'timat.
Yer'ba abiindan'di, Implen'di, oneran'di, et Ins diver'sa, 55
ablati'vo jungun'tur : ut,
Amo're abun'das, An'tiphS. Ter.
Syl'lci om'nes sii'os divi'tiis exple'vit. Sail.
Te qui'biis menda'cns homines levls'simi onera'runt !
Te hoc cri'mme ex'pedi. Ter.
Ex qui'biis quai'dam nonnun'quam geniti'vum re'gunt : ut,
Implen'tur ve'teris Bac'chI, pinyuis'que feri'n^. Virg.
Quasi tu hujus indi'goas patrls. Ter.
FuN'GOR,/r'or, ii'tor, vescdr^digndr, mutO,* 6 commu'nicB,
superseded^ ablati'vo jungiin'tur : ut,
w With several dthers of like import ; as, permag'no, for very much ;
par'vo, for little ; perpur'vo, for very little : and sometimes, nihl'lo./or
nothing, either with, or without, the preposition pro, for, especially after
the vei*b ha'beo, / regard or value.
55 To this Rule beh'mg Verbs of Bereaving or Plundering ; such as>
or' bo, spo'lid, <e. :thus, or'bas pa'trlam juventu'te, tkou beredvest thy
country of her youth ; me bo'nis spolia'vit, he plundered me of my goods.
56 Mil' to, and (in like manner) dlg'nor, and commu'nicd, govern an
accusative case, but require moreover an ablative to complete the sense :
( 155)
Qui adtpis'ci ve'ram gloriam vti'let^ justi'tia> funga'tur
offi'cns. Cic.
Op'timum est alie'nd frii'i insa'ma.
In re ma! Id, a'nimd si bo no uta're, jii'vat.
Ves'cor car'ntbus.
Hand e'quidem td'll me dig'nor hono're. ^ r irg.
Di'rult, didi'ficdt, mu'tat quddrd'ta rotun'dis. Hor.
Communica'bo te men'sa me a.
Verbo'rum multitu'dme superseden'duin est.
MK'ROR, cum adver'bns be'ne, ma IS, me'llus, pe'jiis, op-
time,pcs'slme, ablati'vo jiin'gitur, cum priepositio'ne de : ut,
De me niiriquam be'ne me'ritiis est.
Q.uee'dam accipien'dl, distan'di, et auferen'di yer'ba, ali-
quan'do dati'vo jungun'tur : ut,
Pau'lnm sepTd'tce dis'tat iner'ticE
Celd'td virtus. Hor.
Eri'pe te mo'r^. Ibid.
Qmbus'libetver'bis ad'diturablati'vus" absolute sum'ptiis :
thus, mu'to ga'leam to'ga, / change a helmet with or for a gown ; and
it is remarkable that mu'to signifies either to give or receive in exchange :
aSjinu'tat u'vam stri'gili, " he receives grapes in exchange for a scraper."
Hor. ; me dlg'nor hono're, / deem myself worthy of honour. Hence
they cSnnot (in strictness,) be said to be joined to an ablative ; but, to
require an accusative followed by an ablative. As well, indeed, might
the verbs do'no, / present or / gift, mu'nero, I reward, and several
diners of the like sort, be said to be joined to an ablative, because, like
mu'to, they have an accusative of the person, followed (in ge'neral) by an
ablative of the thing. Gau'deo, / delight in, and ni'tor, 1 lean on, have
an ablative only. And to these might be ddded a few more.
*7 The Ablative case is taken absolutely or independently, when the
sense of the substantive is insulated (as it were) in the se'ntence : for if
the substantive (thus taken or assumed) have any word in the sentence
whereby it can be governed, or 6ny verb to which it can be the nomi-
native, then (of course) the ablative case ought not to be used. For
example, the king having spoken these words went away, rex, h?ec locu'-
tus, dlsces'sit : here the accusative hac is governed by the participle
locu'tus, and the noun understood with it is not assumed absolutely : but
again, the king, these words having been said, went away, rex, his dlc'tis,
dlsces'sit ; here his is the ablative absolute. When no participle is ex-
pressed with the ablative absolute, then existence or Cxlsten'tlbus, being,
is always understood : as, me pu'ero, me a boy, that is, when 1 was a
boy, or me existence pu'ero, / being a boy : Di'is Invi'tls, the Gods being
unwilling, understand, existen'tibus.
( 156 )
Imperan'te Aug*us'to, natus est Chris'tus ; imperan'tS
Tibe'rio, cruclflx'us.
Me du'ce, tu'tus eris. Ovid.
Ver'bis quibus'dam ad'ditur ablati'vus par'tis affec'tee et
poe'tice accusati'vus : ut,
^Egro'tat ammo md'gls qucim cor' pore.
Cdn'det dcn'tes.
Ra'bet c&fitlot.
Quie'dara usurpan'tur e'tiam cum gemtrvo : ut,
AlsTir'defaciSy
Qui an'gas te a'nimi. Plaut.
VERBA PASSIYA.
Verbs Pdssice.
Plssf vis ad'ditur ablati'vus agen'tts, sed anteceden'te a vel
&b preepositio'ne ; et inter'dum datl'vus : 58 ut,
Lauda'tur ab 7iis, culpa'tur ab it Its. Hor.
Hvnes'ta bo'nis vi'ris, non occul'td, qua^run'tur.
CSE teri ca'sus ma'nent in passi'vis,*^ qui fue'runt activo'-
rum : ut,
Accusa'ris a me fur'ti.
Hcibe'bcrls ludfbrio.
Dedoce'beris a me ts'tos mores.
Pricd'berls magistra'tu.
b8 The use of the dative, instead of the ablative with a preposition, is
by a Greek idiom, and occurs dftener (perhaps) in poetry than in prose.
And sometimes, with the ablative of the agent, the preposition is omitted
after passive verbs : as, scribe'ris Va'rio, you will be described by Vdriun.
59 The meaning of this Rule appears to be, that if with the active
voice two cases (neither of which is governed by a preposition) be
employed, the latter of those cases may be put after the passive voice.
Thus, do'ceo te gramma'tTcam, / teach thee grammar, tu doce'ris gram-
rua'ticam, thou art taught grammar : ro'go te senten'tlam, 1 ask thee thy
opinion, roga'rls senten'tiam, thou art asked thy opinion : accm'go me
cu'sern, / begird me with my sivord, accm'gor cn'seni, / am begirt (as to j
<rny sword : o'nero na'vem au'ro, / freight the ship with gold, na'vis
onera'tiir au'ro, the ship is freighted with gold: le'vo tc fas'ce, / liyltten
thee of a bundle, tu leva'rts fas'ce, thou art lightened of a bundle.
(157 )
YA'PULO, venetf, ttceo, ex'ulo, /f *, neu'tro-passl'va ; passi-
vam constructio'uem ha'bent : ut,
A pr&cepto're vapuia'bis.
Md'lo a ci'vS spoiid'rl, quam b hos'te venfrc.
Vlr'tus pdr'vo pre'tlo li'cet ab om'nibiis.
Cur a convivaritilus ex'iilat philoso'phld ?
tyudfi&Zbitto*
VERBA INFINITA.
Verbs of the Infinitive Mood.
VER'BIS qmbiis'dam, partici'piis, et adjecti'vis, addiin'tur
ver'ba infmi'ta ;* et poe'tice substantl'vis : ut,
Di'cere quce pii'duit, scribere jus' sit u'mor. Ovid.
Jiis'sus confun'dere/6eV/5. Virg.
E'rat turn dig'niis ama'ri. Ibid.
Tem'pus abl're tl'lL
Ponun'tur inter'dum so'la, per Ellip'sin, ver'ba infini'ta : ut,
Hinc spar'gere vo'ces
In rul'gum amlfguds, et qudz'rere cdrisciiis dr'ma.
\_Hlc sulauditur incipiebat.]
GERUNDIA ET SUPINA.
Gerunds and Supines.
GRUN'DIA et Supf NA re'gunt ca'sus suorum Yerbo'riim : ut,
Effcror studio pa'tres vestros viden'di. Cic.
Uten'dum 61 e&t teta'te : cl'to pede pros' terlt a? ids. Ovid.
--- Scita turn ora'ciiia Pha: bl
Mittimus.
I. GERUNDIA.
1. Gerunds.
Gerun'dia in -di ean'dem cum geniti'vis constructio'nem
ha'bent, et pendent a quibus'dam turn substauti'vis, tuui
adjecti'vis : ut,
so When two verbs come together, without Any nominative case
between them, the latter is generally put in the infinitive mood.
61 In this Example utL,i'du.m is not by any means the ge'rund in -dum^
but the neuter gender of the future participle passive in -dus. See note
60, below.
( 158 )
Cecrft'piag innfftus a'pcs a'raor Tir'gct baben'di. Virg,
^Ene'ds cel'sa in pup' pi jam cer'tus eun'di. Ibid.
Gerun'dia in -do ean'dem cum ablati'vis ; et gerun'dia in
-dum cum accusati'vis, constructio'nem ob'tment; 68 ut,
Scrllen'di ra'tw conjTmc'ta cum loquen'do est. Quint.
A'litur rl'tium vlvlt'que tegen'do. Virg.
Lo'ciis ad agen'dum amplis'simiis. Cic.
Cum significa'tur " Neces'sitas" ponun'tur gerun'dia in
-dum 63 cftra prajpositio'nem, ad'dito veYbo est : ut,
Oran'dum est, Ttt sit mens sa'na in cor'pore sa'no. Juv.
Vigilan'dum est e'i, qui cii'pit vm'cerc.
Vertun'tur e'tiam gerun'dia in no'mma adjecti'va : C4 ut,
Ad accussan'dos bo' mines duel prcs'mw^prdx'inium latro'-
cinio est.
II. SUPINA.
2. ftiipines.
SupfNUM in -urn 6 ' 9 acti've signi'ficat, et se'quitur ver'bum,
aut partici'pium, signi'ficans mo'tiim ad lo'cum : ut,
62 The gerund in -do has sdmetimes, though more rarely, the con-
struction of the dative case : as, u'tile seren'do, Useful to sowing ;
iip'tus haben'do, fit to having, par solven'do, equal to paying, that is,
solvent,
63 A more vile error than this was never countenanced. To me,
indeed, it is, (I confe'ss) miitter of the greatest astonishment, that hitherto
e'very writer on Latin Grammar (as far, at least, as I am aware) should
have uniformly fallen into the same mistake and have tacitly subscribed
to the same blunder. This " supposed Gerund" is the ndminative case,
singular, neuter gender, of the future pdrticiple passive, with the verb
est assumed impe'rsonally. When the sense is not impersonal, the verb
est is sometimes suppressed : as, levan'dum fron'de ne'rnus, the grove
must be disburdened of its foliage or leafy boughs.
61 This holds good dnly of verbs which govern an accusative case : to
which may be added, fiin'gor, fruor, and po'tior, which had originally
an accusative after them.
65 The supine in -um is vdry elegantly put aiter the verb e'S, I go,
ve'mo, I come, and mit'to, / send : but instedd of the supine, which is
governed by the preposition ad underetodd, the pdets sdmetimes use the
infinitive : as, e'o vide're, / am going to see. On the dther hand, the
supine in -um is occasionally employed after dther verbs than those of
mdtion : as, do f I'liam nup'tiim, / give my daughter to marry. The
supine in u does not follow all adjectives, but dnly those signifying quality,
form, and dthers of similar meaning, such as esy, difficult, agreeable,
disagreeable, wdrthy , unworthy, &c. It is also used" after the substantives
fas and ne'f as.
( 159 )
Specta'tum ve'nmnt, ve'nmnt specten'tur iit ip's&. Ovid.
Milites sunt mis'si specula' turn dr'ccm.
in -w passi've slgni'ficat, et se'qiutur no'mina
adjecti'va : iit,
Quod fac'tu fce'dum est, Tdcm cst et dlc'tu tur'pe.
DE TEMPORE ET LOCO.
Nouns of Time and Place.
I. T EM PUS.
1. Time.
QuJi significant " par'tem tem'poris," in ablati'vo fre-
quen'tius ponun'tur : ut,
Ne'mO mortffllum om'nibiis ho'rls sapit. Plin.
Quee au'tem " duratid'nem tem'poris" significant, in accu-
sati'vo f e're ponun'tur : ut,
Hie jam ter cen'tum to'tos regnd'bitiir an'nos. Virg.
Di'cimus e'tiam :
In panels die'bus.
De di'e.
De noc'te.
Promlt'to in di'em.
Com'modo in men'sem.
An'nos ad qumqtiagm'ta na'tus.
Per tres an'nos studui.
Puer id seta tis.
Non plus tri'duum, am trl'duo.
Ter'tio (vel ad ter'tmm) calen'das vcl calenda'rum.
II. SPATIUM LOCI.
2. Distance of Place.
Spa'tmm lo'ci in accusatl'vo po'nitur, Inter'dum et in ab-
lati'vo : ut,
Jam mille pas'sus proces'serdm.
Attest ub ur'le quingen'tis mil'libus passuum.
I'tem: J[ A7*i bi'dul ;
[U'bl Intelli'gitur spa'tmm vel spa'tio, iffncrt vel Tier.
(160)
III. NOMINA LOCORUM.
3. The Names of Places.
OM'N ver'bum admit' tit geniti'vum op'pidi no'minis, in
quo fit ac'tlo, mo'do pri'mte 65 vel secun'dai declmatio'nis, et
smgula'ris nu'meri, sit : ut,
Quid Rom-^fd clam ? MentTrz ne'scio. Juv.
Hi gemti'vi, liumi, domt, mitftlce, Helli^ proprio'rum se-
quun'tur for'mam : ut,
Par vl sunt.foris dr'mci, ni'si est consTlium do'rai.
- U'nd scin'per mili'ti et do'mi
Fuimiis. Ter.
Ve'riim si op'pidi no'men plura'lis duntax'at nii'raeri, aut
ter'tite declmatio'nis fu'erit, in ablati'vo, po'nitiir : ut,
Col'chus an Assy'rius ; The'bis nutritus^ an Ar'gis ? Hor.
Eo'mte Tilur a'mcm; vcnto'sus^'Eiburefto'inam. Ibid.
Ver bis significan'tibus mo'tiim ad lo'cum 67 fe'rc ad'ditur
no'men lo'ci in accusatl'vo si'ne preepositio'ne : ut,
Conces'si Cantabri'giam ad caplen'dum Inge nil cultiun*
Ad hunc ino'dum u'tmiur domus et rus : ut,
TtS do'mum, saturce^ venit Hesperus, Zte, capel'la:.
rus I'W.
66 Towns in -e of the first declension have usually in ur'bg set before
tnem : as, in vir'be Mityle'ues, in the city of Mitylene. Sdmetinaes, too,
a preposition is put before the name of a town, as In Ro'ma, in Rome,
ad vel a'pud Ro'mara, beside or near Rome. Both these expressions,
however, are different in medniug from Ito'ma:, which signifies " at
Rome." The names of countries and islands are oftentimes (especially
by the pdets) used like the names of towns, as Cy'pri, at Cyprus ; but
this is by ellipsis of the words " in regio'ne vel in m'sulii, in the district
or island.
67 Not dnly the names of towns, but (by poetic licence) those of
ndtions and countries, and sometimes even common nouns, are used in
the accusative case without a preposition, after verbs signifying ' motion
to or toivards :" as, I'bimus Afros, we shall go to the Africans ; spe-
luu'cam ean'dem deve'nmnt, they come to the same grot. The pdets also
occasionally employ the dative for the accusative : as, it clamor cde'lo,
the clamour goes to heaven, meaning, the vociferations rise to the skies.
When motion through a Place is signified, the preposition per is necea-
sary : as, i'ter fc'cit per Londfniim et Can'tium, he made a journey
through London and Kent. >
( 161 )
VER'BIS slgmfican'tibus mo'tum a loco 68 fe're ad'ditu?
no men 15' ci in ablati'vo si'ne preepositio'ne : ut,
Nl'si ante Ro'ma profec'tus es'ses, nunc earn relmqueres.
YERBA IMPERSONALIA.
Verbs Impersonal.
VERBA IMPERSONA'LIA nominati'vum non ha'bent enun-
cia'tum: ut,
Ju'vat ire sub um'lrds.
Htec impersona/lia, Interest et re'fert quibus'libet geniti'-
vis jungun'tur : prater hos ablati'vos fdemini'nos, mea,
tii' a, sii'd, nos'trd, ves'trd, et cujd : fl9 ut,
In'terest magistra'tus tiie'rl bd'nos, dnimddver' tere In
maids.
Tu'a re'fert telpsum nos'se.
Addua tur et hi gemti'vi, tan'tt, qudn'ti, mdg'nt, pdr'w y
qudntlciirique^ tdntl'dem : ut,
Tan'ti re'fert hones' ta agere.
Dati'vum pos'tulant impersona'lia acquislti've po'sita ;
au'tem transiti've ponun'tur, accusati'vum : ut,
A Deo no'bis be'nefit.
Me jii'vat 70 ire per dl'tum.
68 Although the poets, very frequently, put the names of countries,
provinces, islands, and several dther places which do not come properly
under the denomination of cities or towns, in the ablative case without
a preposition, after verbs of " motion from" as Sici'lla disces'slt, he
departed from Sicily, yet, in prose, this construction is seldom, or never,
admitted ; some preposition, as, d, ab, e, c.r, de, being cdmmonly set
before the noun : as, ex Hlber'nra rever'siis cst, he returned from or
out of I'reland.
9 Many grammarians (among dthers Valpy) consider these pronouns
to be the accusative case plural neuter gender, gdverned by tn'tSr or & d
understood!.
7 These four, ju'vat, it delights, de'cet, it befits, delec'tat, it delights,
and opor'tet, it behoves, are ge'nerally followed by an accusative of the
person and an infinitive : and here it may be observed, that the infinitive
alter opdr'let is e'legantly changed into a subjunctive, with the omfssiou
both of the pe'rson and of ut : as, opoi-'tet facias, it behoves that you de>
it, for opor'tct te fa'cere, it behoves you to do it.
C162)
His ve'ro, afttnSt, per'tmet, spec'tat, pro'prie ad'ditur
prajposi'tio ad: ut,
Me vis d?cere quod ad te at'tinet ? Ter.
Spec'tat ad om'ncs be'ne vi'vere.
His Impgrsona'libus subji'citiir acciisatl'vus cum geniti'vo, 71
p&'nitet, tee del, mZseret, miser es'cit, pii'det, pi' get: ut,
Si ad cente'simum mxis'set an'num, senectu'tis e'um
suce non poemte'ret. Cic.
MZseret me tut.
Ver'biim impersona'le passi'vai vo'cis pro sin'giills pers5'nis
utrlus'que nu'meri elegan'ter ac'cipi po'test : ut,
Std'tiir ; id est, sto, stas^stat, sta'mus, stcTtis, slant, vide'-
licet ex vi adjunc'ti ca'sus : tit, statiir d me : id est, sto :
std'tiir ab U'lls ; id est, stdnt.
PARTICIPIORUM COXSTRUCTIO.
The Construction of Participles.
Partici'pia re'gunt ca'sus verbo'rura a qui'bus deriyan'tiir :
ut,
'Du'pllces ten'dens ad sidcrd pal'mas,
Tfflia voce refert. Virg.
Partici'pns passi'vse vo'cis ad'ditur Inter'dum dati'vus,
praiser'tim si ex'eunt in -dus : ut,
Mag' niis cl'vis o'lit, et formida'tus Oth 6'm.
Res'tdt Chremes,
qul mi'hi exoran'dus est. Ter.
Partici'pia, cum fi'unt n6'mina,72 gemti'vum exlgunt : fit,
Alie'nz dp pe tens, suiprofu'sus. Sail.
Exo'sus pero'sus, pertdi'sus, acti've signif ican'tia, accusa-
ti'vum ex'igunt : ut,
71 This genitive is sometimes turned into an infinitive mood of kindred
signification : as, poe'nitet me peccft'ti, it repents me of my offence, poe'-
nltet me pecciis'se, it repents me to have offended, that is, to have offiuded
repents me.
7i A participle is said to become a noun, -when it is entirely dive'sted
of the idea of time, or is capable of comparison : thus, in the phrase,
pa'tiens frl'gus, suffering cold y pa'tiens is a participle ; but in the phrase,
pa'tiens frl gorfs, patient of cold, pa'tiens is a participial or verbal ad-
jective.
( 163 )
Astro'ndmiis exo'sus ad u'nam muITe'res.
Immurid&m segm'tiem pero'sai.
Pert^e'sus Igna'viam suam. Suet.
Exo'sus, et perosuS) passi've sigmfican'tia, cum dati'vo
legun'tur; ut,
Exo'sus De'6 et sanc'tis.
Germanl Roma'ms per5'si siint.
NA'TUS, prdgnfftut, satus, cre'tiis, crea'tiis, or'tiis, <?ditus,
ablati'vura ex'igunt ; et see'pe cum prsepositio ne : ut,
Bond lonis progna'ta paren'tibus.
Sa'te san'guine Dfvum ! Virg.
Quo san'guine cre'tus ! Ibid.
Venus, or'ta ma'ri, mare pr&'stat euriti. ,0vid.
Terra e'dltus.
Edita de mdg'no flu'mine nyniplia fiii.
AD7ERBIORUM CONSTRUCTIO.
The Construction of Adverbs.
EN et ec'ce, demonstran'd! adver'bia, nominati'vd frequen'-
tlus jungun'tiir, accusatl'vo ra'rius : ut,
En Pri'amus. ^irg.
Ecce fill sta'tus not'ttr. Cic.
- En qufftuftr a'ras ;
Ec'ce du'as ti'ln Ddph'ni ; duoque alta'ria P/tce'bo.
Ex et ec'ce exprobran'al, so'li accusative jungun'tiir ; ut,
En a'nimum et men'tem.
Ec'ce an tern al'terum.
adver'bia lo'c!, tem'poris, et quantita'tis, genitl'-
vum admit'tunt.
1. Lo'ci; iit, ii'li, uWnam, nusquam, e'o, lon'ge^ quu,
, huc'cine^ fyc. : lit,
tTll geritiilm ?
Nus'quam 15' ci Invenftiir.
E'6 impuden'tite ven'tum cst.
Quo terra'rum (il'ilt ?
2. Tem'pons ; iit, nunc, tune, turn, mtZrZa, prt'die, pos-
trtdie, $c. : ut,
a
( 164 )
N?hil tune tern poris am'plms quamfle're poterdm.
Pri'die e'jus die'I pug'nam inierunt.
Pri'die calenda'rum, vel ctileridds.
3. Quantita'tis ; ut, pa rum, sa'tls, abun'de, fyc. : ut,
Sci'tis eloquen'tice, sapieritioe pa rum. Sail.
Abiln'de fabula'rum audi'vimus.
QU^E'DAM ca'sus admlt'tunt no'mmum' 3 un'de deduc'ta
siint : ut,
Si'bl inuti'liter mmt.
Prcx'ime Hlspa'mam Mauri sunt. Sail.
Me'liiis vel op'time om'miim. Cic.
Am'plms oplnio'ne morabd'tur. Sail.
ADVER'BIA diversTta'tis, a liter, se'ciis ; et Il'la dii'o, an't& 9
post* ablati'vd non ra'ro jungun'tur : ut,
Mid to a liter.
Pau'lo se'ciis.
Mul'to ante.
Pau'lo post.
Lori go post tem'pore vPnit. Virg.
IN*STAR et er'go adverbialiter sum'pta gemti'vum post se
ha'bent : tit,
In' star moa'tis v'quum., dzv?nd Pdl'ladis dr'te,
^Edi'f tcdnt. Vir<r.
Donari virtu'tis er'g5. Cic.
CONJUNCTIONUM CONSTRUCTIO.
The Construction of Conjunctions.
Conjunctio'nes copulati'v^, et disjuncti'vee, si'miles ca'siis*
mo'dos, et tem'pora, conjun'gunt; ut,
Socrates do cult Xenophon'tem et Plato'nem.
Recto stat cor'pore, despiclt'que ter'rds.
Nee scri'bit, nee le'git.
Ni'si va'riab constructio'nis ra'tiO a'lmd pos'cat : lit,
73 And adverbs of the comparative degree have dptionally the con-
junction quam after them, or an Sblative (if the sense will admit) with
the omfssicn of gu&m : thus, al'tius quam so'litiim vel al'tltts b51it4X
more loftily than usual.
( 165 )
tflrum centiis'si et plu'ris.
Vixl Ro mee et Venetns.
Nl'sl me lactas'ses amaritem, Zifal'sa spe produ'ceres.
QUAM saVpe Intelli'gitur post dm'plms^pliis^ et mi' nits : ut,
Am'plius sunt sex men'ses. Cic.
Paulo plus trecen'ta vehi'cula sunt amts'sa. Liv.
Nuriquam nix mi* mis qua'tuor pe'des al'ta jd'cult.
Quffius VKRBO'RUM MO'DIS QU.E'DAM CON'GR!;UNT ADVER'B!A
ET CONJUNCT1ONES.
Xfi, n, niim, dubitati've, aut indefim'te, po'stta siibjunc-
ti'vo jungun'tiir : iit,
Ni'/iH re'fert feceris'ne an persua'serls.
Vise, niim redi'erit.
DUM, pro dummodo et quous'que, subjunctl'vura postu'-
lat: 74 lit,
Diim pro'sim ti'In.
Ter'tld dum regnciritem vi'derit ces'tas.
Qui, cau'sam signi'ficans, subjuncti'viim ex'igit : ut,
Stul'tus es qui liulc cre'das.
UT, pro post'quiim, s7ciit, et quo'modo, Indtcati'vo jun'gitur:
cum aii'tem quariquiim, utpote, vel finu'lem causam 7 *
de'notat, subjuncti'vo : ut,
7* Dum, -whenever it signifies " whilst or until,'" is joined to the indi-
cative mood : in like manner cum, when it signifies " when" and do'ncc
in the sense of "so long," are followed by the indicative : but when
cum is tised for " since," and do' nee for " until" the subjunctive mood
is necessary. Li'cet, although, K'tTnam, / wish, dum'rmido, proinded-
thaty and a few dthers of like import, have more commonly the subjunc-
tive mood fter them. Ne, the adverb of forbidding, takes either the
imperative or subjunctive mood ; but ne, lest, takes the subjunctive <5nly :
thus, ne ti'me vel n6 ti'meas, do not fear ; ca've ne fa'ciits, take care
lest thou do, that is, take care thou do not : but there is often an ellipsis
of the word ne. And here it should be n6ticed, that after verbs oi
fearing, ne Always means ' lest, 1 ' and implies a partial want of negation,
whilst iit, that, has an acceptation the very reverse : thus, tT'meo no
fa'ciat, I fear lest he do it, that is, I am afraid he will do it: ti'meo lit
ft'clat, / fear that he may do it, that is, / am afraid that he will not
doit.
7b The conjunction tit, when connected with a contingent verb, is
( 166 )
TJt su'mus in Pon'to, ter frtgore con'stitit Is ter. Ovi(
U t tu'te es, i'ta. om'nes cerises es'se.
Ut om'nia contm'gant, qua* vo'lo, leva'ri non possum.
Non est iibtfiden'dum, ut qul to'tles fefel'lerls.
Te o'ro Dd've, ut re'deat^'am in vi'am. Ter.
Qrn'nea de'nique Yo'ces indefinite 76 po'sitai, qua'les sunt
quis, quan'tus, quo'tus, c. subjuncti'vum pos'tulant : ut,
GUI scii'barn vl'deo. Cic.
Quan'tus
In clifpeum assuygat ; quo tur^line tor'queat has'tam.
dften omitted after vo'lo, / wish, opor'tet, it behoves, fer, do thou, ne-
ces'se est, it is requisite, and a few titkers : as, fac co'gites, do think,
for fac ut co'gites.
76 By " words put indefinitely" we are to understand " words em-
ployed in an unrestricted, doubtful, or undefined sense]' 1 particularly
InterrogativeSj whether indeed, they be A r owsor Pronouns or Ad' verbs
or Conjunctions. But the same words, when empldyed in a restricted or
positive sense, will have the indicative mood. And here it may be
remarked that the conjunctions, au'tem, but, ve'r5, but, e'nim,/or, quo'-
que, also, and the adverb qui'dem, indeed, cannot stand first in a
sentence : and that e'tenim, /or, sed, but, er'go, therefore, I'gftur, for
this or that reason, ftaque, therefore, and several others, are sometimes
the first word, and sdrnetimes the second or third. There are few points
in Lathi more difficult than the prdper use of conjunctions : the fol-
lowing rules it is hdped will be found useful.
1. Ct, quo, li'cet, u'tinam, and dum'modo almost always have a sub-
junctive mood ; as, Ava'ro quid ma'H op'tes m'si ut vl'vat di'u? Ju'va
me quo id fi'at faci'lius. Di'cam e'quidem li'cet ar'ma mi'h! mortem'que
mine'tur. Immorta'lla ne spe'res mo'net an'nus. tJ'tinam libero'rum
nostro'rum mo'res non Ip'sT perdere'miis. Om'nia h5nes'ta neg'ligiiut
dum'modo poten'tiani cousequan'tur.
2. Et'si, tamet'sl, quan'quam, in the beginning of a sentence, require
the indicative: as, Et'si vc'reor jti' dices. Tamet'si vicls'se de'beo.
Quan'quam actio'iiem non desidera'bam.
3. Etiam'si and quam'vis have generally a subjunctive, though sdme-
tunes an indicative : as, fitiam'sl max'ima smt. Qufim'vis Ely'sios
mire't-ur Grce'cia cam'pos. Is'ta vc'ritas etlam'sT jucun'jla non est.
4. tJt for quam'vis admits only a subjunctive: as, tJt de'slnt vi'res
ta'men est laudan'da volun'tas.
5. Q,uo'niam, quan'do, quando'quidem have generally an indicative :
as, Quo'mam non po'test fi'eri quod vis. Quando e go tu'um non cu'ro.
Quando'quidem in mol'li conse'dimus her'ba.
6. Qulp'pe having the meaning of nam requires the indicative : as,
Qulp'pe ve'tor fa'tls.
7. tJf pote, and qulp'pe used for ut'pote, if followed by qul, have ge-
nerallv the subjunctive, rarely the indicative ; if fdllowed by cum, have
dnly the subjunctive : as, tft'potc qul in cel'lam au'rum contu'lerit. Nou
Igno'rat vSlupta'tSm Epicu'rus ut'pote qul tcstiflce'tur. Ut'pote qul
(167)
PK^EPOSITIONUM CONSTRUCTIO.
The Construction of Prepositions.
, subaudl'ta, inter'dum fa'cit ut adda'tur abla-
ti'vus : ut,
ffa'bed tc lo'co pareritis :
[jid est, in ld'co.^\
Praiposi'tiO, in compositio'ne, eun'dem nonnun'qiiam ca'sum
re'git, quern et ex'tra compositio nem rege'bat : 77 ut,
Detru'dunt naves sco'pulo. Virg.
Praite'reO te Insaluta turn.
Ver'ba compo'sita cum a, ab, ad, con, de, e, ex, in, non-
nun'quam re'petunt eas'dem pripositi6'nes ciiin su'6 ca'su
ex'tra compositio'nem, id'que elegan'ter: 78 ut,
Abstinue'runt a m'no.
depugna'vit. Quip^e quT op'tunos ci'ves jugQla'rl jus'sit. Quip'pe jus-
ti'tiS si'ue pruden'tia sa'tis ha'beSt auctOrita'tls. tJt'pote ciim si'ue
fc'brS laboras'sem.
8. Q,uod and qui'a, having a definite meaning, require the indicative.,
having an indefinite meaning, require the subjunctive : as, Be'nS ffi'cis
quod me udju'vas. Qui'a acces'sit pecu'ma subla'tl sunt a'niml. Quod
JNa'sicam delendls'set le'viter succen'siiit. Ne'mo ip'sam volupta'tem,
qui'a vfilup'tas sit, asperna'tur.
9. Cum, having the meaning of quo'niam, requires the subjunctive ;
having the meaning of quod, generally requires an indicative : as, Cum
ra'piant ma'la fa'tS bo'nos. Ti'bi gra'tias a'go ciim tan'tum me'ee lite'ree
potiie'runt.
10. Si, sin, ni'sT, si'quidem sometimes require the subjunctive, some-
times the indicative : as, Si il'liini relln'quo e'jtis vi'tce ti'mco. Ml'rum
nl d5'mi est. Ni'si me om'nia fal'lant. Si'quidem quae nuncian tur ve'i'a
Siint. Si id scis'sem nun'quam hue retuhVsem pe'dem. Sin id pS'rum
proce'dat. Ni nos'sem cau'sam cre'derem hunc lo'qul ve'rum. Kec ve'ni
lii'sl fa'tS lo'cum dedis'sent. mo'rSm prJecla'rum si'qmdem tenere'mus.
Si having the meaning of quiim'vis ge'nerally requires the subjunctive :
aw, Nou si me ob'secret. Yet it sdmetimes has the indicative : as, Ve'riaa
si cogna'ta est max'ime.
11. Dfim having the meaning of dum'modo, and quln hdving the
mednhig of quod nOn, require the subjunctive : as, O'derint dtiiu me'-
tuant. Non quln ip's dlssen'tiam.
77 A preposition in composition seldom gdverns a case unless the verb
and preposition can be disjoined without detriment to the sense : thus,
of the two examples given in the text, the one may be resolved into
trudunt naves de sco'pulo; and the dther into e'5 pree'tcr te insd-
lutd'ttm.
TS It is oftentimes more tfegant, and sometimes more expre'ssive, to
( 168 )
IN, pr5 er'gd, coritra, ad, et supra? 9 accusati'vum
tit, _ f
Ac'cipit In Teu'cros a'nimum, mentem'que benig'nam.
In com'moda pub' licit pec'cem. Hor.
In reg'num quce'ritiir h&res.
Re'ges in ip'sos imperium est Jo vis. Hor.
SE T B, cum ad tem'pus refer'tiir, accusati'vo fe're jun'gitur :
ai,
Sub i'dem tem'piis : Liv.
[id est, clr'ca vel per Idem te
?t;
, pro ul'tra, accusati'vo ; pro de, ablati'vo appo'nT-
tiir : iit,
- Sii'pgr ct Garaman'tas ct In'dos.
ProferSt impc'riiim. - ^i r g-
Mul'td su'per Pri'amo ro'gitcins, su'per Hec'tore multa.
Tfi'NUS ablati'vo et singula'rl, et plura'li, jun'gitiir : iit,
Pu'be tc'nus.
Pectoribiis te'nits.
jLt geniti'vo tan'tum plura'li: et sem'per ca'sum su'um
sS'qmtur : iit,
Crurum te'nus.
INTERJECTIONUM CONSTRUCTIO.
The Construction of Interjections.
INTERJECTIO'NES non ra'ro si'ne ca'sfi ponun'tur ; ut,
Spem gre'gis, ah ! s7lic e in nu'dd connix'a r ell' quit.
Qua?, ma'lum, demen'tia !
0, exclaman'tis, nommati'vo, accusati'vo, et vocati'vo, jun'-
gitur: ut,
use a verb compounded with one of these prepositions, than to use the
simple verh, in the very same sense : thus, to say, ni'hil Gxl'bat ex
6're, nothing went out from his mouth, is more elegant and more expres-
sive than to say, ni'hil I'bat ex o're, nothing went out of his mouth ; in
like manner, the phrase inji'cere ma'nus In a'liquem, to throw on hands
upon any one, is moi-e elegant than the phrase ja'cere ma'nus m a'li-
quem, to throw hands upon any one.
7 9 To these four might be added per : as, in the phrase, In ho'ras,
through or into hours, that is, hourly or every hour : so, likewise, m
di'es sm'gulos, through individual days, that is, daily. When in is put
for in'ter it takes an ablative after it : as, In amf els habe'rS, to have
among friend?, that is, in the number of one's friends.
( 169 J
Ofes'tus di'es ho minis ! Ter.
Q fortune? los m'mium, sii'd si 16'nti nurint,
Agri'colas ! Virg.
0/ormo'sS pu'er ! itfmiiim ne cre'de colo'ri. Ibid.
HEU et proJi^ nunc nominati'vo, mine accusati'vo, jungiin'-
tur: iit,
Heu pi'etas, lieu prls'ca fi'des. Yirg.
Heu stlr'pem invl'sam. Ibid.
Proh Jii'piter ! tu me, hd'mo, a'digis fid tnsa'nifan. . Ter.
Proh De'um atfque h&minum fi'dem 1 Ibid.
I'tera Yocati'v5 : ut,
Proh sancte Ju'piter ! Cic.
HEI et vce dati'vo 80 jungun'tiir : ut,
Hei mi'hi quod nullis amor est medicabilis he^'bts!
Viid mTsero mi'hi ! qudn'td de spe de'cidl ! Ter.
P R O S O D I A.
PROSO'DIA est pars Gramma'ticte, qiie Quantita'tem Sylla-
ba'rum d5'cet.
Divi'ditur Proso'dia in tres par'tes, Td'num, Sptritum, et
Tem'piis.
Hoc lo'co vl'sum est no'bis de Tem'pore tan'tum tracta're.
TEM'PUS est syl'labse proteren'dee mensu'ra.
80 Interjections being nothing more than ejaculative pdrticles of Joy,
Surprise, Sorrow, or some dther sudden emdtion of mind, they can have
neither concord nor government : and, therefore, the cases wherewith
they are joined, or whereby they are followed, always depend on some
dther word, or phrase understood. In some instances the import of an
interjection approaches closely to that of a verb, and in others to that of
a noun ; hence, we may, in those instances, view the interjection in the
light of a substitute for the verb or noun which it approaches in meaning :
thus, for example, in the phrase, me ml'sSrnm, O wretched me, the
interjection seems to convey the sense of sen'tio, I feel or I perceive:
again, in the phrase, hem astu'tias, hah ! ttte craft, the interjection
hem is almost syndnymous with, vi'dedr mi'hlmSt mlrii'ii, / seem to
myself to admire : so hel and VCB have generally a signification bor-
dering on that of ma'lum, evil or mischief ' ; hence, hel rni'hi or va
MfAi may be regarded as equivalent to ma'lum est mi'hi, it is an evil or
a calamity to me.
I
Tem'pus brg'vS sic nota'tur ("); ut, dS 'minus: 16
au'tem sic (" ) ; ut, coritrd.
PES dua'rum syllaba'rum plurium've' constitu'tiO est, ex
cer'ta Tem'porum observatio'ne.
Spondte'us est dissyl'labus ; ut, virtus.
Dac'tylus est trisyl'labiis ; ut, scrfler^. 1
SCAN'SIO est legi'tima versus in sm'gulos pe'des commen-
sura'tio.
Scansionl ac'cidunt Figu'rte, Synal&pM, Ectlilipsis, Sy-
nai'resis. Diaeresis, et Ccesu'ra. 2
I. Synalcepha est ell'sio Yoca'lis in fi'ne dictio'nis, an'te
arteram in im'tio sequen'tis : 3 ut,
1 Since the E'ton Grammar treats of no more than two different sorts
of Verse, namely, Heroic and Elegiac, it was not necessary to me'ntion any
other feet than those of which these two sorts consist, that is Spondees
and Ddctyles. Of late years, however, Prosody and Versification have
deservedly becdme dbjects of greater attention in most of the Grammar
Schools of this e"mpire ; and, therefore, it is requisite to ndtice a few
more (at least) of the Metrical Feet, and a few more Species of Latin
Verse ; but it is (of course) only a few of each which we can notice, as
our limits are so confined. In addition, then, to Sp6ndees and Ddctyles,
there are in common use,
1. The Pyrrhic, ~] f " ' 1 fa'pis, a lee,
2. The Iambus, I dissyllable feet < - - Vas^o'ves, sheep,
3. The Trochee, J L " " J Ue'ra, wax,
4. The A'napaest, "I . . 111,1 t j.f ww ~l f ce'cini, I sang,
5. The Tribrach^ ; } tris )' llable feet { - - - } a3 {fl'dlcen, ahdr/er.
Besides the anapaest and the tribrach, there are five dther trisyllable
feet ; namely, the amphimacer or critic [ ], the molossus [ ], the
amphibrach ["""], the bacchius [ ], and the antibacchius [~ " * ].
The feet of four syllables are very numerous : but we shall content
ourselves here with the following four :
1. The Choridmbus, --- ^ f preete'rea, moreover,
2. The Proceleusmdtic, ! ,, J cele'rlter, swiftly,
3. The Ionic a majorc, I I contSn ' (iItg strive ye.
4. The Ionic a mmo're, -- J (^ mSdita'rl, to meditate.
2 In addition to these five Figures of Prosody, suffice it, in this place,
to give three more, namely, Systole, Diastole, and Synapheia. In the
Appendix to this Work most of the Figures be!6nging to Prdsody, in
cdmmon with Etymology and Syntax, will be (briefly) enumerated
under those respective heads. By Systole a long syllable is shdrtened :
by Diastole, called also Ec'tasis, a short syllable is lengthened : and, by
Synapheia, verses of some particular kinds (as, for example, anap&stics,}
are linked together without regdrd to the metrical pause which marks the
termination of a verse in general.
3 A ffnal vdwel or diphthong is not (strictly spedking) elided in toto
by the Figure SYNAL<E'PHA, but very much curtailed, and almost cut
( 171 )
nVmis vit a est eras' tina, v?ve Mdie. Mart.
[Pr5 vt
At lieu et nun'quam Intercipmn'tur. 4
II. ECTHLIP'SIS est, quo' ties m cum su'a Yoca'li 6 peri'mitur,
proxlma dictio'ne a voca'li exor'sa : ut,
Mon'strum liorren'dum, infor'me, in' gens ^ cut lumHn
adem'jptum. Virg.
[Pro mori strum horren'dum^ mfdr f me.~\
III. SYNTHESIS est dua'rum syllaba'rum 8 in u'nam con-
trac'tio : ut,
Seii len'to fuerint alvea'ria vimine tex'ta. Virg.
Qua'si scrip'tum es'set alvffrla.~\
off : still, however, a shadow or faint sound of the vdwel or diphthong
remains : thus, to'gti. et would in poetry be pronounced to'ga et, and not
tojet ! I speak of modern pronuucidtion ; for the Lathis sounded g hard
before every vdwel.
Sometimes the figure Synaldepha is (intentionally) neglected by the
Ldtin poets in imitdtion of the Greeks, who, fond of the vdwel sounds,
very frequently considered the omission of this figure to be a great em-
be"llishment to their pdetry : sdmetimes, likewise, in imitation of the
practice of the same pedple, a long vdwel, or a diphthong, at the end of
a word, is shortened hi Latin, instead of be'ing elided, befdre an initial
vdwel or diphthong : thus, in the 437 verse of the first Book of the
Gedrgics [Glau'co, et Panope', et Ino'o MelTcer'tS] the 5 in Glau'co is
neither elided nor made short before the initial vdwel which follows,
whilst the diphthong (ae) at the end of Panope's, is shdrtened but not
cut off. A judicious neglect, or dnly partial admission, of this figure
has certainly a beautiful effe'ct. But here we must observe, that in
Latin pdetry a short vdwel is v^ry rarely exe'mpted from synaldepha.
At the end of a verse, synaldepha never takes place unless the last syl
lable of the verse be hypermeter or dver measure.
* And similarly the five interjections ah, VOB, vah, he?, proh, aro
seldom or never either elided or shortened. But is, sdmetimes, made
short before an initial vdwel or diphthong.
s In the earlier Latin poets, the figure Ecthlipsis was sometimes
neglected : few examples however of this negle'ct are to be found in the
writings of the Augustan age, and, after that period, none. Virgil
furnishes not a single instance, neither does O'vid : and H6race has
dnly one. At the end of a verse Echthlipsis never takes place before a
vdwel or diphthong beginning the next line, unless the final syllable be
hypermeter : yet in Anapcestics, and Ionics a minore, wherein the final
syllable is affe'cted by the figure Synapheia, care must be taken that no
verse (of exdctly its prdper numbe'r of syllables) end in m when the next
verse begins with a vdwel or a diphthong.
6 By Synceresis two syllables are reduced to one in the pronun-
without the disappearance of Jiuy letter in the writing : thus,
I '2
( 172 )
IY. DiJi'REsls est, u'bi ex u'na syl'laba dissec'ta fTunt
ut,
Debit' erant fit' sos evoliiis'sS su'os. Ovid.
[Evoluis'se pro evolvis'se.~\
Y. CJisu'RA est, cum post pe'dem' absolu'tum, syl'laba
bre'vis in fi'ne dictio'nis exten'ditur : ut,
Pecto>ri\>us irihians, spiran'tid con'sulit ex'td. Yirg.
DE GENERIBUS YERSUUM.*
YER'SUS HERO^CUS, qui HEXI'ME^ERS e'tiam dl'citiir,
cSn'stat ex sex pe'dibus : qum'tus lo'ciis dac'tylum, sex'tus
gr&ve'olens, rank-smelling, or seniia'nimis, half dead, are by this figure
dften pronounced as though written. gru'volens, semafnimis. Some
pros6dians refer these to Synal&pha, and perh&ps justly. When two
syllables are drawn into one, either by the union of two vowels
fdnning a proper diphthong, as in dem'de, afterwards, when pronounced
dein'dc, or by the disappearance of one of two short vowels to form a
long vdwel, as in co'ago, / drive together, reduced to co'gd, the Figure
has the name of Crdsis instead of SY>^E'RESIS. In many instances,
either the one, or the other, of these two may be used with almost equal
propriety : thus, for example, we may write either dii or di, d'us or dis,
deest or dest, as monosyllables ; and, in like manner, either, n'dtm or
I'dem, ils'dZm or ts'dem, dee'rO or de'rd, dee'rit or dc'rit, as dissyllables :
and so forth. But sdmetimes it is necessary to retain both vd \vels in the
character of an improper diphthong.
7 The definition of Caesura, here given, is certainly very vague, and
incorrect. Caesura signifies " a cutting off" and is the name applied to
&ny final syllable that remains after a perfect foot in pdetry, without
reference to the quantity of the syllable so remaining. On every caesural
syllable there is necessarily, in scanning Heroic and Elegiac Ve'rses, a
greater stress of voice laid, "than there would be upon the same syllable,
if it did not begin a foot. This stress, or (as it is termed) metrical ictus,
toge'ther with the interverbal pause which follows, the pdets considered
a sufficient plea in some instances for the extension of a short quantity
in the caesural syllable. An unelided long vdwel or diphthong, in the
caesura after the fourth foot of an hexameter, particularly in proper
names, has a most pleasing effect before an initial vdwel or diphthong,
provided (dnly) that verses of this description are not too frequently
repealed.
8 A single line in pdetry is called a verse, and consists of two orenore
feet, either pe'rfect or incomplete, which feet or parts of a foot must in
Tending the verse be duly atte'nded to, that the harmony be neither
destrdyed nor le'ssened.
Ve'rses sdmetimes take their name from the feet which mdstly predo-
minate in them; as the Dactylic, Iambic, Trochaic, Anapaestic, Chori-
dmbic, %c. : and sometimes also from the number of feet, or the number
of measures, in them ; as, Dimeter, Trimeter, Tetrameter, Periidmeter,
( 173 )
Bpondee'iim peculia'ritSr si'bi Tin'dicat; re'liqui hunc, vl
Il'lum,pro'ut Tolumiis: ut,
1 234 56
Tityre \ tu pa'tu\l& recu\bans sub \ teg'minS \fagi.
Reperi'tur aliquian'dd spondai'us e' tiara in qum'to lo'co: ta
ut,
123 456
Caret De\um sob8\les, inag\niim Jo vis \ lncre\men'tum.
Ul'tima cujuscun'que ver'sus syTlaba habe'tur commu'nis. 11
Hexameter, $c. Not unfrequently, too, a verse borrows its appellation
from the name of its inventor, as the Alcd'ic, the Sapphic, the Anacre-
ontic ; else from the subject which it celebrates, as the Heroic or
Elegiac.
A verse wanting one syllable, at the end, to complete the measure is
called Catalectic : a verse deficient by two syllables at the end, Brachy-
catalectic : a verse wanting one syllable at the beginning, Acephalous .-
a verse having neither deficiency nor redundancy, Acataleclic : and a
rerse having a redundant syllable or a redundant foot at the end, Hyper'
catalectic or Hypcrmeter.
9 The Heroic (or Dactylic Hexameter) Verse consists of six feet ;
whereof the fifth is generally a dactyle, and the sixth a spdndee : the
dther feet, that is, the first, second, third, and fourth, may be either
spdndees, or dctyles, at pleasure. In Dactylic Hexameter verses the
feet ought to run into one audther ; for when the words and the feet end
together throughout a verse, there is no harmony whatever. If after
the first, and also the second, and (in like manner) the third foot, or
after a majority of these three, a syllable remain, the rhythm is, by far,
more agree'able than when there is an absence of one or more of 'these
caesura! syllables.
10 A spondee seldom constitutes the fifth foot of an herdic verse except
in sdlemn, or majestic, or mournful descriptions. Verses, which have
a spdndee in the fifth place, are called Sponda'ic ; but of these the too
frequent recurrence is the farthest from an drnament to poetry,
whereas a spare and a judicious use of them is one of its greatest
beauties.
11 The sense of these words is in some degree* ambiguous : for, it is
assuredly untrue that the last syllable of eVery verse is cdmmon, and
yet it is true that, in many kinds of verse, the last syllable may be either
long, or short, at pleasure, without much injury in the one ins-tance, or
advantage in the dther, to the rhythm. For example, the Jast foot of
e'very herdic verse ought to be a spdndee ; but a trdchee may be sub-
stituted for a spdndee, because the metrical pause at the end of the line
cdrnpensates, in some measure, for the shdrtness of the last syllable : in
like manner a pyrrhic is unobjectionable in lieu of an iambus in the last
foot of any iambic verse. Again, every sdpphic verse should terminate
with a trdchee, but, instead of a trdchee, a spdndee may be used without
detriment to the rhythm.
( 174)
ELfiafXcus, qu! et PENTA'MTRI'* no'men ha'bet,
du'pllci con'stat penthemi'meri ; qua'rum pri'or du'os pe'des,
dacty'licos, spondi acos, vel alterQ'tros comprehen'dit, cum
syl'laba longa ; al'tera, e'tiam, du'os pe'des, sed omni'no dac-
ty'licos cum syl'laba I'tem lon'ga : ut,
1 2 C 3 4 C
Res est | sott?ci\tl \ ple'na tl \ mo'ris a \ mor. Ovid.
12 The Elegiac or (Dactylic Pentameter} Verse consists (as its name
Indicates) of five feet, of which the first two may be either dactyles or
spondees, followed by a long syllable, which must close a word, dividing
the verse into e*qual pdrtions or halves ; then come two dactyles, and
again a syllable, which with the caesural syllable before mentioned cdn-
stitutes an intercepted spondee. The ancients were divided in their
opinion respecting the true scansion of this verse, some of them making
the third foot a spondee, and the last two feet, anapaests. Whichever
be the mode of scanning adopted, the construction of the verse is the
same. Instead of a syllable long by usage or by position, we sometimes
find a syllable le'ngthened by caesura in the middle of a Pentameter, but
this is always a blemish : a monosyllable, however, either long in
itself, else rendered long by position, is unobjectionable in the conclusion
of the first hemistich. An elegiac verse is generally preceded by, and
coupled with, an hexameter ; and should terminate with a dissyllable,
and a full stop : a trisyllable is admissible, but a monosyllable must be
rejected in the conclusion of a Pentameter, unless it occasions the elision
of the final syllable of a dissyllable. A word of four syllables is not an
unharmdnious Ending, though inferior in cadence to a dissyllable. The
feet of an elegiac verse ought to run into one another like those of
her dies.
'a In addition to the observations which we have already made on
Heroic and Elegiac Verse, we shall (briefly ) ndtice a few of the following :
fdmbic, Trochaic, Anapcestic, Ionic, and the more common sorts of
Lyric Verse.
1. Iambics.
An Iambic Verse, when pure, consists of iambuses dnly, two feet
always c6nstituting a measure. The concluding syllable of e'very mea-
sure (the last perhaps exempted) receives on it an emphasis or a metrical
ictus, and ought therefore to be either an accented syllable, else a final
syllable. Iambic verse is found of various lengths, from the tetrameter
down to the dimeter catalectic, called also Anacreontic : but the more
cdmmon lengths are the dimeter or trimeter acatalcctic. Instead of an
iambus in the odd places, a spdndee was at first admitted ; and, after-
wards, an anapaest or a dactyle : and in all the even places (exce'pt the
last) a tribrach often occurs for an iambus. The comic poets, however,
and Phidrus, admit all these feet indiscriminately into every place
except the last, and moredver any feet isochronal with these : nor do
they reject the amphimacer, the amphibrach, and some others.
2. Trochaics.
As an iambus is the ve*ry reverse of a trochee, so Trochaic Verses are
the ve"ry reverse of Iambic Ve'rses : for, if the first half foot of a pure
( 175 )
PBIMABUM AC MEDIABUM SYLLABARUM
QUANTITAS.
I. YocI'Lts an'te du'as consonances aut du'plicem in ea'dem
dlctio'ne, ubi'que positio'ne lon'ga est : ut, veritus, dx'is
CUJltS. [See note 5, page 2, above,]
iambic verse be taken from the beginning, and placed at the end, the
Iambic is converted into a Trocb/u'c. Or, in other words, a Trochaic
Verse, when pure, has every foot a trochee : impure or mixed Trocha'ics
admit spondees, dactyles, tribrachs, and pei'haps anapaests (though more
rarely) in all the even places.
3. Anapcestics.
An Anapcestic Verse is either pure, or impure,- that is, it consists
solely of anapaests, or is made up in whole or in part of dther feet. As
in Iambic and Trochaic Verses, so in Anapceslics, two feet cdnstitute a
measure : but here every measure ought ( if pdssible) to terminate to-
ge*ther with a word, so that the ve'rses may at pleasure be written of any
length from the mon6meter upwards, without the division of a word.
Anapjfistic dimeters are (as the name imp6rts) verses of two measures
each ; but they very rarely occur pure, spondees be"ing admissible into
every place, and dactyles into the first foot (sdmetimes, though seldom,
into the second) of every measure. Hence it dften happens, that, in
anapaestic ve'rses, not one foot of the verse is an anapaest. The final
syllable of each acatalectic verse must have respe'ct to the initial syllable
of the next line, as the verses are linked together by the figure called
Synapheia. An Anapcestic Dimeter Catalectic is frequently subjoined
to a system of Anapcestics, by way of conclusion, or else of temporary
relief to the ear ; and admits a spondee into the first and also second
foot, but has generally the third foot pure, with & caesural syllable dver.
4. Ionics.
An Ionic Verse a majo're consists whdlly (when pure) of major ionic
feet : and, hi like manner, an Ionic Verse a mino'rS consists entirely
(when pure) of minor ionic feet. The more usual length of the first
species is three measures and a half, each foot counting for a medsure.
A double trochee is admissible into the second and third places, and
sdmetimes into the first. More6ver, a long syllable may be resolved
mto two short syllables in any one of the measures. The Ionic a minorS
is perhaps never found impure, and consists generally of four measures,
such, that without either a division of any word, or a clashing of any
syllables, the verse may be sh6rtened to a mondmeter, or extended ad
libitum.
5. Lyrics.
Lyric Verses are those which were sung to the miisic of the lyre, and
occur of various lengths and construction, being sdmetimes pdrtions of
one or more of the species already enumerated, and sdmetimes a parti-
cular arrangement of feet according to the fancy of the compdser. Here
we shall notice only the fdllowing few.
I. The Sapphic, which consists of a trochee, a sp6ndee, a dactyle,
( 176 )
II. Quod si con'sonans priorem dlctio'nem clau'dat, s-
quente t'tem a consonan'te mchoan'te, vocalis priece'deua
e'tiam positio'ne lon'ga e'rit ; ut,
Ma'jor sum quam cut pos'&li fortu'nci noce're.
QSyl'labss -jor, sum> quam, et sit positio'ne lon'gifi sunt.]
III. At, si pri'or dlc'tiO in voca'lem bre'vem ex'eat, s-
and two trdchees : in all, eleven syllables. With the fifth half foot a
word must terminate, Otherwise the verse is faulty. A Sapphic Stanza,
generally contains three sapphic verses fdllowed by an Adonic, that is,
a dactyle, and a sp6ndee or trdchee.
II. The Phaleucian or Hendecasyllabus, which is (likewise) a verse
of five feet, and, as its name imports, comprises (in all) ele'ven syllables.
The first foot is a spondee, sometimes, but vdry rarely, an iambus, or a
trochee : the second, a dactyle, for which a spondee may occasionally
be substituted : and the remaining three feet are trdchees.
III. The Alcaic major, which is a verse of four feet, with a long
csesural syllable after the second foot, which must always be an iambus :
the first foot may be either an iambus, or a spondee j and the last two
feet are dactyles.
IV. The Alcaic minor, which consists of two dactyles fdllowed by two
trdchees. The Carmen Horatianum (so called after Horace who em-
pldyed it in a great many of his Odes) has two major Alcaics for the firs,
two verses of the stanza, and an Alcaic minor always for the fourth.
V. The Asclepiad or Choridmbic Dimeter Intirposite, which is made
up of two choriambuses interposed between a spondee and an iambus or
pyrrhic. Each choriambus should terminate with the termination of a
word : unle'ss the first choridmbus (at least) terminate in this way, the
verse is faulty.
VI. The Archilochian Idmbio Dimeter Hyptrrneter, which contains
four feet and a half : these are sdmetimes (though rarely) all iambuses :
more commonly the first and third feet are spdndees. This verse cda-
stitutes the third of the stanza called Carmen Horatianum.
VII. The Archilochian Trochaic Heptameter, which always consists
of the first four feet of a dactylic hexameter, followed by three trochees.
VIII. The Choridmbic Trimeter Interposite, which is made up of
three choriambuses iuterpdsed betwee'ii a spdndee and an iambus or
pyrrhic, with the same restriction as the Asclepiad.
IX. The Glyc6nic, which consists of a spondee and two dactyles.
X. The Pherecrdtic, which also contains three feet, namely a dactyle
between two spondees.
XI. The Dactylic Tetrameter a posterio'rg, which consists of the last
four feet of a dactylic hexameter.
XII. The Dactylic Trimeter Catalectic, which consists of two dactyles
and a ceesural syllable. This verse is most commonly subjoined to a
dactylic hexameter.
XIII. The Scazoniic, which differs from a trimeter iambic verse
simply in that it has a spondee in the last place, and an iambus in the
fifth.
( 177 )
quen'te a dua'bus consonan'tibiis incipien'te, Inter'dum, s5d
ra'rius, produ'citur : ut,
Occiitta 1 * spo'lid. Juv.
IY. YOCA'LIS bre'vis ari'te mu'tam, sequen'te li'qmda, com-
mu'nis red'ditur : ut, pa'tris, volu'crts. Lon'ga, ve'ro, non
muta'tur : ut, ard'trum, Simula' crum.
YOCA'LIS ante al'teram in ea'dem dictio ne iibi'que bre'-
vis est : lit, Deiis, metis, tu'iis, p?us.
1. ExcTpiAS geniti'vos in -uis^ secun'dam prono'mims for'mam
haben'tes : ut, unfits, tllTus, $c. u'bl i commu'ms reperi'tur :
li'cet in dlterlus sem'per sit bre'vis, in &Kus sem'per lon'ga.
2. Excipien'di sunt, e'tiam, geniti'vi et dati'vi qum'tai
declmatio'nis, w'bl e in'ter ge'minum i lon'ga fit : ut, facie i,
alio'qui non; ut, re'i, spei,fi'del.
Fi- e'tiam infto lon'ga est, m'si sequuntur e et r si'mul ;
lit, fferem. fl'eri : ' 5 velut,
Om'nidjam fi'unt, fi'eri qu& posse negd'lam. Ovid.
Df us pri'mam syl'labam ha'bet lon'gam ; Dtd'nd com-
mu'nem.
O'HE, mterjec'tio, prio'rem syl'labam commii'nem ha'bet. 16
YOCA'LIS an'te al'teram in Gree'ci^ dictio'mbus siibin'dS
lon'ga fit i 1 ' ut,
DTci'te, Ple'rides.
Res'pice Laer'ten.
fit in possess!' vis Grai'cis : ut,
14 This example is by no means proof that a short vdwel is ver
lengthened by position befdre two consonants beginning the next word :
yet might several examples corroborative of such fact be qudted from the
pdets. It is to be remembered, however, that a mute and liquid begin-
ning &ny word can, in nowise, lengthen a preceding short vdwel : and
hence it follows, that the first cdnsonant must necessarily be the le'tter s.
1 5 In Plautus and in Terence the first syllable of/t'^rZ and of fl'lrU
is repeatedly found long.
16 And in like manner the first syllable of e'heu, alas / and of i'o,
hurrah ! are common. To which may be ddded the prdper name I'O,
daughter of 1'nachus.
} 7 In ve'ry many Greek words, but especially prdper -names, a vdwel
is long though imme'diately followed by a vdwel : and in the Idnic dialect
the pe'nult of the genitive and accusative cflses of nouns in -eus is long,
although short in the cdmmon dialect,
13
( 178 )
nutrlx.
Rhodope'ius Or'pheus.
Om'nis diphthon'gus a'pud Lati'nos lon'ga est : ut, au'rum,
7ieuter, mu'sce : msi pros sequen'te voca'll : ut, pr^elre,
pr^eus'tus, prtedm'plus. 16
f vl ean'dem, fe're, cum primiti'vis quantita'tem
sortmn'tur: ut, amd'tdr, amt'cus, amd'liUs, pri'ma bre'vi
ab a mo.
Excipmii'tur ta'men pau'ca, quai, a bre'vibus deduc'ta, pri'-
mam syl'labam produ'cunt : lit,
co'mD co'mis, a co'ma, j mo'bilis, a mffv&o,
fames, eifomen'tum = ^"^ l ""'-
humd'niis, ab ho' mo,
jucuridiis, a
jumentiim,
junior, a juvenis,
Idter'na, a la ted,
lex le'gis, a le'gd,
no'niis, a
rex re'gis, rcg7na, a re' go,
sedes, a se'deo,
Pgiila, a te'gU,
trd'guld, a tralio,
vo'mer, a vo-mo,
vox vo'cls, a vo'co.
Et con'tra sunt, qufe, a lon'gis deduc'ta, pri'mam com'-
pmnt : ut,
fra'gor, fra'gilis, a frdn'gft,
ge'nul, a gigno,
lucer'na, a luceo,
natfi na'tds, a nd'tu,
no to no'tds, a no' tu,
po'sul, a pond,
po'tiii, a pos'sum,
sopor, a
are'na, arls'ta, arun'dd, ab
d'red,
arus'pex, ab d'ra,
di'cdx, a dlcd,* 9
dl'tw, a dltis,
disei''tiis, a dis'sero,
dux dii'cts, a ducD,
fl'des, af?dd,
Et a'lia nonnul'la ex iitro'que ge'nere, qu& relinquun'tiir
stiidio'sis in'ter legen'dum observan'da.
COMPO'SITA simpli'cium quantita'tem seqnun'tur: ut, a
le'gd, le'gis, per 1 lego ; le'gd, le'gds, dlle'gu : a potens, Int'po-
tens ; a so'ldr, consoldr.
18 Except also the diphthong as in Mieo'tfe, Maotic or Sarmatian,
which both O'vid and Se'neca make short : but most others, long.
'5 So in like manner male'dlcus, slanderous, and many 6ther words of
the same kind and derivation, have the penult short.
And similarly va'diim, a ford, from va'do, / go : and am'bitus, a
circuit, from ambr'tiim, to encompass.
( 179 )
Excipiun'tur ta'men hsec bre'via a lon'gis enata :
pe'jero, ajurS; m'niiba, pronuba^ a nulo.
&T OAI'NE PB,JST'RITUM dissyTlabum prio'rem ha'bet
lon'gam : ut, Icgi, e'mi, mo'm.
1. Exci'pias ta'mSn, bi'bi, dZ'dl, scidl, stt'ti, sti'tL tu'li, et
2. PBfMAM Prte'riti geminan'tia pri'mam bre vem ha'-
bent : ut, ce'cidl a cadd ; cecFdi a ccedd ; di'dici, fefci'U^
momdr'di, pepen'di^ pupngi, tel-cn'di, te'tlgi, toton'di, tutudl.
^"SupfNUM dissyriabum prio'rem ha'bet lon'gam: ut,
vt'siim, la'ttim, lo'tum, mo'tum.
Ex'cipe, datum, 1'tiim, li'tiim, qui'tiim, r&'tiim, rutiim t
t&'tiim, sl'tum, st-i'tum ; 21 et cl'tum a cl'to cl'es : nam ci'tiim
a ci'd cis quar'tse ; prio'rem ha'bet lon'gam
ULTIMARUM SYLLABARUM QUANTITAS.
I. A FINI'TA producun'tur : iit, a'ma, contra, er'gd.
1. Exci'pms pitta, I'ta, gui'd, pos'tea, ej(i*~ I'tem om'nes
ca'sus in " -a," cujuscun'que fu'erlnt ge'neris, nu'meri, aut
declinatio'ms : pree'ter vocati'vos a Gr^'cis in -as : ut, O
e'd, Tko'ma : et ablati'vum pri'mse declinat'io ms ; ut,
2. NUMRA'LIA in " gmta" fina'lem ha'bent commu'nem,
sed frequen'tius lon'gam : ut, trigin'tci.
II. In 5, rf, t, desmen'tia, bre'via sunt : iit, al, ad, ca'put.**
III. In c desmen'tia producun'tur : ut, dc t sic, et hlc ad-
ver'bium.
Sed du'o in c corripmn'tur : nee et donee.
Tri'a sunt commu'ma ; fac, prono'men hlc, et neu'trum
cjus hoc, nwdo non sit ablati'vi ca'sus.
21 Though the penult of stX'tZm is short, yet the first syllable of the
ffiture pdrticiple stdtu'rus is long.
In many schools an objectionable practice prevails, in respect of the
pronunciation of final a : I mean, the indiscriminate utterance of it to
rhyme with day. As no person of any taste ever says Jamaicay or
America*/, so ought no person to say Mu'say, when he means Mu'su.
Final a when short, should dlways rhyme with the final syllable of the
En'glish prdper names Martha and Maria : final a, when long, may
rhyme (according to the Eu'glish sound of the vowels) with day.
83 Of course when a diphthong precedes any of these mutes, as in haud,
not, or in aut, or, the syllable is long by the Rule, " Om'nis diphthongus
dpud Latinos longa est :" and when a consonant precedes, the vowel
befdre the two cdnsonants is long by position.
( 180 )
IV. E fini'ta bre'via sunt : ut, mare, pe'ne, le'ge, scri'le.
1. Excipien'dee sunt om'nes To'ces qum'ttfi inflexio'nis in
'6 : ut, fi'de, die;** u'na cum parti'culis in'de ena'tis, lit,
ho'die, quotl'dle, prl'dle, postri'dle : i'tem qua're, quade're^
care, et si'qua sunt simi'lia.
2. Et secun'dai I'tem perse/nab singula'res secun'd< conjuga-
tio'nis : iit, dace, mo've.-*
Producun'tur e"tiam monosyl'laba in e: iit, me, te, se :
prie'ter, -que, ne, -ve,~ 6 conjunctio'nes encli'ticas. 27
Qum et adver'bia m -e, ab adjecti'vis secun'd^ declina-
tio'nis deduc'ta, e lon'giim ha'bent: ut, pul'chre, doc'te,
xdl'de pro va'ltde. 28
Qufbus acce'dimt/er'mejy^Ve 20 : le'ni ta'men etmale
corripiun'tur omni'no. 30
Postre'mo, quse a Gra^'cis per rj (e'td) scrlbun'tur, natu'-
ra producun'tur, cujuscun'que fii'erint ca'sus, ge'neris, aut
nu'meri : ut, Lethe, Anchi'se, ce'te, Tem'pe.
V. / fini'ta lon'ga sunt : ut, do'mtni, mdgis'trl, amarl.
Pr^'ter, mfhi, tl'li, si'bl, ubl, I'll, qu^ sunt commu'ma. 31 .
Ni'si Te'ro et quasi corripiun'tur.
Cu'jus e'tiam sor'tis sunt dati'vi et vocati'vi Graeco'rum,
quo'rum gemti'vus, singula'rfs, in -os bre've 32 ex'it : ut,
81 The final syllable of fa'me, by or with hunger, is long ; this noun
being of the fifth declension in the Ablative case, though of the third
declension in all the dther cases.
25 But ca'vo, bewdre, va'le, farewell, vi'de, see, sal've, hail, and re-
BpOn'de, reply, have the final e common.
2 6 These three monosyllabic particles are always adjunctive, and can
neVer (with correctness) be used as separate and distinct words.
27 With these may be conjoined all syllabic particles in e occasionally
found at the end of certain words ; such as -pt$, -ce 9 -te, -de : thus,
mSap'te, ^Ic'ce, <iZ'te, qudm'de.
2 ^ But adverbs in e derived from adjectives of the third declension
have the final syllable short ; as, fa'cile, easily. To which add Impu'ne,
with impunity, a word of doubtful derivation : and he're, yesterday.
'% Likewise fr/ie : the final syllable, howeVer, of ft'rS is, sometimes,
found short ; as is also that of te'mere, rashly.
30 To which add super'ne, upwardly, and Infer'ne, downwardly.
31 Likewise the conjunction u'iT, ; and cZ'i, whenever it occurs as a
dissyllable which however is se'ldom. Neuters in t have the last
syllable short : as giim'mi, gum or gums.
38 Except, howdver, final i in the vdcative case, singular, of Greek
nouns fdrming their genitive hi -cn'tos : as, Si'mol, Py'rol.
( 181 )
dati'vl, Minoidi, PdUddi, Pkyl'lidi ; vocati'vi, Alex'i, ImA-
ryl'li, D&ph'ni*
VI. L fini'ta compiun'tur : iit, ifnimftlj An'nibdl, me*,
pu'gil, con' sfd.
Prie'ter nil (contrac'tum a w?AzQ, sal et sol.
Et Hebrte'a (quae'dam) in -el: ut, Mi'chael, Gabriel,
Rti'phuel, D&'niel.
VII. N fini'ta producuntur: ut, Pcs'an y Hymen, quin,
Xe'nophon, non, ddfmon.
Ex'cipe, foi's&n, for'sitan, fin, tamen, at'tamen, verun-
ttimSn^ et in.
Acce'dunt his et To'ces il'l^,jque apo'copen patiiiii'tur :
lit, men ? vide'ri ? audi'ri ? E'tiam ex'm, siib'in, de'in,
pro'in, $c.
In -an _quo'que a noniinati'vis in -a : ut, aqminati'vo, Iphi-
genia, utEyi'na ; accusatl'vo, IpJitgcnTan^ ^Egfnan.
Nam in -an _a nominati'vis in -as pr6ducun'tur_: ut,
no-minati'vo, ^Ene'ds^ Mdrsyds ; accusatl'vo, j^Ene'dn,
Mdr'sijdn.
No'mina I'tem in -en** quo'rum geniti'vus -mis cdrrep'tum
ha'bet : ut, cdr^men, cri'men, pec ten, tiltl'cen, -mis.
Quee'dam e'tiam in -in per i, ut, Alex in : 36 et in -yn per
y, ut 1'tyn.
Grte'ca e'tiam in -on per o par'vum, cujuscun'que fu'erint
ca'sus : ut, nominati'v6, 1'litin, Pe'lion ; accusatl'vo, Cau-
cason, Pylon.
VIII. fini'ta commu'nia sunt : ut, d?co, vlrgo, por^ru. 39
Sic doceridu, legerido, et a'lK gerun'dia in -dS.
Sed obli'qui ca'sus in o sem'per producun'tur : ut, dati'vo,
dd'mino, servo ; ablati'vo, tem'plo, ddm'no.
Et adver'bia ab adjecti'vis deriva'ta; tdn'to, qudrito,
33 This Rule of course includes all dative and dblative cases plural in
-si : us, hcro'tsl) che'lysl, sche'masi.
34 Greek accusatives in -en from nouns in -e or in es are long : as,
PcnS'loptn, Anch'i'scn, Dtmos'thenen.
35 And Greek ddtive or ablative csea plural in -sin ; as, Tro'asin,
Dry'asin, cha'risin, e'thesin.
i6 Although, in the tenses of verbs, final o be cdmmon, yet by the best
writers it was dftener used long, than short : except the final o of v5'ln,
/ will, pii'to, / think or / suppose, scT'o, / know, and ne'sclo, I know not,
which is seldom found long ; and to which perhaps might be dded the
final o of e'rO, / shall be, and of es'to, be it. The final o of ce'do, tell me,
is always short ; but let no one confound ce'do with ce'do, / yield.
(182)
Iiquidd,fatsd,pr7mo, manifes'to, c. Pne'ter sPdulfi, mu'tu8 9
crt'oro, 3 " 1 quai sunt commu'nia.
Cab'terum mo do et quo'modo 3 * sem'per corripum'tur.
C?to quo'que, lit et dm'bo, duo, ego, at'que horno^ viz
legun'tur produc'ta. 80
MSnosyl'laba ta'men in o producun'tiir : lit, do, sto.
item GraVca per co (dme'gu) ciijus'modi fu'erint ca'sus :
ut, nominati'vo, Sap'pho, Dido ; geniti'vo, Androgto ; ac-
cusati'vo, A'tho : sic et ergo pro cau'sa.
IX. R f ini'ta corripiun'tur : ut, Cai'sar, per, mr, ux'or,
tur'tur.
Producun'tiir au'teni, far, lar, ver, fur, cur : par quo'que,
cum compo'sitls ; ut, com' par, im'par, dis'pcir. 40
Gr^'ca e'tiam in -er, qu il'lis in -rjp de'sinunt : ut, aer,
crater, chardc'ter, a'ther, so'ter : prai'ter pater, et md'ter,
quee a'pud Latinos ul'timam bre'vem ha'bent.
X. S fini'ta pa'res cum nu'mero voca'lium ha'bent ter-
minatio'nes : nem'pe, -as, -es, -is, -os, -us, -ys.
l. AS fini'ta producun'tiir : ut, a mas, Musds, mdjes'tds,
bd'nttds.
PRJB'TER Graj'ca qu5'rum gemti'vus singula'ris in -dos ex'it :
ut, Ar'cas, Pal'las ; geniti'vo, Ar'cados, Pal'lados.* 1
Et, prater accusatl'vos (plura'les) no'nimiim crescen'tium :
ut, herds, hero'os, Phyl'lls, Phyl'iidos, accusatl'vo plu-
ra'li, hero' as, Phyl'lldas.
n. ES fini'ta lon'ga sunt : ut, Anchises, sc'des, do'ces,
pa'tres.
1. Excipiun'tiir no'mina in -es ter'tiie inflexio'ms, quse
penul'timam geniti'vi crescen'tis corri'pmnt : ut, mi'les, se'ges,
37 In like manner postre'mo, -ultimately or lastly, and se'ro,/afe, have
the final o common : as has also the conjunction ve'ro, but.
38 With the other compounds of mo'do : as post'mudo, dum'modo,
quodam'modo : also, Im'mo, yea or nay.
39 Of these, the last four have the f fnal syllable co"mmon, and per-
haps dftener short than long : yet several instances might be quoted,
particularly of am'bo and du'd, in the neuter as well as the masculine
ge*nder, with the final o long. On the other hand, with ci'to may be
joined, Il'lico, yonder, profec'to, in fact, de'iiiio, anew, as having the last
syllable seldom or never long.
4 The final syllable of any compound of par is common : though,
perhaps, pre'ferably long.
41 And Greek nouns in -as forming their genitive in -atus or -utls :
as a'nas, a duck or drake;
( 183 )
cffves. Sed d'rics, d'Hes, pa'ries, Ceres, et pes u'na cum
compo'sitis, lit, li'pes, tri'pes, lon'ga stint.
2. S, qno'que, a sum, u'na cum compo'sitis corri'pitur :
ut, po'tes, dd'es, pro'des, 61' es: qui'bus pe'nes adjun'gi
po'test.
3. I'tem, neu'tra, et nominati'vi plura'les Grabco'rum : ut,
hippo' manes, cdcoe'thes, Cyclo'pes, Nai' tides,
m. IS f mi'ta bre'via sunt : ut, Paris, pants, trls'tis,
htlaris.
1. Ex'cipe obli'quos ca'sus plura'les in -zV, 42 qui prodficun'-
tur: ut, mu'sis a mu'su ; men' sis a men'sa ; do' minis ;
tem'plts ; et quis pro guibus.
2. I'tem, producen'tia penul'timam geniti'yi crescen'tis :
ut, tSam'nis, Sa'lamis ; geniti'vo, Samni'tis, Salumi'nis.
3. Ad de hue que in -is coritrac'ta ex -eis de'smunt, si've
GraVca, si've Lati'na ; cujuscun'que fii erint nii'meri aut
ca'sus : iit, Si'mois, Py'rols, par'tts, om'nts, e Si'moels,
Py'rocls, pdrteis, om'nets.
4. JEt mon5syl'laba rtgm om'ma ; iit, vis, 43 Its : prse'ter is
et quis nominati'vos ; et izs. 44
5. Is'tis acce'diint secun'd^ perso y n^ singula'res verbo'rum
in -is, quo'rum secun'd^ perso'nte plura'les de'smunt in -i'tis 9
penul'tima produc'ta ; u'na cum futu'ris optati'vi in -ris :
ut, au'dis, veils, de'deris : plura'liter audi'tis, veli'tis, de-
derl'tis.
iv. OS fim'ta producun'tur : ut, hands, ne'pus, dominos,
ser'vos.
Prater compos, Im'pos, et os os'sis.
Et Gree'ca per o par'vum : ut, De'los, Chads, Pal'ladds,
Phyl'lidos.
v. US f Ini'ta corripiun'tiir : iit, fd'mulus, re'giiis, tern'-
pus, amamus.
Excipiun'tiir producen'tia penul'timam genlti'vi 45 cres-
cen'tis: ut, sd'lus, tel'lus ; geniti'vo, saluiis, tellu'rls.
48 And all Adverbs derived from those cdses : as, iraprl'mis, chiefly or
in the first place ; gra'tls, freely : ^Iso fo'rls, abrodd.
43 And their cdmpounds : as, quam'vls, although, uterVts, which of the
two you like.
44 To which may be dded the adverb or preposition cis, on this side.
45 The word pa'lus, a marsh or pool, increases long in the gdnitive case,
and has the final syllable long in the ndminative and vdcative cases sin-
gular. In Horace's Art of Pdetry we find p&'lus with the last syllable
short, a noun of the second or fourth declension like la'cus, a lake.
(
Lon'gse sunt, e tiam, om'nes vS'ces quar'tee infiexio'nis in
-s, prte'ter nommati'vum et vocati'vum smgula'res : iit,
gemti'vo smgula'ri, ma'nus ; nommati'vo, accuati'v6, yoca-
ti'vo plura'li, manus.
His acce'dunt S'tlam monosyl'laba : iit, crus, thus, miis, su&.
Et Gr^'ca i'tem per -or? (-ous) diphtbon'gum, cujuscun'que
fu'erint ca'sils : iit, nommati'vo, Pan'tAut, Mcldm'pus ; genl-
ti'v_5, Sap'phus, Clt'us.
At'qiie pi'is cunc'tis veneran'dum no'meu IE'SUS.
vi. YS fini'ta bre'via sunt : iit, Tetliys, 1'tys, chla'mys.
Ex'cipe ca'sus plura'les in -ys contrac'tos ex -yes vel -ya
ut, Srln'nys pro Ermnyes vel JEririnyas. 4 '*'
XI. Postre'mo, u fini'ta producun'tur om'nia : ut,
ge'nu, ama'tU) di'u.* 7
4 6 Nouns also in -ys increasing long in the genitive have the final
Byltable long : as, Tra'chys, Trachinia, a small country and town of
Phthidtis.
47 The old iidverb ne'nZ for non, not, and the old preposition in'du
for in, which occur in most of the earlier authors, have the final u
short. To which may be added ultimate syllables in - us, with the s
elided ; as, plc'nii', full, for ple'niis : of this last sort of elision, many
instances occur in the poets prior to the Augustan age, and in some
^ven of that ra.
END OP PPvOSODY.
( 185 )
PROPRIA QU/E MARIBUS;
OR THE
RULES FOR THE GENDERS OF NOUNS
CONSTRUED.
The words in the parentheses are understodd, and, in construing, ought to
be supplied.
PROPRIA (ndmina) proper names qiice which tribuuntur
are assigned maribus to males or the male kind, dicas you
may call mascula masculine ; ut as sunt are (ndmina) Divo-
rum the names of the heathen Gods, Mars (genitive Martis),
the God of war; Bacchus (genitive Bacchi), the God of
wine, Apollo (genitive, Apdllinis), the God of wisdom ; (nd-
mina) virdrum the names of men; ut as, Cato (genitive
Catdnis), a noble Roman, Virgilius (genitive, Virgilii, vocative,
Virgi'li), the poet Virgil : (ndmina) fluvidrum the names of
rivers; ut a* Tibris (genitive, Tibridis, accusative, Tibrim,
vocative Tibri), the Tiber ; Ordntes (genitive, Ordntis), a
river by Antioch : (ndmina) mensium the names of months ;
ut as, October (genitive, Octdbris, ablative, Octdbri), the
month of October : (ndmina) ventdrum the names of winds ;
ut as, Libs (genitive, Libis), the south-west tvind, Ndtus
(genitive, No'ti), the south wind, Auster (genitive, Austri),
the south wind.
Prdpria ndmina proper names referentia denoting fcemineum
sexum the female sex tribuuntur are given foemineo generi to
the fcmirine gender ; sive whether sunt they are (ndmina)
Dearum the names of Goddesses ; ut a*, Juno (genitive*
Jundnis), Jupiter's wife, Venus (genitive Yeneris), the God-
dess of beauty : muliebria (ndmina) female names, or the
names of women; ut as, Anna (genitive, Annas), Ann ;
Phildtis (genitive Phildtjdis), Philote : t (ndmina) urbium the
names cf cities; ut as, Elis (genitive, Elidis), a city of Pelo~
ponnesus, O'pus genitive, Opiintis), a city of Ldcris : (ndmina)
regidnum the names of countries ; ut a*, Greecia (genitive,
, Greece, Persis (genitive, Persidis), Persia: item.
( 186 )
likewise nomen the name insulae of an island ; ceu as, Creta
(genitive, Cretae), the island of Crete, Britannia (genitive, Bri-
tanniae), Britain, Cyprus (genitive, Cypri), Cyprus.
Tamen but qusedam (ndmina) certain names urbium of
titles sunt are excipienda to be excepted ; ut as, ista mascu-
lina (ndmina) these masculine nouns ; Sulmo (genitive, Sul-
menis), a town in I'taty, Agragas (genitive, Agragantis), a
town in Sicily :^ quasdam neutralia (ndmina) some neuter
nouns; ut as, Argos (genitive Argeos vet Argi), a city in
Peloponnesus; Tibur (genitive, Tiburis), a city in I'taly ;
Praeneste (genitive, Prsenestis, dilative, Praeneste), a city of
I'taly ; et also Anxur (genitive, Anxuris), a city of I'taly,
quod which dat gives iitriimque genus either gender of the two,
tfiat is, both the masculine and neuter gender.
Appellativa (ndmina) appellative or cdmmon names ar-
borum of trees erunt will be muliebrm feminine : ut as, alnus
[genitive, alni), an aider-tree, cupressus (genitive, cupressi),
a cypress-tree, cedrus (genitive, cedri), a cedar-tree.
Spinus (genitive, spini), a sloe-tree or a black-thorn (est)
mas is masculine, oleaster (genitive, oleastri), a wild olive-
tree (est) mas is masculine.
(Haec ndmina) sunt these nouns are et also neutra of the
neuter gender, siier (genitive, sileris), an osier, or a withy -
tree, suber (genitive, siiberis), a cork-tree, thus (genitive,
thiiris), a frankincense-tree, rdbur (genitive, rdboris), an oak,
atque and acer (genitive, aceris), a maple-tree.
Etiam also (ndmina) vdlucrum the names of birds ; ceu as,
passer (genitive, passeris), a sparrow, hinindo (genitive, hiriin-
dinis), a swallow : (nomma) ferarnra the names of wild beasts ;
ut as, tigris (genitive,1\gr\d\s ve/tigris), a tiger, viilpes (genitive,
viilpis), a fox : et and (no'mina) piscium the names of fishes ;
ut as, dstrea, (genitive, dstreae), an oyster, cetus (genitive,
ceti), a whale, sunt are dicta called (ndmina) epicdena nouns
epicene, quibus (nominibus) to which nouns vox ipsa the termi-
ndtion itself feret will bring aptum genus the right gender.
Attamen but (id est) notandum it is to be observed ex
cunctis (nominibus) of all the names supra above mentioned.
atque and reliquis (nominibus) of nouns that remain, or of
those that follow, dmne (nomen) that every noun quod which
exit in -uni ends in -urn, seu whether (sit) Grsscum (nomen)
it be a Greek noun, sive or Latinum (nomen) a Latin noun,
( 1ST )
fese wneutrum genus of the neuter gender: sic also ndmen
a noun invariable underlined.
No'men a noun non crescens not increasing genitive (casu)
in the genitive case : ceu as, caro carnis flesh, capra capras a
she-goat, nubes nubis a cloud, est z> muliebre genus of tfte
feminine gender.
Multa ndmina many nouns virdrum of men, that is, denoting
the offices of men in -a, ending in -a, dicunttir are called
mascula masculine: ut as, scriba (genitive, scribae), a scribe,
assecla (genitive, asseclae), a page, scurra (genitive sciirrae),
a bujfodn, et and rabula (genitive, rabulae), a pettifogger,
Hxa (genitive, lixas), a sutler, lanista (genitive, lanistae), a
master of gladiators.
Qnot (no'mina) as many nouns as prima declinatio the first
declension Graecdrum of the Greeks fiindit pours out, or
makes to end in -as, et and in -es ; et and quot (Latina
ndmina) as many Latin nouns as fiunt are derived ab illis
from them per -a ending in -a, (sunt) mascula are masculine ;
ut as, satrapas satrapa (genitive, satrapse), a Persian noble-
man ; athletes athleta (genitive, athletae"), a wrestler.
I'tem also (heec ndmina) leguntur these nouns are read
mascula of the masculine gender, verres (genitive, yerris), a
boar-pig, natalis (genitive, natalis), one's birth-day, aqualis
(genitive, aqualis), a ewer.
(Ndmina) nata nouns descended or compounded ab asse of
the word "AS" a Roman coin or pound, ut as, centussis
(genitive, centussis), a hundred pence or pounds-weight:
conjunge (bis) join unto these lienis (genitive, lienis), the
spleen, et and drbis (genitive, drbis), any round thing, callis,
(genitive, callis), a path, caiilis (genitive, caulis), a stalk,
io'llis (genitive* fo'llis), bellows, cdllis (genitive, cdllis), a hill,
mensis (genitive, mensis), a month, et and ensis (genitive,
ensis), a sword, fustis (genitive, fustis), a club, funis, (ge-
nitive, funis), a rope, cenchris (genitive, cenchris), a kind of
serpent, panis (genitive, panis), bread, crinis (genitive, crinis),
hair, et and ignis (genitive, ignis), fire, cassis (genitive,
cassis), a toil or net, fascis (genitive, fascis), a faggot, tdrris
{genitive, to'rris), a fire-brand, sentis (genitive, sentis), a
thorn, piscis (genitive, piscis), a fish, et and unguis (genitive,
unguis), a nail of the hand or foot, et also verm is (genitive,
vermis), a worm, vectis (genitive, vectis), a lever, pdstis (ge~
( 188 )
nitive, pdstis), a door-post ; et also axis (genitive) axis), an
axle-tree societur may be joined.
(Nomina finita) in -Sr nouns ending in -er, ceu as, Tenter
(genitive, ventris), the belly ; (ndmina finita) in -os vel -us,
nouns ending in -6s or in -us ; ut as, logos (gonitive, logi),
word, annus (genitive, anni), a year, (sunt) mascula are
>mdsculine.
At but (haec ndmina) sunt these nouns are foeminei generis
of the feminine gender, mater (genitive, matris), a mother,
humus (genitive, humi), the ground, ddmus (genitive, do'mus
vel ddmi), a house, alvus (genitive, alvi), a paunch, et and
co'lus (genitive, cdli vel cdlus), a distaff or whorl, et also
ficus (genitive, ficus), quarts (declinatidnis) ficus of the
fourth declension pro for fnictu the fruit, that is, a, Jig, atque
and acus (genitive acus), a needle, pdrticus (genitive, pdrticus),
a porch, atque and tribus (genitive, tribus), a tribe, so'crus
(genitive, sdcrus), a mother-in-law, nurus (genitive, niirus),
a daughter-in-law, et and manus (genitive, manus), a handp
idus (genitive, iduum), the ides of a month ; hue to these
anus (genitive, anus), an old woman est addenda is to be
added, hue to these mystica vannus the mystical fan lacchi of
Bacchus.
Jiingas you may (also} join his to these Gneca (nomina)
Greek nouns vertentia changing -os in -us, -os into -us ; pa-
pyrus (genitive, papyri vel papyri), paper, antidotus (geni-
tive, antidoti), an antidote or preventive, cdstus (genitive^
cdsti), the herb zedoary, diphthdngus (genitive, diphthong!),,
a diphthong, byssus (genitive, byssi), fine flax, abyssus
(genitive, abyssi), an abyss or a bottomless pit, crystallus
(genitive, crystalli), crystal, synodus (genitive, synodi), an
assembly, sapphirus (genitive, sapphiri), a ^sapphire stone,
eremus (genitive, eremi), a desert, et and Arctus (genitixe,
Arcti), a set of stars called the Bear, cum with multis aliis
(nominibus) many other nouns, quae which nunc at this time
perscribere to write at large est longum is tedious.
No'men a noun (finitum) in -e ending in e, si ifgignit -is
it begets or makes -is in the genitive case, (est) neiitrum w
neuter, ut as, mare (genitive, maris), the sea, rete (genitive,
retis), a net ; et and adde add quot (nomina) however many
or whatever nouns legas you read (finita) in -on ending in
-CM, flexa per -I inflected by -I, that is, making -I in the ge-
( 189 )
nitive case, ut as, barbiton (genitive, bitrbiti), a harp or
lute.
Hippo'manes (genitive, hippdmanis), a raging hitmour in
mares est is neutrum genus of the neuter gender, et and ca-
coethes (genitive, cacoethis), an evil hdlit or custom (est)
neutrum is neuter, et also virus (genitive, viri), poison,
pelagus (genitive, pelagi), the sea : vulgus (genitive, viilgi),
the common pe6ple mddo sometimes (est) neutrum is nei'iter,
mddb sometimes mas is masculine.
(Hasc ndmina) sjint these nouns are incerti generis of ths
doubtful gender, talpa (genitive, talpse), a mole, et and dama
(genitive, damse), a deer, canalis (genitive, canalis), a channel.,
et and cytisus (genitive, cytisi), hddder, balanus (genitive,
balani), the fruit of the palm-tree, cliinis (genitive, cliinis),
a buttock, finis (genitive, finis), an end, or a limit, penus
(genitive, peni vel penus), all kinds of provision, amnis (ge-
nitive, amnis), a river, pampinus (genitive, pampini), a vine
leaf, et and cdrbis (genitive, cdrbis), a basket, linter (genitive,
lintris), a bark, tdrquis (genitive, tdrquis), a chain, specus
(genitive, specus rdriiis speci), a cave, anguis (genitive, an-
guis), a snake, ficus dans ficificus giving fid, that is, making
fid in the genitive case, pro mdrbo for a disease, atque and
phaselus (genitive, pbaseli), a pinnace, lecytbus (genitive,
lecytbi), an oil cruse, ac and atomus (genitive, atomi), an
atom, grdssus (genitive, grdssi), a green jig, pbarus (genitive,
phari), a watch-tower, et and paradisus (genitive, paradisi),
paradise.
(Ndmen) compdsitum a noun compounded a verbo of a
verb dans -a giving -a, that is, ending in -a, est is commune
dudrum (generum) the common of two genders : Grajiigena
(genitive, Grajugena?), a Grecian-born a. from gigno / beget,
agricola (genitive, agricolre), a farmer a from cdlo / till,
advena (genitive, advenae), a stranger a from venio / come,
rndnstrant show id that.
Adde add senex (genitive, senis and sdmctimes senicis),
an old man or wdman, auriga (genitive, aurigre), a chario-
teer, et and verna (genitive, vernae), a slave by birth, sodalis
(genitive, sodalis), a companion, vates (genitive, vatis), a.
prophet or bard, extdrris (genitive, extdrris), a banished man
or woman, patruelis (genitive, patruelis), a cousin-german,
atque and perduellis (genitive, perduellis), an open enemy in
( 190 )
war, affinis (genitive, affmis), one allied by marriage, juvenis
(genitive, juvenis), a young person, testis (genitive, testis), a
witness, civis (genitive, civis), a citizen, canis (genitive, canis,
genitive plural, canum), a dog or bitch, ho'stis (genitive, hdstis),
an enemy.
NOMEN a noun est is muliebre genus of the feminine gender
si z/'penultima syllaba the last syllable except one genitivi
(casus) of the genitive case crescentis increasing sonat sounds
aciita sharp, that is, if it be accented: velut as hcec (ndmina)
these nouns pietas pietatis piety, virtus virttitis virtue mdn-
strant show.
Quondam ndmina certain nouns monosyllaba of 6nly one
syllable dicuntur are called mascula masculine : sal (genitive,
salis), salt, sol (genitive, soils), the sun, ren (genitive, renis),
a kidney, et and splen (genitive, splenis), the spleen, Car
(genitive, Caris), a Cdrian, Ser (genitive, Seris, accusative,
Sera), a Chinese, vir (genitive, viri), a man or husband, vas
vadis a surety, as (genitive, assis), a pound weight, mas (ge-
nitive, maris), the male kind, bes (genitive, bessis), eight
ounces, Ores (genitive, Cretis), a Cretan or man of Crete,
praes (genitive, preedis), a surety for money, et and pes (geni-
tive, pedis), the foot, glis a dormouse habens having glim
genitivo gliris in the genitive case, mos (genitive, mdris), a
mdnner, flos (genitive, fldris), a flower, ros, (genitive, rdris),
dew, et also Tros (genitive, Trdis), a Trojan or man of Troy,
mus (genitive, miiris), a mouse, dens (genitive, dentis), a
tooth, mons (genitive, mentis), a mountain, pons (genitive.
pdntis), a bridge, et and simul also fons (genitive, fdntis),
a fountain, seps (genitive, sepis), pro serpente seps for a ser-
pent, likewise, an eft, et and gryps (genitive, gryphis), a
griffin, Thrax {genitive, Thracis), a Thrdcian, rex (genitive,
regis), a king, grex (genitive, gregis), a flock, et and Phryx
(genitive, Phrygis), a Phrygian.
Etiam also polysyllaba nouns of more than one syllable
(finita) in -n ending in -n sunt are mascula masculine ; lit
asi Acarnan (genitive, Acarnariis), an Acarndnian, that is,
a man of Acarndnia, lichen (genitive, lichenis), a tetter or
ringworm, also, the herb called liver-wort, et and delphin
(genitive, delphinis), a dolphin : et also (ndmina finita) in
-o nouns ending in -o signantia signifying corpus bddy or
bodily substance ; ut as, leo (genitive, leo'nis), a lion, curciilio
( 191 )
(genitive, curculidnis), the wedsand or gullet : sic also senio
(genitive, senidnis), the number six, ternio (genitive, ternidnis),
the number three, sermo (genitive, sermdnis), a discourse.
(Ndmina finita) in -er, -or, et -6s, nouns ending in -er, -or,
and -os, (sunt) mascula are masculine; ceu as, crater, (ge-
nitive, crateris), a bowl, cdnditor (genitive, conditdris), a
builder, heros (genitive, herd'is), a hero : his (nominibus) to
these (nouns) conjunge conjoin tdrrens (genitive, torrentis),
a torrent, or, land flood, nefrens (genitive, nefrentis), a young
pig, driens (genitive, orientis), the east, atque and cliens (ge-
nitive, clientis), a client, atque and bidens instrumentum the
word "bidens" an instrument or fork with two prongs, cum
pliiribus (nominibus) with many nouns (finita), in -dens
ending in -dens . adde add (to these} gigas (genitive, gigantis),
a giant, elephas (genitive, elephantis), an elephant, adamas
(genitive, adamantis), a diamond, atque and Garamas (ge-
nitive, Garamantis;, a Garamdntian, or, a man of Libya,
atque and tapes (genitive, tapetis), tapestry, atque and lebes
(genitive, lebetis), a cauldron, sic so et also magues (genitive,
magnetis), a magnet or a loadstone, atque and unum ndmen
one noun quintse (declinatidnis) of the fifth declension, meri-
dies (genitive, meridiei), noon or mid-day : et also (ndmina)
zpise the nouns which compomintur are compounded ab o/"asse
a pound iveight, ut as, dddrans (genitive, dodrantis), nine
ounces, semis (genitive, semissis), half a pound.
(Hsec) mascula (ndmina) these masculine nouns jungantur
may be joined, Samnis (genitive, Samnitis), a Sdmnite, hy-
drops (genitive, hydrdpis), the dropsy, et and thorax (genitive,
thoracis), the breast or chest : jungas you may join qudque
also (l)jec) mascula (ndmina) these masculines, vervex (geni-
tive, vervecis), a wether sheep, phdenix (genitive, phcenicis),
a phoznix, et and bdmbyx (genitive, bombycis), pro for ver-
miculo a silk-worm: Attamen yet ex his (nominibus) of these
(nouns) syren (genitive, syrenis;, a mermaid, necnon also
sdror (genitive, sordris), a sister, uxor (genitive, uxdris), a
wife, sunt are muliebre genus of the feminine gender.
Et also haec ndmina these nouns monosyllaba of one syllable
sunt are neutralia neiiter : mel (genitive, mellis), hdney, fel
(genitive, fellis), gall, lac (genitive, lactis), milk, far (genitive,
farris), bread-corn, ver (genitive, veris), the spring, aes (geni-
tive, geris), brass, cor (genitive, cdrdis), the heart, vas
(sent-
( J92 )
a, vessel, os dssis a bone, et and 6s dris the mouth, rus
five, ruris), the country, thus (genitive, thiiris), frankincense,
jus, (genitive, juris), right, also gruel or broth, crus (genitive,
cruris), the leg, pus (genitive, piiris), corruption.
Et also polysyllaba (ndmina) nouns of several syllables^
that is, of more than of one syllable (finita) in al ending in
-al, atque and in -ar ending in -ar : ut as, capital (genitive,
capitalis), a priest's veil, laquear (genitive, laquearis), a roof
or ceiling : alec (genitive, alecis), a sharp pickle (est)
neiitrum is neuter, alex (genitive, alecis), a herring (est)
muliebre (genus) is of the feminine gender.
(Hasc ndmina) sunt these (names or} nouns are diibii g-
neris of doubtful gender ; scrobs (genitive, scrdbis), a ditch,
serpens (genitive, serpentis), a serpent, bubo (genitive, bu-
bdnis), an owl, rudens (genitive, rudentis), a cable, grus
(genitive, gru'is), a crane, perdix (genitive, perdicis), a par-
tridge, lynx (genitive, lyncis), a lynx or an ounce, a sort of
spotted wolf, limax (genitive, limacis), a snail, stirps (genitive^
stirpis), the word stirps pro truncoybr the trunk or body of a
tree f et and calx pedis the heel of the foot.
Adde add dies (genitive, die'i), a day, tantum only esto let it be
mas masculine secundo numero in the second or plural number.
(HsBC ndmina) sunt these nouns are commune (genus) of
the common gender: parens (genitive, parentis), a parent,
father or mother, atque and auctor (genitive, auctdris), an
author, infans (genitive, infantis), a babe, or an infant, ado-
lescens (genitive, adolescentis), a young man or woman, dux
(genitive, duels), a leader, illex (genitive, illegis), an outlaw,
h seres (genitive, haeredis), an heir, exlex (genitive, exlegis),
an outlaw.
(Ndmina) creata nouns compounded a frdnte of frons the
forehead ; ut as, bifrons {genitive, bifro'ntis), one icith two
faces, custos (genitive, custo'dis), a keeper, bos (genitive, bo-
vis, genitive plural, bourn, dative plural, bdbus vel biibus),
an ox, a bull or cow, fur (genitive, furls), a thief, sus (gent-
five, sui's), a swine, atque and sacerdos (genitive, sacerddtis),
a priest or priestess.
NOMEN a noun est is mas masculine, si if pemiltima the
last syllable except one genitivi (casus) of the genitive case,
crescentis increasing sit be gravis Jlat : ut as sanguis blood
genitivo (casu) in the genitive case sangiunis.
( 193 )
Hyperdissyllabon (ndmen) let a noun of more than two
syllables (finitum) in -do terminating in -do, quod (ndmen)
which noun dat gives or makes -dinis the ending -dinis in ge-
nitivo (casu) in the genitive case, atque and (byperdissyllabon
ndmen finitum) in -go any hyperdissyllable noun ending in -go,
quod (dat) which gives or makes -ginis the termination -ginis
in the genitive case sit be foeminei generis of the feminine
gender : dulcedo sweetness faciens making dulcedinis, mdn-
strat demonstrates or shows id that tibi to you, atque and
compago (genitive, compaginis), a joint or joining (mdnstrat)
id shows (to you} that or the same thing.
Adjice add virgo (genitive, virginis), a virgin or maiden,
grando (genitive, grandinis), hail, fides (genitive, fidei),
faith, cdmpes (genitive, cdmpedis), a fetter, teges (genitive,
tegetis), a mat, et and seges (genitive, segetis), corn-land,
arbor vel arbos (genitive, arboris), a tree, atque and \iyems
(genitive, hyemis), winter : sic so chlamys (genitive, chla-
mydis), a cloak or mantle, et and sindon (genitive, sindonis),
fine linen, Gorgon (genitive, Gdrgonis, accusative, Gdrgona),
Medusa's head, icon (genitive, iconis, acciisative, icona), an
image, et and Amazon (genitive, Amazonis, accusative, Ama-
zona), an Amazon.
Grsecula (ndmina) Greek nouns finita ending in -as vel in
-is in -as or in -is, ut as, lampas (genitive, lampadis), a lamp,
iaspis (genitive, iaspidis), a jasper, cassis, (genitive, cassidis),
a helmet, cuspis (genitive, ciispidis), the point of a weapon :
item also mulier (genitive, mulieris), a woman, et and pecus
cattle dans giving or making pecudis (genitivo casu) pccudis
in the genitive case.
Adde add his (nominibus) unto these (nouns'] fdrfex (ge-
nitive, fdrficis), a pair of shears or scissars, pellex (genitive,
pellicis), a harlot, carex (genitive, caricis), sedge, atque and
simul also supellex (genitive, supellectilis), househoid-fiirni-
ture, appendix (genitive, appendicis), an appendage, bystrix
(genitive, bystricis), a porcupine, coxendix (genitive, coxen-
dicis), the hip, atque and filix (genitive, filicis^fern.
Ndmen a noun (finitum) in -a ending in -a, signans signi-
fying rem a thing non aninmtam not animate, that is, a thing
without life, est is neutrale genus of the neuter gender ; ut
as, problema (genitive, problernatis), a problem or a question
proposed : (ndmina et finita in) -en nouns also ending in -en;
K
( 194 )
ut as, omen (genitive, dminis), a token of good or lad luck :
(ndniina finita in) ar nouns ending in ar ; ut as, jiibar (geni-
tive, jiibaris), a sunbeam ; (ndmen) dans -iir, a noun giving
-ur, that is, ending in -iir ; ut as, jecur (genitive, jecoris vel
jecinoris), the liver ; (ndmina in) -us, nouns in -us; ut as,
onus (genitive, dneris), a burden: (ndmina finita in) -put
nouns ending in -put ; ut as, occiput (genitive, occipitis), tlie
hinder part of the head.
Attamen but ex his (nominibus) of these (nouns) peetee
(genitive, pectinis), a comb, furfur (genitive, furfuris), bran,
sunt are mascula masculine.
(Haec ndmina) sunt these nouns are neutra of the neuter
gender, cadaver (genitive, cadaveris), a carcase, verber (geni-
tive, verberis), a stripe, iter (genitive, itineris), a journey,
suber (genitive, siiberis), a cork, tuber (genitive, tiiberis),
pro for fiingo a mushroom, et and uber (genitive, uberis),
a dug or teat, gingiber (genitive, gingiberis), ginger, et and
laser (genitive, laseris), the herb benjamine, cicer (genitive,
ciceris), a vetch, et and piper (genitive, piperis), pepper, atque
and papaver (genitive, papaveris), a poppy, et also siser (ge-
nitive, siseris), a pdrsnep.
Addas you may add his (nominibus) unto these (nouns)
neutra the neuters sequor (genitive, aquoris), a level surface
or a plane superficies, marmor (genitive, marmoris), marble,
atque and ador (genitive, adoris vel addris),y?rae wheat, atque
and pecus cattle quandb when facit it makes pecoris in geni-
tive (casu), pecoris in the genitive case.
(Haec ndmina) suiit these nouns are diibii generis of the
doubtful gender, cardo (genitive, cardinis), a hinge, margo
(genitive, marginis), the margin, brink, or brim of a thing,
cinis (genitive, cineris), ashes or cinders, dbex (genitive,
dbicis), a bolt, forceps (genitive, fdrcipis), a pair of tongs,
piimex (genitive, pumicis), a pumice-stone, imbrex (genitive,
imbricis), a gutter-tile, cortex (genitive, cdrticis), the rind or
bark of a tree or shrub, piilvis (genitive, piilveris), dust,
atque and adeps (genitive, adipis), ya.
Adde add culex (genitive, culicis), a gnat, natrix (genitive,
natricis), a water-serpent., et and onyx (genitive, dnychis),
an onyx, a sort of precious stone, cum prole with its offspring
or compounds, atque and silex, (genitive, silicis), a JHn. t
quamvis although usus use vult wishes or will have hsee
(195 )
(nomina) these nouns melius rather dicier to be called mascula
masculine.
Is'ta (nomina) these nouns sunt are communis generis of
the common gender, that is, are indifferently masculine or
feminine } vigil (genitive, vigilis), a sentinel, pugil (genitive,
pugilis), a boxer, or champion, exul (genitive, exulis), a
banished man or woman, prsesul (genitive, prsesulis), a prelate,
homo (genitive, hdminis), a man or woman, nemo (genitive,
neminis), nobody, martyr (genitive, martyris), a martyr,
Ligur (genitive, Liguris), a Ligurian, augur, (genitive, au-
gur is), a diviner by birds, or a soothsayer, et and Areas (ge-
nitive, Arcadis vel Arcados), an Orcadian, antistes (genitive,
antistitis), a chief priest or priestess, miles (genitive, militis),
a s6ldier y pedes (genitive, peditis), a footman or foot-woman,
interpres (genitive, interprets), an interpreter, comes (geni-
tive, co'mitis), a companion on a journey., hdspes (genitive^
lidspitis), a host or landlord, also, a guest : sic so ales (geni-
tive, alitis), any great bird, prases (genitive, preesidis), a
president, princeps (genitive, principis), a prince or princess,
auceps (genitive, aiicupis), a fowler, eques (genitive, equitis),
a horseman or horse-woman, dbses (genitive, dbsidis), a
hostage : atque and multa alia nomina many other nouns
quse which creantur are formed or derived a verbis from
verbs : ut as cdnjux (genitive, cdnjugis), a husband or wife,
jiidex, (genitive, jiidicis), a judge, vindex (genitive, vindicis),
an avenger, dpifex (genitive, opificis), a workman, et and
aruspex (genitive, ariispicis), a diviner by the entrails at
sacrifice.
ADJECTIVA adjectives habentia having duntaxat only unam
Tocem one termination, ut, a*, felix (genitive, felicis), happy,
aiidax (genitive, audacis), bold, retinent keep dmne genus
every gender sub una (vdce) under that one ending; si if
cadant they fall sub under gemina vdce a double termination,
veliit as dmnis all et and dmne all, prior vox the former word
(of the two) est is commune (genus) dudrum (generum) the
common of two genders, that is, both masculine and feminine,
altera vox the second word (est) neiitrum (genus) is neuter ;
at but si if variant they vary tres voces the three terminations
or endings ; ut as, sacer, sacra, sacrum, sacred; prima vox
( 196 )
the first word est is mas masculine, altera the second, fcemina
feminine, tertia the third, neiitrum (genus) neuter.
Obser. 1. At but sunt (ndmina) there are some nouns
quce which vocares you would call substantiva siilstantives
prdpe in a manner flexu by their declining 1 : tamen yet (sunt)
reperta they are found (esse) to be adjectiva adjectives natiira
by nature atque and lisu by use. Talia such sunt are pauper
(genitive, paiiperis), poor, puber (genitive, piiberis), ripe of
age, cum with degener (genitive, degeneris), degenerate, uber
(genitive, uberis), fruitful, et and dives (genitive, divitis),
rich, locuples (genitive, locupletis), wealthy, sdspes (genitive,
sdspitis), safe, comes (genitive, cdmitis), accompanying or
attending, atque and superstes (genitive, superstitis), sur-
viving : cum with paiicis aliis (nominibus) a few others (nouns),
quae which justa lectio due redding docebit will teach.
Obser. 2. Hsec (adjectiva) these adjectives gaudent like
ndsciscere to take sibi unto themselves quemdam prdpriuin
flexum a certain pecidiar inflexion or manner of declining,
campester champaign, vdlucer swift, celeber famous, celer
speedy, atque and saliiber wholesome ; junge join pedester,
belonging unto a footman, equ ester belonging to a horseman,
et and acer sharp ; junge jom paliister marshy, ac and alacer
cheerful, silvester woody :
At but tu you variabis shall vary or decline haec (adjectiva)
.these adjectives sic thus : hie celer, in the masculine, haec
celeris, in the feminine, hoc celere neutro (genere) hoc celtre
in the neuter gender ; aut or aliter otherwise sic thus ; hie
atque haec celeris for the masculine and feminine, nirsum
again hoc celere est hoc celere is neiitrum (genus) tibi the
neuter gender for you.
NOUNS HETEROCLITE, OR IRREGULAR,
CONSTRUED.
(Nomina) quse those nouns which variant change genus
their gender aut or flexum their declension* (et) quaecumque
(nomina) and whatsoever nouns novato ritu by or after a new
manner deficiunt^a// short vel or superant exceed in declining,
siinto let them be (called) heterdclita heteroclites, or nouns
irregular.
( 197)
Cernis you perceive or see haec (nomina) these nouns vari-
antia varying partim in part genus their gender, ac and
flexum their declining : Perg-amus (genitive, Pergami), the
city ofPergamus gignit makes Pergama the citadel of Troy in
plurali numero in the plural number.
Prior niimerus the former or singular number dat gives hi3
(nominibus) unto these nouns neutrum genus the neuter gender,
alter (numerus) the other, or plural number, utrumque both
the "masculine and neuter ; rastrum (genitive, rastri), a rake,
or harrow, cum with freno {nominative, frenum), the bit of a
bridle, filum (genitive, fill), a thread, atque simul and also
capistrum (genitive,^ capistri), a halter : item also Argos (ge-
nitive, Argeos vel Argi), Argos, a town in Greece, et and
ccelum (genitive, ctieli), heaven, sunt are neutra neuter singula
singulars, that is, in the singular number, sed but aiidi hear
or observe, vocitabis you shall say duntaxat only cdelos, et
and Argos (in the plural number) mascula masculine : sed
but frena neuter, et and frenos masculine, quo pacto on which
condition, or after which manner (Latini) fdrmant they (the
Latins} form et also ceetera the rest, that is, of the nouns above
mentioned, namely, rastrum, filum, and capistrum.
Pluralis numerus the plural number solet is wont addere to
add his (nominibus) to these nouns utrumque genus either
gender of the two, that is, both genders, the masculine and
neuter ; sibilus (genitive, sibili), a hissing, atque and jdcus
{genitive, joci), sport, locus {genitive, loci), a place. Jungas
you may join his (nominibus) unto these (nouns} qudque also
plurima (no'mina) very many or many more {nouns}.
Propago (ndminum) the stock {of nouns} quas ivhich se-
quituryb//ows est is manca defective casu in case vel or nu-
mero in number.
(No'mina) quas nouns which variant vary millum casum no
case ; ut a*, fas divine law, nil nothing, nihil nothing, instar
resembling in size or appearance : et and multa (nomina)
many nouns (finita) in -u ending in u, simul also in -i ending
in i : ut as, sunt are haec these atque both co'rnu a horn, atque
and genu the knee ; sic so gummi gum, friigi thrifty ; sic so
Tempe a pleasant vale in Thessaly, tot so many, quot, how
many, et and dmnes numeros all numbers, that is, nouns of
number a tribus from three ad centum to a hundred, vocabis
you shall call aptdta dptotes.
(198 )
Atque and nomen a noun cui vox to which the vocable or
diction cadit una falls one or single, that is, which hath only
one case est is called monoptdton a monoptote ; ceu as, no'ctu
by night, natu by birth, jussu by order, injiissu without order,
simul also astu by craft, prdmptu in readiness, permissu with
permission or leave: legimus we have read astus plurali
(numero) dstus in the plural number : legimus, we have read
inficias a denial, sed but ea vox that case sola alone est reperta
is found.
(Ndmina) sunt those nouns are (called) diptdta diptotes,
quibus to which duplex flexiira a double fl6xure or twofold
declining remansit has remained, that is, nouns which have
only two cases : ut as, fors chance dabit will give or make
forte by chance, sexto (casu) in the sixth or ablative case,
qudque also spdntis of choice spdnte by choice : et and jugeris
of an acre dat gives or makes jiigere by an acre, sexto (casu)
in the sixth or ablative case, aiitern and verberis of a stripe
verbere by a stripe, qudque also suppetise aid dant gives or
makes suppetias aid or succour, quarto (casu) in the fourth, or
the accusative case ; tantiindem just so much dat makes tan-
tidem of just so much, et and simul also impetis of an attdck
dat makes impete by an attdck, (ablativo casu) in the abla-
tive case ; sic so repetundarum of illegal exactions repetundis
by illegal exactions. Verberis of a stripe, cum with jugere
by an acre servant keep quatuor casus four cases in altero
numero in the other or plural number.
(Ndmina) vocantur nouns are called or named triptdta
triptotes quibus in which inflectis you decline tres casus three
cases : sic so est it is ndstrse dpis of or in our power, legis
you read or meet with fer dpem bring assistance, atque and
dignus worthy ope of aid or help ; flecte decline preci to
prayer, atque and precem prayer, et and blandus petit he
complaisant courts, that is, complaisdntly woos amicam his
mistress piece with entreaty or entreaties : at but friigis of
fruit caret ivants tantum only recto (casu) the straight case or
the nominative, et and also ditidnig of rule : vox the word vis
force est is Integra entire, nisi unless forte perhaps dativus
(casus) the dative case desit be wanting : Jiingas you may
join his (nominibus) to these (nouns} vicis of a turn, atque
and vicem a turn, et and vice by a turn : qudque also plus
more habet hath pluris of more* et and plus more, quarto
( 199 )
(casu) in the fourth, or accusative case : Jter immerus tlie
other or plural number} datur is given omnibus his (noini-
nibus) to all these nouns.
Notes you may note (or observe) cuncta prdpria (ncmina)
all pr6pcr names, quibus to which est there is natiira a na-
ture, that is, which have a nature, or an import, coercens
restraining them ne fuerint lent they be, that is, from being-
pliirima many or plurals ; et and multa alia (nomina) many
other nouns occiirrent tibi will meet you legenti redding, that
is, will fall in your way in redding, raro seldom excedentia
exceeding primum nuinerum thejirst, or singular number.
(Haec) mascula (nomina) these masculines sunt are con-
tenta content with or confined to secundo numero the second
or plural number tantum only : manes (genitive, manium),
the spirits of the departed, or ghosts, majdres (genitive, ma-
jorum), ancestors, cancelli (genitive, cancelldrum), lattices,
liberi (genitive, liberdrum), children, et and antes (genitive,
antium), the fore ranks of vines, lendes, (genitive, lendium),
nits, et and lemures (genitive, lemurum), spectres, simul
also fasti (genitive, fastdrum), registers or annals, atque and
mindres (genitive, mindrum), yoimgers or posterity, natales
(genitive, natalium), cum when assignant it assigns or signi-
fies genus extraction, or kindred ; adde add penates (genitive,
penatum), household gods, et and Idea (genitive, locdrum),
places, that is, the names of places plurali (numero) in or of
the plural number, quales such as, atque both Gabii (genitive^
Gabidrum), a city in I'taly, atque and Ldcri (genitive, Lo-
crdrum), the Locrians or inhabitants of Ldcris, et and quas-
oiinque (nomina) ivhatever nouns similis ratidnis of like sort
or kind legas you may read passsim here and there, that is,
in authors.
Hose (nomina) these noims sunt are foeminei generis of the
feminine gender, atque and secundi numeri of the plural
number: exuvise (genitive, exuviarum), cast garments or Any
thing stript off from the bddy, phalerse (genitive, phalerarum),
horse-trappings, atque and grates (genitive, defective}, thanks^
manubiae (genitive, manubiarum), the spoils of war, et and
idus (genitive, iduum), the ides of a month, antise (genitive,
antiarum), a forelock, et and induciae (genitive, induciarum) ?
a truce ; simul also atque both insidiae (genitive, insidiarum) ?
an ambush, atque and minae (genitive } minarum), threats,
( 200 )
excubiae (genitive, excubiarum), watch by day or night, ndna?
(genitive, nonarum), the nones of a month, nug^e {genitive,
nugarum), trifles, atque and tricse (genitive, tricarum), toys,
calendae (genitive, calendarum), the calends of a month, quis-
quilia3 (genitive, quisquiliarum), the sweepings or refuse of
any thing, thermae (genitive, thermarum), a hot-bath, curias
(genitive, cunarum), a cradle, diraa (genitive, dirarum),
curses, atque and exequiae (genitive, exequiarum), funeral
rites, feriae (genitive, feriarum), holidays, et and inferice (ge-
nitive, inferiarum), sacrifices performed to the dead; sic so
atque both primitiae (genitive, primitiarum), the Jirst fruits of
the year, atque and plagae (genitive, plagarum), signantes
signifying retia (genitive, retium), nets, et and valvae (geni-
tive, valvarum), fdlding-doors, atque and divitiaa (genitive,
divitiarum), riches, item also niiptiae (genitive, nuptiarum),
nuptials or a marriage, et and lactes (genitive, Jactium), the
small guts : Thebae (genitive, Thebarum), Thebes, et and
Athene (genitive, Athenarum), Athens, addantur may be
added : quod genus of which sort invenias you may find et
also pliira ndmina more names locdrum of places.
Haec neiitra (no'mina) these neuter nouns pluralia of the
plural number legiintur are read rarius seldom primo (nii-
inero) in the Jirst, or singular number; mtienia (genitive.
mdenium), the walls of a city, cum with tesquis (the ablative of
te'squa, tesquorum), rough and desert places, praecordia (ge-
nitive, pra3cordio'rum), the parts about the heart, also, the
midriff or diaphragm, lustra (genitive, lustrdrum), the dens
ferarum of wild beasts, arma (genitive, armdrum), arms of
war, map alia (genitive, mapalium), Numtdian cottages; sic
so bellaria (genitive, bellaridrum), junkets ; miinia (genitive,
munidrum), an office of trust or charge, castra (genitive, cas-
trdrum), a camp : funus (genitive, funeris), a funeral petit
requires jiista (genitive, justdrum), due rites or solemnities, et
ind virgo (genitive, virginis), a virgin petit requires spon-
salia (genitive, sponsalidrum), espousals: disertus (homo) an
eloquent man amat loves rostra (genitive, rostrdrum), the
pulpit, atque and piieri (genitive, puerdrum), children gestant
tarry crepiindia (genitive, crepundidrum), rattles, atque and
infantes (genitive, infantum), babes or infants cdlunt use cu-
nabula (genitive, cunabulo'rum), cradles, that is, lie in cradles :
augur (genitive, auguris), a soothsayer, consulit consults exta
( 201 )
(genitive, exto'rum) the entrails, et and absdlvens finishing
his sacrifice siiperis (diis) to the supernal gods, that is, to the
gods above recantat chants over effata (genitive, effatorum),
their decrees : festa (genitive, festdrum), the feasts deurii (for
dedrum) of the gods, ecu as Bacchanalia (genitive, Bacchana-
lium vel Bacchanalidrum), feasts dedicated to Bacchus, pdte-
runt will be able, that is, mill be proper jungi to be Joined.
Quod si and if leges you shall read pliira (ndmina) more
nouns or names of the same sort, or description, licet (ut)
repdnas it is granted (that) you place them, that is, you may
place them qudque also hac classe in this rank or class.
Haec (ndmina) these nouns simt are simul at one and the
same time et both quarti of the fourth atque and secundi
flexus of the second declension ; enim for laurus a bay-tree
facit makes genitivo (casu) in the genitive case, laiiri of a
bay-tree et and laurus of a bay-tree ; sic so do quercus an
oak, pinus, a pine-tree, ficus the word ficus pro for friictu
the fruit, that is, a Jig, ac and (pro) arbore for the tree as
well, that is, a fig-tree : sic also cdlus (genitive, cdli vet
cdlus), a distaff", atque and penus (genitive, peni vel penus),
all kinds of victuals or provisions, cdrnus (genitive, co'rnr
xel cdrnus), quandb when habetur arbor it is had or reck-
oned a tree, that is, when it signifies the tree, namely, the
cornel or wild cherry-tree ; sic so lacus (genitive, laci vel
lacus), a lake, atque and ddmus (genitive, do'mi vel ddmus),
a house ; licet although, haec (ndmina) these nouns nee recur-
rant neither recur, that is, are not found ubique in every in-
stance, or at all times.
Leges you will read qudque also pliira (ndmina) morenounf
his than these, quae which relinquas you may leave jure of
right priscis to the ancients, that tg, which you may well enough
leave to tht ancients.
( 202 )
AS IN PR^ESENTI,
OR,
THE RULES FOR VERBS
CONSTRUED.
As in praesenti (tempore) the termination -as in the second
person singular of the present tense of a verb format forms
perfectum (tempus) in -a'vi the preter-perfect tense in -dvi:
ut as, no nas / swim, navi ; vdcito vo'citas / call often, voci-
tavi. Deme take awciy or except lavo / wash, lavi ; jiivo jf
help, juvi ; atque and nexo / knit, nexui ; et and seco / cut,
quod (facit) which makes seciii ; neco / kill, quod (facit)
which makes necui ; verbum the verb mico / glitter, quod
(facit) which makes micui ; plico I fold, quod (facit) which
makes plicui ; frico / rub, quod which dat gives or makes
fricui : sic so domo 1 tame, quod which (facit) makes ddmiii ;
tdno / thunder, quod (facit) which makes to'nui ; yerbum the
verb sdno I sound, quod (facit) which makes sdniii in the pre-
terite tense; crepo I crack, quod (dat) which gives crepui ;
veto I forbid, quod which dat gives vetui ; atque and cubo /
lie along, ciibui : haec (verba) these verbs rarb formantur are
rdrely or seldom formed in -avi. Do das I give vult will
formareybrm rite by custom, de'di ; sto stas / stand, ste'ti.
Es in pra3senti the termination -es in the second person
singular of the present tense of a verb format forms perfectum
the preterperfect tense dans -m (by) giving -ui ; ut as nigreo
nigres I grow black, nigrui: excipe except jubeo Ibid, jiissi :
sdrbeo / sup up habet has sdrbui, qudqtie also sdrpsi ; mulceo
I stroke gently, mulsi : liiceo / shine vult will have hixi ;
sedeo / sit, sedi ; atque and video / see vult will have vidi ;
sed but prandeo / dine (facit) prandi makes prdndi ; strideo
I screak, stridi ; suadeo / advise, suasi ; rideo / laugh, risi
et and ardeo / am onjire habet hath arsi.
Prima syllaba the first or leading syllable Ms quatuor
( 203 )
(verbis) in these four verbs infra below or following geminate
is doubled : namque for pendeo / Jiang down vult will have
pependi ; atqtie and mdrdeo / bite, momdrdi ; spdndeo /
betrothe vult will habere have spopdndi ; atque and tdndeo /
clip or shear, totdndi.
Si if 1 vel r the letter I or r stet stand ante before -ge6, -ge5
the termination -geo vertitur is changed in -si into -si : ut as
urgeo / urge, lirsi: mulgeo I milk dat gives or makes mulsi,
qudque dlso miilxi ; frigeo / am cold, frixi ; lugeo / mourn,
liixi ; et and aiigeo / increase or augment habet has aiixi.
Fleo fles / weep dat makes flevi ; leo les I anoint, levi;
atque and (verbum) inde natum a verb thence originating,
that is, its compound deleo / wipe out, delevi ; pleo pies, I
Jill, plevi ; neo / spin, nevi.
Mansi formatur the preterpcrfect tense mcinsi is formed a
from maneo / tarry ; tdrqueo / twist vult will have torsi ;
hareo / stick, heesi.
Veo the termination -veo fit is made -vi : ut as, ferveo I
am hot, fervi ; niveo I wink or beckon, et and (verbum) satum
a verb sprung inde from thence, that is, its compound con-
niveo / wink pdscit requires -nivi et and -nixi ; cieo / stir
up, civi ; atque and vieo / bind, vievi.
TER'TIA (conjugatio) the third conjugation formabit will
form praeteritum (tempus) the preterperfect tense ut as mani-
festum is manifest or shown hie here.
Bo the termination -bo fit is made -bi : ut as lambo / lick,
Iambi : excipe except scribo 7 write, scripsi ; et and nubo /
marry, nupsi : antiquum (verbum) the ancient or old verb
cumbo / lie down dat gives or makes ciibui.
Co the ending or termination -co fit is made -ci : ut as
vinco / conquer or overcome, vici : parco / spare vult will
have peperci et and parci : dico / say, dixi; qudque dlso
duco / lead, diixi.
Do the termination -do fit is made -di : ut as mando / eat,
mandi : sed but scindo / cut or slash dat gives sci'di ; findo
/ cleave, fi'di ; fiindo / pour out, fu'di ; atque and tundo /
pound, tutudi ; pendo / weigh, pependi ; tendo / bend, te-
tendi; atque and juuge Join cado I fall, quod which format
forms cecidi ; ceedo the verb cddo pro for verbero / beat^
cecidi ; cedo the verb cedo pro for discedere to depart, sfve
or dare locum to give place, cessi : vado / go, rado / shave,
( 204 )
hedo 2 hurt, ludo I play, divide / divide, trudo / thrust^
claiido I shut, plaiido I clap hands, rodo I gnaw, ex -do from
-do, semper always faciunt -si make -si.
Go the termination -go fit is made -xi ; ut a* jungo /
join, jiinxi : sed but r the letter r ante before -go vult will
have -si ; ut as spargo / sprinkle, sparsi : lego / read facit
makes legi ; et and ago / act, egi : tango / touch dat gives
or makes tetigi ; piingo I prick, piinxi ; atque and piipugi :
frango / break dat gives fre'gi ; pago, the verb pdgo f or P a ~
ciscor / covenant vult will have pepigi ; etiam also pango /
fasten, pegi, sed but lisus use or custom maluit had rather
(form) panxi.
Ho the termination -ho fit is made -xi : ecu as, traho I
draic, traxi, ddcet shows ; et and veho I carry, vexi.
Lo the termination -lo fit is made -ui : ceu. as cdlo / till,
co'lui : excipe except psallo I play on an instrument cum p
with the letter p, et and sallo I season with salt, sine p with-
out the letter p, namfor utrumque (verbum) either of the two
format ii\>\ forms to you -li, that is, both of those verbs make
-li in the preterphfect tense: vello I pluck dat gives velli,
qudque also vulsi : fallo, / deceive, fefelli ; cello the verb cello
projor frango I break, ceculi ; atque ano?pello I drive away,
pepuli.
Mo the termination -mo fit is made -ui ; ceu as, vdmo /
vdmit, vdmui : sed but emo / buy facit makes emi : cdmo /
deck the hair petit requires co'mpsi; promo / draw out,
prdmpsi : adjice add demo I take away, quod which format
forms dempsi in the preterite ; sumo / take, sumpsi ; premo
I press, pressi.
No the termination -no fit is made -vi : ceu as, sino I stiff er
or permit, siyi : excipe except temno / contemn, tempsi :
sterno / strew, dat gives stravi ; sperno / despise, sprevi ;
lino I smear over, levi, interdurn sometimes lini et and livi ;
qudque also cerno / discern, crevi ; gigno / beget, pdno /
put, cano / sing, dant make genui, pdsui, cecini.
Po the termination -po fit is made -psi : ut as scalpo /
scratch, scalpsi : excipe except riimpo / break, riipi ; et and
strepo / screak, quod which format forms strepui ; crepo /
crack, quod which dat gives crepui.
Quo the termination -quo fit is made -qui : ut as linquo /
leave, liqui : demito take away or except co'quo / cook or
dress meat, cdxi.
( 205 )
Ro the termination -ro fit is made -vi : ceu as sero, pro for
planto / plant et and semino / sow, sevi ; quod (verbura)
which (verb) signans signifying" drdino / set in order dabit
will give (or make} semper always melius rdther serui ; verro
/ brush vult will have verri, et and versi ; uro / burn, ussi ;
gero / bear, gessi ; queero / seek, quaesivi ; tero / beat or
bruise, trivi ; curro / run, cucurri.
So the termination -so formabit will form -sivi, veluti at
arcesso / send for, incesso 1 attack, atque and lacesso / pro-
voke pro'bant prove : sed butto\le takeaway (or except) capesso
/ take in hand, quod which facit makes capessi, atque and
capessivi ; atque (tdlle) and (except) facesso / despatch*
facessi ; ct also viso I go to see, visi : sed but pinso I pound
or grind habebit will have pinsui.
Sco the termination -sco fit is made vi: ut as pasco I feed
cattle, pavi : pdsco / demand or require vult will have popd-
sci ; disco / learn vult wishes fo'rmare to form, that is, forms
didici : quinisco I nod the head, quexi.
To the ending or termination -to fit is made -ti : ut as
verto / turn, verti : sed but activum (verbum) sisto let the
active verb sisto, pro for facio stare I make to stand, notetui
be marked, nam for dat it gives jure by right stiti : mitto /
send dat gives misi ; peto / ask vult will formarejforrn Detivi;
sterto / snore, habet has stertui ; meto / mow, messui.
Ex'i the termination -exi in the preterite fit is made ab
from -6cto : ut as flecto / bend, flexi : necto / knit dat gives
nexui, atque and habet has (also) nexi ; etiam likewise pecto
/ comb dat gives or makes pexui : habet it hath quo'que also
pexi.
Vo the ending or termination -vo fit is made -vi : ut ai
vdlvo / roll, vdlvi : excipe except vivo / live, vixi.
Xo the ending or termination -xo fit is made -ui : ut a.
texo / weave, quod which habebit will have texui, / wove, or
have woven mdnstrat shows.
Cio the termination -do fit is made -ci : ut as facio I do
or make, feci ; qudque also jacio 7 cast or throw, jeci ; anti-
quum (verbum) the old verb lacio / allure, lexi ; qudque also
specio / behold, spexi.
Dio the termination -dio fit is made -di : ut as fddio, / dig,
fddi / dug, or have dug.
Gio the termination -gio (fit is made) -gi : ecu as fugio, I
flee (nigi Ijled, or havejled).
( 206 )
Pio the termination -pio fit is made -pi : ut as capio / take,
cepi : excipe except cupio / covet or desire, (cu)pivi ; et and
rapio / snatch, rapui ; sapio / savour or taste, sapui, atque
and sapivi.
Rio the termination -rio fit is made -ri : ut as pario / bring
forth young, peperi.
Tio the termination -tio makes -ssi, geminans s doubling the
letter s : ut as quatio / shake, quassi, quod which vix reperf-
t'lir is scarcely found in usu in use.
Denique finally -uo the ending or termination -uo fit IK
made -ui : ut as statuo / erect, statui : pliio I rain formal
forms pluvi, sive or plui : sed but striio I build or pile up
(facit) makes struxi ; fliio I flow, fiiixi.
QUAR'TA (conjugatio) the fourth conjugation dat -is gives
or makes -Is, in the present tense of the indicative mood active,
-ivi in the preterperfect : ut as scio scis / know, scivi, mon-
strat tibi shows to you : excipias you may except venio I come
dans giving veni ; et and veneo / am sold, venn ; raiicio, /
am hoarse, raiisi : farcio / stuff", farsi ; sarcio I patch, sarsi ;
sepio / hedge, sepsi ; sentio 7 perceive, sensi ; fulcio 7 prop,
fiilsi : item also haiirio 7 draw, dat gives haiisi , sancio,
7 establish, sanxi ; Tincio 7 iiW, vinxi ; salio, the verb scilio,
pro for salto I leap, salui ; et and amicio I clothe, amicui.
SIM'PLEX (verbum) any simple verb et and (siium) com-
positivum (verbum) its compound dat gives or makes idem
prseteritum (tempus) the same preterperfect tense : ut as
ddcui 7 taught, edocui, 7 taught perfectly, monstrat shows.
Sed but syllaba the syllable quam which simplex (verbum) the
simple verb semper always geminat doiibles non gemiiiatur is
not doubled composite (verbo) in the compound verb : pra?-
terquam except (in) his tribus (verbis) in these three, praeciirro
I run before, excurro I run out, repungo I prick again ; atque
and (in verbis) rite creatis in verbs rightly formed or com-
pounded a of do I give, disco 7 learn, sto I stand, pdsco 7 re-
quire or demand.
(Verbum) compdsitum a verb compounded a of plico 7
fold, cum with sub, vel or nomine a noun, ut as ista (verba)
these, supplico 7 beseech, multiplico I multiply, gaiidet delights
formare to form, that is,formf -plicavi : applico I apply, cdm-
plico I fold up, replico I fold back, or lay 6pen, et and explico
/ unfold, fdrmant make qudque also -ui, in addition to -dvi.
( 207 )
Quamvis although simplex (verbum) the simple verb oleo
/ smell vult will have dlui, tarn en yet quod vis compdsitum
(verbum) any (that is, every} compound verb inde from thence
or thereof formabit will form melius rather olevi ; at but red-
olet it casts a scent sequitur follows fdrmam the form simplicis
(verbi) of the simple verb, atque and subolet it smells a little.
Ornnia (verba) compdsita all the verbs compounded a of
pungo I prick formabunt will form -punxi ; unum (hdrum)
one of these, repiingo I prick again, vult will have (re)pupugi
tque and inter dum sometimes repiinxi.
(Verbum) natum any verb compounded a of do I gwe>
quandb when est it is tertia inflexio the third inflexion or con-
jugation, ut as addo / add, credo I believe, edo / set forth,
dedo / yield up, reddo / restore, perdo / lose, abdo / put
away, vel or dbdo / set against, cdndo / build, indo I put in,
trado / deliver, prddo / betray, vendo / sell, (dat) gives or
makes -did! ; at but unum (verbum ex his verbis) one of these,
abscdndo / hide^ makes abscdndi. (Verbum) natum any verb
sprung or derived a from sto stas, / stand^ habebit will have
-stiti.
Haec simplicia verba these simple or primitive verbs, si ij
componantur they be compounded, mutant change prinmm
vocalem the first vowel (et both) praesentis (temporis) of the
present tense, atque and praeteriti (temporis) of the preterper-
fect tense, in -e into -e : damno / condemn, lacto / suckle,
sacro / dedicate, fallo / deceive, arceo / drive away, tracto /
handle, fatiscor / am weary, vetus (verbum) the old word
cando / burn., capto / lie in wait, jacto / throw, patior I
suffer, atque and gradior / step, partio / divide, carpo / crop
or I cull, patro / achieve or I finish, scando / climb, spargo
/ sprinkle; atque and pario I produce young, cujus duo
nata (verba) whose two compounds cdmperit he knows for cer-
tain et and reperit he finds dant give or make the preterperfect
tense per -i in -i : sed but cetera (verba inde nata) the rest
per -ui in ui ; velut a* htec (verba) these, aperire to open,
operire to cover.
Haec duo compdsita (verba) let tliese two compounds a of
pasco pavi / feed cattle, compesco / pasture in company or
together with, dispesco / drive from pdsture, notentur be n6ted
habere to have, that is, be observed as having tantum only
-pescui ; csetera the rest, ut a*, epasco / eat up, servabunt
( 208 )
will keep or observe usum the custom or usage simplicis (verbi)
of the simple verb.
Hasc (verba) these verbs, babeo, I have, lateo I lie hid, salio
J leap, statuo / erect, cado I fall, leedo / hurt, et and tango
/ touch, atque and cano / sing ; sic so qutero I seek, ceedo
cecidi / beat, sic also egeo / want, teneo / holdfast, taceo /
am silent, sapio / savour, atqtie and rapio / snatch, si /'
componantur ^ey 60 compounded, mutant change primam vo-
calem thejirst vdwel in i into -i: ut, as, rapio / snatch, rapui ;
eripio I take away by force, eripui : (verbum) natum a verb
sprung or derived a. from cano / sing, that is, any compound
of cano, dat gives or makes praeteritum the preterperfect tense
per -ui in ui, ceu as cdncino / sing in concert, concinui.
Sic also displiceo / displease a of placeo / please : sed but
haic diio these two compound verbs, complaceo / please vastly,
cum with perplaceo I please very much, bene servant well keep,
that is, always observe or follow lisum the usage simplicis
(verbi) of the simple verb.
(Verba) compo'sita verbs compounded, that is, the compounds
a of verbis the verbs calco / tread, salto / leap or dance,
mutant change -a per -u the letter a into -u ; conculco I tread
upon, inculco / tread in, resulto / rebound, demo'nstrant show
id that tibi to you.
(Verba) composita verbs compounded, that is, the compounds
a of claiido / shut, quatio 1 shake, lavo I wash, rejiciunt -a
cast away the letter -a ; occludo / shut against, exclude /
shut out, & from claiido / shut, docet teaches or shows id this:
atque and perciitio / strike, exciitio / strike out, a from
quatio / shake : a from lavo, / wash, (verba) nata the verbs
derived, that is, the compounds prdluo / drench, diluo / wash
out (decent id, teach or show it.)
Si jfcompdnas you compound (haec verba ) these verbs, ago
/ act, emo / buy, sedeo / sit, rego, / rule, frango, / break,
et and capio I take, jaclolcast, lacio / allure, spe'cio / behold,
premo 7 press, pango / fasten, mutant they change sibi for
themselves primam vocalem the Jirst vowel prassentis (tern*
poris) of the present tense in -i into -i, minquam never prae-
teriti (temporis) of the preterperfect tense : ceu a* of frango
/ break, refringo / break open, refregi ; incipio J begin,
incepi, a of capio I take : sed but paiica (verba) let a few
note'ntur be marked, namqudybr perago I finish se'quitur
( 209 )
follows siiura simplex (verbum) its own simple verb, atque
and satago / am busy : atque and dego / lead on or pass, or,
I live, vhfrom ago I act, dat gives degi : co'go / bring together,
coegi ; sic so a from rego / rule, pergo / go forward (facit)
makes perrexi : quo'que also siirgo / rise vult will have sur-
rexi, media syllaba the middle syllable prsesentis (teinporis)
of the present tense adempta being taken away.
Ista quatuor composita (verba) these Jour compounds a of
pango I fix or fasten retinent -a keep the -a ; depango I fix
in the ground, oppango I fasten against, circumpango I fasten
about, atque and repango I fasten again.
Facio / make or do variat changes nil nothing, nisi unless
proeposito praeeunte a preposition going before it, that is, when
it is compounded with a preposition : olfacio I smell out ddcet
teaches or demonstrates id that, cum with calfacio I make hot,
atque and inficio / infect.
(Verba) nata verbs sprung or descended a.fro?n lego / read^
that is, the compounds of lego, re, per, prte, sub, trans, a
pra?eunte the prepositions, re, per, pra>, sub, trans, ad, going
before, servant keep vocalem the vowel prassentis (temporis)
of the present tense: csetera (composita verba a lego) the rest
of the compounds of lego mutant change it, namely, the vowel
-e, in -j into i ; de quibus (compdsitis verbis) of which hsec
(verba qua3 sequiintur) these tantimi only, intelligo / under-
stand, diligo / love, negligo I neglect, faciunt make praeteritum
(tempos) their preterperfect tense lexi ; dmnia reliqua (com-
posita verba a lego) all the rest, legi.
Xu>*c now discas you may learn formare to form supinum
the siipine ex prteterito (tempore)^-om the preterperfect tense.
Bi the termination -bi suniit takes sibi to itself -turn:
Damqnejbr sic so bi'bi / drank fit is made bibitum.
Ci the termination ~ci fit is made -ctum ; ut as vici / con-
quered or overcame, victum, testatur testifies or shows, et and
ici / smote dans making ictum ; feci / made or did, facturn ;
qudque also jeci / threw or cast, jactum.
Di the termination -di fit is made -sum ; ut as vidi / saw,
visum : quujdam (supina) some geminant s double the letter s;
ut as pandi / opened, passum, sedi / sat, sessum : adde add
scidi I cut, quod which dat gives scissum ; atque and fidi 1
cleft, fissum ; qudque also fddi / dug, fdssum.
Hie here etiam also advertas you may mark, quod that
( 210 )
prima syllaba the first syllable, quam which prteteritum (tern-
pus) the preterperfect tense vult wishes gemmari to l>e doubled,
that is, will have doubled, non geminatur is not doubled supinis
in ihd supines : atque id and this totdndi / clipped or shore,
dans making tdnsum, ddcet teaches or shows ; atque andcecidi
I beat, quod which dat gives c^sum ; et and cecidi I fell, quod
^vh^ch (dat gives} casum ; atque and tetendi / bent, quod
which (habet) has tensum et also ten turn ; tiitudi / pounded*
tunsum ; atque and dedi / gave, quod which jure by right
pdscit requires datum : atque and momdrdi / bit vult will
have mdrsum.
Gi the termination -gi fit is made -ctum ; nt as leg! / have
read) lectum ; pegi I fastened atque and pepigi / covenanted
dant give or make pactum ; fregi / broke, fractum ; qudque
also tetigi / touched, tactum ; egi / acted, actum : piipugi /
pricked, punctum ; fiigi I fled dat gives or makes fugitum.
Li the termination -li fit is made -sum ; ut as salli the pre-
terite o/'sallo, stans standing pro/o?' cdndio sale I season with,
salt, salsum ; pepuli I drove away dat gives or makes pulsum;
ceculi I broke, ctilsum; atque and fefelli / deceived, falsum ;
velli / plucked dat gives viilsum ; qudque also tiili / bore
liabet has latum.
Mi, ni, pi, qui, the terminations -mi, -ni, -pi, and -qui, fdr-
vn&f\.iform -turn, velut as (id est) manifestum is manifest hie
here : emi / bought, emptum ; veni / came, ventum ; cecini
I sang a. from cano / sing", cantum ; cepi I took a from capio
/ take, captum ; qudque also cdbpi / began, cdeptum ; rupi /
brake or broke a from rumpo / break, ruptum ; qudque also
liqui / left, lictum.
Ri the termination -ri fit is made -sum : ut as verri 1
briished, yersum : excipe except peperi / brought forth
young, partum.
Si the ending -si fit is made -sum : ut as visi / went to see,
visum : tamen but misi / sent formabit will form missum, s
geminato the letter s being doubled : excipe except fulsi 1
pr6pped, fultum ; haiisi / drew, haustum ; sarsi / patched,
sartum ; qudque also farsi / stuffed, fartum ; lissi / burnt,
ustum ; gessi / carried or lore, gestum : torsi / wreathed
requirit requires or hath diio (supina) two supines tdrtum,
et and tdrsura ; indiilsi / indulged, indultum atque and
indiilsum.
( 211 }
Psi the termination -psi fit is made -turn : ut as scrips! I
wrote, scriptum ; qudque also sculpsi / engraved, sculpt am.
Ti the termination -ti fit is made -turn : namque for steti
the preterite steti a from sto 7 stand, atque and stiti the pre-
terite stiti a from sisto / make, to stand, ambo loth rite by
right dant give statum : tamen but excipe except ve'rti /
turned^ versum.
Yi the termination -vi fit is made -turn : ut as flavi / blew,
flatum : excipe except pavi I fed cattle, pastum: lavi I washed
dat gives lotum, interdum sometimes laiitum, atque and lava-
turn ; potavi / drank facit makes pdtum, interdum sometimes
eidlso potatum : sed but favi I favoured (facit) wja^sfautum;
cavi / bewared or I took care, caiitum. A from sero sevi /
sow rite formes you may rightly form satum : livi I besmeared
atque and lini / besmeared dant give litum ; sdlvi / loosened
a from sdlvo / loosen, solutum ; vdlvi / rolled a from vdlvo
I roll, voliitum : singultivi I sobbed vult will have singultum :
A 7 eneo, venis, venivi / am sold, venum ; sepelivi / buried, yite
by right, sepultum.
(Verbum) quod a verb that dat gives or makes -ui dat
gives or makes -ituni : ut as ddmui I tamed, ddmitum : excipe
except quod vis verbum what verb you like, that is, every verb
in -uo ending in -uo, quia because semper formabit it
{namely, any verb of that- termination} will always form -ui
in -utum -ui into utum ; ut a* exui / put off, exiitum : deme
take away or except rui, a from nio / rush, dans making
ruitum : secui / cut vult will have sectum ; necui / slew, nec-
tum ; atque and fricui / riibbed, frictum ; item also miscui /
mingled, mistum : atque and amicui / clothed dat gives amic~
turn : tdrrui / roasted habet has tdstum ; ddcui / taught,
ddctum ; acque and tenui / held, tentum ; consului / con-
sulted, consultum ; alui / nourished or fed, altuni, atque and
alitum: sic so salui I leaped, saltum; cdlui / tilled, qudque
also occului / hid y cultum ; pinsui / pounded or ground
habet has pistum ; rapui / snatched, raptuni ; atque and
serui / have set in order, a from sero / set in order, vult
will have sertum : sic so qudque also texui / wove habet
has textum.
Sed but haec (verba) these verbs mutant change -ui in -sum
-in into -sum : nam for censeo / judge habet hath censum ;
cellui / broke, celsum; meto messui I reap habet has qudque
( 212)
dlso inessum : item likewise nexui. I knitted liabet AtfsnexE.ni,
sic so quo'que dlso pexui / combed, pexum.
Xi the termination -xi fit is made -ctum : ut as vinxi /
bound, vinctum : quinque (verba) jive verbs abjiciunt n cast
away the letter n ; ut a* finxi I formed or fashioned ffctum ;
minxi / made water, mictum ; adjice add pinxi I painted dans
giving pictum ; strinxi I stripped or rendered bare, strictum ;
quo'que dlso rinxi / grinned, rictum. Flexi / bent, plexi, /
twisted, fixi I fastened, dant give or make -xum ; et and fliio
I flow, fliixum.
Quodque compositum supinum every cdmpound supine
formatur is formed ut as (siium) simplex (supinum) its own
simple supine, quamvis though eadem syllabi the same syllable
non stet may not stand, that is, does not continue semper always
utrique (supino) to either supine of the two, that is, to them
both. (Verba) compdsita verbs compounded a of tunsum to
pound, that is, the compounds of tunsum, n dempta the letter
n being taken away, (faciunt) make -tiisum : (verbum compo-
situm) any cdmpound a o/'ruitum to rush, media i the middle
letter i dempta being taken away, fit is made -rutum ; et and
quo'que dlso a o/*saltum to leap, sultum. (Verba) compdsita
the compounds a of or from sero I sow quandb whenever for-
mat it forms satum dant give or make -situm.
Haec (supina) these siipines captum to take, factum to do,
jacturn to cast or throw, raptum to snatch, mutant -a per -e
change -a into -e ; et and cantum to sing, partum to bring
jorth young, sparsum to sprinkle, carptum to crop or cull,
quo'que dlso fartum to stuff".
Verbum the verb edo I eat, compositum compounded, that
is, when it is compounded, non facit.ma^ not -estum, sed
but -esum : unuin (verbum compo'situm ab edo) one of its
compounds duntaxat only comedo / eat up, formabit will
form utrumque either one or the other, that is, both -esum,
and -estum.
A. from nosco I know (heec) duo (compo'sita verba) these
two compounds tantum only cdgnitum to know et and agnitum
to know again or to recognise habentur are had or are found;
cajtera (compdsita verba a ndsco) the rest dant give or make
no'tum : ndscitum the supine ndscitum jam now est is in millo
usu in no use, that is, such supine is not now in use.
VER'BA in -or verbs ending in -or admittunt admit or take
( 213 )
prateritum (tempus) their preterperfect tense ex posterlore
Bupinofrom the latter (or second} supine, -u verso the final
-u being" turned per -us into -us, et and sum vel fiii the
auxiliary ', sum or fid, consociato being linked or joined irith
it, that is, being- added to the new termination ; ut as a. from
or oflectu to be read (formatur) is formed lectus sum vel fiii
/ have been read. At but hdrum (verbdrum) of these verbs
nunc sometimes est there is depdnens (verbum) a verb depo-
nent, nunc at other times est there is commune (verbum) a
common verb notandum to be ndted or observed: nam for
labor I glide or slide dat gives lapsus ; patior / suffer, passus,
et and (verba) nata ejus verbs sprung from it, that is, its
compounds, ut as, compatior / suffer together with, fdrmans
compassus^/ormmg" compassus, atqtie and perpetior I endure
(fdrmans forming} perpessus : fateor / own or confess dat
gives fassus, et and (verba) nata inde any verbs originating
from thence, that is, all its compounds; ut as confiteor 1
'confess or acknowledge, fdrmans forming confessus ; atque
and diffiteor / deny or disavow (formsms forming) diftessus :
gradior / step dat gives or makes gressus, et and (verba)
nata inde any verbs originating from thence, that is, its com-
pounds ; ut as digredior / step aside, digressus : junge join
fatiscor / am weary, fessus sum ; metior / mete or measure,
mensus sum ; et and utor I use, lisus.
Ordior the verb ordior pro for texo / weave dat gives or
makes orditus, pro for incepto / begin, o'rsus ; nitor / strive
(facit makes} nisus, vel or nixus sum ; et and ulciscor 7
avenge or I revenge , liltus : simul also irascor / am angry,
iratus ; atque and reor / think or I suppdse, ratus sum ;
obliviscor I forget, vult will have oblitus sum ; fruor / enjoy,
dptat wishes or chooses friictus, vel or frditus : junge join or
add misereri to have pity, misertus.
Tiior / see, et and tiieor / defend, non vult wishes not,
that is, will not have tutus, sed but tuitus sum : adde add
locutus, a. from or o/'ldquor I speak ; et and adde add secutus,
a of or from sequor I follow.
Experior / try, facit makes expertus ; paciscor I c6venant
or bargain, gaiiclet delights formare to form, that is, will form
pactus sum ; nanciscor I get, nactus ; apiscor / obtain^ quod
which est is vetus verbum an old verb, aptus sum ; unde^rom
whence adipfscor I get, adeptus.
Juugejnin or add queror / complain, questus; jungejoin
or add proficiscor / go, profectus; expergiscor / awake,
experrectus sum ; et and qudque also hsec (verba) these verbs,
comminiscor / devise, commentus ; nascor / am lorn, natus ;
atque and mdrior / die, mortuus; atque and drior / rise,
quod which facit makes prseteritum (tempus) its preterper-
feet tense, o'rtus.
Haec (verba) these verbs habent have prasteritum (tempus)
a preter perfect tense activas (vdcis) of the active, et and
passivae vdcis of the passive voice : cceno / sup, format tibi
forms to you coenavi I slipped, et and coenatus sum I slipped ;
jiiro / swear, juravi, et and juratus ; atque and pdto / drink.
potavi / drank, et and pdtus ; titubo / stumble, titubavi /
stumbled, vel or titubatus.
Prandeo / dine dat gives prandi, et and pransus sum ,
placeo I please, placui. et and placitus : suesco / accustom,
vult will have suevi, atque and suetus.
Nubo / marry (habet has) niipsi, atque and also nupta
sum ; mereor I deserve, meritus sura, vel or merui : adde add
libet it pleases, libuit, libitum ; et and adde add licet it is
allowed, or it is lawful, quod which (facit) makes licuit, lici-
tum ; ta^det it wearies, quod which dat gives or makes tseduit,
et and pertsesum : adde add piidet it ashdmes or it ashdmeth,
faciens making puduit, atque and puditum ; atque and piget
it irks or grieves, quod which format tibi forms for you piguit
it irked, atque and pigitum, it irked.
Neutro-passivum (verbum) a neuter-passive verb format
tibi forms for you praeteritum (tempus) its preterperfect tense
sic thus, or in the manner following ; gaudeo / am glad,
gavisus sum; fido I trust, fisus ; et and audeo I dare, ausus
sum ; f io / become or am made, factus ; sdleo / am wont,
sdlitus sum.
(Haec verba) fugiunt these verbs flee or avoid prseteritum
(tempus) a preterperfect tense, that -is, want the preterite :
vergo / verge or bend, ambigo / doubt, glisco / spread,
fatisco I chink, pdlleo I am valid or powerful, nideo I shine :
ad hsec (verba) to these (addas^ow may add} inceptiva (verba)
inceptive verbs ; ut as puerasco I verge towards childhood :
et and passiva (verba) passive verbs, quibus in which activa
(verba) the actives caruere wanted, that is, of which the active
voices want supinis the supines ; ut as metuor lam dreaded.
C 215 )
timeor, I am feared: (adde add} dmnia meditativa (verba) all
meditative or desiderative verbs, prater except partiirio / am
in labour or childbirth, esiirio lam hungry; qua? duo (verba)
ichich two verbs servant keep praeteritum (tempus) the prefer-
perfect tense.
Hasc verba these verbs rarb seldom ant or niinquam never
retinebunt will retain or keep, that is, ivill have supinum a su-
pine ; lambo / lick, mico micui I glitter, rudo / bray, scabo
/ claw, parco peperci / spare, dispesco / drive from pasture,
pdsco / require or I demand, disco 1 learn, compesco / re-
strain, quinisco I nod the head, dego I lead on or pass, ango
/ throttle, sugo / suck, lingo / lick, ningo / snow, atque and
satago I am biisy, psallo I play on an instrument, vdlo I am
willing, ndlo / am unwilling, malo / am more willing or would
rather, tremo 1 tremble, strideo, stride, / screak, flaveo / am
yellow, liveo / am black and blue, avet he covets, paveo /
dread, conniveo / connive with or wink at, fervet it is hot.
(Verbum) compdsitum a verb compounded a o/*ndo I nod ;
ut a* remio / refuse: a o/"cado I fall ; ut as accido I fall
upon, praeter except dccido / fall down, quod which facit
makes occasum, atque and recido I fall back, recasum : respuo
I refuse, linquo, I leave, liio I pay, metuo I fear, duo I shine
or am famous, frigeo I am cold, calveo / am bald, et and sterto
/ snore, timeo / fear : sic so luceo / shine ; et and arceo 1
repel or drive away, cujus whereof (or of which verb) com-
pdsita (verba) the compounds habent have -ercitum : sic so
(verba) nata verbs sprung or derived a from griio I cry like a
crane, ut as, ingruo / invade: et and quseciimque neiitra
(verba) whatsoever neuters secundae (conjugatidnis) of the
second conjugation formantur are formed in -ui : excipias you
may except dleo / smell, ddleo / am in pain or I grieve,
placeo / please, atque, and taceo / am silent, pareo / obey ;
item also careo / want, ndceo I hurt, jaceo / lie extended, at-
que and lateo / am hid or concealed, et also valeo / am well
or in health, caleo / am hot : namque for base (verba) these
verbs gaiident delight supino in a supine, that is, these verbs
have one supine.
SYNTAXIS,
THE RULES OF GRAMMAR
CONSTRUED.
PERSONALS verbum a personal verb or a verb personal,
tfiat is, a verb which has different persons concordat agrees
curn ivith nominativo (casu) its nominative case niimero in
number et and persona in person: ut as, via the way ad to
bdnos mores good manners est is minquam sera never (too) late.
Nominativus (casus) the nominative case prondminum of
pronouns raro exprimitur is seldom expressed nisi unless
gratia for the sake distinctidnis of distinction, aut or emphasis
of energy of expression : ut as, vos ye damnastis (for dam-
navistis) have condemned (me); quasi as though dicat he
should say, nemo prseterea no one else. Tu thou es art pa-
tro'nus our patron, tu thou parens our father, (literally, pa-
rent,) si j/tu thou deseTisforsdke us periimus (for perivimus)
we perish (literally, we have perished), or are undone;
quasi as though dicat he should say, tu thou es patrdnus art
our patron prsecipue chiefly or in an especial manner, et and
prae before aliis (all) others. (IHe) fertur he is reported de-
signasse (for designavisse) to have committed (literally, to
have plotted or marked out) atrdcia flagitia atrocious villanies,
that is, horrid crimes.
Aliquando sometimes oratio a sentence est is nominatival
(casus) the nominative cane verbo to a verb : ut, as didicisse
to have learnt ingenuas artes the ingenuous arts, that is, the
liberal sciences fideliter ftithfully or thoroughly emdllit softens
much mores the manners, nee nor sinit (eos) suffers them esse
to be feros brutal or rude.
Aliquando sometimes adverbium an adverb cum with geni-
( 217 )
tivo (casu) a genitive case (est nominativus casus verbo is the
nominative to a verb} : ut as, partim virdrum part of the
men ceciderunt^e^/, that is, ivere killed or slain in bello in war
or the war.
YERBA verbs infinitivi modi of the infinitive mood fre-
quenter frequently or oftentimes statuunt set ante se before
them accusativum (caswn) an accusative case pro for or in-
stead of nominative* (casu) a nominative, conjunctione the con-
junction quod that vel or ut to the end that omissa being
omitted or left out : ut as, gaudeo / rejoice or I am glad te
that thou rediisse (for redivisse) have returned, that is, art re-
turned incdlumem safe.
Verbum a verb pdsitum placed inter between duos nomina-
tives (casus) two nominative cases diversdrum numerdrum of
different numbers pdtest can or may concordare agree cum with
alterutro (illdrum) either one of them: ut as, irae the quarrels
(literally, angers) amantium of lovers (literally, of persons
loving) est is integratio the renewal amdris of love. Pectus
(her) breast qudque also fiunt becomes rdbora oak (liter-
ally, oaks).
Ndmen a noun multitu&inis of multitude singulare singular,
that is, any collective noun of the singular number, jungitur is
joined quanddque sometimes plurali verbo to a plural verb :
ut as, pars part (of them) abiere (for abivere) have gone, that
is, are gone away. Uterque each or both of the two deludun-
tur are deluded or beguiled ddlis with tricks, that is, are gulled
by deceptions.
Impersonalia (verba) impersonal verbs non habent have not
nominativum (casum) any nominative enunciatum expressed
(in Latin) : ut, as, teedet me it wearies me, that is, I am
u-edry or tired vitse of life. Est it is pertaBSum altogether
zuedrisome, that is, I am quite tired or sick conjugii of wedlock.
ADJECTIVA adjectives, participia participles, et and prond-
mina pronouns concordant agree cum substantive with their
substantive, genere in gender, numero in number, et and casu
incase: ut as, rara avis a scarce or an uncommon bird in
terris in the lands, that is, in the world, atque and simillima
very (much) like unto nigro cycno a black swan.
Aliquandb sometimes oratio a sentence supplet supplies locum
the place substantivi of a substantive, adjective the adjective
pdsito being put in neutro genere in the neuter gender : ut as >
L
( 218)
audito it being heard, or it having been heard, regem that the
king proficisci was set out Doroberniamybr Dover.
RELATIVUM the relative concordat agrees cum with ante-
cedente its antecedent, genere in gender, numero in number,
et and persona in person : ut as, quis who est is bonus vir a
good man ? (Vir) qui the man who servat keeps consulta the
decrees pat-rum of the fathers or senators, (vir) qui the man
who (servat) keeps leges the laws atque and jura the ordi-
nances or rites.
Aliquando sometimes oratio a sentence pdnitur is put pro
for antecedente the antecedent : ut, a*, veni / came ad
earn to her in tempers in time or in season, quod (negdtium)
which est is primurn (nego'tium) the first or main thing om-
nium rerum of all things, that is, the chief business or con-
cern of all.
Relativum a relative collocatum placed inter between duo
substantiva two siibstantives diverso'rum generum of different
genders et and (diversorum) numerdrum (of different] num-
bers concordat agrees interdum at times cum with posteridre
(substantivo) the latter (substantive] : ut as, homines men
tuentur regard ilium gldbum that globe quee which dicitur is
called terra the earth.
Aliquando sometimes relativum the relative concordat agrees
cum with primitivo (nomine) the primitive noun, quod which
subauditur is understood in possessive (nomine) in the posses-
sive : ufc as, dmnes (homines) all men (cceperunt) dicere
began to say dmnia bdna (verba) all good or hopeful words,
et and laudare to praise or to extol meas fortunas my lucky
stars or good fortune qui haberem who had gnatum a son
pr&ditum endued tali ingenio with such a disposition.
Si if nominativus (casus) a nominative case interponatur
1)6 put between relative the relative et and verbo the verb, rela-
tivum the relative regitur is governed a by verbo the verb,
aiit or ab alia dictidne by some other word quas which locatur
is placed in oratidne in the sentence, cum verbo with the verb :
ut as, gratia favour abest is wanting, that is, thanks are
lost ab officio in a kindness quod which mdra backwardness
tardat retards, that is, which tardiness or delay keeps back.
Cujus niimen whose divinity or divine will and presence addro
/ adore.
Quum when duo substantiva two substantives diversce signi-
(219 )
ficatidnis of a different signification concurrunt meet together,
poster ius (substantivum) the latter (substantive) po'nitur is
put in genitivo (casu) in the genitive case : ut as, amor the
love or the liking minimi of money crescit increases quantum
as much as peciinia ipsa the money itself crescit increases.
Hie genitivus (casus) this genitive case aliquando at times
vertitur is changed in dativum (casum) into the dative : ut
as (ille) est he is pater a, father lirbi to the city, atque and
maritus a husband urbi to the city ; that is* he is the father
and husband of the city.
Adjectivum an adjective in neutro genere in or of the neuter
gender pdsituni put sine substantivo without a substantive,
pdstulat requires aliquando sometimes genitivum (casum) a
genitive case: ut as, paululum pecuniae very little of money,
that is, very little money.
Interdum sometimes genitivus (casus) the genitive case
pdnitur tantuin is set alone, priore substantivo the former
substantive of the two subaudito being understood per ellipsin
by the figure ellipsis : ut as, ubi when veneris you shall have
come, that is, when you are come ad Dianas to Diana's ito
turn ad dextram (manum) to the right hand : subaiidi under-
stand templum temple ; that is, when you come to the temple
of Diana, turn to the right.
Duo substantiva two substantives ejusdem rei of the same
thing, that is, respecting the same affair, ponuntur are put or
placed in eddem casu in the same case : ut as, opes riches,
irritamenta'maldrum the incentives of evils or of vice, eftbdiuntur
are dug out (of the earth).
Laus praise, vituperium dispraise, vel or qualitas the
quality rei of a thing, ponitur is put in ablativo (casu) in the
ablative case, etiam also genitivo (casu) in the genitive case :
ut as, piier a boy ingenui viiltus of an ingenuous counte-
nance or aspect, atque and ingenui puddris of an ingenuous
bdshfulness or modesty. Vir a man niilla fide of no fidelity
or integrity, that is, a man of no honesty or principle.
O'pus need or needfulness et and usus use or occasion exi-
gunt require ablativum (casum) an ablative case: ut as,
opus est ndbis there is need to us, that is, we have need tiia
auctoritate of your authority. Non accepit he received not,
that is, he would not receive pecuniam money ab iisfrom them,
qua (pecunia) of which, (namely, money,) esset there could be
L2
( 220 )
i>r there was nihil usiis nothing of occasion, that is, no need
sibi unto him: in dther words, of which he had no need, or
for ivhich he had no occasion.
Autem but opus the word opus videfcur seems quanddque
sometimes pdni to be put adjective ddjectively pro for necessa-
rius necessary : ut as, dux a leader et and auctor an adviser
est is opus necessary nobisfor us.
Adjectiva adjectives quaa which significant signify deside-
rium desire, nStitiam knowledge, memdriam memory, timdrem
fear, atque and contraria things contrary, that is, the contra-
ries or opposites iis to these, exigunt require genitivum (casum)
a genitive case: ut as, natiira the nature hdminum of men,
that is, of mankind, est is avida fond novitatis of novelty.
Mens a mind prascia prescient or foreknowing futiiri of the
future or of that which is to come. Esto be thou mem or
mindful brevis am of the short age, that is, of the shortness of
life. Immemor unmindful beneficii of a kindness. Imperitus
rerum unskilled of things, that is. unacquainted ivith the world.
Kudis belli rude or aukivardofwar, that is, ignorant of war'
fare. Timidus dedrum fearful of the gods. Impavidus siii
fearless of himself. Cum pliirimis aliis (adjectivis) with many
other adjectives quaa which denofcant denote or declare affec-
tidnem affection or passion animi of mind.
Yerbalia adjectiva verbal adjectives, that is, adjectives
derived from verbs, in -ax ending in -ax, etiam likewise exi-
gunt require genitivum (casum) a genitive case: ut as,
atidax ingenii bold of disposition, that is, bold* by nature
Tempus time edax consumptive rerum of things ; meaning,
time is the eater or consumer of all things.
Partitiva ndmina partitive nouns, numeralia (ndmina)
numerals or nouns of number, comparativa (ndmina) com-
paratives or nouns of the comparative degree, et and super-
lativa (ndmina) superlatives, et also qusedain adjectiva certain
adjectives pdsita put partitive pdrtitively exigunt require
genitivum (casum) a genitive case a quo (genitivo casu)/row
which genitive (that is, from the noun which they require to
be in the genitive case) et mutuantur they also borrow genus
their own gender. ut as, accipe take utrum hdrum which c,f
these two mavis you would rather. Romulus fuit Romulus
was primus (rex) the first Romano'rum regum of the Roman
kings. Dextra (raanus) the right est is fdrtior (manus) the
(221 )
stronger manuum of the hands. Medlus (digitus) the middle
finger est is longissimus (digitus) the longest digitdriim of
the fingers. Sancte (deus) dedrum O holy of gods, that is, O
sacred deity) sequimur te we follow thee.
Autem but (haec ndmina) usurpantur they are usurped or
vsed et also cum with his prsepositidnibus these prepositions
a, ab, de, e, ex, inter, ante : ut as, tertius the third ab jEnea
from JEneas. Solus the only one de superis of the gods above.
Alter one e vdbis of you (two} es art deus a god. Primus
the first inter among dmnes all. Primus ihejirst ante dmues
before all.
Secundus the adjective secundus (signifying, second or infe-
rior to} aliquando sometimes exigit requires dativum (casum)
a dative case: ut as, baud secundus not inferior or secona-
lilli to any one veterum of the ancients virtute in valour.
Interrogativum an interrogative et and redditivum ejus its'
redditive or respondent, that is, the word that answers to it
erunt will be, that is, must be ejiisdem casus of the same case
et and (ejusdem) temporis (of the same} tense., nisi unless or-
except voces words variae constructions of a different construc-
tion adbibeantur he adhibited or made use of: ut as, quarum
rerum of what things est is there nulla satietas no satiety or
fulness ? Divitiarum of riches. Ne whether acciisas do you
accuse (me) fiirti of theft, an or homicidii of homicide or
murder? Utrdque of both, namely, of theft and of murder.
Adjectiva adjectives quibus by ivhich cdmmodum advantage^
incdmmodum disadvantage, similitudo likeness, dissimilitude*
unlikeness, voluptas pleasure, submissio submission, aut or
relatio relation ad aliquid (negdtium) to any thing significatur
is signified, postulant require dativum (casum) a dative case :
ut as, si z/"facis you do (or take care) ut that sit he be iddneus
serviceable patriae to his country, utilis useful agris unto the
lands. Turba a crowd, or multitude, gravis troublesome paci
to the peace, atque and inimica hostile or averse placida?
quieti to placid ease, that is, to unruffled tranquillity or quiet-
ness. Similis like patri his father. Color the colour qui
which erat was albus white est is mine now contrarius con-
trary or reverse albo to white. Juciindus pleasant or delight-
ful amicis to his friends. Siipplex suppliant or submissive
omnibus (hominibus) to all. Poeta a poet est is finitimus
very near akin oratdri to an orator.
( 222 )
Hue hither referiintur are referred ndmina nouns cornpo'sita
compounded ex praepositione con (pro cuin) of the preposition
con (for cum ) : ut as, contubernalis a comrade or one of
the same class, commilito a fellow-soldier ', conservus, a fellow-
servant, cognatus a kinsman by birth.
Quadam (adjectiva) some ex his (adjectivis) of these, quae
which significant signify similitudinem likeness, jungiintur are
joined etiam also genitive (casui) to a genitive case : ut as,
(homo) quern he whom metuis you fear erat was par the model
or image hujus of this man, that is, he was like this man in
size and appearance. Es you are similis the like dornim of
your master, that is, you resemble your master.
Communis cdmmon, alienus strange or foreign, immiinis,
free, junguutur are joined genitivo (casui) to a genitive case,
dativo (casui) to a dative; et also ablativo (casui) to an
ablative cum with praepositione a preposition : ut as, est it is
commune a common property omnium animantium of all
living creatures, that is, it is common to all animals. Mora
death est is communis common omnibus (animalibus) to all.
Hoc (negdtium) this est is commune cdmmon mihi to me cum
te with thee, that is, cdmmon to you and me. Non aliena not
unfit for consilii the design. Alienus ambitidni (a man)
strange to ambition, that is, an enemy or a stranger to ambi-
tion. Non alienus not averse a from studiis the stiidies, that
is, to the studies Sc^volse of Sccevola. Dabitur it shall be
given or granted vdbis to you esse to be immunibusfrec hujus
mali of this mischief that is, exempt from this calamity.
Caprificus the wild fig-tree est is immunis free omnibus to
all. (Nos) sumus we are immiines free ab illis malis from
those evils.
Natus born, cdmmodus convenient, incdmmodus inconve-
nient, utilis useful, imitilis useless or unserviceable, vehe-
mens earnest, aptus Jit, cum with miiltis aliis (adjectivis)
many other adjectives, jungiintur are joined interdum some-
times etiam likewise accusative (casui) to an accusative case
cum ivith praepositione a preposition : ut as, natus born ad
gldriam to or for glory. Utilis useful or profitable ad earn
rem to that affair or purpose.
Verbalia (adjectiva) verbal adjectives, or adjectives derived
from verbs (finita) in -bills ending in -bilis accepta taken
passive passively, et also participialia (adjectiva) participial
(223)
adjectives (finita) in -dus ending in -dus, postulant require
dativum (casum) a dative case : ut a*, iners liicus a sluggish
or a heavy grove, that is, a thick grove penetrabilis penetrable
nulli astro to no star, that is, not penetrable by the rays of any
of the heavenly bodies. O Juli, O Julius, memorande mihi
worthy unto me to be mentioned, that is, worthy or deserving
of mention by me post after nullos sodales none (of my) com-
panions or acquaintances.
Mensiira the measure magnitiidinis of magnitude or of
quantity subjicitur is subjoined to or is put after adjectivis
adjectives in accusative (casu) in the accusative case, ablativo
(casu) in the ablative case, et and genitive (casu) in the geni-
tive case : ut a*, tiirris a tower alta high centum pedes a
hundred feet, meaning, a tower one hundred feet high. Fons
a fountain or well latus wide tribus pedibus three feet, altus
deep triginta (pedibus) thirty feet, meaning, a spring three
feet wide and thirty feet deep. Area ajloorlatz broad denum
(for dendrum) pedum ten feet, or a floor ten feet broad.
Accusativus (casus) an accusative case aliquando sometimes
subjicitur is subjoined to or put after adjectivis adjectives et
and participiis participles, ubi where praepositio seciindum
the preposition secundum videtur seems subintelligi to be
understood: ut as, similis like Deo to a god 6s as to his
countenance or visage atque and humeros as to his shoulders,
that is, in his carriage cf himself, and in his size. Demissus
cast down vultum as to his look.
Adjectiva adjectives quae which pertinent pertain or relate
ad cdpiara to plenty vel or (ad) egestatem to want, exigunt
require interdum sometimes ablativum (casum) an ablative
case, interdum sometimes genitivum (casum) a genitive case :
ut as, dives rich equum (for equdrum) of horses, or, in
horses, dives rich picta'i \estisofpictured vesture, that is,
m embroidered raiment, et and auri of gold. Amor love
est is fcecundissimus very fecund or abundant et both melle
with or of honey et and lelle with or of gall. Expers fraudis
void of deceit. Beatus happy or abounding gratia in favour.
Adjectiva&idjectives, et and substantiva substantives, regunt
govern ablativum (casum) an ablative case significantem
signifying causam the cause, et and fo'rmam the form, vel or
mddum the manner rei of a thing: ut as, pallidus pale ira
with anger. Grammaticus a grammarian nomine in name.
( 224 )
18 in reality barbarus a barbarian. Caisar Trojanus C&sar
a Trojan origine by descent.
Dignus worthy, indignus unworthy, pneditus endued, captu<
taken or disabled, contentus content, extdrris banished, freti
relying upon, liber free, cum with, adjectivis adjectives signi-
ficantibus signifying- pretium price exigunt require ablativum
(casuni) an ablative case : ut as, es thou art dignus worthy
ddio of hatred. (Ego) qui haberem I who had gnatum a son
prseditum endued tali ingenio with such a disposition. Talps3
the moles capti dculis taken in their eyes, that is, the blind
moles fodere have dug or excavated cubilia their beds or holes.
Abi go your way contentus content tiia sdrte with your lot.
Animus a mind liber free terrdre/rom fear. Non venale not
pitr chase able, that is, not to be purchased gemmis with gems or
jewels, nee nor auro with gold.
Nonmilla (adjectiva) some or a few hdrum (adjectivdrum)
of these admlttunt admit interdum sometimes genitivum
(casum) a genitive case: ut as, indignus unworthy magnd-
rum avdrum of his great ancestors. Carmina verses digna
worthy Deae of a Goddess. Extdrris banished regni of the
kingdom, that is, banished the kingdom or from the realm.
Comparativa comparatives, cum when exponantur they can
be expounded or explained per by (the conjunction] quam
than, admittunt admit, or receive after them, ablativum
(casum) an ablative case : ut as, argentum silver est is
viiius more vile, or, of less value, auro than gold, aurum gold
(est viiius, is of less value] virtutibus than heroic qualities or
virtue: id est that is, quam than aurum gold, quam than
virtutes heroic qualities or virtue.
Tanto by so much, quanto by how much, hoc by this, eo by
that, et and quo by which or by what, cum with quibusdam
aliis (ablativis) some others, qute which significant signify
mensuram the measure excessus of excess, or, of exceeding ;
^tem also astate by age, et and natu by birth, junguntur are
joined ssepe oftentimes comparativis unto comparatives et and
superlativis to superlatives: ut as, tanto by so ^nuch, (sum)
pessimus pbeta {ami] the worst poet omnium (poetarum) of
all, quanto by how much tu thou (es) dptimus patrdnus (art)
the best patron omnium (patrono'rum) of all. Quo plus by
what much {or hoiv much] the more habent they have, eo plus
by that much (or by so much] the more cupiunt do they covet
( 225 )
or desire. Major the greater set-ate by age, that is, the elder r
et and maximus the greatest (cetate) by age, that is, the eldest.
Major greater natu ly birth, that is, older ; et and maxi-
mus greatest (natu) ly birth., or oldest.
Mei of me, tui of thee or you, sui of himself, herself, of
itself, or themselves, nostri of us, vestri of you, (nempe
namely,} genitivi (casus) the genitive cases primitivdrum.
(no'minum) of the primitive nouns, ponuntur are put or used
cum when persona a person significatur is signified : ut as,
languet she languishes desiderio tiii with desire of thee, that
is, for want of thee. Cara pignora dear pledges sui of him-
self. Ccecus amor the blind love sui of self, that is, the blind
love of one's self. Imago nostri the picture of us, that is, of
our person.
Meus mine, tuus thine, siius his own, her own, its own, or
their own, ndster ours, vester yours, ponuntur are used cum
when actio action, vel or possessio the possession rei of a thing
significatur is signified : ut as, fa vet she favours tiio desi-
derio your wish or desire. Ndstra imago our picture : id est,
that is, (imago) quam (imaginem) the picture which nos we
possidemus possess.
Haec possess! va (prondmina, quse sequiintur) these possessive
pronouns, meus mine* tuus thine, suus his own, her own, its
own, or their own, ndster ours, et and vester yours, recipiunt
receive or take post se after them hos genitivos (casus) these
genitive cases; ipsius of himself, of herself, or of itself, solius
of him, her, or it alone, unius of one, dudrum of two, trium of
three, c. omnium of all, pliirium of more, paucdrum of few,
cujusque of every one, et and also genitivos (casus) the geni-
tive cases participidrum of participles, qui which referuntur
are referred ad primitivum (ndmen) to the primitive word
subauditum understood : ut as, dixi / said or affirmed rem-
piiblicam that the state or commonwealth esse salvam was
safe, that is, was saved or preserved mea unius opera by my
single service (literally, by my doing of one or alone"). Meum
solius pcccatum my offence alone (literally, mine offence of
(me} 6nly, or, the offence of me individually,} non pdtest
cannot cdrrigi be amended. Cum when, or whereas nemo
nobody legat reads mea scripta timentis the writings of me
fearing (literally, my writings of (me) fearing) recitare to
recite or rehearse them vulgo publicly or in public. Ceperis
(226)
you may have taken or formed conjecturam a conjecture,
that is, you may guess de tuo studio ipsius from your study of
(you) yourself, that is, by your own individual study. Prae-
stantior more excellent in sua laiide cujusque in his own praise
(that} of each : freely, each in his own skill. Ndstra memdria
omnium in our memory (that} of us all, that is, in the memory
or recollection of us all. Respdndet he answers vestris laiidi-
bus paucdrum to the praises of you few : literally, to your
praises (being those} of (you*) few.
Sui of himself, of herself, of itself, of themselves, et and
siius his own, her own, its oicn, or their own, sunt are reci-
proca reciprocals, hoc est that is, reflecttintur they are reflected,
or have relation, semper always ad id to that quod which prse-
cessit went before prEecipuum chief or the most to be noted in
sententia in the sentence : ut as, Petrus Peter admiratur
admires se himself nimium too much. Parcit he spares siiis
errdribus hit (own) errors. Petrus Peter rdgat magndpere
legs earnestly ne deseras se that you desert him not, or, that
you do not forsake him.
Haec (tria) demonstrativa (prondmina) these (three) demon-
strative pronouns, hie this, iste that, ille he, or that, distin-
guiintur are distinguished sic thus ; hie this demdnstrat shows
or points to prdximum the nearest (person or thing} mihi to
me ; iste that (demdnstrat shows or points to) eum him qui
who est is apud te by you ; ille he, or. that (demdnstrat points
to} eum him qui who est is remdtus remote or distant ab
utrdqueyVom both of us.
dim when hie this, et and ille he or that, referuntur are
referred ad duo antepdsita to two things, or persons, set or
going before, hie this refertur is referred plerumque generally
ad posterius to the latter, ille he, or that, ad prius to the
former : ut as, quocunque which way soever aspicias you look
est there is nihil nothing nisi unless or except pdntus sea et
and aer air: hie this or the latter tiimidus tumid or swollen
niibibus with clouds, ille that or the former minax threatening
fluctibus with billows or wares.
Substantiva \QY\>& substantive verbs; ut as, sum 7 am, fdrcm
I might or would be, f io / am made, or I become, existo / do
exist ; passiva verba passive verbs vocandi of calling; ut as,
ndminor / am named, appellor / am called, dicor / am said,
vocor / am called, nuncupor / am named ; et and (verba)
(227 )
similia similars, that is, others like iis to those ; lit as, videor
I am seen, or, I seem, habeor lam accounted, existimor I am
thought, habent have edsdem casus the same cases utrinque on
both sides of them : ut as, De'us God est is summum bo'num
the chief good. Perpusilli very diminutive (or little] persons
vdcantur are called nani dwarfs. Fides faith habetur is reck-
oned fundamentum the foundation ndstrae religidnis of our
religion. Natiira nature dedit hath granted omnibus (homin-
ibus) to all ease to be beatis happy.
Item likewise dmnia verba all verbs fere almost or in a
manner admittunt admit post se after them adjectivum an
adjective, quod (adjectivum) which concordat agrees cum
with nominative casa verbi the nominative case of or to the
verb, genere in gender, et and niimero in number : ut as, pii
(homines) pious persons drant pray taciti silent, that is,
tacitly or in silence. Malus pastor a bad shepherd ddrmit
sleeps supinus supine, or, supinely, that is, with his face
upwards.
Sum / am, pdstulat requires genitivum (casum) a genitive
case qudties as often as significat it signifies possessidnem
possession, officium duty, signuni sign, aiit or id that quod
which pertinet pertains or has repect ad quampiam rem to
any thing whatever: ut as, pecus the cattle est is Melibcei
Melibceus's. Est it is adolescentis the duty of a young man
revereri to reverence majdrcs natu his elders, or, his gr eaters
by birth : in this sentence the word officium duty is omitted
by the figure ellipsis.
Hi nominativi (casus) these nominative cases excipiuntur
are excepted: meum mine, tiium thine, siium his, hers, its
or theirs, nostrum our, vestrum your, humanum human, bel-
luinum, brutal or wild-beast-like, et and similia (adjectiva)
similar adjectives, or the like : ut as, non est meuin it is not
mine, or it becomes not me, dicere to speak contra against
auctoritatem the authority senatus of the senate. Est it is
Lumanum a human th'ng or a human frailty irasci to be angry.
Verba verbs accusandi of accusing, damnandi of con-
demning, monendi of warning, absolvendi of acquitting, et
and similia (verba) similar verbs, or the like of those, postu-
lant require genitivum (casum) a genitive case, qui (genitivus
casus) which significat signifies crimen the ojfence or charge :
ut as, opo'rtet it behoveth, or it is Jit, eum that he qui who
( 223 )
inciisat accuses alterum (hdminem) another man prdbri of
dishonesty, intueri look into se ipsum himself, (Hie) con-
demnat he condemns suum geneium his own son-in-law sce-
leris of wickedness. Admoneto (tu) ilium remind him pris-
tinae fortiinae of his former fortune or condition. Est absolutus
he was absolved or is acquitted furti of theft.
Hie genitivus (casus) this genitive vertitur is turned or
changed aliquando sometimes in ablativum (casum) into an
ablative, vel either cum with prsepositidne a preposition, vel
or sine without prsepositidne a preposition : ut as, putavi 1
thought te that you esse admonendum ought to be put in mind
de ea re of that matter. Si if es you are iniquus jiidex an
iniquitous or a partial judge in me towards me, ego / con-
demnabo will condemn te you eddem crimine of the same crime'
or offence.
Uterque both, millus none, alter the 6ther, neuter neither
of the two, alius another, ambo both, et and superlativus
gradus the superlative degree junguntur are joined verbis to
verbs id genus (o/*) that kind, non nisi not unless^ that w,
only in ablativo (casu) in the ablative case ut as, accusas*
(dum) do you accuse (him) fiirti of theft, an or stiipri of dis-
hdnesty ? Utrdque of both vel or de utrdque of both (those
crimes) : ambdbus of them both ve or de ambdbus of them
both : neiitro of neither of the two vel or de neutro of neither
of the two. Accusaris you are accused de pliirimis (crimin-
ibus) of very many things simiil at once.
Satago / am busy about a thing, misereor / commiserate, et
and miseresco I pity, postulant require genitivum (casum) a
genitive case : ut as, is he satagit is busy or has his hands-
full suarum rerum of his own concerns or business. O'ro 1
pray you miserere pity tanto'rum labdrum so great distresses ;
miserere have pity on animce a soul ferentis suffering non dignu
things not worthy, that is, unmerited or undeserved afflictions.
Et and miseresce pity tui generis your own species or family.
Reminiscor / remember, obliviscor / forget, memini /
remember, recorder / call to mind, admittunt admit geniti-
vum (casum) a genitive case, aut or accusativum (casum) an
accusative case : ut as, reminiscitur he remembers datoe f idei
his given faith, that is, his pledged troth, or promise. Est it
is prdprium a thing prdper, that is, the property stultitias of
folly cernere to discern vitia alidrum (hdminum) the faults of
( 229 )
other 's, oblivisci to forget sudrum (vitidrum) its own. Faciam
/ will make or cause (you) ut raemineris that you remember,
that is, to remember hujus loci this place semper always.
Juvabit it will be a pleasure dlim hereafter meminisse to recall
to mind haec these things. Recorder I do remember liiijns meriti
this favour in me towards me. Si if recorder / recollect rite
rightly audita the things heard, that is, the words which I heard.
Pdtior I gain or enjoy jungitur is joined aut either genitivo
(casui) to a genitive case, aut or ablativo (casui) to an abla-
tive case : ut as, Romani the Romans sunt potiti gained sig-
ndrum the banners or standards et and armdrum the arms or
weapons of war. Tree's the Trojans egressi being" landed or
debarked potiuntur enjoy optata arena the wished-for sand
or shore.
O'mnia verba all verbs regunt govern dativum (casum) a
dative case ejus rei of that thing; cui to or for which aliquic?
any thing acquiritur is gotten aut or adimitur is taken away r
ut as, nee seritur it is neither being sown, nee nor metitur is
it being mown, that is, there is neither sowing" nor mowing, mini
for me istic there, or in that matter. Quis casus what accident
ademit te hath taken thee away mihi to me, that is. from me ?
VERBA verbs varii generis of various kind or sorts append-
ent belong huic regulse to this rule.
Imprimis foremost or in thejirst place verba verbs signifi-
cantia signifying cdmmodum advantage aut or incdmmoduni
disadvantage regunt govern dativum (casum) a dative case :
ut as, non pdtes you cannot commodare accommodate or serve
nee nor incommodare incommode or disserve mihi me.
Ex his (verbis) of these, juvo, / help, leedo / hurt, delecto
/ delight, et and queedam alia (verba) some few other verbs
exigunt require accusativum (casum) an accusative case
ut as quies rest jiivat delights fessum (hdminem) a weary
person plurimum very much.
Verba verbs comparandi of comparing re'gunt govern
dativum (casum) a dative case : ut as, sic thus solebam was
I accustomed or wont compdnere to compare magna (negdtia)
great things parvis (negdtiis) to small things.
Verb but interdum sometimes (hsec verba regunt) they
govern ablativum (casum) an ablative case cum praepfleHione
"cum" with the preposition "cum" interdum sometimes
accusativum (casum) an accusative case cum with praeposi-
( 230 )
tidnibus "ad" et "inter'' the prepositions " ad" and " inter:"
ut as, cdmparo JT compare Virgilium Virgil cum with
Homero Homer. Si if (is) comparatur he is compared ad
eum to him est nihil he is nothing. Haec (negdtia) these
things non sunt are not conferenda worthy of being compared,
that is, are not Jit to be compared inter se between themselves
or one with another.
Verba verbs' dandi of giving et and reddendi of restoring
regunt govern dativum (casum) a dative case : ut as, for-
tiina fortune dat gives nimis too much miiltis (hominibus) to
many, satis enough niilli to no one. Est he is ingratus (homo)
an ungrateful person, qui who non repdnit does not return
gratiam acknowledgment, that is, thanks (cuiquam) merenti
bene to any one deserving well (of him) that is, to his benefactor.
Verba verbs promittendi of promising ac and solvendi of
paying, regunt govern dativum (casum) a dative case: ut
as, (negdtia) quas the things which promitto / promise tibi to
you, ac and recipio engage esse observaturum to be observing
of, that is, to observe sanctissime most religiously or scrupu-
lously. Numeravit lie counted or paid mibi to me alienum
sss the debt, literally the strange brass or money.
Verba verbs imperandi of commanding et and nuntiandi
of relating or of telling regunt govern dativum (casum) a
dative case : ut as, peciinia money collecta collected, that is.
amassed or hoarded up imperat commands aut or servit servet
cuique every man. S^pe often videto see, or take care, quid
dicas what thou say de qudque viro of every man, that w, of
any one, et and cui to whom (dicas id, thou say it).
Excipe except rego / rule, guberno / govern, quae (duo
verba) which (two) verbs babent ha-ve accusativum (casum)
an accusative case ; tempero 1 rule et and mdderor / manage,
quas (duo verba) which two verbs nunc sometimes habent have
dativum (casum) a dative case, nunc sdmetimes accusativum
(casum) an accusative: ut <w, Luna the moon regit rules or
regulates menses the months. Deus ipse God himself guber-
nat governs drbem the world. Ipse he temperat sibi tempers
or commands himself, that is, he has the command of himself.
Sol the sun temperat tempers or sways dmnia all things liice
by or with his light. Hie this man moderatur manages equos
his horses, qui who non moderabitur will not manage, or,
master irae his anger or passion.
(2S1 )
Yerba verbs fidendi of confiding or trusting regunt govern
dativum (casum) a dative case : ut as, decet it is becoming
or proper committere to commit nil nothing nisi unless or
except lene that which is soft or of a mitigating quality vacuis
venis to the empty veins.
Yerba verbs obsequendi of complying with et and repusf-
nandi of opposing, regunt govern dativum (casum) a dative
case : ut as, pius filius a dutiful son semper always obtem-
perat obeys patri his father. Fortiina fortune repiignat
opposes ignavis precibus sluggish prayers, that is, the prayers
of the sluggish or slothful.
Yerba verbs minandi of threatening, et and irascendi of
being angry, regunt govern dativum (casum) a dative, case :
ut as, est minitatus he threatened mortem death utrique to
both of them. Nihil est there is nothing, that is, no reason
quod that (or why) succenseam / should be angry adolescent!
with the young man.
Sum / am cum with (suis) compositis (verbis) its com-
pounds, prater except possum I am able, regit governs dativum
(casum) a dative case : ut a*, pius rex a pious king- est is
ornamentum an ornament reipublicae to the state. Nee dbest
it neither hurts nee prddest nor profits mihi me.
Yerba verbs compdsita compounded cum with, his adverbiis
these adverbs bene well satis enough, male ill; et and cum
with his praepositio'nibus these prepositions, prae, ad, con, sub,
ante, post, ob, in, inter ; ferme for the most part regunt
govern dativum (casum) a dative case: ut as, Dii may the
Gods benefaciant do good tibi unto thee, that is, may they
bless thee. Ego / prasluxi have outshone meis majdribus mv
ancestors virtute in virtue, or valour. (Homo) qui (a person")
who intempestive out of season adluserit/o&erf on /amoccupato
occupied or when he ivas busy. Hoc this condiicit conduces or
is conducive, that is, redounds tuae laudi to your praise. Con-
vixit he lived ndbis with us. Subolet uxdri it savours a little
to my wife, that is, she begins to smell out, jam already (id)
quod that which ego machinor / am contriving, that is, she
has some just suspicions respecting my plans. Antefero /
prefer iniquissimam pacem the most unequal or dishonourable
peace justissimo bello to or before the most just war. Post-
pone I postpone pecuniam money famae to reputation, that is,
lvalue money less than I value reputation* Qudniam because
( 232 )
ea she po'test can obtrudi be thrust ne'mini upon nobody, itur
it is come, that is, they come ad me fa me. Periculum danger
Impendet hangs over omnibus all. Non sdlum not only inter-
fuit ivas he present his rebus at these things, sed but etiain
also prcefuit he was foremost or chief in them.
Non pauca (verba) not a few ex his (verbis) of these verba
aliqudties sometimes mutant change dativum (casum) the
dative in alium casum into another case : ut as, alius one
prtestat exceeds or excels alium another ingenio in talent or
ability.
EST there is, pro for habeo / have, regit governs dativum
(casum) a dative case: ut as, namque./or est mihi there is
to me pater a father ddmi at home, that is, I have a father at
home, est there is, injusta noverca an iniquitous (or) a severe
step-mother, that is, I have a severe step-mother.
Suppetit it sufficeth est is simile like huic (verbo) to this
verb (namely ', sum, or rather est) : ut as, enimfor non est he
is not paiiper poor cui to whom usus rerum the use of things
suppetit is sufficient, that w, who has a sufficiency of the
necessaries of life.
Sum / am cum with miiltis aliis (verbis) many other verbs
admittit admits geminum dativum (casum) a double dative
case: nt as, mare the sea est is exitio a destruction avidis
naiitis to greedy mariners, that is, the destruction of avari-
cious sailors. Speras do you expect (id) fore that (that}
should be laudi a credit tibi to yourself ^uod which vertis you
impute vitio as a fault mihi to me ?
Est libi there is where, that is, sometimes hie dativus (casus)
this dative case, tibi to thee, aiit or sibi to himself, herself^
itself, or themselves, aut or etiam also mihi to me additur is
added causa for the sake elegantise of elegance in expression:
ut as, jugulo / stab hunc (hdminem) this man sue- gladio
with his own sword sibi to himself, that is, with his very own
sword.
Transitiva verba transitive verbs cujusciinque generis of
what kind soever, sive whether activi (generis) of the active
(kind) sive or deponentis (generis) deponent, sive or com-
munis (generis) common, exigunt require accusativum (casum)
an accusative case: ut as, fiigito avoid percontatdrem an
inquisitive person, nam for idem the same est is garrulus a
blab. A per the wild-boar depopulatur lays waste agros the
( 233 )
Jields. Imprimis in the first place venerare Decs venerate
the Gods, that is, address yourself to the Gods worshipfully.
Neutra verba neuter verbs habent have or take accusativum
(casum) an accusative case cognate significatidnis of a kin-
dred or like signification : ut as, servit he serves duram servi-
tutern a hard servitude.
Sunt there are (nonndlla verba) some few verbs quae which
habent have accusativum (casum) an accusative case figurate
figuratively or by a figure : ut as, nee nor vox does (your)
voice sdnat sound hominem man, that is, like the voice of a
human creature : O Dea O a Goddess ! certe certainly or
withoiit doubt.
Verba verbs rogandi of asking, docendi of teaching, ves-
tiendi of clothing; celandi of concealing, fere commonly regunt
govern duplicem accusativum (casum) a double acciisative, that
is, two accusative cases : ut as, tu modo do only you pdsce
crave veniam pardon Deos of the Gods. Dedocebo / will
untedch te you istos mores those manners. Est ridiculum
(negdtium) it is ridiculous or a Jest is far you admonere me
to remind me istuc of that. Induit se he clad himself, that is,
he put on calceos the shoes quos (calceos) which exiierat he
had put off prius before. Consuefeci / have accustomed
filiurn my son, ne celet that he conceal not ea those things me
from me.
Verba verbs hujusmodi of this sort habent have post se
after them accusativum (casum) an accusative case etiam also
in passiva vo'ce in the passive voice: ut as, po'sceris you are
demanded or asked for, that is you are required to sacrifice
exta the ejitrails bdvis of a heifer.
Appellativa ndmina appellative nouns fere commonly ad-
diintur are added cum with praepositidne a preposition verbis
to verbs quae (verba) which denotant dendte mdtum motion :
lit as, ibant they icent ad templum to the temple Palladis of
Pallas.
Quddvis verbum any verb you like, that is, every verb ad-
mittit admits ablativum (casum) an ablative case significantena
signifying instrumentum the instrument, aut or causam the
cause, aut or mddum the manner actidnis of an action : ut as,
hi (milites) these soldiers certant endeavour defendere (se) to
defend themselves jaculis with darts, illi those, saxis with stone*.
Excanduit vehem enter he turned excessively pale ira with
(234)
Anger. Peregit rem lie performed the matter mira celeritata
tcith wonderful despatch.
Ndmen a noun pretii of price subjicitur is subjoined to or
put after quibiisdam verb is some verbs in ablative casu in
the ablative case : ut as, non emerim I would not purchase it
teruncio at a farthing, seu or vitidsa niice a rotten nut. Ea
victoria that victory stetit stood or cost Poems the Carthagi-
nians sanguine the blood multo'rum (hdminum) of many men,
(hat is, much blood, ac and vulneribus (many} wounds.
Vili at a low rate, paulo for little, minimo for very little,
magnofor much, nimio for too much, plurimo for very much*
dimidioybr half, duplo for twice as much, ponuntur are put
SEepe often per se by themselves, vdce the word pretio (price")
subaudita being understood : ut as, triticum wheat venit is
sold vili at a low rate.
Hi genitivi (casus) these genitive cases pdsiti put sine sub-
fetantivis without si'ibstantives excipiuntur are excepted: tanti
for so much, quanti for how much, pliiris for more, mindris
for less, tantidem^or just so much, quanti vis for as much as
you like, quantilibetybr as much as you please, quanticiinque
for how much soever : ut as, eris you will be tanti of so much
value aliis to others quanti as fiieris you shall have been or are
tibi to yourself.
Fldcci of a lock of wool, nauci of a nut-shell, nihili of
nothing, pili of a hair, assis of a penny, hiijus of this, te-
riincii of a farthing, adduntur are added, peculiariter peculi-
arly or very prdperly verbis to verbs aestimandi of esteeming:
ut as, ego pendo ilium / value him fldcci a straw, nee facio
nor do I regard him hujus this (viz. a snap of the finger and
thumb) qui who aistimat me esteems me pill (not) a hair.
Verba verbs abundandi of abounding, implendi of filling,
onerandi of loading, et and (verba) diversa his (verbis) verbs
different to (or from) these, that is, their contraries, jungiintur
are joined ablative (casui) to an ablative case : ut as, Anti-
pho, Antipho, abundas^ozt abound amdre with love, that is,
in that which you like. Sylla explevit Sylla filled dmnes
suos (milites) all his soldiers or his army divitiis with riches.
Quibus mendaciis with what lies levissimi homines have the
vainest persons onerarunt (for oneraverunt) te loaded you !
Expedi clear te yourself \\oc crimine of this charge.
Ex quibus (verbis) of which (verbs) queedam (verba) some
( 235 )
verbs noimunquam occasionally regunt govern genitivum (ca-
sum) a genitive case : ut as, implentur they are filled veteris
Bacchi of old Bacchus, that is, with old wine, atque and pin-
guis ferinae (carms)fat wild flesh or venison. Quasi as though
tu indigeas you have need patris hujus (hominis) of this man's
father.
Fiingor I discharge, fruor, Z^ enjoy, utor, / use, vescor, /
live upon) dignor / deem myself worthy, muto, / change or
barter, communico I communicate, supersede I pass by, jun-
guntur are joined ablative (casui) to an ablative case : ut as,
(ille) qui he who volet shall desire adipisci to obtain veram.
gldriam true glory fungatur should discharge officiis the duties
justitise oj justice, that is, let the man who desires, discharge .
Est it is optimum (negdtium) an excellent thing friii to enjoy
or to profit by aliena insania alien insanity or folly, that is,
by the madness of others. Jiivat it profits or is of service si
if utare you can use or employ bdno animo a good courage,
that is, can keep up an undaunted resolution in mala re in an
unlucky affair, or, unprosperous event. f Yescor / eat car-
nibus fleshes, that is, butchers' meat. Equidem truly baud
dignor me / deem not myself worthy tali hondre of such
honour. Diruit he pulls down, asdificat he builds up, iriiitat
he changes or alters quadrata square things rotundis^or round.
Communicabo te / will communicate you mea mensa with my
table, that is, I will give you access to my table, or I will
confer with you at my table. Est supersedendum it is to be
superseded or let pass, multitudineyrom a multitude verbdrum,
of words, that is, we must forbear saying many words or much.
Mereor / deserve, cum adverbiis with the adverbs bene
well, male ill, melius, better, pejus worse, dptime very well,
pessime very ill, jiingitur is joined ablative (casui) to an
ablative case cum with praepositidne de the preposition de : ut
as, minquam est meritus lie, never deserved bene well de me
of me.
Queedam verba certain verbs accipiendi of receiving, dis-
t*andi of distancing, or, of being distant, et and auferendi of
taking away, aliquando sometimes jungiintur are joined
dativo (casui) to a dative case: ut as, celata virtus concealed
virtue distat differs paulum little sepultas inertiseyrom buried
idleness, or, from lifeless sloth. Eripe te mo'rae snatch thyself
away to delay, that is, throw off tardiness or delay.
( 236 )
Ablativus (casus) an ablative case siimptus taken absolute
absolutely additur is added or subjoined quibiislibet verbis to
any verbs you like: ut as, Christus Christ est natus was
born Augusto imperante Augustus reigning, that is, when
Augustus was emperor, (est) crucifixus he was crucified
Tiberio imperante, Tiberius reigning, thai is, when Tiberius
was Roman emperor. Me duce / being your guide eris you
will be tutus safe.
Ablativus (casus) an ablative case partis (corporis vel
animi) of the part (of body or mind} affectae affected, et and
poetice poetically, or by the poets, accusativus (casus) an
accusative additur is added quibiisdam verbis to some verbs :
ut as, aegrotat he is ill ammo in mind magis more quam than
cdrpore in body. Candet he is white denies as to his teeth*
that is, his teeth are white. Riibet he 'is red capillos as to his
hairs, that is, his hair is red.
Quaidam (verba ex his verbis) some of these verbs usur-
pantur are usurped, or used, etiam also cum genitive (casu)
with a genitive case : ut as, facis you do, or act, absurde
absurdly qui who angas tormentest te thyself animi of or in
mind.
Ablativus (casus) an ablative case agentis of the doer ad-
ditur is added passivis (verbis) to passive verbs, sed but
prsepositidne tcith the preposition a from vel or ab by antece-
dente going before ; ut as, laudatur he is praised ab bis by
these, culpatur he is blamed ab illis by those. Honesta (ne-
go'tia) honest things or honourable objects non occulia (negd-
tia) not hidden or underhand things qua?runtur are sought
or aimed at bdnis viris by good men.
Cteteri casus the other cases manent remain or continue, in
passivis (verbis) in passive verbs, qui (casus) which cases fueruni
were or belonged (iis) to them activdrum (verbdrum) of (or
as) actives : ut as, accusaris you are accused furti of theft a
me by me. Habeberis you will be had ludibrio for a laughing-
stock, that is, you will be made a laughing-stock. Dedoceberia
you will be untaught istos mores those manners a me by me.
Privaberis you will be deprived magistratu of your magis-
tracy or office.
Vapulo / am beaten, veneo / am sold, liceo / am prized.
exulo I am banished, fio JT am made, or, I become, neiitro-
passiva (verba) neuter-passives habent have passivam con-
(237 )
structidnem a passive construction : ut as, vapulabis you will
be beaten a prseceptdre by the master. Malo / would rather
spoliari be plundered a cive by a citizen quam than venire be
sold ab hdste by an enemy. Yirtus virtue licet is set parvo
pre'tio at a small or low price ab omnibus (hominibus) by all
men. Cur why philosdphia exulat is philosophy banished a
convivantibus by persons feasting ? Quid what fiet will be-
come ab illo of him ?
Infinita verba infinitive verbs, that is, verbs of the infini-
tive mood adduntur are added to or put after quibiisdam
verbis some verbs, participiis participles, et and adjectivis
adjectives', et and also substantivis substantives poetice poeti-
cally or by the poets: ut as, amor love jiissit commanded (me)
scribere to write (ea verba) those things quae which puduit it
ashamed me or which I was ashamed dicere to speak. Jussus
being ordered confiindere foedus to violate the treaty. Erat
he was turn then, or at that time, dignus worthy amari to be
loved. (Est) te"mpus it is time tibifor you abire to go away,
that is, to be gone.
Infinita verba infinitive verbs, that is, verbs of the infini-
tive mood interdum sometimes pomintur are put sola alone or
by themselves per ellipsin by the figure ellipsis : ut as, hinc
from this time or up6n this spargere in vulgum [he begdn^ to
scatter abroad, that is, to throw out, or forth, ambiguas voces
ambiguous or equivocal sayings, et and cdnscius knowing
himself guilty, quserere to seek arma means to destroy me :
liic here incipiebat he began subauditur is understood.
Geriindia gerunds et and supina supines regunt govern
casus the cases sudrum verbo'rum of their own verbs : ut as,
efferor, I am transported studio with desire videndi of seeing
vestros patres your fathers. Est utendum it is to be employed,
that is, we must employ, or make use of, aetate our time :
aitas time prteterit passes away cito pede with tumble step.
^Jittimuswe jewdscitatum to consult oracula the oracle Phdebi
of Apollo.
Gerundia in -di gerunds in -di habent have eandem con-
structidnem the same constriiction cum with genitivis (casibus)
genitive cases, et and pendent depend turn both a quibusdam
substantivis upon certain substantives, turn and also adjectivis
adjectives : ut as, innatus amor an innate love or a natural
desire kabendi of having, that is, of getting (honey '),urget urges
(2S8 )
or excites Cecropias apes the Attic lees. ^Eneas (father)
JEneas in celsa piippi on his lofty stern, that is, on loard his
stately ship, jam certus eundi already sure of (or determined
Gerundia in -do gerunds in -do obtinent obtain (or have)
eandem constructidnem the same construction cum with abla-
tivis (casibus) ablative cases ; et and also gerundia in -dum
gerunds in -dum cum with accusativis (casibus) accusative
cases: ut as, ratio the manner or means scribendi of writing
est is conjiincta conjoined or connected cum loquendo with
speaking, or, with oratory. Yitium disease alitur is fed or
nurtured atque and vivit lives tegendo by being covered or
concealed. Locus a place amplissimus most ample ad agen-
dum for pleading, that is, very magnificent and honourable
to plead in.
Cum when necessitas necessity significatur is signified, ge-
rundia in -dum gerunds ending in -dum ponuntur are put or
used citra praepositidnem this side of a preposition, that is,
without a preposition, verbo " est" the verb " esf addito being
added : ut as, est orandum it is to be prayed, that is, we mutt,
pray ut sit that there be or that ive may have sana mens a
sound mind in sano cdrpore in a sound body. Est vigilandum
ei it must be watched by him, that is, he must watch qui who
ciipit desires vincere to conquer.
Gerundia gerunds etiam also vertuntur are changed in
adjectiva ndmina into ddjsctive nouns : ut as, duci to be led
or induced preemio by reward or a bribe ad accusandos ho'mi-
nes to accuse men est is prdximum next akin latrocinio to
robbery.
Supinum in -um the supine in -um signifi cat signifies active
actively, et and sequitur follows verbum a verb aiit or parti-
cipium a participle significans signifying mo'tum motion ad
locum to a place : ut as, veniunt they come spectatum to see,
veniunt they come ut to the end that ipsae they themselves spec-
tentur may be seen. Milites soldiers sunt missi were sent
speculatum to view arcem the citadel.
Supinum in -u the siipine in u significat signifies passive
passively, et and sequitur follows adjectiva no'mina adjective
nouns : ut as, (id) quod that which est is fcedum foul or
filthy factu to be done, I'dem the same est is et also turpe base
or shameful dictu to be spoken.
( 239 )
(Ndmina) qua? nouns which significant signify partem a
portion or part temporis of time ponuntur are put frequentius
dflener, that is, more commonly in ablativo (casu) in the ab-
lative case : ut as, nemo mortalium nobody of mortals, that
is, no mortal man sapit is wise omnibus ho'ris at all hours or
times.
Autem but (ndmina) quae nouns which significant signify
duratidnem any continuance, or duration temporis of time,
ponuntur are put fere commonly in accusativo (casu) in the
accusative case : ut as, hie here jam now or from this time
regnabitur it shall be swayed, that is, kings shall reign ter
centum three hundred tdtos annos whole years, or, full three
hundred years.
Dicimus etiam roe say also : In paiicis diebus in a few days,
meaning, within the period of a few days. De die by day.
De ndcte by night. Promitto I promise in diem into or for a
day. Cdmmodo / accommodate or I lend in mensem for a
month. Natus ad quinquaginta annos born to fifty years,
that is, fifty years old. Stiidui I studied per tres annos for
three years. Piier a boy or child id aetatis that of age, mean-
ing, of that age. Non plus not more than, or, not above
triduum the space of three days, aut or triduo the space of
three days. Tertio (die) on the third vel or ad tertium (diem)
at the third (ante) cal^ndas before the calends vel or calenda-
rum of the calends of the month.
Spatium distance loci of place pdnitur is put in accusativo
(casu) in the accusative case, et and interdum sometimes in
ablativo (casu) in the ablative : ut as, jam now processeram
/ had advanced mille passus a thousand steps or a mile.
Abest he is distant quingentis millibus passuum Jive hundred
thousand of steps or Jive hundred miles ab lirbe from the city.
Item also, abest he is distant bidui two days journey : ubi
where spatium the space vel or spatio by the space, itinere by
a journey, vel or iter a journey, intelligitur is understood.
Om'ne verbum every verb admittit admits genitivum (ca-
sum) a genitive case ndminis of the name dppidi of a city or
town in quo (dppido) in which actio fit an action is done, that
is, in which aught takes place ; mo'do provided only sit it be
primse (declinatio'nis) of the first vel or secunda? declinatidnia
of the second declension, et and singularis niimeri of the singu-
lar number : ut as, quid what faciam should I do Romae at
C 240 )
Home? Nescio I know not mentiri (how) to lie, that is. I
cannot utter falsehoods.
Hi genitivi (casus) these genitive cases, liumi upon the
ground, ddmi at home, militia? in warfare or abroad, belli of
or in war, sequuntur follow fdrraam the construction propri-
drum (ndminum) of proper names; tit as, arina arms sunt
are parvi of little worth fdris abroad, nisi unless est there is
consilium counsel or wisdom ddmi at home. Fiiimus we were
semper always link together militias abroad or in war, et and
ddmi at home.
Verum but si if ndmen the name dppidi of a city or town,
fiierit be (literally, may or shall have been] pluralis niimeri of
the plural number duntaxat only, aut or tertiaa declinatidnis
of the third declension, pdnitur it is put in ablativo (casu) in
the ablative case : ut a*, Cdlchus a Colchian, an or Assyrius
an Assyrian ; nutritus brought up Thebis at Thebes, an or
Argis at Argos. Ventdsus being wind-like, that is, fickle or
inconstant as the wind, Romas at Rome amem / (can) like
Tibur the city Tibur, Tibure at Tibur (amem) Ro'mam / (can)
like Rome.
Ndmen the name loci of a place fere commonly additur is
added to, or, put after verbis verbs significantibus signifying
mdtum motion ad locum to a place, in accusative (casu) in {he
accusative case sine praapositio'ne uithoiit a preposition : ut
as, concessi / went Cantabrigiam to Cambridge ad capien-
dum to take ciiltum culture or cultivation ingenii of genius,
lhat is, to get learning.
Ad hunc mddum to (or after} this manner litimur we use
ddmus a house, et and rus the country : ut as, capella3 ye
little she-goa.ts saturse being full ite ddmum go home, Hes-
perus the E'vening star venit comes, that is, the evening ap-
proaches, ite be gone. Ego ibo I will go rus into the country.
Ndmen the name loci of a place fere commonly additur is
added to, or, put after verbis verbs significantibus signifying
nidtum motion a loco from a place in ablativo (casu) in the
ablative case, sine praepositidne without a preposition : ut as,
nisi unless esses profectus you had gone, that is, if you had
not gone H6m-dfro7n Rome ante before, relinqueres you ivould
leave earn it nunc now.
Impersonalia verba impersonal verbs non habent have not
nominativum (casum) a nominative case enunciatum expressed
(241 )
Cm Latin} : ut as, juvat it is pleasant ire to go sub umbras
tinder the shadows, or into the shade.
Haec impersonalia (verba) these impersonate, interest it
interests, et and refert it concerns, jungiintur are joined qui-
buslibet genitivis (casibus) unto any genitive cases you like,
preeter except or with the exception ofhos foemininos ablatives
(casus) these feminine ablative cases, mea with mine ; tiia with
thine ; siia, with his, hers, its, theirs ; ndstra, with ours ;
vestra, with yours ; et and ciija, with whose ? ut as, interest
it interests or concerns magistrates a magistrate, that is, it is
his duty, tueri to defend bdnos (homines) the good, animad-
vertere to animadvert in malos (homines) upon the bad, that
is, to punish the bad. Refert tua it concerns your business,
that is, you, nosse {for novisse) to know te ipsum yourself.
Et also hi genitivi (casus) these genitive cases adduntur
are added, tanti of so much, quanti of how much, magni of a
great deal, parvi of little, quanticunque of how much soever,
tantidem of just so much : ut as, refert tanti it relates of so
much, that is, of such concern is it agere to do honesta honest
things, that is, to act honestly.
Impersonalia (verba) impersonal verbs pdsita put acquisi-
tive acquisitively postulant demand or require dativum (ca-
sum) a dative case : autem but (ea verba) quae those verbs
which pomintur are put transitive transitively, (postulant
require) accusativum (casum) an accusative case : ut as,
benefit it benefits ndbis us, that is, we enjoy blessings a Deo,
from God. Jiivat it delights me me ire to go per altum over
the deep, that is, to travel by sea.
Verb but praepositio ad the preposition ad prpprie additur
\* properly or peculiarly added his (verbis) unto these verbs,
attinet it belongs, pertinet it pertains, spectat it concerns : ut
.<?, vis would you have me me dicere to speak (id) quod {that)
which attinet belongs ad te to you ? Spectat it looks ad dmnes
(homines) to all men, that is, it concerns all vivere to live bene
well or righteously.
Accusativus (casus) an accusative case cum with genitivo
(casu) a genitive, subjicitur is subjoined to or put after his
impersonalibus (verbis) these impersonal verbs, pojnitet it
repents, tsedet it wearies, miseret, it pitieth, rniserescit, it com-
miserates, piidet it shames, piget it irks or grieves: ut as, si
if vixisset he had lived ad centesimum annum to (his) Iwn*
M
(242 )
dredth year, non poeniteret it would not repent, that is, it
would not have repented eum him siiae senectutis of his oh
age. Miseret me it pities me tiii oft/tee, that is, I pity thee.
Impersonate verbum an impersonal verb passivae vo'cis (.
the passive voice po'test can or may accipi be taken pro fo
singulis persdnis the several persons respectively, that is, for
each person utri usque niimeri of both numbers eleganter ele-
gantly, or with elegance: ut as, statur it is stood (a me by
me), id cst, that is, sto I stand, (a te by thee, that is), stas
thou atdnde&t, (ab illo by him, that is), stat he stands, (a ndbis,
by us, that is), stamus we stand, (a vo'bis by you, that is),
statis you stand, (ab illis by them, that is), stant they stand ;
videlicet you may see, or namely, ex vi by virtue casus of a
case adjunct! added to it : ut as, statur it is stood a me by me,
id est thai is, sto / do stand : statur it is stood ab illis by
them, id est that is, stant they do stand.
Participia the participles of verbs regunt govern casus the
cases verbdrum of the verbs a quibus (verbis) from which
derivantur they are deduced or derived: ut as, tendeiis
sir etching forth or spreading out diiplices paltnas double open-
hands or both his palms or hands ad sidera to the stars, or
towards heat-en, refert he utters vo'ce with voice, that is, loudly
talia (ver'ba) such words as these.
Dativus (casus) a dative vase interdum sometimes additur
is added participiis to participles passivee vdcis of the passive
voice, prassertim especially si if exeunt in -dus they end in
-diis : ut as, magnus civis a great or mighty citizen or subject
dbiit (yb?'obivit) died, et and formidatus (one) feared Othdni
to Oiho, thafis* a person dreaded by O'tho. Chremes restat
Chrem.es remains, qui who est is exorandus to be beseeched
mihi to me, that is, to be yet prevailed upon by inc.
Participia participles, cum when fiunt they are made or
become (adjectiva) ndmina adjective nouns exigunt require
genitivum (casum) a genitive case : ut as, appetens greedy
alieni (negdtii) of another mans prdperty, profiisus lavish
sui (negdtii) of his own.
Exdsus hating, perdsus utterly hating, perteesus weary of,
significantia signifying active actively, exigunt require accu-
sativum (casum) an accusative case : ut as, astrdnomus an
astronomer exdsus hating- mulieres women ad unam (mulie-
rem) to one, that is, in general. Pero'see utterly hating im-
( 243 )
mundam segnitiem filthy sloth or idleness. Pertzesus quite
weary or tired o/suam ignaviam his own sluggishness.
Exo'sus detested, et and perdsus hated to death, significantia
signifying passive passively, legiintur are read cum with
dativo (casu) a dative case: ut as, exdsus detested or greatly
hated Deo of God, et and sanctis the saints. German! the
Germans sunt are perdsi mortally odious Ilomanis to the
Romans, that is, are mortally hated by the Romans.
Natus born, prognatus procreated, satus sprung, cretus
descended, creatus begotten or produced, drtus risen, editus
brought forth, exigunt require ablativum (casum) an ablative
case ; et and ssepe oftentimes cum with praepositidne a prepo-
sition : ut a*, bdna (fcemina) a virtuous lady prognata born
bdnis parentibus of virtuous parents. Sate O thou who art
sprung sanguine from the blood Divum (for Divdrum) of the
Gods! Quo sanguine from what blood cretus descended!
Yenus drta Venus sprung- marifrom the sea preestat secures
mare the sea eiinti to the person going, that is, to the passen-
ger. Editus sprung terra from the earth. Fiii / was
nympha a nymph edita descended de magno fliirnine from a
great river.
EN lo or behold et and ecce look or see, adverbia adverbs
demonstrandi of showing, junguntur are joined frequentius
more frequently, that is, most commonly nominative (casui)
to a nominative case : accusativo (casui) to an accusative,
rarius seldomer, that is, less frequently : ut as, en see Priamus
Priam. Ec'ce tibi behold for thee noster status our state or
condition. En lo quatuor aras four altars : ecce see there
diias (aras) two tibi for thee, Daphni O Ddphnis, atque and
duo altaria two sacrificial heartlis Pliobbo for Phcsbus or
Ap6llo.
En lo or behold, et and ecce look at or see, (adverbia)
exprobrandi adverbs of upbraiding, junguntur are joined ac-
cusativo (casui) soli to an accusative case only: ut a*, en
animum et mentem see a mind and a disposition. Auteni
but ecce alterum see the other (here).
QU^DAM adverbia certain adverbs loci of place, temporis
of time, et and quantitatis of quantity, admittunt admit
genitivum (casum) a genitive case.
1. Loci of place : ut as, libi where, ublnam where, misquam
no where o thither, longe^/ar, quo whither, ubtvis any where,
M 2
( 244
hiiccine what hither, $c. ut as, ubi gentium ichere of nations
or in the world? Invenitur he is found nusqukm loci no
where of place, that is, no where. Est ventum it is come, that
is, men are now arrived eb impudentise at that (degree} of
impudence. Quo terrarum to what part of lands or of the
globe or earth abiit (for abivit) is he gone ?
2. Temporis of time: ut as, mine now, tune then, turn then,
interea in the mean time, pridie the day before, postridie, the
day after, fyc. : ut as, pdteram / could do nihil nothing ani-
pliiis more tune temporis then of time, that is, at that time
quam than flere weep. Inierunt (for iniverunt) they entered
or began pugnam the fight or battle pridie the day before ejus
diei that day. Pridie the day before calendarum the calends
of the month, vel or calendas the calends of the month.
3. Quantitatis of quantity : ut as, parum but little, satis
enough, abunde abundantly, fyc. ut as, satis eloquentiae
enough of eloquence, parum sapientiaB little enough of wisdom.
Audivimus we have heard abunde fabularum abundantly of
tales, that is, a world of fables.
QUJEDAM (adverbia) some adverbs admittunt admit casus
the cases nominum of the nouns uncle whence, or from which
sunt dediicta they are deduced, or ivere derived: ut as, vivit
he lives inutiliter uselessly or unprofitably sibi to himself.
Mauri the Moors sunt are proximo Hispaniam next to Spain.
Melius better, vel or optime the best omnium of all. Mora-
batur he staid or tarried amplius opinidne more than opinion,
that is, longer than was expected.
(Haec) adverbia these adverbs diversitatis of diversity,
^liter otherwise, secus otherwise ; et and ilia duo (advcrbia)
these two, ante before, post after, non rarb junguntur are not
seldom joined, that is, are often joined ablativo (casui) to an
ablative : ut a*, multb aliter much otherwise. Paulo secus
little otherwise. Miiltb ante much before. Paulo post a
tittle after. Venit she came longo temporepbst a long time after.
Instar like^ or equal to, et and ergo because or for the sake
of sumpta being assumed or taken adverbialiter adverbially,
that is, as adverbs, habent have genitivum (casum) a genitive
case post se after them : ut as, sedificant they build equum a
horse divina arte by the divine art or aid Palladis of Pallas,
or Minerva, instar mentis as big as a mountain. Donari to
be gifted or rewarded ergo for the sake o/'virtiitis virtue.
(245)
CONJUNCTIONES conjunctions copulatives copulative et and
disjunctive disjunctive conjungunt join together, that is, con^
nect similes casus like cases, (similes) mddos (like) moods, et<
and (similia) tempora (like} tenses : ut as, Socrates do'cuit
Socrates taught Xenophdntem Xenophon et and Plato'nem.
Plato. Stat he stands recto cdrpore with erect body, that is>
with his body erect or upright, atque and despicit looks down
upon terras the lands or earth. Nee scribit he neither writes
nee legit nor reads.
Nisi unless ratio the reason or the adoption varies constmc-
tidnis of a different construction pdscat require aliud another
thing, that is, that it should be otherwise : ut as, emi / bought
librum a book centussi for a hiindred pence et and pluris
more. Vixi Hived Ro'mse at Rome et and Venetiis at Venice.
Nisi unless lactasses (for lactavisses) me you had suckled or
fed me up amantem loving or being in love, et and produceres
were drawing me on, that is, had drawn, (or continued to
draw} me on falsa spe with false hope.
Quam the conjunction " quam" than, Sepe oftentimes intel-
ligitur is understood post after (haec adverbia these adverbs}
amplius more, plus more et and minus less : ut as, sunt there
are amplius more, that is, it is more sex menses (than] six
months. Paulo plus somewhat more trece'nta yehicula (than)
three hundred carriages sunt amissa ivere lost. Nix the snow
nunquam never jacuit lay alta deep minus less quatuor pedes
(than} four feet.
QUIBUS mo'dis unto what moods verbdrum of verbs qusedam
adverbia certain adverbs et and conjunctions conjunc-
tions cdngruant correspond.
Ne, an, num whether or not, pdsita being put or used dubi-
tative doubtfully, aut or indefinite indefinitely, junguntur are
joined subjunctive (mddo) unto a subjunctive mood: ut as,
refert nihil it matters nothing, or, it makes no difference fece-
risne whether you did it an or persuaseris persuaded (to it}.
Vise go see niim whether or not redierit (for rediverit) he be
returned.
Dum whilst pro for dummodo so that, et and quousque
until, pdstulat claims or demands subjunctivum (mddum) a
subjunctive mood: ut as, dum so that prdsini / may profit
tibiyon. Dum until tertia testas the third summer viderii
shall have seen or beheld (ilium) regnantem him reigning.
(246 J
Qui who significans signifying causam the cause, exigit
quires subjunctivum (modum) a subjunctive mood : ut as,
you are stiiltus a fool qui credas who can believe, that is, t
believing huic (hdmini) this fellow.
Ut that pro for pdstquam after that, or, since that, sicut
et and qudmodo how, jungitur is joined indicative (mddo) to
an indicative mood : aiitem but cum when denotat it implies
or signifies quanquam although, utpotejbr as much as, vel or
finalem causam the final cause, (jungitur it is joined") sub-
junctive (mddo) to a subjunctive mood: ut as, ut since that
sumus ice are in Pdnto in Pontus, Ister the Danube cdnstitit
frigore has stood with cold, that is, has been frozen ter three
times. Ut as tiite you yourself 'es are, ita so censes you Judge
or think dmnes that all esse arc. Ut although dmnia (negdtia)
all things contingant should fall out, quee (negdtia) which vdlo
I wish, or I would, non possum I cannot levari be eased. !Non
est fidendum it is not to be trusted, that is, -no trust is to be
given tibi to you ut qui as one who fefelleris have deceived
tdties so oft, that is, because you have so frequently been found
a deceiver. Dave Ddvus, dro / intredt te you ut that, jam
now redeat he may return in viam into the way.
Denique lastly, dmnes voces all ivords pdsitae put indefinite
indefinitely, quales such as sunt (hse voces) are these, quis who,
quantus how great, qudtus how many, fyc. postulant require
subjunctivum (modum) the subjunctive mood : ut as, video /
see cui to ivhom, or to what sort of man scrfbam I am icriting.
Quantus how great assiirgat he rises up in clypeum (hdstis)
against the enemy's shield : quo turbine with what a whirl or
force tdrqueat he hurls hastam the lance !
PR^POSITIO a preposition subaudita understood interdum
s6metim.es facit makes, or causes, ut that ablativus (casus) an
ablative case addatur be added : ut as habeo / have (or I es-
teem} te you loco in the place parentis of a parent, id est, that
is, in loco.
Praspositio a preposition in compositidne in composition
nonminquam sometimes regit governs eiindem casum the same
case quern (casum) which regebat it governed et also extra
compositidnem out of composition : ut as, detrudunt they thrust
of naves the ships or vessels sccpulofrom the rock. Pnetereo
/ pass by te you insalutatum unscduted, that is, I pass you
without saluting you.
Yerba verbs compdsita compounded cum icith (praeposi-
tidnibus the prepositions] a, ab, ad, con, de, e, ex, in, nonnun-
quam sometimes repetunt repeat easdem praspositidnes the
same prepositions cum suo casu with their case, that is, with
the case which they govern, extra compositidnem out of compo-
sition, atque and id that or this eleganter elegantly : ut as y
abstinuerunt they abstained a Tfinofrom wine.
In the preposition " in," pro for erga tdwards, contra
against, ad to, et and supra above., exigit requires accusativum
(casum) an accusative case: ut as, accipit she receives or
admits animum a feeling atque andmeniema mind benignam
kind, that ts, she conceives or entertains kindly thoughts and
inclinations in Teucros towards the Trojans. Peccem /
should offend in piiblica cdmmoda agai-nst the public advan-
tage, or good. Hceres an heir quseritur is sought in regnum
for the kingdom. Iraperium ttte government or power Jdvis
of Jupiter est is in reges ipsos over kings themselves.
Sub the preposition " sub" under ', cum when refertur it has
relation or relates ad tempus to time, fere commonly jungitur
is joined accusative (casui) to an acciisative case ; ut as, sub
idem tempus about the same time, id est that is, circa about
vel or per throughout idem tempus.
Siiper the preposition " super" over, pro for ultra beyond,
appdnitur is put accusative (casui) to an accusative case ; pro
for de of or concerning (apponitur is put) ablative (casui) to
an ablative : ut as, prdferet he icill extend imperium the
empire (or kingdom) et both super Graramantas beyond the
Garamdtians or Africans et and Indos the In'dians. Rdgi-
tans inquiring and inquiring over again multa many things
(or much), super Priamo concerning Priam, multa many
things (or much) super Hectore about or concerning Hector.
Tenus as far as jungitur is joined ablative (casui) to an
ablative case et both singular! (numero) in the singular et and
plurali (numero) plural number : ut as, tenus pube as high
as the waist or groin. Tenus pectdribus up to the breasts.
At but genitive (casui) to a gsnilive case plurali (numero)
in the plural number tantum alone: et and semper sequitur
it always follows suum casum its case : ut as, crurum tenus
as high as the legs.
INTERJECTION ES interjections ponuntur are put, that is, are
used, non rarb not seldom, in other words, are frequently
( 248 )
employed sine casu without a case : ut as, connixa hdvi/i?
yeaned, reliquit she abandoned or left spem gregis the hope of
the flock, ah aids! in mida silice upon the bare flint, that is,
on the hard and naked rock. Quse dementia wnat mddnett
(is this) malum (with) a mischief/
O ! exclamantis the interjection " 0!" of a person exclaim-
ing, jungitur is joined nominative (casui) to a nominative case,
accusative (casui) to an accusative* et and vocative (casui)
to a 'vocative : ut as, O festusdies 0! the joyful day hominig
of (mortal) man ! O nimium fortunatos agricolas ! too for-
tunate husbandmen, si j/*n6rint (for no'verint) they knew sua
"bo'iia their own happiness ! formdse piier O ! beautiful boy,
ne crede trust not nimium too much coldri to colour, or com-
pletion ; that is, to your beauty.
Heu ah ! et and proh wo ! or aids ! junguntur are joined
nunc now or sometimes nominative (casui) to a nominative
case, nunc now or at other times accusative (casui) to an accu-
sative : ut as, heu pietas ah ! his piety ! Heu prisca fides
ah I the ancient integrity ! Heu invisani stirpem ah ! the
odious stock or race I Proh ! Jupiter ! Jupiter, tu thou,
homo man, adigis me drivest me ad insaniam to madness.
Proh fideni alas! the faith or help Deum (for Deo'rum) of
Gods atque and hdminum of men ! Item likewise vocative
(casui ) to a vocative case ut as, Proh ! sancte Jupiter !
sacred Jove.
Hei wo ! et and vae aids ! junguntur are joined dative
(casui) to a dative case: ut as, lie! mihi wo ! me quod that
amor love est is medicabilis curable niillis herbis by no herbs or
medicaments. Va3 alas ! misero mihi wretched me, that is*
aids! wretched man that I am, de quanta spe from how
great hope decidi have I fallen, that is, from what high hopes
am I fallen !
PROSODY CONSTRUED.
PROSODIA prosody est is (ea) pars that part grammatical
vf grammar, qua) which ddcet teaches quantitatem the quantity
or true time syllabarum of syllables.
Prosddia prosody (vulgo) dividitur is (commonly} divided in
( 249 )
tres partes into three parts, tdnum the tons, spiritum the
breathing, et and tempus the time.
Hoc loco in this place est visum ndbis it is seen to us, that
is, it is thought proper by us, tractare to treat tantuni only
de tern pore of time or quantity.
Tempus time est is mensiira the measure or duration profe-
rendte syllable of littering or pronouncing a syllable.
Breve tempus a short quantity or time notatur- is marked or
distinguished sic thus ( u ) : ut as, (gratia exempli, for the
sake of example), Do'mmus the Lord: autem but lo'ngum
(tempus) a long quantity (notatur is marked) sic thus OP
after this fashion (') : ut as, con'tra against.
PES a foot est is constitutio the placing together duarum,
syllabarum of two syllables vel or pluriurn (syllabarum) of
more (than two) ex from (or according to) certa observatione
the certain observation (or observance) temporum of the times
or measures of the syllables.
Spond&us a spondee est is diseyllabus (pes) a dissyllable
foot, that is, afoot consisting" of two syllables : ut as, vir'-tus.
virtue.
Dactyl us a ddctyle est is trisyllabus (pes) a trisyllable
foot, that is, a metrical foot consisting of three syllables : ufc
as, scii'-be-re to write.
SCANSIO scansion or scanning est is legitima commensuratio
the legitimate commensurdtion (or, the measuring according
to Rule) versus of a verse in singulos pedes into its several
feet, that is, the dividing it correctly into the metrical feet
whereof it is formed.
Scansidni to scansion, or the scanning of a verse, accidunt
there happen or belong figure the figures (appellate called),
Synaldepha, Ecthlipsis, Synteresis, Diteresis, et and Caesura.
Synaltepha the figure Synalccpha est is elisio the elision or
striking out vocalis of a vowel in fine in or at the end dictidnis
of a word ante alteram (vocalem) before another (vowel) in
initio in the beginning sequentis (dictidnis) of the following
word : ut as, crastina vita to-mdrrow's life est is nimis se'r;i
too late, vive live, hddie to-day. In this verse, pro for vi'ta,
vl'vc, we pronounce or say vi't' and vi'v'.
At but lieu ! aids ! et and ! the interjection ! nunquam
intercipiiintur are never intercepted, or struck out ; that is,
are never elided by &ynalojpha.
M3
( 250 )
Ecthlipsis the figure Ecthlipsis est is qudties as 6ften as m
the letter m perimitur is cut off cum with sua vocali its towel,
pro'xima dictidne the next icord exo'rsa beginning a vocali with
a vowel: ut as, mdnstrum a monster horrendum horrible.
infdrme ugly, ingens huge or of vast bulk, cui to i*/hom lumen
the light (est) ademptum has been taken away, that is, a
horrid, ugly, big monster, deprived of his sight. In this
verse pro far indnstrum horrendum, infdrme, we pronounce
mdnstr' mhorrend' minfdrm'.
Synzeresis the figure Synocresis est is contractio the con-
traction duarum syllabarum of two syllables in linam (sylJa-
bam) into one : ut as, seu or whether alveiiria the bee-hives
fuerint texta may have been woven lento virnine of limber osier.
Sere the word alvearia is pronounced quasi as thougn esset
scriptum it lucre written alvaria.
Diuresis the figure Diceresis est is libi ichen ex una syllaba
of one syllable dissecta divided diite (syllabae) two syllables
fiunt are made: ut as, debiierant they ought (literally, had
owed) evoluisse to have unwound siios fiisos their spindles.
Evoluisse, pro for evolvisse.
Cassiira the figure Ccesura est is cum when post after abso-
lutum pedem an absolute or a perfect foot brevis syllaba a
short syllable extenditur is extended or made long in fine
dictidnis in or at the end of a word : ut as, inhians intent
upon pectdribus the viscera, or inner parts, cdnsulit she con-
sults spirantia exta the reeking or panting entrails.
Hero'icus versus an heroic verse, qui (versus) which dicitur
e"tiam is called also Hexameter (by the name of) Hexameter
cdnstat consists ex sex pedibus of sir feet : quintus locus the
fifth place (of the verse) peculiariter peculiarly (or, in a spe-
cial manner) vindicat sibi arrogates or claims to itself dacty-
lum a ddctyle, sextus (locus) the sixth (place retires)
spondceum a spondee ; reliqui, (loci) the other places (habent)
liunc have this foot vel ilium or that (either a ddctyle or
a spdndee) prdut according as vdlumus we ivill or like : ut as*
Tityre O Tityrus, tu thou, recubans reclining sub tegmine
tinder the cover patulae fagi of a wide-spreading beech-
tree.
Spondceus a spondee etiam also aliquando sometimes repe-
ritur is found in quinto loco in the fifth place : ut as, cara
sdboles (thou) dear offspring Deum (for Dedrum) of the
(251 )
Gods, magmnn incretaentum great increment, that is, illus-
trious prdgeny Jdvis of Jupiter.
Ultima syllaba the last syllable, cujusciinque versus of every
verse habetur is accounted communis common, that is, may be
either a long or a short syllable at pleasure.
Elegiacus versus an elegiac verse, qui (versus) which et also
habet has ndmen the name Pentametri of Pentameter, cdnstat
consists e duplici pentbemideri of a double penthcmimer, that
is, of two penthcmimers, quaruni (pentbemimerum) whereof
or of which prior (penthemimeris) the former or first of the
two comprebendit contains duos pedes two feet, dactylicos
dactylic, that is, ddctyles, spondiacos s&onddic or spondees,
Tel or alterutros either the one or the other of those ; cum
with longa syllaba a long syllable : altera (pentbemimeris)
the other penthemimer (comprebendit) etiam contains also
duos pedes two feet, sed but omnino dactylicos wholly dactylic,
that is, always ddctyles, item likewise cum with longa syllaba
a long syllable : ut as, amor love est is res a thing plena, full
solliciti timdris of anxious fear.
THE QUANTITY OP FIKST AND MIDDLE SYLLABLES.
I. VocALis a vowel ante before duas consonantes two conso-
nants, aut or duplicem (consonantem) a double consonant, in
eadem dictione in the same word, est is ubique everywhere
longa long positidne by position : ut as, (in the words) ven'tus
the wind, ax'is an axle-tree, patri'zo / act like my father,
cu'jus of whom or of what.
II. Quod si but if cdnsonans a consonant claudat terminate
or close pridrem dictidnem the former word (that is, the first
word of the two}, sequente (dictione) thefollou-ing word item
also incboante beginning a consonante by or with a consonant,
vocalis the vowel prascedens going before etiam also erit will
be longa long positidne by position : ut as, sum / am major
greater quam than cui whom, that is, one whom fortunayor-
tune pdssit is able nocere to hurt. Syllable the syllables -jor,
-sum, quam, et and -sit, sunt longae are (here) long positidne
by position.
III. At si but if prior dictio the first word of the two exeat
terminate in brevem vocalem in a short vowel, scqnente (dic-
tione) the following word incipiente beginning a duabus con-
eonantibus by or with two consonants, interdum sometimes
( 252 )
prodiicitur it is made long, that is, the final letter is length-
ened^ sed but rarius seldomer, meaning, not often : ut as,
occulta spolia the secret spoils : here the final " a" (^'"occul-
ta" t* lengthened before initial "sp-" either by this Rule or
by Ccesiira.
IV. Brevis vocalis a short vowel ante mutam (Hteram)
before a mute, liquida (litera) sequente a liquid following,
redditur is rendered communis common : ut as (in the words)
patris of a father, vdlucris (vel volucris) of a bird. Verb but
longa (vocalis) a long vowel non mutatur is not altered or
changed: ut as (in the words) aratrum a plough, simula-
crum an image. fc
VOCALIS a vowel ante alteram (vocalem) before another
tdwel in eadem dictidne in the same word est is ubique every-
where brevis short: ut as (in the words) De'us God, me'us
mine, tu'us thine, pi'us godly or affectionate.
Excipias you may or must except genitives (casus) gemtico
cases (finitos) in -ins ending in -ius, habentes having seciin-
dam formam the second form or declension prondrninis of a
pronoun: ut #.9, unius vel unius of one, illius vel illius of
him, her, it or that, c. ; ubi where or iti which i the vowel
" i " reperitur is found commuuis common ; licet although in
alterius in the word " alterius" of another, sit it be semper
always brevis short: in alms in the genitive " alius" of an-
other, (sit) semper it be always longa long.
Etiam likewise genitivi (casus) the genitive et and dativi
(casus) dative eases quintae declinatidnis of thejifth declension
sunt are excipiendi to be excepted, ubi where, or in which e
the vowel " e" inter betwixt or between geminum i double " i "
that is, preceded and followed by the letter " i" fit is made
longa long; ut as (in the word) faciei of a face: alidqui non
otherwise not ; ut as (in the words) rei of a thing, spei of
hope, fidei of faith.
Etiam also fi- the syllable fi- in fio in the verb " fio" 7 am
made or I become, est longa is long ; nisi unless e et r the
letters e and r sequuntur follow simul together : ut as (in the
two words) fi'erem / might become, fi'eri to be made or done :
velut thus, jam now dmnia (negdtia) all things fiunt are
done quas (negdtia) which negabam / denied posse mere able
fieri to be done, that is, which I asserted could not be done.
Dius godlike or heavenly habet has primara syllabam the
( 253 )
first syllable longam long: Diana the proper name Diana (ha-
bet primam syllabam )communem has the first syllable common.
Interjectio dhe the interjection " 6he" habet has priorem
syllabam) the prior syllable, that is, the first syllable of the
two communem common.
Vocalis a vowel ante alteram (vocalem) before another vowel
in Greeds dictionibus in Greek words subinde now and then
fit is made longa long; ut as, dicite Pierides say, O ye
Muses. Respice Laerten regard Laertes.
Et and in Grrecis possessivis (nominibus) in Greek posses-
sives : ut as, TEne'ia niitrix the JEnean nurse, that is,
^fineas's nurse. Rhodope'ius Or'pheus, Rliodopean Orpheus,
that is, Or'pheus of Rhodope.
Om'nis diphtho'ngus every diphthong est is longa long apud
Latinos among or with the Latins : ut as, au'rum gold,
neu'ter neither, miisai of or to a song : nisi unless or except
pra) the preposition ^ prve" vocali sequente a vowel following,
that is, when a vowel follows : ut as, pr^eire to go before,
prceustus burnt at one end, pr#?amphis very large.
DERIVATIVA (vocabula) derivative words fere in general,
or commonly, sortiiintur are allotted or assigned tandem quan-
titatem the same quantity cum with primitivis (vocabulis)
their primitives, that is, with the words from which they are
derived: ut a*, amator a lover, amicus a friend, amabilis
amiable; prima (syllaba existente) brevi the Jirst syllable
being short, ab a'ir.0 (because derived) from (the verb)
" a'mO" / love.
Tamen however pauca (verbula) a few words excipiuntur
are excepted, quoe (verbula) which dediicta being derived a
brevibus (syllabis) from short syllables prodiicunt extend or
lengthen primam syllabam the 'first syllable: ut as, co'mo
eo'nris / comb or adorn the hair, a co'ina (derived] from
" coma" the hair ; fo'm&Bfuel, et and fomen'ttim an assuag-
ing plaster, a. from fo'veO / cherish ; huma'nus human, or hu~
mane, ab ho'mofrom " ho'mo" a man (or woman] : jucun'dus
pleasant, a. from jii'vO / delight ; jumen'tum a beast of biirdett,
a from ju'vO / help ; ju'nior younger, a from ju'venis young,
unless this last be rightly a contraction for juve'mor; la-
ter'na a lantern, a. from la'teo I lie hid; lex le'gls a law, a
from le'gO / read ; mo'bilis moveable afrojn mo'veO / move ;
no'niis the ninth a from no vein nine ; rex re'gis a king-,
(254 )
regi'na a queen, a from re'gO 1 rule : se'des a seat, a from
se'deS I sit ; te'gula a tile, a. from te'gO / cover; tra'gula a
javelin, also a drag-net, a from tra'liO / drag or draw ; \b'-
mer a plough-share, a from vo'mo / throw out or cast up ;
vox v5'cis a voice, a from TO'CO / call.
Et and contra upon the other hand sunt (dicta) there are
words, quae (dicta) which (etsi) deducta (although] derived a
longis (syllabis)/rom long syllables, that is, from primitives
with or of long quantity (yet) corripiunt shorten primam (syl-
labam) the first syllable: ut a*, are'na sand, aris'ta the beard
of corn, arun'do a reed, abfrom a'reO / am dry or parched ;
arus'pex a sootJisayer, or diviner, ab from a'ra an altar ;
di'cax a jester, a from di'cO / speak or say ; di'tiO power, a
from di'tis opulent, or rich ; diser'tus eloquent, a from dls'-
8er5 / dispute ; dux du'cis a leader, a from du'cO / lead ;
fi'des faith, a from fi'o / m mf?e or I become : fra'gor a
rustling noise or crash, f ia gilis frail, a from fran'gO I break ;
ge'nui / begat, a from gig'nS / beget ; liicer'na a candle, a
from lu'ceO / shine ; na'to na'tas 7 shoot out, a from na'tu to
be grown or to be sprung up ; no' to no'tas / mark, ^.from
no'tu to be known; po'sul I have put, a. from po'nS I put ;
po'tiji / have been able, a from pos'sum / am able ; so'por
sound sleep, a. from so'pid / lull to sleep.
Et and nonnulla alia (dicta) some fen' other u-ords ex utro-
que genere of either sort or kind, quse (dicta) which relin-
quuntur are left observanda to be observed studio'sis by the
studious inter legendum in (their) redding.
COMPOSITA (ve'rba) compound words sequuntur follow quan-
titatem the quantity (long or short), simplicium (verboniin)
of their simple icords : ut as, a from le'gO le'gls / read (venit
comes) peYlegd I read through ; (a from) le'gO le'gas I send
as an ambassador (venit comes) alle'gO / allege, or I accuse
by messengers ; a from po'tens pdwerful, im'potens weak ; a
from so 'lor / solace or cheer, cons5'lor I comfort.
Tamen yet or however hesc (paiica) brevia (verbula) these
(few) short words, that is, these words having short syllables,
(etsi) enata (though) derived a lo'ngis (syliabis) from long
syllables, excipiuntur are excepted ; de jero / su-ear a great
cath, pe'jerO I perjure or forswear, a from ju'ro I swear ;
in'niiba unmarried, pro'niiba a bride-maid, a from nu'bo I
marry or am married.
( 255 )
OM'NE prseteritum (tempus) every preterperfect tense dis-
syllabnm of two syllables habet has priorem (syllabam) the
Jirsi syllable of the two \6ngnm long- : ut as, le'gi I have read,
e'mi / have bought., mo'vi / have moved.
1. Tamen yet excipias you may (or must) except (the pre-
terites) bT'bi I drank, de'di I gave, scT'di / have cut, ste'ti /
stood, sti'ti / stayed, tiili / bore or I suffered, et and f I'di /
/ clove or cleft, a from f indo / cleave.
2. (Verba) geminantia verbs doubling primam (syllabam)
the first syllable prEeteriti (temporis) of the preterperfect
habent have primam (syllabam) the first syllable brevem short;
ut as, ce'cidi, I fell or have fallen, afrojn ca'do I fall ; cecidi
/ have beaten, a from caedo / beat ; di'dici / have learnt,
fefelli / have deceived, momordi / lit or have bitten, pependi
/ weighed, pu'pugi / pricked, tetendi / stretched, te'tigi /
touched, totdndi / shore or I have shorn, tu tudi / thumped.
Dissyllabum supinum a dissyllable supine, that is, any
svpine of two syllables liabet has priorem (syllabam) the
jvrvner or first syllable longam long : ut as, vi'suin to see^
la'tiim to bear or suffer, lo'tum to rvash, mo'tum to more.
Excipe except da'tum to give, I'tiim to go, li'tum to besmear
or daub, qui'tum to be able, ra'tum to suppose, ru'tum to rush.,
sa'tum, to sow, si'tum to permit, sta'tum to stop, et and ci'tum
to stir up, \from cieo cies I stir up ; T&mfor ci'tum to make
to go, a from cio cis / make to go, quartce (conjugatio'nis) of
the fourth conjugation, habet hath priorem (syllabam) the
former, or first, syllable longam long-.
THE QUANTITY OP FINAL SYLLABLES.
I. A finita a ' final, that is, final syllables in -a produ-
cuntur are produced or made long- : ut as, ama love ihov,,
contra against, erga towards.
Excipias you may (or must} except, puta suppose, ita even
so, quia because, po'stea afterwards, eja, well! Item also
omnes casns all cases (finitos) in " a" ending in "a," cv^us-
ciinque generis of whatever gender fiierint they may have
been, or are, (cujusciinque) numeri (of whatever] number,
aut or declinatidnis declension ; praeter except vocatives (ca-
sus) vbcative cases a Grtecis (dictidnibus finitis) in -as of
Greek words ending in -as ; ut as, O ^Enea 6 ^Encas, O
Tho'ma O Thomas . et and ablativum (casum) the dblatice
( 256 )
case (singular} primee declinatidnis of the Jlrst declension ;
ut as, miisa by or with a song.
Numeralia (ndmiua) numeral nouns, thai is, nouns of
number (finita) in -ginta ending in " ginta" habent have
finalem (Ijteram) the final or last letter, (that is, the termind-
t tonal syllable) communem common, sed but frequent! us
oftener or more frequently lo'ngam long : ut a*, triginta
thirty.
II. (Verba) desinentia words ending in b, d, t, in any of
the three mutes b, d, t, sunfc brevia are short (as to the termi-
ndtional or final syllable) : ut as, ab by or from, ad to,
caput the head.
III. (Verba) desinentia in c words ending in c producun-
tur are made long : ut as, ac and, sic 50, et and adverbium
the adverb hie here.
Sed but duo (verbula finita) in c two (words ending) in c,
corripiuntur are shortened, nee neither, et and donee until.
Tria (verbula) three words (ending in c) sunt comraunia
are common, that is, are either long or short as to the quan-
tity of the syllable thus terminating, namely, fac do thou, pro-
no'men " hie" the pronoun " hfc" et and neutrum (genus) ejus
its neuter " hoc,'' mddo provided only non sit it be not ablativi
casus of the ablative case.
IV. E finita f e' final, that is, words ending in -e, sunt
brevia are short (as to the last letter) : ut as, mare the sea,
pene almost, lege read thou, scribe write.
Om'nes voces all words quintsB inflections of the fifth de-
clension (finita) in -e ending in -e sunt excipiendte are to be
excepted : ut as, fide with faith or fidelity, (the ablative case
of fides faith), et and die in the day-time or by day : lina
together cum with particulis the particles (or words} enatis
inde derived from it, that is, from " di'e ;'' ut as, hodie to-
day, quotidie daily, pridie the day before, postridie the day
after : item also quare (that is, qua re) wherefore ; quadere
(that is, qua de re) for what purpose or cause ; eare (that is,
e'a re) therefore; et and si qua stint similia (vocabula) if
there be any (more words) of the like sort or derivation.
Et item and also secunda3 perso'nas singulares the second
persons singular secunda? conjugations of the second conju-
gation : ut as, do'ce teach, move move.
Etiam also monosyllaba (all) monosyllables (finita) ia e
( 257 )
ending in " e" producuntur are made long: ut as, me i.i*r,
te thee, se himself, herself ] itself, or themselves ; prater except
encliticas conjunctidnes the enclitic or adjunctive conjunctions,
-que and -ne whether or not, -ve or.
Qum et moreover, too, adverbia adverbs (finita) in -e
ending in " e," deducta deduced or derived ab adjectivis/rom
adjectives secundae declinatidnis of the second declension habent
have e the letter e lo'ngum long : ut as, piilchre beautifully ;
ddcte learnedly ; valde mightily pro for valide.
Quibus (vdcibus) to which (adverbia) the adverbs ferme
cdmmonly, et and ferg almost, accedunt accede or are added :
tainen yet bene well, et and male ill omnino corripiuntur are
altogether or always made short.
Postremb lastly, (verba) quse words which scribuntur are
written a Grcecis by the Greeks per 77 with the letter " eta,"
that is, long " e," producuntur are lengthened natura by
nature, cujuscunque casus of whatever case fuerint they may
have been, or are, ( cujuscunque) generis (of whatever gender),
aut or numeri number : ut as, Lethe the river Lethe, or Wa-
ter of Oblivion ; Anchise with Anchises ; cete whales ; Tempe
the vale of Tempe, a pleasant place in Thessaly.
V. I finita -t final, that is, final syllables in i sunt long^,
are long : ut as, do'mini lords, magistri masters, amari to b&
loved.
Prseter except mihi to me, tibl to thee, sibi to himself, her-
self, itself, or themselves, libi when or where, ibl there, qua*
(verbula) which words sunt are coinmiinia common (as to the
last syllable}.
Verb but nisi unless, et and quasi as if, corripiuntur are
shortened ; that is, they have the final " i" short.
Cujus eo'rtis of which kind etiam likewise sunt are dativi
(ca-us) the dative (cases) et and vocativi (casus) the vocaticg
cases (singulares singular) Graecdrum (ndminum) of Greek-
nouns ; quorum (ndminum) of which genitivus (casus) singu-
laris the genitive case singular exit ends in os breve in -as
short : ut as, (hi dativi (casus) these dative cases, Mindidi to
M'uwis, or the daughter of Minos ; Palladi to Pallas, that is,
Minerva ; Phyllidi to Phf/llis : vocativi (casus) these vocative
cases, Alexi O Alexis, Amarylli O Amaryllis, Daplmi O
Ddphnis.
VI. L finita -/ final, that is, final syllables in -I corripi-
( 258 )
*/ntur are shortened: ut as, animal an animal, Annibal
Hannibal, a Carthaginian general, mel honey, pugil a cham-
pion or boxer, consul a consul.
Prseter except (these three words) nil nought, contractum
contracted a of (or from) nihil nothing ; sal salt, et and sol
the sun.
Et and qucedam Hebreea (ndmina) some (or certain) He-
brew words or names (finita) in -el ending in -el: ut as,
Michael the angel Michael, Gabriel the angel Gabriel, Raphael
the angel Raphael, Daniel the prophet Daniel.
VII. N finita -n final, that is, ultimate syllables in -n
producuntur are lengthened : ut as, Paean a hymn to Apollo,
Hymen the god of wedlock, or, marriage, qum but, Xenophdn
a man's name, ndn no, or not, dsemSn a demon or devil.
Excipe except (these words) fdrsan perhaps, fdrsitan per-
chance, an whether, tamen yet, attamen but yet, veruntamen
nevertheless, et and in the preposition " in."
Et and his (vdcibus) to these (words) accedunt accede or
are added illas voces those words, qua3 (voces) which patiuntur
si(ffer apdcopen apocope, that is, loss at the end : ut as, me'n*
(for mene ?) what me? vide'n' (for videsre?) do you see ?
audi'n' (for audisne ?) do you hear ? Etiani also exin ( for
exinde) henceforth, subin (for subinde) now and then, dem
(for deinde) thereafter, or, afterwards, prdin (for proinde)
therefore.
Qudque in -an dlso words ending in ' -an,' \from nomina-
tivis (casibus) nominative cases (finitis) in -a ending in " a :"
nt as. nominative (casu) in the nominative case, Ipjiigenia
Iphigenia, a daughter of Agamemnon, ^Egina JEgine, a
princess of Bosotia ; accusative (casu) in the accusative case,
Jphigenian /Eginan : nam for (voces fmitae) in -an words
in ' an,' a from nominativis (casibus) nominative cases (finitis)
in -as ending in " as" producuntur are lengthened : ut as,
nominative (casu) in the nominative case, jEneas a Trojan
prince of that name, Marsyas a Phrygian satyr so called :
accusative (casu) in the accusative case, ^nean, Marsyan.
Item dlso ndmina nouns in -en ending in " en," quorum
(ndminum) w;^e?'eq/*genitivus (casus^ the genitive case habet
hath -inis, correptum shortened, that is, hath the penult short:
ut as, carmen a song or poem, crimen a fault or crime,
pecten a comb, tibicen a player en the flute, (cducta habentia)
( 259 )
-inis (in genitive casu) having all of them -mis in the genitive
case singular.
Qusedarn (ndmina) some nouns etiam also (finita) in -in
ending in -in per -i with an -i, ut as* Alexin, Alexis (in the
objective case} : et in -yn and in -yn per -y with the letter -y,
ut .<>, Ityn, I'tys (in the objective case}.
Greeca (verba) Greek ivords etiam also (finita) in -on end-
ing in -on, per parvum o with little o (called by the Greeks
omicron}, cujuscunque casus of whatsoever cane fuerint they
be, literally, shall or may have been : ut as, nominativo
(casu) in the ndminative case (singular}, Ilion the city Troy ;
Pelion a hill of that name, in Thessaly : accusativo (casu) in
the accusative case, Caucason mount Caucasus ; Pylon the
town Pylos.
VIII. O finita -o final, that is, final syllables in -o sunt
commiinia are common (as to quantity}: ut as, dicO T say,
virgO, a virgin, porrO moreover. Sic so docendo in teaching,
legendo in redding, et and alia geriindia other gerunds (finita)
in -do (ending} in -do.
Sed but obliqui casus in -o oblique cases in -o semper always
producuntur are lengthened; ut as, dativo (casu) in the dative
case, domino to a lord or master; srv6 to a slave or servant;
ablativo (casu) in the ablative case, templd by or from a,
church or temple ; damno with loss.
Et and adverbia adverbs derivata derived ab adjectivis (no-
minibus) from adjective nouns: ut as, tanto by so much,
quanto by how much, liquido clearly, f also falsely, prime, first,
manife'sto manifestly, fyc. prater except seduld diligently,
miituo mutually, crebrO frequently, quas (adverbia) which sunt
are communia common (as to the quantity of the final -o}.
Caiterum but (these two} mddo now or only, also, provided
that, et and quo'modo how, semper always corripiuntur are
made short.
Qudque likewise citb soon, ut et as also, ambo both, duo
two, ego /, atque and homo a man or woman, vix leguntur
are scarcely ever read producta long (as to the final syllable).
Tamen however inonosyllaba in -o monosyllables in -o produ-
ciintur are lengthened : ut as, do / give, sto / stand.
Item also Grieca (vocabula) Greek words per <a with o long
(by the Greeks called omega}, cujusmodi casus of whatever
casa fuerint they shall have been, or are : ut as, nominativo
( 2CO )
(casu) in the nominative case, Sappho a poetess of Lesbos,
Dido a queen of Carthage : genitivo (casu) in the genitive
case, Androgeo of Androgeus : accusative (casu) in the accu-
sative case, Athd mount Athos. Et sic and so likewise ergo
the word " ergo" (when put) pro for causa the cause or sake
f-
IX. R finita -r final, that is, final syllables in r corripi-
untur are shortened : ut as, Ccesar a title of the Roman em-
perors, per by or through, vir a man, uxor a wife, turtur a
turtle.
Aiitem lut (haec verba) produciintur these (words) are made
long : far bread corn, Lar a household god, Nar the river
Nar, now called the Nera, ver the spring, fur a thief, cur
why : qudque also par equal to or like, cum with (siiis) com-
pdsitis its compounds, ut as, cdmpar a companion, impar un-
equal, dispar unlike.
Etiain also Grajca (vocabula) Greek words in -er ending in
~er, quae (vocabula) which illis with or among them (nempe
namely, Gracis the Greeks}, desinunt end in -r)p in long e before
r : ut as, a'er the air, crater a bowl, or goblet, character a
mark or sign, aether the sky, sdter a saviour or deliverer :
preeter except pater a father, et and mater a mother, quce
(duo ndmina) which two nouns apud Latinos with the Latins
or Romans habent have ultimam (syllabam) the last syllable
brevem short.
X. S finita -s final, that is, final syllables in -s habent
have pares tcrminatidnes the like terminations, that is, the
same number of endings cum with mimero the number voca-
lium of the vowels : nempe namely, -as, -os, -is, -os, -us, -ys.
1. As finita c -as' final, that is, final syllables in '-as' pro-
ducuntur are lengthened or made long : ut as, amas thou
lovest, jMiisas the Muses, majestas majesty, bdnitas goodness.
Prteter except (qusedam) Greeca (verbula some) Greek
words, quorum (verbuldrum) whereof or of which genitivus
(casus) singularis the genitive case singular exit in -dos ends
in -dos : ut as, Areas an Arcadian, Pallas Minerva ; genitivo
{casu) in the genitive case, Arcados of an Arcadian, Pallados
of Minerva.
Et likewise prater except accusatives (casus) plurales the
accusative cases plural ndminum of nouns crescentium in-
creasing ; ut as, heros hero'os a hero, Phyllis Phyllidos Phyllis;
( 261 )
accusative (casti) plurali in the accusative plural herdas
heroes, Phyllidas Phyllisses.
'2. Es finita -es final, that is, final syllables in -es sunt
ldno;a are long: ut at^ Ancliises the father of ^Eneas, sedes
a scat, ddees thou tedchest, p&tresjfttfutrs.
Ndmina in -es nouns (fading) in -es tertize inflectidnis of
the third inflection or declension, qua? (ndmina) which corri-
phmt shorten penultimam (syllabarn) the last syllable save
one gcnitivi (casus) of the genitive case crescentts increasing,
excipiiintur are exempted : ut as, miles a soldier, seges stand-
ing corn, dives rich. Sed lut aries a ram, abies a fir-tree,
paries a wall or partition, Ceres the Goddess of corn, and of
harvests, et also pes a foot, una together cum with compdsitis
(ve'rbulis ejus) its compounds: ut as, bipes two-footed or
having two feet, tripes three-footed or having three feet, sunt
arc long a long.
Quo'que likewise es thou art, a. from sum 7 am, una together
cum with compdsitis (verbis ejus) its {several} compounds,
corripitur is shortened : ut as, pdtes thou art able or canst,
ades thou art present, or, be present, prddes thou profitest,
dbes thou hinderest or hurtest : quibus (vdcibus) to which
(words') penes in the power of, pdtest may adjiingi be added.
Item also neiitra (ndmina) neuter nouns, that is, words of
the neuter gender, et and nominativi (casus) plurales the
nominative cases plural (quoriindam) Graecdrum (ndminum)
of certain Greek nouns : ut as, hippdmanes a raging humour
in mares, cacoetbes an ill habit or a vicious custom, Cyclopes
the Cyclops, giants of Sicily, Naiades, the Ndids, fairies
haunting rivers and fountains.
3. Is finita -is final, that is, final syllables in -is sunt are
brevia short : ut as, Pans a Trojan prince, panis bread,
tristis sorrowful or sad, hilaris merry or gay.
Excipe except obliques casus plurales oblique cases plural
(finitos) in -is ending in -is, qui (casus) which producuntur
are lengthened or made long : ut as, musis to or by songs, a
of muss, a song ; mensis to or by tables, a o/*mensa a table ;
ddmims to or by lords, templis to or by temples, et and quis,
pro/or quibus, to or by whom.
Item also (ndmina) producentia nouns lengthening penul-
timam (syllabam) the penult, or last syllable save one, genitivi
(casus) of the genitive case (crescentis) increasing: ut as,
( 262 )
Samms a Sdmnite, Salamis an isle by Athens ; genitivo (casu)
in the genitive case, Samnitis, Salaminis.
Adde hue add hither, or, to this place, that is. to these nouns
(dmnia verba) quae (verba) all words which, that is, such words
as desinunt in -is end in -is, contracta contracted ex -els from
the diphthong -els, sive whether Grseca (verba) Greek, sive
or Latina (verba) Latin, cujusciinque nuraeri of whatever
number aut or casus case fuerint they may be : ut as, Simois
a river by Troy, Pyrois one of the horses of tiie Sun, partis
parts, o'mnis all : e from (the words'] Simoeis, Pyroeis, partels,
o'mneis.
Et item and also dmnia monosyllaba (verba) all mono-
syllables; ut as. vis strength or force, Us strife: prater
except nominatives (casus) these nominative cases, is he, et
and quis who ? et and (adverbium) the adverb bis twice.
Istis (vdcibus) to these words accedunt accede (or are added)
seciindaa perso'nae singulares the second persons singular verbd-
rum (finite) in '-is' of verbs ending in '-is' quorum (verbo'rum)
whereof or of which secundae (persdnae) plurales the second
persons plural desinunt in -itis end in -itis, penultima (syl-
laba) the penult or last syllable save one producta bc'ing made
long : una together cum with futuris (tempo'ribus) the future
tenses optativi (modi) of the optative or potential mood (finitis)
in -ris ending in -ris : ut as, aiidls thou dost hear, veils thou
mayest (or canst} be willing, dederis thou, wilt have given ;
pluraliter in the plural number audi'tis, .veli'tis, dederi'tis.
4. Os finita -os final, that is, final syllables in -os produ-
cuntur are lengthened or made long : ut as, hdnos honour,
nepos a grandchild, ddminos lords, servos slaves or servants.
Prater except compos master of, or, a person who has ob-
tained his desire, impos not master of, or, a person who is
unable ; et and os dssis a. bone.
Et and Gneca (vocabula) Greek words per parvum -o
with lUtle o : ut as, Delos the isle of Delos in the JEgean sea,
chaos a confused mass or heap ; Pallados of Pallas, or of
Minerva ; Phyllidos of Phyllis, a woman's name.
5. Us finita " -us" final, that is, ultimate syllables in -us
corripiiintur are made short: ut as, famulus a man-servant,
regius royal, tempus time, amain us we love.
(Ndmina) producentia nouns lengthening penultimam (syl-
labam) the penult, or last syllable save one, genitivi (casus) oj
( 263 )
the genitive case crescentis increasing, ezcipiuntiir are ex-
cepted: ut as, salus health, tellus the earth; genitivo (casu)
in the genitive case, salu'tis, tellu'ris.
Etiam also dmnes voces all words quartse inflectldnis of the
fourth inflection or declension (finitae) in -us ending*in -us
sunt longae are long : prater except nominativum (casum)
the nominative et and vocativum (casum) the vocative case
singulares singular (or, of the singular number'}: ut as,
genitivo (casu) singular! in the genitive case singular, manus
of the hand, nominative, accusative, vocativo (casu) plurali
in the nominative, accusative, and vocative case plural, manus
hands.
Etiam likewise monosyllaba (verba) monosyllables accedunt
accede or are added his to these : ut as, crus the leg from
the knee to the ancle-, thusfrdnki?icense, mus a mouse, sus a
swine, sow or boar.
Et item and also Greeca (vocabula) Greek words per diph-
tliongum -ovs (ending) with the diphthong -ous, cujuscunque
casus of whatever case fiierint they may have been or are : ut
as, nominativo (casu) in the nominative case, Panthus, Me-
lampus, Proper Names of men : genitivo (casu) in the
genitive case, Sapphus of Sappho, Ciius of Clio, one of the
Muses.
Atque and Jesus ike Saviour Jesus ndmen a name vene-
randum to be reverenced cunctis piis (hominibus) by all relz-
gious or godly persons.
6. Ys finita -ys final, that is, last syllables in -ys sunt
brvia are short: ut as, Tethys a marine goddess of (hat
name, Itys a son of Tereusa king of Thracs, chlamys a cloak
or mantle. Excipe except plurales casus plural cases (finitos)
in -ys ending in -ys contractos contracted ex -yes vel -yas
from -yes or from -yas : ut as, Erinnys the furies pro for
Erinnyes, vel or Erinnyas.
XI. Postremo lastly, - u finita -u final, that is, final syl-
lables in 4 u ' producuntur are made long dmnia all or without
exception : ut as, manu by or with the hand, the db/ative
case singular ofmanus a hand; geiiu the knee ; amatu to be
I6ved ; diu a long while or time.
(264)
APPENDIX.
I. PUNCTUATION.
A SENTENCE is either Simple or Compound : Simple when
i-t consists of no more than one subject, and contains no more
than one finite verb ; that is, a verb in any mood except the
infinitive mood, whether the verb be expressed or under-
stood : Compound when it consists of more than one subject,
and contains more than one finite verb.
Every compound sentence is divided into two or more parts
(according to the number of independent finite verbs in it) by
one or more of the following stops :
1. A COMMA ,] which is used at the end of every simple
subject, in a compound sentence: as, Cicero, who studied
diligently, hoping to becdme eminent, gained learning, glory,
and rank.
2. A SEMICOLON |~;] which is used in the middle of any
compound sentence, when half the sentence is finished, an'd
the remaining half forms a contrast with t!ie former half: as,
A dishonest man may take pains to screen himselffrom shame
and punishment ; but justice will take still more pains to dis-
cover and expose him.
3. A COLON :] which is used when the sense is perfect,
but the sentence not ended : as, Dread to be known for a
liar : because that character is detestable, and sure to last as
long as life lasts.
4. A PERIOD or FULL STOP .^ which is used at the end of
every sentence, both simple and compound.
^iT The pause occasioned by a comma is equal to the time
necessary (at the ordinary rate of reading or speaking) to
count one. The pause at a semicolon is twice as long as at a
comma ; that is, equal to the time necessary to count too.
The pause at a colon is three times as long as at a cdmma ; or
equal to the time necessary to count three. And the pause at
a period (or a full stop), is four times as long as at a comma ;
or equal to the time necessary to count, four.
(265)
5. A PARENTHESIS, ( ) which is a clause in the middle of a
sentence, such, that it may be omitted without detriment to
the sense : thus, Quintilian (an accurate judge of mankind)
was pleased with boys who wept when their school-fellows out-
did them : for he knew that the sense of disgrace would make
them emulous, and that emulation would make them scholars.
F Instead of the two crotchets inclosing the words of a
parenthesis, two commas are not unfre"quently employed :
thus, in the preceding example, we might, with perfect cor-
rectness, write, Quintilian, an accurate judge of mankind^
was pleased, c.
6. AN INTERROGATION, [?] which is a mark used instead of
a full stop after any sentence whereby a question is asked :
as, Xenocrates, holding his peace at some detracting discourse,
was asked, why he did not speak ? " Because" said he, " I
have more than once repented of having spdken, but never of
having been silent"
7. A sign of ADMIRATION, !] which is a mark that de-
notes wonder or some sudden emotion of mind : as, Aids ! the
cares of life! Oh! the emptiness of its pursuits !
II. CAPITAL LETTERS.
1. Every sentence ought to begin with a capital letter ;
and, in poetry, each verse may, or may not, commence in a
similar manner.
2. All proper names, and words used for proper names,
such, for example, as September, the Graces, Tdwer-hill,
should begin with a capital.
3. Common substantives, when emphatic, should begin with
a capital letter ; but not unless they are emphatic.
4. All adjectives derived from proper names, as, Roman,
Swedish, Welsh; and common adjectives when applied to
persons of eminence, as Almighty God, H6ly Ghost, Royal
Majesty, Serene Highness, are generally made to begin with
a capital letter.
5. A quotation or speech, introduced in the middle of a
sentence, may begin with a capital letter ; but when inverted
c()mmas are used, a capital letter is seldom requisite : as, Zeno,
hearing a young man speak more than was becoming, said,
" we have two ears, and only one tongue, to the end that we
tftould hear much and say little"
(266 )
%* As the Romans were unacquainted with the figures of
arithmetic now in use among us, they employed certain capital
letters to denote numbers : as, for example, I for one, V for
Jive, X for ten, L for fifty, C for a hundred, D for jive Mn-
dred, and M for a thmisand.
III. FIGURES OP GRAMMAR.
Any deviation from the drdinary way of speaking, or from the Ordinary
form of writing, whether for the sake of brevity, of beauty, or of dnergv,
is called a FIGURE.
I. The Figures of ETYMOLOGY are :
1. Prosthesis, which adds a letter, or syllable, to a word at the be-
gfnning : as gna'ta, a daughter, for na'ta ; te'tuli, / bore, 'for tull.
2. Aphoeresis, which takes away a letter, or syllable, from the begin-
ning of a word : as, 'st, it is, for est ; 'ru'it, he rushes forth, for e'ruit.
3. Epinthesis, which inserts a le'tter, or a syllable, in the middle of a
word : as, rep'perlt, he found, for re'perlt ; mdupe'ra'tor, a commander,
for impera'tor.
4. Syncope, which drops (or omits) a letter, or a syllable, in the
mfddle of a word : as, puer'tia, childhood, for puerT'tia ; obTTt, he died,
for Sbfvit ; dix'tl, thou saidest, for dixis'ti.
5. Paragoge, which adds a letter, or syllable, to the end of a word :
as, hero'Tsm, to heroes, for herS'TsT ; di'cier, to be said, for dl'cl.
6. Apocope, which takee away a letter, or syllable, from the end of a
word : as, meV ! what me 9 for me'ne ; sa'tm' 1 enough ? for satls'ne ?
7. Metathesis, which transposes a le'tter in a word : as, corcodl'lus,
a crScodile, for cr&codl'lus ; pis'tris, a sort of whale, also, a galley, for
pris'tis.
8. Arch'dismus, which means an old or antiquated manner of writing,
or of pronouncing : as, cur'ru, to a chariot ; for cur'rul ; ol'll, they, for
Il'li.
9. Hellenismus, which implfes efther the adaption, or else the imita-
tion, of some Greek word : as, He'lene, Helen, for Helena: del'phln, a
d&phin, for delphfnus : tfgridos, of a tiger, for tl'grls or ti'gridis.
II. The Figures of STN'TAX are cldssed under the heads of Ellipsis,
Pleonasmus, Enallage, and Hypirbaton ; each of which is again sub-
divided into various branches, wheredf the following are the principal.
I. ELLIPSIS.
ELLIPSIS is the omission of some word, or words, necessary to com-
plete the sense : as, e'gomet conti'nuo me'eum, forthwith I myself with
myself, understand cogita're Incipie'bam, began to cogitate or to think.
Quid mfll'ta ^ Why many things or words 9 Understand di'cam, need 1
toy, Ven'tum e'rat ad Vgs'tae, it was or * had been come to Vesta's
mderstand ae'dem vel tem'plum,./ane or temple.
II. PLEONASMUS.
PLEONAS'MUS is the use of something superfluous in a sentence : >as,
Ro'ma est me'a pa'tria et na'tale s^Qm, Rome is my country and native
SO&
( 207 )
III. ENALLAGE.
ENAL'LAGE Is a change of gender, number, case, mood, tense, or person :
as, RSma'nus vlc'tor e'rXt, the Roman was conqueror, for Roma'ni vic-
to'res e'rant, the Romans were cbnquerors.
IV. HYPERBATON.
HYPEUBATON is a deviation from the cdmmon practice in the arrange-
ment of words in a sentence, as respects either the natural drder of
eve'nts, or the established mode of speaking and of writing : as, valet
at'que vl'vit, he is well and lives, instead of vl'vit at'que va'let.
III. The Figures of PROSODY are, Synalcepha, Ecthlipsis, Syn&resis,
Diaeresis, Systole, Diastole, Synapheia, and Caesura : the whole of
which have been ndticed above, under the head of Prdsody.
IV. FIGURES OF RHETORIC.
The art of speaking and of writing with propriety is teYmed GRAM'MAR ;
whilst the art of speaking and of writing with elegance is nmed RHE-
TORIC.
The chief Figures of RHETORIC, or Tropes, as they are generally called,
are the following :
1. Metaphora, or the application of some bdrrowed Attribute or qu-
lity, to express more beautifully, or more forcibly, some circumstance or
appearance : as, ge'mlni, du'o ful'mma bel'li, Sclprads, cla'des Li'byae,
the twin-like Scipios (literally, sons of Scipio}, two thunderbolts of war,
havoc to Libya ; with allusion to Publius Cornelius Scipio Africdnus
major, and Publius Cornelius Scipio JEmilianus Africdnus minor : or,
vi'tlo mo'riens si'tit a'eris her'ba, by fault of the air the dying herbage
thirsts, medning, that, owing to the drought the grass is in lack of moisture
to further its growth, and enable it to regain and maintain its verdure.
2. Metonymia, or the substituting for a PERSON or a THING some signi-
ficant circumstance relating either to the one or the dther : as, 5xpec-
ta'te cica'das, wait for the balm-crickets, meaning sesta'te'm, In qua stri'-
dent cica'dae, summer, wherein the grasshoppers or balm-crickets chirp :
Virgilius le'gitur, Virgil is read, for carrmna a Vlrgili5 compo'sita
legun'tur, the poems composed by Virgil are read.
S. Synecdoche, or the putting the whole for a part, or a part for the
whole ; as, trlgm'ta mi'nas pro cS'pite tii'o de'di, I gave thirty mince for
thy head : A'rarim Par'thus bi'bet, the Parthian shall drink the Saone.
4. Ironia, or the assumed use of words in a sense diametrically dp-
posite to their me^nuig : as, sal'v, bo'ne vir, curas'ti proHbg, O God
save you, good sir, you have taken care honestly. Here the words are at
variance with the thoughts of the speaker.
5. Allegoria, or the mention of sdmething under a fictitious or feigned
appellation, maintaining throughout the whole discourse a series of me'-
taphors bdrrowed from the subject first assumed : as, nil' vis, re'ferent
in ma're t no'vi fluc'tus, O ship, (mesining, O Roman state") new waves
will bear thee back to the sea, that is, new commotions will embroil thee in
civil war.
6. Climax, or a gradual advancement in force of expression until fbe
subject rises to the highest : as, fa'cinus est vlucfie ci vem Roma'nurn
sce'lus, verbera're ; pro'pS parrici'dium, necnre ; quid dl'cam, In cru'cC
( 268 )
toTlere ? It is a daring thing to lind a Roman citizen ; an atrocity, '
inflict Idshes on him ; almost parricide, to slay him ,- what can I call it
uplift him on the cross ?
7. Hyperbolt, or the magnifying a subject excessively in admira'tio:
or diminishing it excessively in contempt : thus, si'dera ver'tice fe'riar
/ shall strike the stars with my crown : le'vior cornice, lighter than cor
8. Prosopopoeia, or the personification of either inanimate or irrdtionc
objects : as, te'cum, Catlll'na, pa'tria sic a'git, et quodam'modS tacit?
lo'qultiir ; Bul'lum, jam tot an'nos, fa'ciniis ex'titit, &c., with thee, Cdt
line, thy country thus impledds, and in a manner silent she says , unt
now, for so many years no villany has existed, &c.
9. Apostrophe, or when a speaker, transported with edrnestnes
addresses hunself to Anything that presents itse'lf to his mind, whethe
pre'sent or Absent : as, Poludo'riim obtrun'cat, et au'ro vi po'titur.
non mortalla pec'tora co'gts, au'ri sfic'ra fa'mes ? He murders Polydort
and by violence gets possession of his gold. What, O cursed hunger o
goldjforcest thou not mortal breasts unto? ,
THE
BRTvURV AND EVANS, T'RINTERi;, ^yHITZFRIARS.
fe-
re
CVJ
CD
;
v. .
t
